15 Mdiv Unit Outlines

MDiv Unit Outlines

60

MDIV UNIT OUTLINES

LA002 Introduction to New Testament Greek

D EPARTMENT OF B IBLE AND L ANGUAGES

Status Elective

LANGUAGES (LA)

Exclusions Students cannot also take LA001, nor take this unit with or after LA004A / LA004B.

LA001 Introduction to Biblical Hebrew Status Elective Exclusions Students cannot also take LA002, nor take this unit with or after LA003A / LA003B. Learning Outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the fundamental structures of Biblical Hebrew. (b) To enable candidates to make proper use of commentaries on the Hebrew text and to be able to consult lexica and grammars for exegetical purposes. (c) To enable candidates to appreciate the fundamentals of translation of the biblical texts into English. Content Typical areas to be covered would include: 1 The place of Hebrew among Semitic languages: historical relationships; lexical and grammatical correspondence. 2 The writing system: the Hebrew alphabet, PalaeoHebrew and square script; the vowel system; Masoretic notations. 3 Grammatical essentials: for example, the “roots”; noun forms and relationships the verbal “aspects”; the “stems” of the verbal system; syntax (word order, clause types, use of infinitives) with respect to the use of Hebrew lexica, concordances and commentaries based on the Hebrew text. Bibliography Prescribed texts and reference works: Kittel, R. (ed.), Biblia Hebraica Stuttgartensia (Stuttgart: Württemberg Bible Society, 1990). Holladay, W. L., A Concise Hebrew and Aramaic Lexicon of the Old Testament (Leiden: Brill, 1989). Joüon, P. and T. Muraoka, A Grammar of Biblical Hebrew (rev. ed.; Rome: Editrice Pontificio Instituto Biblico, 2006). Recommended readings: Chisholm, R. B. Jr., From Exegesis to Exposition: A Practical Guide to Using Biblical Hebrew (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1998). Kelley, P. H., Biblical Hebrew: An Introductory Grammar (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1996). Seow, C. L., A Grammar for Biblical Hebrew (Rev. ed.; Nashville: Abingdon, 1995). 

Learning Outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the fundamental structures of New Testament Greek. (b) To enable candidates to make proper use of commentaries on the Greek text and to be able to consult lexica and grammars for exegetical purposes. (c) To enable candidates to appreciate the fundamentals of translation of the biblical texts into English. Content Typical areas to be covered would include: 1 The emergence and character of Koine Greek. 2 The main features of accidence, grammar and syntax; the alphabet, pronunciation; the Greek verb (tense, aspect, voice, mood); the participle; basic syntax (word order, emphasis, prepositional constructions, purpose and result clauses); and parsing with respect to the use of Greek lexica, concordances, commentaries on the Greek text and other grammatical and exegetical tools. Bibliography Prescribed texts and reference works: Aland, B., K. Aland, et al (eds), The Greek New Testament (4th ed.; Stuttgart: UBS, 1994). Trenchard, W. C., A Concise Dictionary of New Testament Greek (Cambridge: CUP, 2003). Wallace, D. B., Greek Grammar Beyond the Basics (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1996). Recommended readings: Countryman, L. W., The New Testament is in Greek. A Short Course for Exegetes (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1993). Goodrick, E. W., Do It Yourself Hebrew and Greek (Eugene, OR: Wipf & Stock, 1980, 2002 repr). Merritt, M. A., New Testament Greek for Laymen: An Introductory Grammar (Lanham, MD: UPA, 2002). Mounce, W. D., Greek for the Rest of Us (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2003).  LA003A Biblical Hebrew A Status Elective Exclusions Students cannot also take LA001 with or after this unit

MDiv Unit Outlines

61

Learning Outcomes (a) To impart to candidates a solid working knowledge of the Hebrew language as used in the Hebrew Bible, up to at least half way through one standard grammar of Biblical Hebrew; (b) To introduce students to the textual critical apparatus of the Hebrew Bible.

LA003B Biblical Hebrew B

Content Typical areas to be covered would include an introduction to Biblical Hebrew through completion of at least the first half of a standard Hebrew grammar (e.g., Kelley, Ross, Seow).

Exclusions Students cannot also take LA001 with or after this unit.

Bibliography Reference works: Brown, F., G. A. Driver and S. Briggs, A Hebrew & English Lexicon of the Old Testament (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1974, 1996 repr). Clines, D. J. A., The Dictionary of Classical Hebrew (8 Vols; Sheffield: Sheffield Phoenix, 1993–) [Vols. 7-8 forthcoming]. Joüon, P. and T. Muraoka, A Grammar of Biblical Hebrew (rev. ed.; Rome: Editrice Pontificio Instituto Biblico, 2006). Koehler, L. and W. Baumgartner, (Rev. by Baumgartner, W. and J. J. Stamm et al), The Hebrew and Aramaic Lexicon of the Old Testament (Leiden: Brill, 1994–2000). Scott, W. R., A Simplified Guide to BHS, with H. P. Ruger, An English Key to the Latin Words & Abbreviations and Symbols of BHS (North Richland Hills, TX: Bibal, 1987). Wonneberger, R., Understanding BHS: A Manual for the Users of Biblia Hebraica Stuttgartensia (Rome: Pontifical Biblical Institute, 1990). Recommended readings: Chisholm, R. B. Jr, From Exegesis to Exposition: A Practical Guide to Using Biblical Hebrew (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1998). Cook, J. A., and R. D. Holmstedt, Ancient Hebrew. A Student Grammar (Toronto: University of Toronto, 2007). Kelley, P. H., Biblical Hebrew: An Introductory Grammar (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1996). Martin, J. D. (ed.), Davidson’s Introductory Hebrew Grammar (27th ed.; Sheffield: Continuum, 1993). Practico, G. D. and M. V. Van Pelt, Basics of Biblical Hebrew and Workbook (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2001). Ross, A. P., Introducing Biblical Hebrew (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2001). Seow, C. L., A Grammar for Biblical Hebrew (Rev. ed.; Nashville: Abingdon, 1995). 

Status Elective Pre-requisites Students must have completed LA003A.

Learning Outcomes (a) To impart to candidates a solid working knowledge of the Hebrew language as used in the Hebrew Bible; (b) To give candidates experience in translating Biblical Hebrew: basic translation skills, including the use of lexical aids; familiarity with textual critical apparatus. Content Typical areas to be covered would include: 1 An introduction to Biblical Hebrew through completion of a standard Hebrew grammar (e.g., Lambdin, Ross, Weingreen). 2 Translation of selected chapters of the Old Testament in the light of the listed aims (e.g., Genesis 1–3, or passages of comparable length and difficulty). Bibliography (For reference works and recommended readings refer to LA003A). Prescribed texts: Kittel, R. (ed.), Biblia Hebraica Stuttgartensia (Stuttgart: Württemberg Bible Society, 1990). Schenker, A., et al., Biblia Hebraica Quinta (Stuttgart: Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft, 2004- ) (fascicles appearing regularly).  LA004A New Testament Greek A Status Elective Exclusions Students cannot also take LA002 with or after this unit Learning Outcomes (a) To impart to candidates a solid working knowledge of New Testament Greek, its grammar and syntax, at least up to half way through one standard grammar of New Testament Greek. (b) To introduce candidates to the textual apparatus printed in the UBS Greek New Testament in an elementary way.

MDiv Unit Outlines

62

Content Typical areas to be covered would include completion of at least the first half of a standard introduction to New Testament Greek (e.g. Duff, Stevens, Mounce). Bibliography Reference works: Bauer, W., W. F. W. Danker, F. Arndt and F. W. Gingrich, A Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament and Other Early Christian Literature (3rd ed.; Chicago: University of Chicago, 2000). Mounce, W. D., The Analytical Lexicon to the Greek New Testament (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1993). Rogers, C. L. Jr. and C. L. Rogers, The New Linguistic and Exegetical Key to the Greek New Testament (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1998). Trenchard, W. C., The Student’s Complete Vocabulary Guide to the Greek New Testament (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1992). Zerwick, M. and M. Grosvenor, An Analysis of the Greek New Testament (Rome: Biblical Institute, 1981, 1996 repr). Recommended readings: Black, D. A., Learn to Read New Testament Greek (expanded ed.; Nashville: Broadman, 1994). Black, D. A., It’s Still Greek to Me (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1998). Duff, J., Elements of New Testament Greek (Cambridge: CUP, 2005). Mounce, W. D., Basics of Biblical Greek Grammar (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2003). Powers, B. W., Learn to Read the Greek New Testament with Student Workbook (5th ed.; London: SPCK, 1995). Stevens, G. L., New Testament Greek (2nd ed.; Lanham, MD: UPA, 1997). Stevens, G. L., New Testament Greek Primer (Eugene, OR: Cascade, 2004). Wallace, D. B., The Basics of New Testament Syntax: An Intermediate Greek Grammar (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2000).  LA004B New Testament Greek B Status Elective Pre-requisites Students must have completed LA004A. Exclusions Students cannot also take LA002 with or after this unit Learning Outcomes (a) To impart to candidates a solid working knowledge of New Testament Greek, its grammar and syntax; (b) To complete introducing students to the textual apparatus printed in the UBS Greek New Testament;

(c) To give students experience in translating New Testament Greek. Content Typical areas to be covered would include: 1 Completion of standard introduction to New Testament Greek (e.g. Duff, Stevens, Mounce). 2 Translation of selected passages of the New Testament (e.g. Mark 1–4, Philippians, or passages of comparable length and difficulty). Bibliography (For reference works and recommended readings refer to LA004A). Prescribed texts: Aland, B., K. Aland, et al (eds), The Greek New Testament (4th ed.; Stuttgart: UBS, 2000). Nestle, E., E. Nestle, et al., Novum Testamentum Graece (27th ed.; Stuttgart: Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft, 1993).  LA010 Intermediate Greek Status Elective Pre-requisites LA004A and LA004B Learning Outcomes (a) Enhance the vocabulary range of the student so as to ease the frustration of constant reliance on lexical aids (b) Further the study of the grammatical forms and to demonstrate the exegetical significance of these forms (c) Further develop NT translation by set exercises working with grammatical forms (d) Widen exposure to Koine Greek by the means of translation of selected texts Content Typical areas to be covered would include: 1 The study of Greek grammar and syntax at a level more advanced than that undertaken in LA004. 2 Translation of at least four chapters taken from: (a) The Septuagint (LXX); or (b) Sections of the Greek NT not otherwise covered in the students’ course; or (c) Non-biblical early Christian literature; or (d) The equivalent in the form of Hellenistic or Graeco-Roman papyrus documents. Bibliography (Refer to LA004A and LA004B for basic texts) Prescribed texts: Aland, B., K. Aland, et al (eds), The Greek New Testament (4th ed.; Stuttgart: UBS, 2000).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Nestle, E., E. Nestle, et al., Novum Testamentum Graece (27th ed.; Stuttgart: Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft, 1993). Reference works: Aland, K., K. Aland and E. F. Rhodes, The Text of the New Testament (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1987). Bauer, W., F. W. Danker, F. Arndt and F. W. Gingrich, Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament and Other Early Christian Literature (3rd ed.; Chicago: Univ. of Chicago, 2000). Brooks, J. A. and C. L. Winbery, A Morphology of New Testament Greek (Lanham, MD: UPA, 1994). Conybeare, F. C. and St. G. Stock, Grammar of Septuagint Greek: With Selected Readings, Vocabularies, and Updated Indexes (Peabody: Hendrickson, 2001; based on 1905 edition). Fanning, B. M., Verbal Aspect in New Testament Greek (Oxford: Clarendon, 1990). Horsley, G. H. R., New Documents Illustrating Early Christianity, vols.1-5 (North Ryde: AHDRC Macquarie University, 1981-1989). Llewellyn, S. R., New Documents Illustrating Early Christianity, vols.6-9 (North Ryde: AHDRC Macquarie University, 1992-2002). Lust, J., E. Eynikel and K. Hauspie, Greek-English Lexicon of the Septuagint, rev.ed. (Stuttgart: Deutsche Biblegesellschaft, 2003). McKay, K. L., A New Syntax of the Verb in New Testament Greek (New York: Peter Lang, 1994). Moule, C. F. D., An Idiom-Book of New Testament Greek (2nd ed.; Cambridge: Cambridge Univ. Press, 1959, repr. 1971). Mounce, W. D., The Morphology of Biblical Greek (Grand Rapids: Michigan, 1994). Muraoka, T., A Greek-English Lexicon of the Septuagint, Chiefly of the Pentateuch and the Twelve Prophets (Louvain: Peeters, 2002). Porter, S. E. and D. A. Carson, Biblical Greek Language and Linguistics: Open Questions Current Research (Sheffield: Sheffield Academic, 1993). Porter, S. E., Verbal Aspect in the Greek of the New Testament (New York: Peter Lang, 1989). Rahlfs, A. and R. Hanhart (ed.), Septuaginta (2nd rev. ed.;Stuttgart: Deutsche Bibelgesesllschaft, 2006). Wallace, D. B., Greek Grammar Beyond the Basics (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1996). Wikgren, A., E. C. Colwell and R. Marcus, Hellenistic Greek Texts (Chicago: Univ. of Chicago, 1947). Young, N. H., Syntax Lists for Students of New Testament Greek (Cambridge: CUP, 2001). Zerwick, M., Biblical Greek Illustrated by Example (Rome: Biblical Institute, 1981, 1996 repr). Zerwick, M. and M. Grosvenor, Grammatical Analysis of the Greek New Testament (3rd ed.; Rome: Pontifical Biblical Institute, 1988). Recommended readings: Greenlee, J. H., Introduction to New Testament Criticism (rev. ed.; Peabody: Hendrickson, 1995).

63

Metzger, B. M. and B. D. Ehrman, The Text of the New Testament. Its transmission, corruption and restoration (4th ed.; New York: OUP, 2005). Metzger, B. M., A Textual Commentary on the Greek New Testament (2nd ed.; Stuttgart: UBS, 1994). Mounce, W. D., Graded Reader of Biblical Greek (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1996). Porter, S. E., Idioms of the Greek New Testament (2nd ed.; Sheffield: SAP, 1994). Scott, B. B., Reading New Testament Greek (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1993). Wegner, P. D., The Journey from Texts to Translations (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1999). Young, R. A., Intermediate New Testament Greek (Nashville: Broadman & Holman, 1994).  LA011 Intemediate Hebrew Status Elective Pre-requisites LA003A and LA003B Learning outcomes: The aims of this unit are to: (a) enhance the vocabulary range of the student so as to ease the frustration of constant reliance on lexical aids (b) further the study of grammatical forms and to demonstrate the exegetical significance of these forms (c) further develop OT translation by set exercises working with the grammatical forms (d) widen exposure to Biblical Hebrew by means of translation of selected texts Content: 1 Reading of a standard reference grammar 2 Translation and grammatical analysis of four chapters such as Exodus 1-4, Joshua 1-4 Judges 13-16, Ruth 1-4 or other passages of similar length and difficulty from, for example, the Dead Sea Scrolls or Rabbinic texts Bibliography (Refer to LA003A and LA003B for basic texts) Prescribed texts: Kittel, R. (ed.), Biblia Hebraica Stuttgartensia (Stuttgart: Württemberg Bible Society, 1990). Schenker, A., et al., Biblia Hebraica Quinta (Stuttgart: Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft, 2004- ) (fascicles appearing regularly). Reference works: Brown, F., G. A. Driver and S. Briggs, A Hebrew & English Lexicon of the Old Testament (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1974, 1996 repr).

MDiv Unit Outlines

64

Clines, D. J. A., The Dictionary of Classical Hebrew (8 Vols; Sheffield: Sheffield Phoenix, 1993–) [Vols. 7-8 forthcoming]. Joüon, P. and T. Muraoka, A Grammar of Biblical Hebrew (rev. ed.; Rome: Editrice Pontificio Instituto Biblico, 2006). Koehler, L. and W. Baumgartner, (rev. by Baumgartner, W. & J. J. Stamm et al), The Hebrew and Aramaic Lexicon of the Old Testament (Leiden: Brill, 1994–2000). Pelt, M. and G. D. Pratico, The Vocabulary Guide to Biblical Hebrew (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2003). Scott, W. R., A Simplified Guide to BHS, with H. P. Ruger, An English Key to the Latin Words & Abbreviations and Symbols of BHS (North Richland Hills, TX: Bibal, 1987). van der Merwe, C. H. J., J. A. Naudé and J. H. Kroeze, A Biblical Hebrew Reference Grammar (Sheffield: Sheffield Academic Press, 1999). Wonneberger, R., Understanding BHS: A Manual for the Users of Biblia Hebraica Stuttgartensia (Rome: Pontifical Biblical Institute, 1990). Recommended readings: Arnold, B. T. and J. H. Choi, A Guide to Biblical Hebrew Syntax (Cambridge: CUP, 2003). Tov, E., Textual Criticism of the Hebrew Bible (rev.ed.; Minneapolis: Fortress, 2001). Waltke, B. K. and M. O’Connor, An Introduction to Biblical Hebrew Syntax (Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns, 1990). Williams, R. J., Williams’ Hebrew Syntax (3rd ed.; Toronto: University of Toronto, 2007). Würthwein, E. and E. F. Rhodes, The Text of the Old Testament (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1995).  LA689 Languages Seminar Status Elective Pre-requisites To be determined on a seminar-by-seminar basis, linked to content and focus Learning outcomes: (a) Develop a program of study that explores in depth a specific language topic or theme; (b) To give candidates the opportunity to develop cooperative research skills, so that candidates can discover new skills and implement them in their research; (c) Enable candidates to explore the application of the chosen language topic so that candidates can relate these to personal and pastoral needs, including the translation and interpretation of biblical translations.

Content: The choice of the topic or theme to be studied is left to approved institutions but must have staff and library support sufficient to sustain the unit. The course coordinator is responsible for submitting for approval a proposed unit outline along with assessment plans to the moderator for Languages. The unit is taught, conducted as a seminar involving class discussion as well as lectures and individual reading. The unit is not an individual research topic. It is strongly recommended that the unit include set reading not covered elsewhere in the candidates’ course. 1. 2. 3.

4.

The total amount of work expected is that equivalent to an essay of approximately 6,000 words; Candidates must demonstrate a thorough grasp of the language issues involved; Assessment should be designed to encourage exploration of the personal and pastoral implications of languages discerned in candidates’ learning; Units approved for the Master of Arts (Theology or Ministry) may be used as the basis for this unit, adjusted appropriately to reflect major level MDiv study for students enrolled in the Master of Divinity.

Bibliography None 

OLD TESTAMENT (OT) OT501 and OT502 Old Testament Unit Descriptions: These two units form the foundation upon which all further study of the Old Testament builds. The primary concern is to provide an overview of key features of the content of the books of the Old Testament, along with overall historical framework as provided by that literature. Students will interact with major critical issues, recognising that detailed consideration of these will be given in advanced units. The study is undertaken in the light of the various ancient contexts of the biblical narrative, illustrated by modern archaeological findings. In covering the variety of literature it is not intended that all potential issues be handled in detail. Within the balance of the overall aims, lecturers are free to select what issues to focus on in each book. Thus in some cases Ancient Near Eastern background and the impact of archaeological findings will be important, in others significance of literary form and relevance for interpretation, while commonly to the fore will be key theological motifs. Lecturers will be free to select the order in which material is covered. Also, if desired, some discussion of books not explicitly mentioned may be included, while maintaining relative proportioning between Sections A and B in each unit

MDiv Unit Outlines

of approximately 60% and 40%. Examination questions are to be set from each of Sections A and B. Learning Outcomes (a) To assist candidates acquire an overall acquaintance with the text of the Old Testament, as one of the two primary documents of biblical studies and Christian ministry; (b) To provide candidates with an overview of the contents of literature in the Old Testament, taking into account the nature of that literature and major critical issues; (c) To give candidates an overall historical framework within which to interpret the books of the Old Testament; (d) To ensure that candidates have an appreciation of the appropriate Ancient Near Eastern background (cultural, religious and archaeological) and its significance for understanding the Old Testament; (e) To provide candidates with an understanding of major theological themes of the Old Testament and their significance for Christian theology; (f) To enable candidates to begin a more detailed exploration of some aspects of Old Testament studies; (g) To consider the implications of the Old Testament for Christian life and thought. Recommended Readings: OT501 and OT502 Old Testament General Works Candidates should consult relevant articles in standard bible dictionaries, such as: Alexander, T. D. and D. W. Baker (eds), Dictionary of the Old Testament: Pentateuch (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2003). Arnold, B. T. and H. G. M. Williamson (eds), Dictionary of the Old Testament: Historical Books (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2005). Alexander, T. D. and B. S. Rosner, et al (eds), New Dictionary of Biblical Theology (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2000). Bromiley, G. W. (ed.), International Standard Bible Encyclopedia (4 Vols; Rev ed.; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1988). Freedman, D. N. (ed.), The Anchor Bible Dictionary (6 Vols; New York: Doubleday, 1992). Freedman, D. N. (ed.), The Eerdmans Dictionary of the Bible (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Longman, T., III and P. Enns (eds), Dictionary of the Old Testament: Wisdom, Poetry and Writings (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2008). Sakenfeld, K., et al (eds), The New Interpreter’s Dictionary of the Bible, 5 vols. (Nashville: Abingdon, 2006- ) [Vols. 4-5 forthcoming]. Atlases Aharoni, Y. and M. Avi-Yonah (eds), The Carta Bible Atlas (4th ed.; Jerusalem: Carta, 2002). Dowley, T. (ed.), The Baker Atlas of Christian History (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1997).

65

Mittmann, S. and G. Schmitt (eds), Tübingen Bible Atlas (Stuttgart: Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft, 2001). Pritchard, J. B. and L. M. White (eds), HarperCollins Concise Atlas of the Bible (New York: HarperCollins, 2000). Rainey, A. F. and R. S. Notley, The Sacred Bridge: Carta’s Atlas of the Biblical World (Jerusalem: Carta, 2006). Roaf, M., Cultural Atlas of Mesopotamia and the Ancient Near East (New York: Facts on File, 1990). Candidates should become familiar with texts related to the Old Testament. These include: Bienkowski, P. and A. Millard, Dictionary of the Ancient Near East (London: British Museum/ Philadelphia: Univ. Of Pennsylvania, 2000). Beyerlin, W., Near Eastern Religious Texts Relating to the Old Testament (London: SCM, 1978). Charlesworth, J. H., Old Testament Pseudepigrapha (2 Vols; New York: Doubleday; CUP, 1983–1985). Hallo, W. W. and K. L. Younger Jr., The Context of Scripture (3 Vols; Leiden: Brill, 2002). Pritchard, J. B. (ed.), Ancient Near Eastern Texts (3rd ed. + supplement; Princeton: Princeton University, 1955–1969). Archaeology Aharoni, Y., Archaeology of the Land of Israel (Philadelphia: Westminster, 1982). Currid, J. D., Doing Archaeology in the Land of the Bible (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1999). Hoerth, A. J., Archaeology and the Old Testament (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1998). Kitchen, K. A., On the Reliability of the Old Testament (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2003). Mazar, A., Archaeology of the Land of the Bible (New York: Doubleday, 1990). Stern, E., Archaeology of the Land of the Bible, vol. 2 (New York: Doubleday, 2001). Walton, J. H., V. H. Matthews and M. W. Chavalas, The IVP Bible Background Commentary: Old Testament (Downers Grove: IVP, 2000). Journals: Near Eastern Archaeology and Biblical Archaeology Review Old Testament Introduction Brueggemann, W., An Introduction to the Old Testament: The Canon and Christian Imagination (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2003). Collins, J. J., Introduction to the Hebrew Bible (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2004). Davies, P. and J. Rogerson, The Old Testament World (2nd ed.; Louisville: WJK / London: T. & T. Clark, 2005). Dumbrell, W., The Faith of Israel (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Baker, 2002). Flanders, H. J., et al, People of the Covenant (4th ed.; New York: OUP, 1996). Hill, A. E. and J. H. Walton, A Survey of the Old Testament (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2000).

MDiv Unit Outlines

66

Hill, A. E. and J. H. Walton, A Survey of the Old Testament (3rd ed.; Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2009). La Sor, W. S., et al, Old Testament Survey (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1996). Old Testament History Albertz, R., A History of Israelite Religion in the Old Testament Period (2 Vols; Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1992). Bright, J., A History of Israel (4th ed, Philadelphia; Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2000). Coogan, M. D. (ed.), The Oxford History of the Biblical World (New York: OUP, 1998). Kaiser, W., A History of Israel (Nashville: Broadman & Holman, 1998). Miller, J. M. and J. H. Hayes, A History of Ancient Israel and Judah (2nd ed; Philadelphia: Westminster, 2006). Provan, I., V. P. Long and T. Longman, III, A Biblical History of Israel (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2003). Old Testament Theology Birch, B. C., et al, A Theological Introduction to the Old Testament (Nashville: Abingdon, 1999). Brueggemann, W., Theology of the Old Testament (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1997). Goldingay, J., Old Testament Theology (Vols. 1 and 2; Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2003 and 2006). House, P. R., Old Testament Theology (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1998). Martens, E. A., God’s Design (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Baker; Apollos, 1994). Ollenburger, B. C. (ed.), Old Testament Theology: Flowering and Future (Vol. I, Rev. ed.; Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns, 2004). Wright, C. J. H., Old Testament Ethics for the People of God (Leicester: Inter-Varsity Press, 2004). Wright, C. J. H., The Mission of God (Nottingham: Inter-Varsity Press, 2006). Old Testament Institutions and Religion Biale, D. (ed.), Cultures of the Jews (New York: Shocken 2002). King, P. J. and L. E. Stager, Life in Biblical Israel (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2002). de Vaux, R. and J. McHugh, Ancient Israel: Its Life and Institutions (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1997). 

(b) To provide candidates with an overview of the contents of literature in the Old Testament, taking into account the nature of that literature and major critical issues; (c) To give candidates an overall historical framework within which to interpret the books of the Old Testament; (d) To ensure that candidates have an appreciation of the appropriate Ancient Near Eastern background (cultural, religious and archaeological) and its significance for understanding the Old Testament; (e) To provide candidates with an understanding of major theological themes of the Old Testament and their significance for Christian theology; (f) To enable candidates to begin a more detailed exploration of some aspects of Old Testament studies; (g) To consider the implications of the Old Testament for Christian life and thought. Content Section A. The Pentateuch/Torah: 1. Genesis 1-11 2. Genesis 12-50 3. Exodus 4. Leviticus/Numbers 5. Deuteronomy Section B. Historical books/ Former Prophets 6. Joshua and Judges 7. 1 and 2 Samuel 8. 1 and 2 Kings Bibliography Blenkinsopp, J., The Pentateuch: An Introduction to the First Five Books of the Bible (New York: Doubleday, 2000). Merrill, E., Kingdom of Priests (Grand Rapids: BakerAcademic, 2008). Hamilton, V. P., Handbook on the Historical Books (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2001). Satterthwaite, P. E., and J. G. McConvlle, Exploring the Old Testament, vol. 2: A Guide to the Historical Books (Downers Grove: InterVarsity, 2007). Wenham, G., Exploring the Old Testament: The Pentateuch (London: SPCK, 2003). Classics: Clines, D. J., The Theme of the Pentateuch (2nd ed.; Sheffield: JSOT, 1997). 

OT501 Old Testament Foundations OT502 Old Testament Prophets and Writings Status Core Learning outcomes (a) To assist candidates acquire an overall acquaintance with the text of the Old Testament, as one of the two primary documents of biblical studies and Christian ministry;

Status Core Learning outcomes (a) To assist candidates acquire an overall acquaintance with the text of the Old Testament, as one of the two primary documents of biblical studies and Christian ministry;

MDiv Unit Outlines

(b) To provide candidates with an overview of the contents of literature in the Old Testament, taking into account the nature of that literature and major critical issues; (c) To give candidates an overall historical framework within which to interpret the books of the Old Testament; (d) To ensure that candidates have an appreciation of the appropriate Ancient Near Eastern background (cultural, religious and archaeological) and its significance for understanding the Old Testament; (e) To provide candidates with an understanding of major theological themes of the Old Testament and their significance for Christian theology; (f) To enable candidates to begin a more detailed exploration of some aspects of Old Testament studies; (g) To consider the implications of the Old Testament for Christian life and thought. Content Section A. Prophetic Books/Latter Prophets 1. The Book of Isaiah 2. The Book of Jeremiah 3. The Book of Ezekiel 4. The Book of Daniel 5. The Twelve (at least four in detail) Section B. The Writings 6. Chronicles, Ezra and Nehemiah 7. The Book of Psalms 8. Wisdom Literature Bibliography Berry, D. K., An Introduction to Wisdom and Poetry of the Old Testament (Nashville: Broadman & Holman, 1995). Blenkinsopp, J., A History of Prophecy in Israel (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1996). Brueggemann, W., The Prophetic Imagination (Minneapolis: Augsburg Fortress, 2001). Chisholm, R., Handbook on the Prophets (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2002). Collins, J. J., The Apocalyptic Imagination: An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1998). Long, V. P., The Art of Biblical History (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1994). McConville, G., Exploring the Old Testament Prophets (Vol.4; London: SPCK, 2002). Murphy, R. E., The Tree of Life (3rd ed.; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2002). Satterthwaite, P. E., and J. G. McConvlle, Exploring the Old Testament, vol. 2: A Guide to the Historical Books (Downers Grove: InterVarsity, 2007). Walton, J. H., Covenant: God’s Purposes, God’s Plan (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1994). 

67

OT503 Principles of Hermeneutics Status Elective This unit is a non-exegesis unit Learning outcomes (a) To introduce candidates to the general principles of the interpretation of the biblical documents, so that they can begin to relate these to different problem areas in Scripture. (b) To enable the candidates to gain a greater understanding of the various genres of literature in Scripture, and how such genres should be interpreted. (c) To impart to candidates an awareness of foundational considerations so that they can prepare biblical texts for exposition and use in ministry. Content 1 The definition, importance and scope of hermeneutics. 2 Grammatico-historical principles of interpretation: linguistic, literary, historical and cultural contexts; semantics; authorial intent; the occasional character of biblical documents. 3 The interpretative rules and principles appropriate for the study of different literary forms and genre in the Scriptures. Bibliography Recommended: Bartholomew, C. G., C. Greene and K. Möller, Renewing Biblical Interpretation (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2000). Barton, J. (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to Biblical Interpretation (New York: CUP, 1998). Hayes, J. H. (ed.), Dictionary of Biblical Interpretation (2 Vols; Nashville: Abingdon, 1999). Kaiser, W. C. Jr. and M. Silva, An Introduction to Biblical Hermeneutics (2nd ed., Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2007). Lundin, R., et al, The Promise of Hermeneutics (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1999). Tate, W., Interpreting the Bible (Peabody: Hendrickson, 2006). Vanhoozer, K. J. (ed.), Dictionary of Theological Interpretation of the Bible (Grand Rapids: Baker/London: SPCK, 2005). Old Testament Brueggeman, W., A Pathway of Interpretation: The Old Testament for Pastor and Students (Eugene, OR: Cascade Books, 2009). Goldingay, J., Approaches to Old Testament Interpretation (Toronto: Clements Publishing, 2002). Longman, T., How to Read the Psalms (Downers Grove, IL: Intervasity Press, 2009). Williams, M. J., The Prophet and His Message: Reading Old Testament Prophecy Today (Phillipsburg, NJ: P&R Publishing, 2003).

MDiv Unit Outlines

68

New Testament Black, D. A. and D. S. Dockery (eds), Interpreting the New Testament: Essays on Methods and Issues (Nashville: Broadman and Holman, 2001). Longenecker, R. N., Biblical Exegesis in the Apostolic Period (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1999). Watson, F., Paul and the Hermeneutics of Faith (London: T. & T. Clark, 2004). Special Hermeneutics Adam, A. K. M., Postmodern Interpretations of the Bible: A Reader (St Louis: Chalice, 2000). Ryken, L. et al (eds), Dictionary of Biblical Imagery (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1998). Vanhoozer, K. J., Is There a Meaning in This Text? (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1998). Classics: Cotterell, P. and M. Turner, Linguistics and Biblical Interpretation (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1989). Marshall, I. H. (ed.), New Testament Interpretation: Essays on Principles and Methods (Exeter: Paternoster, 1977). Neill, S. and N. T. Wright, The Interpretation of the New Testament 1861–1986 (Oxford; New York: OUP, 1988). Osborne, G. R., The Hermeneutical Spiral: A Comprehensive Introduction to Biblical Interpretation (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1991).  OT620 The Pentateuch (English Text) Status Elective Pre/co-requisites OT501 Learning outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the contents and overall structure of the books of the Pentateuch, so that they might be able to identify and outline its main themes and teaching. (b) To enable candidates to interact with select theological themes within the Pentateuch with special reference to the book of Deuteronomy, so that candidates can explain and relate these themes both to the book of Deuteronomy itself, and to other books of the Pentateuch. (c) To provide candidates with a variety of skills in exegetical procedures, so that they may be able to interpret and explain the set texts in some depth. (d) To enable candidates to give thought and reflection to the texts under study, so that they can begin to apply their study to both exposition, and life and ministry. Content 1 The theology of the Pentateuch with special reference to the Book of Deuteronomy, especially

2

such themes as covenant, law, land, grace, holy war, people of God, blessing and cursing. Exegesis of the English text of Genesis 1–11; Deuteronomy 5–8, 12, 16–18 (or comparable passages).

Bibliography Theological Themes and Traditions Alexander, T. D. and D. W. Baker (eds), Dictionary of the Old Testament: Pentateuch (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2003). Alexander, T. D., From Paradise to Promised Land (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Baker, 2002). Balentine, S. E., The Torah’s Vision of Worship (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1999). Barker, P. A., The Triumph of Grace in Deuteronomy (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2004). Brueggemann, W., The Land: Place as Gift, Promise, and Challenge in Biblical Faith (Philadelphia: Fortress, 1997). Fretheim, T. E., The Pentateuch (Nashville: Abingdon, 1996). Hess, R. S. and D. T. Tsumura, I Studied Inscriptions from Before the Flood (Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns, 1994). Rogerson, J. W., Genesis 1–11 (Sheffield: JSOT, 1990). Sailhamer, J. H., The Pentateuch as Narrative (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1992). Wenham, G., Exploring the Old Testament Vol. I; The Pentateuch (London: SPCK, 2003). Commentaries Alter, R., Genesis: Translation and Commentary (New York: Norton, 1996). Brett, M. G., Genesis (London: Taylor & Francis, 2007). Brueggemann, W., Deuteronomy (Nashville: Abingdon, 2001). Christensen, D. L., Deuteronomy 1:1-21:9 and 21:1034:12 (2 Vols; Dallas, TX: Word, 2001–2002). Clements, R. E., ‘Deuteronomy’ in The New Interpreter’s Bible, Vol.II (Nashville: Abingdon, 1998). Fretheim, T. E., ‘Genesis’ in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. I; Nashville: Abingdon, 1994). Hamilton, V., The Book of Genesis Chapters 1–17 (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1990). Hartley, J. E., Genesis (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 2000). McConville, J. G., Deuteronomy (Leicester: Apollos, 2002). McKeown, J., Genesis (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2008). Nelson, R. D., Deuteronomy (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2002). Sarna, N., Genesis (Philadelphia: Jewish Publication Society, 1989). Turner, L. A., Genesis (Sheffield: Sheffield Academic Press, 2000). Waltke, B., Genesis (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2001). Weinfeld, M., Deuteronomy 1–11 (New York: Doubleday, 1991).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Wenham, G., Genesis 1–15 (Waco, TX: Word, 1987). Westermann, C., Genesis 1–11 (Minneapolis: Augsburg, 1984). Wright, C., Deuteronomy (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1996).  OT621 Former Prophets (English Text) Status Electives Pre/co-requisites OT501 Learning outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the contents and overall structure of the books of the Former Prophets, so that they might be able to identify and outline its main themes and teaching. (b) To enable candidates to interact with select theological themes within the Former Prophets with special reference to the books of 1 and 2 Samuel, so that candidates can explain and relate these themes both to the books of 1 and 2 Samuel themselves, and to other books of the Former Prophets. (c) To provide candidates with a variety of skills in exegetical procedures, so that they may be able to interpret and explain the set texts in some depth. (d) To enable candidates to give thought and reflection to the texts under study, so that they can begin to apply their study to both exposition, and life and ministry. Content 1 The theology of the Former Prophets, with special reference to 1 and 2 Samuel, including such motifs as prophecy, temple, kingship, the people of God, the Ark of the Covenant, Deuteronomistic History. 2 Exegesis of the English text of 1 Samuel 1–12; 2 Samuel 5–7, 15–18 (or comparable passages) Bibliography Theological Themes and Traditions Chisholm, R. B. and D. M. Howard, Interpreting the Historical Books: An Exegetical Handbook (Grand Rapids: Kregel, 2006). Harrison, R., Old Testament Times (Grand Rapids: Baker Books, 2005). Satterthwaite, P. E., and J. G. McConville, Exploring the Old Testament: Vol. 2: A Guide to the Historical Books (Downers Grove: InterVarsity, 2007). Commentaries Anderson, A. A., 2 Samuel (Dallas, TX: Word, 1989). Arnold, B. T., 1 and 2 Samuel (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2003). Birch, B. C., ‘1 & 2 Samuel’ in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. II, Nashville: Abingdon, 1998).

69

Brueggemann, W., 1 & 2 Samuel (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1990). Cartledge, T. W., 1 and 2 Samuel (Macon, GA: Smyth & Helwys, 2001). Evans, M. J., 1 & 2 Samuel (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2000). Gerbrandt, G. E., Kingship According to the Deuteronomistic History (Atlanta: Scholars, 1986). Klein, R. W., 1 Samuel (Nashville: Nelson, 2008). McCarter, P. K., 1 Samuel (New York: Doubleday, 1980). McCarter, P. K., 2 Samuel (New York: Doubleday, 1984). Peterson, E. H., 1 & 2 Samuel (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1999). Polzin, R., Samuel and the Deuteronomist, 1 Samuel (San Francisco: Harper and Row, 1989). Tsumura, D. T., The Book of 1 Samuel (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2006).  OT622 Eighth Century Prophets (English Text) Status Elective Pre/co-requisites OT502 Learning outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the contents and overall structure of the books of the Eighth Century Prophets, so that they might be able to identify and outline their main themes and teaching. (b) To enable candidates to interact with select theological themes within the Eighth Century Prophets so that candidates can explain and relate these themes to other books of the Eighth Century Prophets. (c) To provide candidates with a variety of skills in exegetical procedures, so that they may be able to interpret and explain the set texts in some depth. (d) To enable candidates to give thought and reflection to the texts under study, so that they can begin to apply their study to both exposition, and life and ministry. Content 1 The theology of the Eighth Century Prophets, including such motifs as prophets and covenant, prophetic eschatology, law and cult, social justice, election, the remnant, foreign nations. 2 Exegesis of the English text of two of the following—Joel, Hosea, Micah, Amos, and Isaiah 1:1–2.4, 5:1–10:4 (or comparable passages). Bibliography Theological Themes and Traditions Barton, J., Isaiah 1–39 (Sheffield: SAP, 1995). Blenkinsopp, J., A History of Prophecy in Israel (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1996).

70

MDiv Unit Outlines

Gordon, R. P. (ed.), The Place Is Too Small for Us: The Israelite Prophets in Recent Scholarship (Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns, 1995). Hasel, G. F., Understanding the Book of Amos (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1991). Meier, S. A., Themes and Transformations in Old Testament Prophecy (Downers Grove: IVP, 2009). Rodas, M. Daniel Carroll, Amos: The Prophet and his Oracles (Louisville: WJK, 2002). Classic: Petersen, D. L., Prophecy in Israel (London: SPCK, 1987). Commentaries Achtemeier, E., “Book of Joel” in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. 7, Nashville: Abingdon, 1996). Achtemeier, E., Minor Prophets 1 (Peabody, MA: Hendickson, 1996). Andersen, F. I. and D. N. Freedman, Micah (New York: Doubleday, 2000). Barton, J. Joel and Obadiah (Louisville: WJK, 2001). Blenkinsopp, J., Isaiah 1–39 (New York: Doubleday, 2002). Brueggemann, W., Isaiah 1-39 (Louisville: WJK, 1998) Finley, T. J., Joel, Amos, Obadiah (Chicago: Moody, 1990). Gitay, Y., Isaiah and His Audience (Assen: Van Gorcum, 1991). Goldingay, J., Isaiah (Peabody: Hendrickson, 2001). Gowan, D. E., “The Book of Amos”, in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. 7, Nashville: Abingdon, 1996). Hubbard, D. A., Joel and Amos (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1989). Jeremias, J., The Book of Amos (Louisville: WJK, 1998). Motyer, A., Isaiah (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1998). Oswalt, J. N., Isaiah 1–39 (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1986). Paul, S., Amos (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1991). Seitz, C. R., Isaiah 1–39 (Louisville: John Knox, 1993). Simundson, D. J., ‘The Book of Micah’ in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. 7, Nashville: Abingdon, 1996). Smith, G. V., Amos (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1989). Stuart, D., Hosea–Jonah (Waco, TX: Word, 1987). Tucker, G.M., ‘The Book of Isaiah 1-39’, in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol.6, Nashville: Abingdon, 2001). Webb, B. W., The Message of Isaiah (Leicester: IVP, 1996). Wildberger, H., Isaiah 1–12 (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1991). Williamson, H .G. M., Isaiah 1-5 (London: T.& T. Clark, 2006) Yee, G. A., “The Book of Hosea”, The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. 7, Nashville: Abingdon, 1996). 

OT623 Exilic Prophecy (English Text) Status Electives Pre/co-requisites OT502 Learning outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the contents and overall structure of the books of the Exilic Prophets, so that they might be able to identify and outline their main themes and teaching. (b) To enable candidates to interact with select theological themes within the Exilic Prophets with special reference to either the book of Ezekiel, Isaiah 40-55 or Jeremiah, so that candidates can explain and relate these themes both to the book chosen for special study, and to the other books of Exilic Prophecy. (c) To provide candidates with a variety of skills in exegetical procedures, so that they may be able to interpret and explain the set texts in some depth. (d) To enable candidates to give thought and reflection to the texts under study, so that they can begin to apply their study to both exposition, and life and ministry. Content 1 Exilic prophecy, with special reference to the theology of either the book of Ezekiel, or Isaiah 40–55 or Jeremiah 2

Exegesis of the English text of either Ezekiel 1–5, 8–11, 33–37 or Isaiah 40–55 or Jeremiah 1, 6–7, 15–20, 28–33 (or comparable passages)

Bibliography Theological Themes and Traditions Albertz, R., The History and Literature of the Sixth Century B.C.E. (Leiden: Brill, 2004). Blenkinsopp, J., A History of Prophecy in Israel (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1996). Dumbrell, W. J., The Search for Order (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1994). Grabbe, L. L., Judaic Religion in the Second Temple Period: Belief and Practice from the Exile to Yavneh (London: Routledge, 2000). Janowski, B., and P. Stuhlmacher (eds), The Suffering Servant: Isaiah 53 in Jewish and Christian Sources (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Mein, A., Ezekiel and the Ethics of Exile (Oxford: OUP, 2001). Murphy, F. J., Early Judaism: The Exile to the Time of Jesus (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 2002).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Classics: Scott, J. M. (ed.), Exile: Old Testament, Jewish and Christian Conceptions (Leiden: Brill, 1997). Seitz, C., Theology in Conflict: Reactions to the Book of Jeremiah (Berlin: de Gruyter, 1989). Williamson, H. G. M., The Book Called Isaiah (Oxford: Clarendon, 1994). Commentaries Block, D. I., The Book of Ezekiel 1-24 (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1997). Block, D. I., The Book of Ezekiel 25-48 (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1998). Childs, B. S., Isaiah (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2000). Darr, K. P., ‘Ezekiel’ in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol.6, Nashville: Abingdon, 2001). Greenberg, M., Ezekiel 1-20 and 21-37 (New York: Doubleday, 1983, 1997). Hanson, P. D., Isaiah 40–66 (Louisville: John Knox, 1995). Motyer, A., The Prophecy of Isaiah (Leicester: IVP, 1993). Odell, M. S., Ezekiel (Macon, GA: Smyth & Helwys, 2005). Seitz, C. R., “Isaiah 40-66” in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. VI; Nashville: Abingdon, 2001). Wright, C. J. H., The Message of Ezekiel (Leicester: Inter-Varsity, 2001). Zimmerli, W., Ezekiel 1 (Philadelphia: Fortress, 1979). Zimmerli, W., Ezekiel 2 (Philadelphia: Fortress, 1983). For Recommended Readings relevant to the book of Jeremiah, see OT628; and for the book of Isaiah see OT627. 

71

apply their study to both exposition, and life and ministry. Content 1 Wisdom literature and traditions: (a) Wisdom in the Old Testament and the Ancient Near East in its social settings; (b) Wisdom in Old Testament theology, with special reference to the book of Job: the doctrines of God and humanity, creation, the fear of God, retribution and moral order 2

Exegesis of the English text of Job 1–2, 9–10, 14, 19, 28, 38–42; Ecclesiastes 1–4, 12 (or comparable passages)

Bibliography Theological Themes and Traditions Blenkinsopp, J., Sage, Priest, Prophet: Religious and Intellectual Leadership in Ancient Israel (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2000). Clifford, R. J. (ed.), Wisdom Literature in Mesopotamia and Israel (Atlanta: SBL, 2007). Curtis, E. M. and J. J. Brugaletta, Discovering the Way of Wisdom (Grand Rapids: Kregel, 2004). Fyall, R. S., Now My Eyes Have Seen You: Images of Creation and Evil in Job (Leicester: Apollos, 2002). Hunter, A., Wisdom Literature (London: SCM, 2006). Longman, T., III and P. Enns (eds), Dictionary of the Old Testament: Wisdom, Poetry and Writings (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2008). Lucas, E., Exploring the Old Testament Vol. III; The Psalms and Wisdom Literature (London: SPCK, 2003). Murphy, R. E., The Tree of Life (3rd ed.; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2002).

OT624 Wisdom Literature (English Text) Status Elective Pre/co-requisites OT502 Learning outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the contents and overall structure of the books of the Wisdom Literature, so that they might be able to identify and outline its main themes and teaching. (b) To enable candidates to interact with select theological themes within the Wisdom Literature with special reference to the book of Job, so that candidates can explain and relate these themes both to the book of Job itself, and to other books of the Wisdom Literature. (c) To provide candidates with a variety of skills in exegetical procedures, so that they may be able to interpret and explain the set texts in some depth. (d) To enable candidates to give thought and reflection to the texts under study, so that they can begin to

Commentaries Balentine, S .E., Job (Macon, GA: Smyth & Helwys, 2006). Clines, D. J. A., Job 1–20 and 21-37 (Dallas, TX: Word, 1989, 2006). Garrett, D., Proverbs/Ecclesiastes/Song of Songs (Nashville: Broadman, 1993). Habel, N. C., The Book of Job (London: SCM, 1985). Hartley, J. E., The Book of Job (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1988). Krüger, T., Qoheleth (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2004). Longman, T., III, The Book of Ecclesiastes (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1998). Murphy, R. E., Ecclesiastes (Dallas, TX: Word, 1992). Seow, C. L., Ecclesiastes (New York: Doubleday, 1997). 

72

MDiv Unit Outlines

OT625 Old Testament Apocalyptic & Post-exilic Prophecy (English Text) Status Elective

Classics: Collins, J. J., The Apocalyptic Imagination: An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic Literature (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1998). Hanson, P. D., Old Testament Apocalyptic (Nashville: Abingdon, 1987).

Pre/co-requisites OT502



Learning outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the contents and overall structure of the books of Old Testament Apocalyptic & Post-exilic Prophecy, so that they might be able to identify and outline its main themes and teaching. (b) To enable candidates to interact with select theological themes within Old Testament Apocalyptic & Post-exilic Prophecy with special reference to either the book of Daniel or Haggai, Zechariah and Malachi, so that candidates can explain and relate these themes both to the book chosen for special study, and to the other books of Old Testament Apocalyptic & Post-exilic Prophecy. (c) To provide candidates with a variety of skills in exegetical procedures, so that they may be able to interpret and explain the set texts in some depth. (d) To enable candidates to give thought and reflection to the texts under study, so that they can begin to apply their study to both exposition, and life and ministry.

OT626 The Psalter (English Text)

Content 1 Old Testament apocalyptic (its origin, development and theology) and Post-exilic prophecy with special reference to the theology of either the book of Daniel or Haggai, Zechariah and Malachi. 2 Exegesis of the English text of Daniel or Zechariah

Content 1 The origin and use of the Psalms in ancient Israel: (a) The development of the Psalter, psalm types, psalm and cult; (b) Theological motifs in the Psalter: the “I”, kingship, lament, enemies, Zion. 2 Exegesis of the English text of Psalms 2, 8, 16, 19, 22, 24, 46, 51, 73, 74, 96, 99, 103, 110, 116, 132, 137 (or a comparable selection).

Bibliography Theological Themes and Traditions Collins, J. J., and P. W. Flint (eds), The Book of Daniel: Composition and Reception, 2 vols. (Leiden: Brill, 2001). Cook, S. L., Prophecy and Apocalypticism: Post-Exilic Social Setting (Minneapolis: Augsburg Fortress, 1996). Rowland, C., The Open Heaven (Eugene, OR: 2002). Tigchelaar, E. J. C., Prophets of Old and the Day of the End (Leiden: Brill, 1995). Commentaries Collins, J. J., Daniel (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1993). Ferguson, S., Daniel (Nashville: Thomas Nelson, 1988). Goldingay, J., Daniel (Word BC; Dallas, TX: Word, 1989). Lucas, E. C., Daniel (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2002). Smith-Christopher, D. L., “The Book of Daniel” in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. 7, Nashville: Abingdon, 1996).

Status Elective Pre/co-requisites OT502 Learning outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the contents and overall structure of the book of the Psalter, so that they might be able to identify and outline its main themes and teaching. (b) To enable candidates to interact with select theological themes within the Psalter. (c) To provide candidates with a variety of skills in exegetical procedures, so that they may be able to interpret and explain the set texts in some depth. (d) To enable candidates to give thought and reflection to the texts under study, so that they can begin to apply their study to both exposition, and life and ministry.

Bibliography Theological Themes and Traditions Bullock, C. H., Encountering the Book of Psalms (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2001). Firth, D., and P. S. Johnston (eds), Interpreting the Psalms: Issues and Approaches (Downers Grove: IVP Academic, 2005). Longman, T. III and P. Enns (eds), Dictionary of the Old Testament: Wisdom, Poetry and Writings (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2008). Lucas, E., Exploring the Old Testament: Vol. III; The Psalms and Wisdom Literature (London: SPCK, 2003). Commentaries Allen, L. C., Psalms 101–150 (rev. ed.; Nashville: Nelson, 2002). Broyles, C. G., Psalms (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1999).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Craigie, P. C., Psalms 1–50 (Word BC; Waco, TX: Word, 1983). Eaton, J., The Psalms: A Historical and Spiritual Commentary (London: Continuum, 2005). Gerstenberger, E. S., Psalms Part 1 (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1988). Gerstenberger, E. S., Psalms Part 2 and Lamentations (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2001). Goldingay, J., Psalms, 3 vols: 1-41, 42-89, 90-150 (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2006-08). Hossfeld, F.-L. and E. Zenger, Psalms 2 [51-100] (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2005). Kraus, H. J., Psalms 1–59 (Minneapolis: Augsburg, 1988). Kraus, H. J., Psalms 60–150 (Minneapolis: Augsburg, 1989). Limburg, J. Psalms (Louisville: WJK, 2000). Mays, J. L., Psalms (Louisville: John Knox, 1994). McCann, J. C., ‘Psalms’ in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. IV; Nashville: Abingdon, 1996). Schaefer, K., Psalms (Collegeville: Liturgical Press, 2001). Tate, M. E., Psalms 51–100 (Word BC; Dallas, TX: Word, 1990). Terrien, S., The Psalms (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2003). Wilson, G. H., Psalms, vol. 1 [1-72] (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2002). Classics: Kraus, H. J., Theology of the Psalms (Minneapolis: Augsburg, 1986). McCann, J. C., A Theological Introduction to the Book of Psalms (Nashville: Abingdon, 1993). McCann, J. C. (ed.), The Shape and Shaping of the Psalter (Sheffield: JSOT, 1993). Seybold, K., Introducing the Psalms (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1990).  OT627 Isaiah (English Text) Status Elective Pre/co-requisites OT502 Learning outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the contents and overall structure of the book of Isaiah, so that they might be able to identify and outline its main themes and teaching. (b) To enable candidates to interact with select theological themes within Isaiah. (c) To provide candidates with a variety of skills in exegetical procedures, so that they may be able to interpret and explain the set texts in some depth. (d) To enable candidates to give thought and reflection to the texts under study, so that they can begin to apply their study to both exposition, and life and ministry.

73

Content The theology of the book and exegesis of the English text of Isaiah, with special attention to about 18 chapters which should be evenly distributed between chapters 1–39 and 40–66 (e.g., 1, 6, 11–12, 24–27, 40– 42, 53–55, 61, 65–66 or equivalent passages). Bibliography Themes and Setting Blenkinsopp, J., A History of Prophecy in Israel (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1996). Childs, B. S., The Struggle to Understand Isaiah as Christian Scripture (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Leclerc, T. L., Yahweh is Exalted in Justice: Solidarity and Conflict in Isaiah (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2001). McGinnis, C. M., and P. K. Tull, “As Those who are Taught”: The Interpretation of Isaiah from the LXX to SBL (Atlanta: SBL, 2006). Williamson, H. G. M., The Book Called Isaiah (Oxford: Clarendon, 1994). Williamson, H. G. M., Variations on a Theme (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1998). Exegesis: Whole Book Beyer, B., Encountering the Book of Isaiah (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2007). Blenkinsopp, J., Isaiah 1–39, 40–55, 56–66 (New York: Doubleday, 2000–2004). Brueggemann, W., Isaiah 1–39 and 40–66 (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1998). Childs, B. S., Isaiah (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2001). Goldingay, J., Isaiah (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 2001). Motyer, J. A., Isaiah (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1999). Oswalt, J. N., Isaiah 1–39 and 40-66 (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1986 and 1998). Watts, J. D. W., Isaiah 1-33 and 34-66 (rev. ed.; Nashville: Nelson, 2006). Isaiah 1–39 Barton, J., Isaiah 1–39 (Sheffield: SAP, 1995). Beuken, W. A. M., Isaiah 28-39 (Leuven: Peeters, 2001). Seitz, C. R., Isaiah 1–39 (Louisville: John Knox, 1993). Tucker, G. M., ‘Isaiah 1–39’ in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. VI; Nashville: Abingdon, 2001). Wildberger, H., Isaiah 1–12, 13-27 and 28-39 (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1991- 2002). Williamson, H. G. M., Isaiah 1-5 (London: T. & T. Clark, 2006). Isaiah 40–66 Baltzer, Deutero-Isaiah (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2001). Emerson, G. I., Isaiah 56–66 (Sheffield: JSOT, 1992). Goldingay, J., The Message of Isaiah 40-55: A Literary-theological Commentary (London: T. & T. Clark, 2005).

MDiv Unit Outlines

74

Goldingay, J. and D. Payne, Isaiah 40-55, 2 vols. (London: T. & T. Clark, 2006). Hanson, P. D., Isaiah 40–66 (Louisville: John Knox, 1995). Koole, J. L., Isaiah Part III; Vols I & II; 40–48/49–55 (Kampen: Kok Pharos, 1997 & 1998). Seitz, C. R., ‘Isaiah 40–66’ in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. VI; Nashville: Abingdon, 2001).  OT628 Jeremiah (English Text) Status Elective Pre/co-requisites OT502 Learning outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the contents and overall structure of the book of Jeremiah, so that they might be able to identify and outline its main themes and teaching. (b) To enable candidates to interact with select theological themes within Jeremiah. (c) To provide candidates with a variety of skills in exegetical procedures, so that they may be able to interpret and explain the set texts in some depth. (d) To enable candidates to give thought and reflection to the texts under study, so that they can begin to apply their study to both exposition, and life and ministry. Content 1 The theology of the book of Jeremiah, including such motifs as covenant, the “confessions”, temple, kingship, the nations, judgment and hope, and true and false prophecy. 2

Exegesis of the English text of Jeremiah 1, 6–7, 15–20, 28–33 (or comparable passages).

Bibliography Theological Themes and Traditions: Diamond, A. R., K. M. O’Connor and L. Stulman (eds), Troubling Jeremiah (Sheffield: SAP, 1999). Goldingay, J. (ed.), Uprooting and Planting (London: T. & T. Clark, 2007). Kessler, M. (ed.), Reading the Book of Jeremiah (Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns, 2004). Lalleman-de Winkel, H., Jeremiah in Prophetic Tradition (Leuven: Peeters, 2000). Lundbom, J., Jeremiah: A Study in Ancient Hebrew Rhetoric (Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns, 1997). Commentaries Bracke, J. M., Jeremiah 1-29 (Louisville: WJK, 2000). Brueggemann, W., A Commentary of Jeremiah: Exile and Homecoming (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1998).

Carroll, R. P., Jeremiah (Philadelphia: Westminster, 1986). Craigie, P. C., P. H. Kelley and J. F. Drinkard Jr., Jeremiah 1–25 (Dallas, TX: Word, 1991). Fretheim, T. E., Jeremiah (Macon, GA: Smyth & Helwys, 2002). Holladay, W. L., Jeremiah 1 and 2 (Philadelphia; Minneapolis: Fortress, 1986 and 1989). Huey, F. B. Jr., Jeremiah, Lamentations (Nashville: Broadman, 1993). Jones, D. R., Jeremiah (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1992; repr Sheffield: SAP, 1997). Keown, G. L., P. J. Saclise and T. G. Smothers, Jeremiah 26–52 (Waco, TX: Word, 1995). Lundbom, J. R., Jeremiah 1–20 , 21–36, 37–52 (New York: Doubleday, 1999–2004). Miller, P. D., “Jeremiah” in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. VI; Nashville: Abingdon, 2001).  OT630 The Pentateuch (Hebrew Text) Status Elective Pre-requisites LA003A and LA003B Pre/co-requisites OT501 Learning outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the contents and overall structure of the books of the Pentateuch, so that they might be able to identify and outline its main themes and teaching. (b) To enable candidates to interact with select theological themes within the Pentateuch with special reference to the book of Deuteronomy, so that candidates can explain and relate these themes both to the book of Deuteronomy itself, and to other books of the Pentateuch. (c) To provide candidates with a variety of skills in exegetical procedures, so that they may be able to interpret and explain the set texts in some depth. (d) To enable candidates to give thought and reflection to the texts under study, so that they can begin to apply their study to both exposition, and life and ministry. Content 1 The theology of the Pentateuch with special reference to the Book of Deuteronomy, especially such themes as covenant, law, land, grace, holy war, people of God, blessing and cursing. 2 Translation and exegesis of the Hebrew text of Genesis 1-3 and Deuteronomy 5-7 (or comparable passages).

MDiv Unit Outlines

75

Bibliography

OT631 Former Prophets (Hebrew Text)

Theological Themes and Traditions Alexander, T. D. and D. W. Baker (eds), Dictionary of the Old Testament: Pentateuch (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2003). Alexander, T. D., From Paradise to Promised Land (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Baker, 2002). Balentine, S. E., The Torah’s Vision of Worship (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1999). Barker, P. A., The Triumph of Grace in Deuteronomy (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2004). Brueggemann, W., The Land: Place as Gift, Promise, and Challenge in Biblical Faith (Philadelphia: Fortress, 1997). Fretheim, T. E., The Pentateuch (Nashville: Abingdon, 1996). Hess, R. S. and D. T. Tsumura, I Studied Inscriptions from Before the Flood (Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns, 1994). Wenham, G., Exploring the Old Testament Vol. I; The Pentateuch (London: SPCK, 2003).

Status Electives

Commentaries Alter, R., Genesis: Translation and Commentary (New York: Norton, 1996). Brett, M. G., Genesis (London: Taylor & Francis, 2007). Brueggemann, W., Deuteronomy (Nashville: Abingdon, 2001). Christensen, D. L., Deuteronomy 1:1-21:9 and 21:1034:12 (2 Vols; Dallas, TX: Word, 2001–2002). Clements, R. E., ‘Deuteronomy’ in The New Interpreter’s Bible, Vol.II (Nashville: Abingdon, 1998). Fretheim, T. E., ‘Genesis’ in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. I; Nashville: Abingdon, 1994). Hamilton, V., The Book of Genesis Chapters 1–17 (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1990). Hartley, J. E., Genesis (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 2000). McConville, J. G., Deuteronomy (Leicester: Apollos, 2002). McKeown, J., Genesis (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2008). Nelson, R. D., Deuteronomy (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2002). Sarna, N., Genesis (Philadelphia: Jewish Publication Society, 1989). Turner, L. A., Genesis (Sheffield: Sheffield Academic Press, 2000). Waltke, B., Genesis (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2001). Weinfeld, M., Deuteronomy 1–11 (New York: Doubleday, 1991). Wenham, G., Genesis 1–15 (Waco, TX: Word, 1987). Westermann, C., Genesis 1–11 (Minneapolis: Augsburg, 1984). Wright, C., Deuteronomy (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1996). 

Pre-requisites LA003A and LA003B Pre/co-requisites OT501 Learning outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the contents and overall structure of the books of the Former Prophets, so that they might be able to identify and outline its main themes and teaching. (b) To enable candidates to interact with select theological themes within the Former Prophets with special reference to the books of 1 and 2 Samuel, so that candidates can explain and relate these themes both to the books of 1 and 2 Samuel themselves, and to other books of the Former Prophets. (c) To provide candidates with a variety of skills in exegetical procedures, so that they may be able to interpret and explain the set texts in some depth. (d) To enable candidates to give thought and reflection to the texts under study, so that they can begin to apply their study to both exposition, and life and ministry. Content 1 The theology of the Former Prophets, with special reference to 1 and 2 Samuel, including such motifs as prophecy, temple, kingship, the people of God, the Ark of the Covenant, Deuteronomistic History. 2

Translation and exegesis of the Hebrew text of 1 Samuel 9–11, 2 Samuel 5–7 (or comparable passages).

Bibliography Theological Themes and Traditions Chisholm, R. B., and D. M. Howard, Interpreting the Historical Books: An Exegetical Handbook (Grand Rapids: Kregel, 2006). Harrison, R., Old Testament Times (Grand Rapids: Baker Books, 2005). Satterthwaite, P. E., and J. G. McConville, Exploring the Old Testament: Vol. 2: A Guide to the Historical Books (Downers Grove: InterVarsity, 2007). Commentaries Anderson, A. A., 2 Samuel (Dallas, TX: Word, 1989). Arnold, B. T., 1 and 2 Samuel (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2003). Birch, B. C., ‘1 & 2 Samuel’ in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. II, Nashville: Abingdon, 1998). Brueggemann, W., 1 & 2 Samuel (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1990).

MDiv Unit Outlines

76

Cartledge, T. W., 1 and 2 Samuel (Macon, GA: Smyth & Helwys, 2001). Evans, M. J., 1 & 2 Samuel (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2000). Gerbrandt, G. E., Kingship According to the Deuteronomistic History (Atlanta: Scholars, 1986). Klein, R.W., 1 Samuel (Nashville: Nelson, 2008). McCarter, P. K., 1 Samuel (New York: Doubleday, 1980). McCarter, P. K., 2 Samuel (New York: Doubleday, 1984). Peterson, E. H., 1 & 2 Samuel (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1999). Polzin, R., Samuel and the Deuteronomist, 1 Samuel (San Francisco: Harper and Row, 1989). Tsumura, D. T., The Book of 1 Samuel (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2006).  OT632 Eighth Century Prophets (Hebrew Text) Status Elective Pre-requisites LA003A and LA003B Pre/co-requisites OT502 Learning outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the contents and overall structure of the books of the Eighth Century Prophets, so that they might be able to identify and outline their main themes and teaching. (b) To enable candidates to interact with select theological themes within the Eighth Century Prophets so that candidates can explain and relate these themes to other books of the Eighth Century Prophets. (c) To provide candidates with a variety of skills in exegetical procedures, so that they may be able to interpret and explain the set texts in some depth. (d) To enable candidates to give thought and reflection to the texts under study, so that they can begin to apply their study to both exposition, and life and ministry. Content 1 The theology of the Eighth Century Prophets, including such motifs as prophets and covenant, prophetic eschatology, law and cult, social justice, election, the remnant, foreign nations. 2 Translation and exegesis of the Hebrew text of two of the following—Joel, Hosea 1–3, Micah 1– 3, Amos 2:6–5:15, and Isaiah 6:1–9:6 (or comparable passages).

Blenkinsopp, J., A History of Prophecy in Israel (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1996). Meier, S. A., Themes and Transformations in Old Testament Prophecy (Downers Grove: IVP, 2009). Rodas, M. Daniel Carroll, Amos: The Prophet and his Oracles (Louisville: WJK, 2002). Commentaries Achtemeier, E., “Book of Joel” in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. 7, Nashville: Abingdon, 1996). Achtemeier, E., Minor Prophets 1 (Peabody, MA: Hendickson, 1996). Andersen, F. I. and D. N. Freedman, Micah (New York: Doubleday, 2000). Barton, J. Joel and Obadiah (Louisville: WJK, 2001). Blenkinsopp, J., Isaiah 1–39 (New York: Doubleday, 2002). Brueggemann, W., Isaiah 1-39 (Louisville: WJK, 1998) Finley, T. J., Joel, Amos, Obadiah (Chicago: Moody, 1990). Goldingay, J., Isaiah (Peabody: Hendrickson, 2001). Gowan, D. E., “The Book of Amos”, in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. 7, Nashville: Abingdon, 1996). Hubbard, D. A., Joel and Amos (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1989). Jeremias, J., The Book of Amos (Louisville: WJK, 1998). Motyer, A., Isaiah (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1998). Oswalt, J. N., Isaiah 1–39 (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1986). Paul, S., Amos (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1991). Seitz, C. R., Isaiah 1–39 (Louisville: John Knox, 1993). Simundson, D. J., ‘The Book of Micah’ in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. 7, Nashville: Abingdon, 1996). Smith, G. V., Amos (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1989). Stuart, D., Hosea–Jonah (Waco, TX: Word, 1987). Tucker, G. M., ‘The Book of Isaiah 1-39’, in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol.6, Nashville: Abingdon, 2001). Webb, B. W., The Message of Isaiah (Leicester: IVP, 1996). Wildberger, H., Isaiah 1–12 (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1991). Williamson, H. G. M., Isaiah 1-5 (London: T.& T. Clark, 2006). Yee, G. A., “The Book of Hosea”, The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. 7, Nashville: Abingdon, 1996).  OT633 Exilic Prophecy (Hebrew Text)

Bibliography

Status Electives

Theological Themes and Traditions Barton, J., Isaiah 1–39 (Sheffield: SAP, 1995).

Pre-requisites LA003A and LA003B

MDiv Unit Outlines

Pre/co-requisites OT502 Learning outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the contents and overall structure of the books of the Exilic Prophets, so that they might be able to identify and outline their main themes and teaching. (b) To enable candidates to interact with select theological themes within the Exilic Prophets with special reference to either the book of Ezekiel, Isaiah 40-55 or Jeremiah, so that candidates can explain and relate these themes both to the book chosen for special study, and to the other books of Exilic Prophecy. (c) To provide candidates with a variety of skills in exegetical procedures, so that they may be able to interpret and explain the set texts in some depth. (d) To enable candidates to give thought and reflection to the texts under study, so that they can begin to apply their study to both exposition, and life and ministry. Content 1 Exilic prophecy, with special reference to the theology of either the book of Ezekiel, or Isaiah 40–55 or Jeremiah 2

Translation and exegesis of the Hebrew text of either Ezekiel 2–5, 36–37 or Isaiah 40, 45, 50, 52–55 or Jeremiah 1, 6–7, 20, 30–31 (or comparable passages).

Bibliography Theological Themes and Traditions Albertz, R., The History and Literature of the Sixth Century B.C.E. (Leiden: Brill, 2004). Blenkinsopp, J., A History of Prophecy in Israel (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1996). Dumbrell, W. J., The Search for Order (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1994). Grabbe, L. L., Judaic Religion in the Second Temple Period: Belief and Practice from the Exile to Yavneh (London: Routledge, 2000). Janowski, B., and P. Stuhlmacher (eds), The Suffering Servant: Isaiah 53 in Jewish and Christian Sources (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Mein, A., Ezekiel and the Ethics of Exile (Oxford: OUP, 2001). Murphy, F. J., Early Judaism: The Exile to the Time of Jesus (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 2002). Commentaries Block, D. I., The Book of Ezekiel 1-24 (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1997). Block, D. I., The Book of Ezekiel 25-48 (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1998). Childs, B. S., Isaiah (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2000).

77

Darr, K. P., ‘Ezekiel’ in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol.6, Nashville: Abingdon, 2001). Greenberg, M., Ezekiel 1-20 and 21-37 (New York: Doubleday, 1983, 1997). Hanson, P. D., Isaiah 40–66 (Louisville: John Knox, 1995). Motyer, A., The Prophecy of Isaiah (Leicester: IVP, 1993). Odell, M. S., Ezekiel (Macon, GA: Smyth & Helwys, 2005). Seitz, C. R., “Isaiah 40-66” in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. VI; Nashville: Abingdon, 2001). Wright, C. J. H., The Message of Ezekiel (Leicester: Inter-Varsity, 2001). Zimmerli, W., Ezekiel 1 (Philadelphia: Fortress, 1979). Zimmerli, W., Ezekiel 2 (Philadelphia: Fortress, 1983). For Recommended Readings relevant to the book of Jeremiah, see OT628; and for the book of Isaiah see OT627.  OT634 Wisdom Literature (Hebrew Text) Status Elective Pre-requisites LA003A and LA003B Pre/co-requisites OT502 Learning outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the contents and overall structure of the books of the Wisdom Literature, so that they might be able to identify and outline its main themes and teaching. (b) To enable candidates to interact with select theological themes within the Wisdom Literature with special reference to the book of Job, so that candidates can explain and relate these themes both to the book of Job itself, and to other books of the Wisdom Literature. (c) To provide candidates with a variety of skills in exegetical procedures, so that they may be able to interpret and explain the set texts in some depth. (d) To enable candidates to give thought and reflection to the texts under study, so that they can begin to apply their study to both exposition, and life and ministry. Content 1 Wisdom literature and traditions: (a) Wisdom in the Old Testament and the Ancient Near East in its social settings; (b) Wisdom in Old Testament theology, with special reference to the book of Job: the doctrines of God and humanity, creation, the fear of God, retribution and moral order. 2

Translation and exegesis of the Hebrew text of Job 1–2 ,42; Ecclesiastes 1–3 (or comparable passages).

MDiv Unit Outlines

78

Bibliography Theological Themes and Traditions Blenkinsopp, J., Sage, Priest, Prophet: Religious and Intellectual Leadership in Ancient Israel (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2000). Clifford, R. J. (ed.), Wisdom Literature in Mesopotamia and Israel (Atlanta: SBL, 2007). Curtis, E. M. and J. J. Brugaletta, Discovering the Way of Wisdom (Grand Rapids: Kregel, 2004). Fyall, R. S., Now My Eyes Have Seen You: Images of Creation and Evil in Job (Leicester: Apollos, 2002). Hunter, A., Wisdom Literature (London: SCM, 2006). Longman, T. III and P. Enns (eds), Dictionary of the Old Testament: Wisdom, Poetry and Writings (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2008). Lucas, E., Exploring the Old Testament Vol. III; The Psalms and Wisdom Literature (London: SPCK, 2003). Murphy, R. E., The Tree of Life (3rd ed.; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2002). Commentaries Balentine, S. E., Job (Macon, GA: Smyth & Helwys, 2006). Clines, D. J. A., Job 1–20 and 21-37 (Dallas, TX: Word, 1989, 2006). Garrett, D., Proverbs/Ecclesiastes/Song of Songs (Nashville: Broadman, 1993). Habel, N. C., The Book of Job (London: SCM, 1985). Hartley, J. E., The Book of Job (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1988). Krüger, T., Qoheleth (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2004). Longman, T. III, The Book of Ecclesiastes (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1998). Murphy, R. E., Ecclesiastes (Dallas, TX: Word, 1992). Seow, C. L., Ecclesiastes (New York: Doubleday, 1997).  OT635 Old Testament Apocalyptic & Post-exilic Prophecy (Hebrew Text) Status Elective Pre-requisites LA003A and LA003B

reference to either the book of Daniel or Haggai, Zechariah and Malachi, so that candidates can explain and relate these themes both to the book chosen for special study, and to the other books of Old Testament Apocalyptic & Post-exilic Prophecy. (c) To provide candidates with a variety of skills in exegetical procedures, so that they may be able to interpret and explain the set texts in some depth. (d) To enable candidates to give thought and reflection to the texts under study, so that they can begin to apply their study to both exposition, and life and ministry. Content 1 Old Testament apocalyptic (its origin, development and theology) and Post-exilic prophecy with special reference to the theology of either the book of Daniel or Haggai, Zechariah and Malachi. 2 Translation and exegesis of the Hebrew text of Daniel 1:1–2:4, 8–10, 12 or Zechariah 1–6, 13–14 (or comparable passages). Bibliography Theological Themes and Traditions Collins, J. J., and P. W. Flint (eds), The Book of Daniel: Composition and Reception, 2 vols. (Leiden: Brill, 2001). Cook, S. L., Prophecy and Apocalypticism: Post-Exilic Social Setting (Minneapolis: Augsburg Fortress, 1996). Rowland, C., The Open Heaven (Eugene, OR: 2002). Tigchelaar, E. J. C., Prophets of Old and the Day of the End (Leiden: Brill, 1995). Commentaries Collins, J. J., Daniel (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1993). Ferguson, S., Daniel (Nashville: Thomas Nelson, 1988). Goldingay, J., Daniel (Word BC; Dallas, TX: Word, 1989). Lucas, E. C., Daniel (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2002). Smith-Christopher, D. L., “The Book of Daniel” in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. 7, Nashville: Abingdon, 1996). Classics: Hanson, P. D., Old Testament Apocalyptic (Nashville: Abington, 1987). Tigchelaar, E. J. C., Prophets of Old and the Day of the End (Leiden: Brill, 1995).

Pre/co-requisites OT502 Learning outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the contents and overall structure of the books of Old Testament Apocalyptic & Post-exilic Prophecy, so that they might be able to identify and outline its main themes and teaching. (b) To enable candidates to interact with select theological themes within Old Testament Apocalyptic & Post-exilic Prophecy with special

 OT636 The Psalter (Hebrew Text) Status Elective Pre-requisites LA003A and LA003B

MDiv Unit Outlines

Pre/co-requisites OT502 Learning outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the contents and overall structure of the book of the Psalter, so that they might be able to identify and outline its main themes and teaching. (b) To enable candidates to interact with select theological themes within the Psalter. (c) To provide candidates with a variety of skills in exegetical procedures, so that they may be able to interpret and explain the set texts in some depth. (d) To enable candidates to give thought and reflection to the texts under study, so that they can begin to apply their study to both exposition, and life and ministry. Content 1 The origin and use of the Psalms in ancient Israel: (a) The development of the Psalter, psalm types, psalm and cult; (b) Theological motifs in the Psalter: the “I”, kingship, lament, enemies, Zion. 2 Translation and exegesis of the Hebrew text of Psalms 2, 8, 22, 46, 73, 99, 132, 137 (or a comparable selection). Bibliography Theological Themes and Traditions Bullock, C. H., Encountering the Book of Psalms (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2001). Firth, D. and P. S. Johnston (eds), Interpreting the Psalms: Issues and Approaches (Downers Grove: IVP Academic, 2005). Longman, T. III and P. Enns (eds.), Dictionary of the Old Testament: Wisdom, Poetry and Writings (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2008). Lucas, E., Exploring the Old Testament: Vol. III; The Psalms and Wisdom Literature (London: SPCK, 2003). Commentaries Allen, L. C., Psalms 101–150 (rev. ed.; Nashville: Nelson, 2002). Broyles, C. G., Psalms (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1999). Craigie, P. C., Psalms 1–50 (Word BC; Waco, TX: Word, 1983). Eaton, J., The Psalms: A Historical and Spiritual Commentary (London: Continuum, 2005). Gerstenberger, E. S., Psalms Part 1 (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1988). Gerstenberger, E. S., Psalms Part 2 and Lamentations (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2001). Goldingay, J., Psalms, 3 vols: 1-41, 42-89, 90-150 (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2006-08). Hossfeld, F.-L. And E. Zenger, Psalms 2 [51-100] (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2005). Kraus, H. J., Psalms 1–59 (Minneapolis: Augsburg, 1988).

79

Kraus, H. J., Psalms 60–150 (Minneapolis: Augsburg, 1989). Limburg, J., Psalms (Louisville: WJK, 2000). Mays, J. L., Psalms (Louisville: John Knox, 1994). McCann, J. C., ‘Psalms’ in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. IV; Nashville: Abingdon, 1996). Schaefer, K., Psalms (Collegeville: Liturgical Press, 2001). Tate, M. E., Psalms 51–100 (Word BC; Dallas, TX: Word, 1990). Terrien, S., The Psalms (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2003). Wilson, G. H., Psalms, vol. 1 [1-72] (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2002). Classics: Kraus, H. J., Theology of the Psalms (Minneapolis: Augsburg, 1986). McCann, J. C. (ed.), The Shape and Shaping of the Psalter (Sheffield: JSOT, 1993). Seybold, K., Introducing the Psalms (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1990).  OT637 Isaiah (Hebrew Text) Status Elective Pre-requisites LA003A and LA003B Pre/co-requisites OT502 Learning outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the contents and overall structure of the book of Isaiah, so that they might be able to identify and outline its main themes and teaching. (b) To enable candidates to interact with select theological themes within Isaiah. (c) To provide candidates with a variety of skills in exegetical procedures, so that they may be able to interpret and explain the set texts in some depth. (d) To enable candidates to give thought and reflection to the texts under study, so that they can begin to apply their study to both exposition, and life and ministry. Content The theology of the book and exegesis of six chapters of the Hebrew text, with a minimum of at least two chapters to be taken from each of chapters 1–39 and 40–66 (e.g., 6, 11, 40–41, 61, 66 or equivalent passages).

MDiv Unit Outlines

80

Bibliography

OT638 Jeremiah (Hebrew Text)

Themes and Setting Childs, B. S., The Struggle to Understand Isaiah as Christian Scripture (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Leclerc, T. L., Yahweh is Exalted in Justice: Solidarity and Conflict in Isaiah (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2001). McGinnis, C. M., and P. K. Tull, “As Those Who Are Taught”: The Interpretation of Isaiah from the LXX to SBL (Atlanta: SBL, 2006).

Status Elective

Exegesis: Whole Book Blenkinsopp, J., Isaiah 1–39, 40–55, 56–66 (New York: Doubleday, 2000–2004). Brueggemann, W., Isaiah 1–39 and 40–66 (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1998). Childs, B. S., Isaiah (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2001). Goldingay, J., Isaiah (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 2001). Motyer, J. A., Isaiah (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1999). Oswalt, J. N., Isaiah 1–39 and 40-66(Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1986 and1998). Watts, J. D. W., Isaiah 1-33 and 34-66, (rev. ed.; Nashville: Nelson, 2006). Webb, B. W., The Message of Isaiah (Leicester: IVP, 1996). Isaiah 1–39 Barton, J., Isaiah 1–39 (Sheffield: SAP, 1995). Beuken, W. A. M., Isaiah 28-39 (Leuven: Peeters, 2001). Seitz, C. R., Isaiah 1–39 (Louisville: John Knox, 1993). Tucker, G. M., ‘Isaiah 1–39’ in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. VI; Nashville: Abingdon, 2001). Wildberger, H., Isaiah 1–12, 13-27 and 28-39 (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1991- 2002). Williamson, H. G. M., Isaiah 1-5 (London: T. & T. Clark, 2006). Isaiah 40–66 Baltzer, Deutero-Isaiah (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2001). Emerson, G. I., Isaiah 56–66 (Sheffield: JSOT, 1992). Goldingay, J., The Message of Isaiah 40-55: A Literary-theological Commentary (London: T. & T. Clark, 2005). Goldingay, J. and D. Payne, Isaiah 40-55, 2 vols. (London: T. & T. Clark, 2006). Hanson, P. D., Isaiah 40–66 (Louisville: John Knox, 1995). Koole, J. L., Isaiah Part III; Vols I & II; 40–48/49–55 (Kampen: Kok Pharos, 1997 & 1998). Seitz, C. R., ‘Isaiah 40–66’ in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. VI; Nashville: Abingdon, 2001). 

Pre-requisites LA003A and LA003B Pre/co-requisites OT502 Learning outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with the contents and overall structure of the book of Jeremiah, so that they might be able to identify and outline its main themes and teaching. (b) To enable candidates to interact with select theological themes within Jeremiah. (c) To provide candidates with a variety of skills in exegetical procedures, so that they may be able to interpret and explain the set texts in some depth. (d) To enable candidates to give thought and reflection to the texts under study, so that they can begin to apply their study to both exposition, and life and ministry. Content 1 The theology of the book of Jeremiah, including such motifs as covenant, the “confessions”, temple, kingship, the nations, judgment and hope, and true and false prophecy. 2 Translation and exegesis of the Hebrew text of Jeremiah 1, 6–7, 20, 30–31 (or comparable passages) Bibliography Theological Themes and Traditions: Diamond, A. R., K. M. O’Connor and L. Stulman (eds), Troubling Jeremiah (Sheffield: SAP, 1999). Goldingay, J. (ed.), Uprooting and Planting (London: T. & T. Clark, 2007). Kessler, M. (ed.), Reading the Book of Jeremiah (Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns, 2004). Lalleman-de Winkel, H., Jeremiah in Prophetic Tradition (Leuven: Peeters, 2000). Lundbom, J., Jeremiah: A Study in Ancient Hebrew Rhetoric (Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns, 1997). Commentaries: Bracke, J. M., Jeremiah 1-29 (Louisville: WJK, 2000). Brueggemann, W., A Commentary of Jeremiah: Exile and Homecoming (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1998). Carroll, R. P., Jeremiah (Philadelphia: Westminster, 1986). Clements, R. E., Jeremiah (Atlanta: John Knox, 1988). Craigie, P. C., P. H. Kelley and J. F. Drinkard Jr., Jeremiah 1–25 (Dallas, TX: Word, 1991). Fretheim, T. E., Jeremiah (Macon, GA: Smyth & Helwys, 2002). Holladay, W. L., Jeremiah 1 and 2 (Philadelphia; Minneapolis: Fortress, 1986 and 1989).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Huey, F. B. Jr., Jeremiah, Lamentations (Nashville: Broadman, 1993). Jones, D. R., Jeremiah (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1992; repr Sheffield: SAP, 1997). Keown, G. L., P. J. Saclise and T. G. Smothers, Jeremiah 26–52 (Waco, TX: Word, 1995). Lundbom, J. R., Jeremiah 1–20 , 21–36, 37–52 (New York: Doubleday, 1999–2004). Miller, P. D., “Jeremiah” in The New Interpreter’s Bible (Vol. VI; Nashville: Abingdon, 2001).  OT646 Archaeology and the Bible Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) To familiarise candidates with major archaeologists whose work has had a bearing on the study of the Old and New Testaments; (b) To develop an understanding of the history and techniques (including archaeological methods, processes and practices) associated with the modern study of the lands in which the Biblical story is set; (c) To explore significant archaeological sites, epigraphic material and artefacts that have influenced the historical and cultural understanding of the Bible; (d) To enable candidates to reflect on the relationship between archaeological context, artefact, epigraphic material, historical interpretation and the text of the Bible. Content 1 The unfolding story of archaeology in the Middle East from 1800 to the present, including the major archaeologists. 2 The context of archaeological activity in Bible lands 3 The development of archaeological technique, practice, and interpretive method. 4 Approaches to historical geography and the study of the landscape. 5 The study of significant archaeological sites, epigraphic material and artefacts of a part or whole of the lands of the Bible. 6 The analysis and comparative study of archaeological finds and approaches to dating material. 7 Issues in the interrelationship of archaeology and the Bible, including the reliability and significance of archaeology, historical controversies, and the value and limitations of using archaeology in biblical studies. Bibliography Charlesworth, J. H., Jesus and Archaeology (Grand Rapids, Michigan: Eerdmans, 2006). Currid, J. D., Doing Archaeology in the Land of the Bible (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1999).

81

Davis, T. W., Shifting Sands: The Rise and Fall of Biblical Archaeology (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2004). Dever, W. G., What Did the Biblical Writers Know & When did They Know It? (Grand Rapids, Michigan: Eerdmans, 2001). Drower, M. S., Flinders Petrie: A Life in Archaeology (London: Victor Gollanz, 1985). Finkelstein, I., The Archaeology of the Israelite Settlement (Jerusalem: Israel Exploration Society, 1988). Franken, H. J. and C. A. Franken-Battershill, A Primer of Old Testament Archaeology (Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1963). Hoffmeier, J. K., The Archaeology of the Bible (Oxford: Lion Hudson, 2008). Hoffmeier, J. K. and A. Millard (eds), The Future of Biblical Archaeology. Reassessing Methodologies and Assumptions (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Hoerth, A. J., Archaeology and the Old Testament (Grand Rapids, Michigan: Baker, 2009). Kitchen, K. A., On the Reliability of the Old Testament (Grand Rapids, Michigan: Eerdmans, 2003). Laughlin, J. C. H., Archaeology and the Bible (London: Routledge, 2000). McRay, J, Archaeology and the New Testament (Grand Rapids, Michigan: Baker, 2008). Matthews, V. H., Studying the Ancient Israelites. A Guide to Sources and Methods (Grand Rapids/Nottingham: Baker/Apollos, 2007). Mazar, A., Archaeology of the Holy Land of the Bible: 10,000-586 BCE (New York: Doubleday, 1990). Moorey, P. R. S., A Century of Biblical Archaeology (Cambridge: Lutterworth, 1991).  OT689 Old Testament Seminar Status Elective Pre-requisites OT301 and OT302, plus any other unit deemed necessary for the given seminar Learning outcomes (a) To enable candidates to study biblical texts in Hebrew or English not covered in the candidate’s course, so that candidates can have the opportunity to interpret select texts in depth. (b) To give candidates the opportunity to develop cooperative research skills, so that candidates can discover new skills and implement them in their research. (c) To assist candidates in the understanding of Old Testament insights so that candidates can relate these to personal and pastoral needs. Content The choice of the topic or theme to be studied is left to approved institutions but must have staff and library

MDiv Unit Outlines

82

support sufficient to sustain the unit. The course coordinator is responsible for submitting for approval a proposed unit outline along with assessment plans to the moderator for Old Testament. The unit is taught, conducted as a seminar involving class discussion as well as lectures and individual reading. The unit is not an individual research topic. It is strongly recommended that the unit include set reading of approximately 15 chapters from OT texts in Hebrew or 25 chapters in English not covered elsewhere in the candidates’ course. 1 2 3

4

The total amount of work expected is that equivalent to an essay of approximately 6,000 words; Candidates must demonstrate a thorough grasp of the Old Testament issues involved; Assessment should be designed to encourage exploration of the personal and pastoral implications of Old Testament perspectives discerned in candidates’ learning; Units approved for the Master of Arts (Theology) may be used as the basis for this unit, adjusted appropriately to reflect major level undergraduate study for students enrolled in the undergraduate degrees.

Bibliography General Works Students should consult relevant articles in standard Bible dictionaries, such as: Boring, M. E., et al (eds), Hellenistic Commentary to the New Testament (Nashville: Abingdon, 1995). Evans, C. A. and S. E. Porter (eds), Dictionary of New Testament Background (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2000). Ferguson, E. (ed.), Encyclopedia of Early Christianity (London: Garland, 1990). Freedman, D. N. (ed.), Anchor Bible Dictionary (6 Vols; New York: Doubleday, 1992). Freedman, D. N. (ed.), The Eerdmans Dictionary of the Bible (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Green, J. B. (ed.), Dictionary of Jesus and the Gospels (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1992). Hawthorne, G., R. P. Martin and D. G. Reid (eds), Dictionary of Paul and His Letters (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1993). Keck, L. E., et al (eds), The New Interpreters Bible (Nashville: Abingdon, 1994–). Martin, R. P. and P. H. Davids (eds), Dictionary of the Later New Testament and Its Developments (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1997). Also note the resources available at ‘The New Testament Gateway’, http://www.ntgateway.com

Bibliography None 

NEW TESTAMENT (NT) NT501 and NT502 These two units form the foundation upon which all further study of the New Testament builds. They are thus concerned not so much with the critical issues of New Testament studies, as with enabling candidates to grasp a firm understanding both of the ministry of Jesus and of the contents, themes and theology of the various books of the New Testament. Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to understand the ministry of Jesus in its historical, cultural, religious and political environment. (b) To give candidates an understanding of the evangelists as Christian theologians, with their own distinctive theologies and outlooks. (c) To teach candidates the features of the theology and expansion of the early church, particularly as they are reflected in the Acts of the Apostles. (d) To study the background to and the teaching of selected epistles of the New Testament. (e) To help candidates reflect on the significance of the New Testament portions studied, for their own lives and ministry.

Atlases Bisco, T. (ed.), Holman Bible Atlas: A Complete Guide to the Expansive Geography of Biblical History (Nashville: Broadman & Holman Reference, 1999) Braybrooke, M and J Harpur (eds), The Collegeville Atlas of the Bible (Collegeville, MN: Liturgical Press, 1999) Classics: Aharoni, Y. and M. Avi-Yonah The Macmillan Bible Atlas (3rd ed.; London: Macmillan, 1993). Pritchard, J. B. (ed.), The Times Atlas of the Bible (New York: Times, 1987). New Testament Introduction Achtemeier, P. J., J. B. Green and M. M. Thompson, Introducing the New Testament: Its Literature and Theology (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2001). Beale, G. K. and D. A. Carson, Commentary on the New Testament Use of the Old Testament. (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, 2007). Brown, R. E., An Introduction to the New Testament (New York: Doubleday, 1997). Carson, D. A. and D. J. Moo. An Introduction to the New Testament. (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2005). de Silva, D. A., An Introduction to the New Testament: Contexts, Methods & Ministry Formation (Leicester: Apollos, IVP, 2004). Ehrman, B. D., The New Testament: A Historical Introduction to the Early Christian Writings (4th ed.; New York: Oxford University Press, 2007).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Johnson, L. T., The Writings of the New Testament: An Interpretation (rev. ed.; Minneapolis: Fortress, 2002). Koester, H., Introduction to the New Testament (2 Vols, 2nd ed.; New York: Walter de Gruyter, 1995, 2000). McDonald, L. M. and S. E. Porter (eds), Early Christianity and Its Sacred Literature (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 2000). Schnelle, U., The History and Theology of the New Testament (London: SCM, 1998). Theissen, G., Fortress Introduction to the New Testament, trans. John Bowden (Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 2003). New Testament Theology Brown, C. (ed.), The New International Dictionary of New Testament Theology (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1999). Hurtado, L., Lord Jesus Christ: Devotion to Jesus in Earliest Christianity. Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2003). Jeremias, J. and K. C. Hanson, Jesus and the Message of the New Testament. (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2002). McKnight, S. and G. R. Osborne, The Face of New Testament Studies: A Survey of Recent Research (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2004). Matera, F. J., New Testament Theology. (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2007). Schreiner, T. R., New Testament Theology: Magnifying God in Christ. (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2008). Classics: Caird, G. B and L. D. Hurst, New Testament Theology. (Oxford: Clarendon, 1994). Dunn, J. D. G., Unity and Diversity in the New Testament (London: SCM, 1990). New Testament Histories and Background Documents Barnett, P., Jesus and the Rise of Early Christianity: A History of New Testament Times (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1999). Elwell, W. A. and R. W. Yarborough, Encountering the New Testament and Readings from the FirstCentury World [with CD-ROM] (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Baker, 2005). Feldman, L. H. and M. Reinhold, Jewish Life and Thought Among Greeks and Romans: Primary Readings (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1996). Horsley, G. H. R. (ed.) et al, New documents Illustrating Early Christianity (9 Vols; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1981–2002). Klauck, H.–J., The Religious Context of Early Christianity: A Guide to Graeco-Roman Religions (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 2000). Neusner, J. and W. S. Green (eds), Dictionary of Judaism In The Biblical Period (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1999). Roller, M. B., Dining Posture in Ancient Rome: Bodies, Values, and Status (Princeton: Prince University Press, 2006) .

83

Saldarini, A. J., Pharisees, Scribes, and Sadducees in Palestinian Society: A Sociological Approach (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2001). Scott, J. J., Jewish Backgrounds of the New Testament (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2000). Schnabel, E. J., Early Christian Mission. Vol.1: Jesus and the Twelve. Vol. 2: Paul and the Early Church. (Downers Grove, Ill.: InterVarsity Press, 2004). Vermes, G., The Complete Dead Sea Scrolls in English (New York: Penguin, 1998). Classic: Barrett, C. K., New Testament Background: Selected Documents (Revised & expanded; San Francisco: HarperSanFrancisco, 1995). The Ministry of Jesus and the Gospels Barton, S. C., (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to the Gospels, Cambridge Companions to Religion (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2006). Becker, J., Jesus of Nazareth (New York: Walter de Gruyter and Co, 1998). Blomberg, C. L., The Historical Reliability of the Gospels. (Downers Grove: IVP, rev. 2007). Bockmuehl, M., The Cambridge Companion to Jesus (Cambridge: CUP, 2001). Bock, D. L., Studying the Historical Jesus: A Guide to Sources and Methods (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2002). Bolt, P. G., The Cross from a Distance: Atonement in Mark’s Gospel (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2004). Borg, M. J., Jesus (New York: Happer One,2008). Blomberg, C. L., Jesus and the Gospels (Leicester: Apollos, 2002 repr). Dunn, J. D. G., Jesus Remembered. (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2003). Harding, M. and A. Nobbs (eds), The Content and Setting of the Gospel Tradition (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2010). Hultgren, A. J., The Parables of Jesus: A Commentary (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Malina, B. J.and R. L. Rohrbaugh, Social-Science Commentary on the Synoptic Gospels, (2nd ed.; Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 2003). Stanton, G. N., The Gospels and Jesus, Oxford Bible Series, (2nd ed.; New York: Oxford University Press, 2002). Stegemann, E. and W. Stegemenn, The Jesus Movement: A Social History of Its First Century (Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 1999). Strauss, M. L., Four Portraits, One Jesus: An Introduction to Jesus and the Gospels. (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2007). Theissen, G., The Gospels in Context: Social and Political History in the Synoptic Tradition, trans. Linda Maloney (London; New York: T&T Clark, 1999). Theissen, G. and D. Winter, The Quest for the Plausible Jesus: The Question of Criteria (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2002).

MDiv Unit Outlines

84

Classics: Meier, J. P., A Marginal Jew: Rethinking the Historical Jesus (4 Vols, New York: Doubleday, 1991, 1994, 2000, 2001). Stanton, G., Gospel Truth?: New Light on Jesus and the Gospels (London: HarperCollins, 1995). Wright, N. T., Jesus and the Victory of God (London: SPCK, 1994). The Churches in Acts Barrett, C. K., A Critical and Exegetical Commentary on the Acts of the Apostles (ICC, rev.), 2 vols. (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1994-1998). Bock, D. L., Acts (BECNT) (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2007). Collins, J. J., Between Athens and Jerusalem: Jewish Identity in the Hellenistic Diaspora, (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1999). Fitzmyer, J. A., The Acts of the Apostles (New York: Anchor, Doubleday, 1997). Hengel, M., Acts and the History of Earliest Christianity (repr; Eugene, OR: Wipf & Stock, 2003). Oakes, P. (ed.), Rome in The Bible and The Early Church (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2002). Pelikan, J., Acts (Grand Rapids: Brazos, 2006). Schnabel, E. J., Early Christian Mission. Vol. 2: Paul and the Early Church. (Downers Grove, Ill.: InterVarsity Press, 2004). Thompson, A. J., One Lord, One People: The Unity of the Church in Its Literary Setting (London: T. & T. Clark, 2008). Witherington, B., The Acts of the Apostles: A Socio– Rhetorical Commentary (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1998). Woods, E. J., The ‘Finger of God’ and Pneumatology in Luke–Acts (Sheffield: SAP, 2001). Classics: Cassidy, R. J., Society and Politics in the Acts of the Apostles (New York: Orbis, 1987). Spencer, F. S., The Portrait of Philip in Acts: A Study of Roles and Relations (Sheffield: JSOT, 1992). Winter, B. W. (Gen. Ed.), Book of Acts in its First Century Setting (6 Vols; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1993–1996).  NT501 The Content and Setting of the Gospel Tradition Status Core Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to understand the ministry of Jesus in its historical, socio-cultural, religious and political environment. (b) To give candidates an understanding of the evangelists as Christian theologians, with their own distinctive theologies, styles and outlooks.

(c) To introduce candidates to a range of critical methods as applied to Gospel studies for the purpose of illuminating the meaning and significance of the Gospel traditions. (d) To help candidates reflect on the significance of the Gospels in our contemporary context and for their own lives and ministry. Content Jesus’ life and ministry, with special reference to the following: 1 The historical, religious and political setting of Palestine as part of the Roman Empire. 2 The Markan outline and emphases. 3 Distinctive features of the Gospels of Matthew, Luke and John. 4 The Kingdom of God in the proclamation of Jesus. 5 The parables and their interpretation. 6 The ethics of Jesus, including the Sermon on the Mount. 7 The miracles of Jesus and their significance. 8 The titles of Jesus in the Gospels. 9 The passion and resurrection narratives. Bibliography Barton, S. C., (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to the Gospels, Cambridge Companions to Religion (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2006). Bauckham, R. (ed.), The Gospels for All Christians: Rethinking the Gospel Audiences (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1998). Becker, J., Jesus of Nazareth (New York: Walter de Gruyter and Co, 1998). Blomberg, C. L., Jesus and the Gospels (Leicester: Apollos, 2002 repr). Bockmuehl, M., The Cambridge Companion to Jesus (Cambridge: CUP, 2001). Bock, D. L., Studying the Historical Jesus: A Guide to Sources and Methods (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2002). Bock, D. L. and G. J. Herrick. Jesus in Context: Background Readings for Gospel Study. (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2005). Bolt, P. G., The Cross from a Distance: Atonement in Mark’s Gospel (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2004). Borg, M. J., Jesus (New York: Happer One,2008). Dungan, D. L., A History of the Synoptic Problem, Anchor Bible Reference Library (New York: Doubleday, 1999). Edwards, J. R., The Gospel According to Mark (PNTC). (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2002). Gnilka, J., Jesus of Nazareth: Message and History (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1997). Harding, M. and A. Nobbs (eds), The Content and Setting of the Gospel Tradition (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2010). Hultgren, A. J., The Parables of Jesus: A Commentary (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Malbon, E. S., Hearing Mark: A Listener's Guide (Harrisburg: Trinity Press International, 2002). Rhoads, D., J. Dewey and D. Michie, Mark as Story: An Introduction to the Narrative of a Gospel (2nd ed. Minneapolis:Fortress Press, 1999).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Seccombe, D., The King of God’s Kingdom: A Solution to the Puzzle of Jesus (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2002). Stanton, G. N., The Gospels and Jesus, Oxford Bible Series, (2nd ed.; New York: Oxford University Press, 2002). Stein, R. H., Studying the Synoptic Gospels. (2nd Ed.; Grand Rapids: Baker, 2001). Strauss, M. L., Four Portraits, One Jesus: An Introduction to Jesus and the Gospels. (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2007). Wright, N. T., Jesus and the Victory of God. (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1996). Wright, N. T., The Resurrection of the Son of God. (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2003).  NT502 The Early New Testament Church Status Core Learning Outcomes This is one of two foundational units that form the basis for all further study of the New Testament. There are two focal points in this unit: to consider the Book of Acts as a presentation of history, theology and narrative; and to investigate the contents, themes and theology of the various books of the New Testament. Candidates will develop an understanding of key developments in the growth of the earliest church, together with an awareness of emerging patterns and common themes alongside exceptional and notable events. In analysing and exploring these texts, candidates will develop an increased ability to recognise and employ inter-disciplinary skills and perspectives. Candidates will also gain an ability to summarise and outline relevant information from Acts and various epistles, with an increased capacity to synthesise and review significant themes, perspectives and interpretations associated with the material in view. Content Section A The beginnings and expansion of the church as reflected in the New Testament documents, with special attention to the Acts of the Apostles. Topics to be covered include: 1 The Jerusalem church 2 Early Christian preaching 3 Stephen and the Hellenists 4 The Pauline mission and churches 5 The Council of Jerusalem 6 Schism, heresy and external threat in the early church. Section B The main issues confronted in and the teaching of at least seven major New Testament epistles.

85

Note: Sections A & B are weighted approximately equally. Bibliography Fitzmyer, J. A., The Acts of the Apostles (New York: Anchor, Doubleday, 1997). Hengel, M., Acts and the History of Earliest Christianity (repr; Eugene, OR: Wipf & Stock, 2003). Marshall, I. H. and D. Peterson (eds), Witness to the Gospel: The Theology of Acts (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1998). Schnabel, E. J., Early Christian Mission, Vol 2: Paul and the Early Church (Downers Grove: InterVarsity Press, 2004). Winter, B. W. (Gen. Ed.), Book of Acts in its First Century Setting (6 Vols; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1993-1996). Witherington, B., The Acts of the Apostles: A Socio– Rhetorical Commentary (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1998). Woods, E. J., The ‘Finger of God’ and Pneumatology in Luke–Acts (Sheffield: SAP, 2001). Classics: Goulder, M., St Peter Verses St Paul: A Tale of Two Missions (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1995). Hemer, C. J., The Book of Acts in the Setting of Hellenistic History (ed. By C.H. Gempf; Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns, 1990). Spencer, F. S., The Portrait of Philip in Acts: A Study of Roles and Relations (Sheffield: JSOT, 1992).  NT620–NT638 New Testament Studies at Advanced Level – Units These units entail detailed studies of both the theology and the exegesis of various elements in the New Testament literature, building upon the foundation laid in NT501 and 502. Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to exegete large sections of the text of certain books of the New Testament, with reference to a wider body of biblical and extra biblical sources of relevance to the passage in view (b) To develop in candidates the skills of appropriate exegetical methodology, employing the various interpretative methods of biblical criticism, with an increased capacity to draw on inter-disciplinary skills and perspectives (c) To assist candidates to reflect upon particular aspects of the theology of certain New Testament writers, with an enhanced capacity to contextualize the documents: e.g. historical, socio-cultural, canonical and textual contexts. Insights gained will increase the ability to develop some measure of synthesis, with more developed application of classification and analytical models

MDiv Unit Outlines

86

(d) Candidates will also develop a more independent capacity to evaluate, critique, propose and defend propositions and interpretive perspectives (e) To help candidates think through the implications of their studies for New Testament exposition in ministry, with contemporary application on the basis of analytical skills and the ability to recontextualise. Notes (a) Candidates are required to learn to make appropriate use of a range of the exegetical methods of modern critical scholarship. Candidates who pursue exegesis in the Greek text are also urged to include OT647 in their studies, as Greek exegesis will expect an acquaintance with the issues in the major textual variants. (b) Candidates may not take any unit in which they repeat material completed in another unit. This is relevant to units NT621/631, NT622/632, NT626/636, NT627/637 and NT628/638. (c) Greek exegesis units require the completion of LA004A and LA004B. (d) Candidates cannot take the Greek and English text options in the same unit. Recommended Readings: In addition to Bibliography listed with each unit, the following are also recommended: Fee, G. D., New Testament Exegesis: A Handbook for Students and Pastors (3rd ed.; Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2002). Guthrie, G. H. and J. S. Duvall, Biblical Greek Exegesis (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1998). Horrell, D. G. (ed.), Social-Scientific Approaches to New Testament Interpretation (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1999). Lacocque A. and P Ricoeur, Thinking Biblically: Exegetical and Hermeneutical Studies (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1998). Metzer, B. M and B. D. Ehrman, The Text of the Testament: Its Transmission, Corruption, and Restoration, (4th ed.; New York: Oxford University Press, 2005). Porter, S. E., Handbook to Exegesis of the New Testament (Leiden: Brill, 1997). Resseguie, J. L., Narrative Criticism of the New Testament: An Introduction (Grand Rapids, MI: Baker Academic, 2005). Classics: Green, J. (ed.), Hearing The New Testament: Strategies for Interpretation (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1995). Neill, S.and N. T. Wright, The Interpretation of the New Testament, 1861-1986 (Rev.: New York: Oxford University Press, 1988) Robbins, V., Exploring the Texture of Texts: A Guide to Socio-Rhetorical Interpretation (Valley Forge, PA: Trinity Press International, 1996). 

NT620 The Synoptic Gospels (English Text) Status Elective Pre/co-requisites NT501 Learning Outcomes This unit entails detailed studies of both the theology and the exegesis of various elements in the Synoptic Gospels, building upon the foundation laid in NT501 and 502. (a) To enable candidates to exegete large sections of the text of the Synoptic Gospels. (b) To develop in candidates the skills of appropriate exegetical methodology, employing the various interpretative methods of biblical criticism. (c) To assist candidates to reflect upon the distinctive character, styles, themes and interrelationship of the Synoptic Gospels (d) To appreciate the literary forms and socio-cultural context of the Synoptic Gospels (e) To help candidates think through the implications of their studies for New Testament exposition in ministry. Content Candidates are required to learn to employ exegetical methods of modern critical scholarship. Candidates may not take any unit in which they repeat material completed in another unit. 1. The theology and critical issues in modern study of the Gospel chosen. 2. Exegesis of the English text of Luke 14–24 (or a comparable block of chapters from a Synoptic Gospel). Bibliography General Works Black, D. A. and D. R. Beck (eds), Rethinking the Synoptic Problem (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic 2001). Bockmuehl, M. and D. A. Hagner (eds), The Written Gospel. (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2005). Blomberg, C. L., Jesus and the Gospels (Leicester: Apollos, 2002 repr). Burridge, R. A., Four Gospels One Jesus (2nd & updated ed.; London: SPCK, 2005). Burridge, R. A., What Are the Gospels?: A Comparison with Graeco-Roman Biography (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Goodacre, M., The Synoptic Problem: A Way Through the Maze (Sheffield: SAP, 2001). Goodacre, M., The Case Against Q (Harrisburg, PA: TPI, 2002). McKnight, S. and G Osborne (eds.), The Face of New Testament Studies: A Survey of Recent Research (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, and Leicester: Apollos, 2004).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Classic: Sanders, E. and M. Davies, Studying the Synoptic Gospels (London: SCM, 1989). Studies on Luke Bartholomew, G. C., J. B. Green, and A.C. Thiselton, (eds), Reading Luke: Interpretation, Reflection, Formation, Scripture and Hermeneutic 6 (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2005). Bovon, F., Luke the Theologian: Fifty-five Years of Research (1950-2005) (Waco: Baylor University Press, 2006). Byrne, B., The Hospitality of God: A Reading of Luke’s Gospel (Strathfield: Liturgical Press, 2000). Forbes, G. W., The God of Old: The Role of the Lukan Parables in the Purpose of Luke’s Gospel (Sheffield: SAP, 2000). Hur, J., A Dynamic Reading of the Holy Spirit in LukeActs JSNTS 211 (London: Continuum, 2004). Marshall, I. H., Luke: Historian & Theologian (repr & updated; Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1998). Classics: Bailey, K. E., Poet and Peasant and Through Peasant Eyes: A Literary-Cultural Approach to the Parables in Luke (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1983). Turner, M., Power from on High: The Spirit in Israel's Restoration and Witness in Luke-Acts (Sheffield: SAP, 1996). Commentaries Bock, D. L., Luke (2 Vols; Grand Rapids: Baker, 1994,1996). Bovon, F., Luke 1: A Commentary on the Gospel of Luke 1:1-9:50 (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2002). Green, J. B., The Gospel of Luke (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1997). Fitzmyer, J. A., The Gospel According to Luke (2 Vols; New York: Doubleday, 1979, 1985). Johnson, L. T., The Gospel of Luke (Collegeville, MN: Liturgical, 1991). Talbert, C. H., Reading Luke: A Literary and Theological Commentary on the Third Gospel (New York: Crossroad, 1988).  NT621 Paul and Corinthian Christianity (English Text) Status Elective Pre/co-requisites NT502 Exclusions This unit may not be taken if Corinthians has been taken in unit NT628/638.

87

Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to exegete large sections of the text from the Corinthian correspondence. (b) To develop in candidates the skills of appropriate exegetical methodology, employing the various interpretative methods of biblical criticism and socio-cultural considerations. (c) To assist candidates to reflect upon significant themes in 1 and 2 Corinthians, and Paul’s pastoral theology viewed in context of issues facing the Corinthian church. (d) To help candidates think through the implications of their studies for the contemporary world and issues that challenge the church of today. Content Candidates are required to learn and employ exegetical methods of modern critical scholarship. Candidates may not take any unit in which they repeat material completed in another unit. 1 The church at Corinth: its foundation, the influences upon its life, and the theological and ethical issues reflected in the Pauline letters. 2 Exegesis of the English text of 1 Corinthians 1–7, 11–15 (or a comparable block of chapters from 1 and 2 Corinthians). Bibliography Theological and General Studies Adams, E. and D. G. Horrell (eds), Christianity at Corinth: The Quest for the Pauline Church (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2004). Cheng, A. T., Idol Food in Corinth: Jewish Background and Pauline Legacy (Sheffield: SAP, 1999). Furnish, V. P., The Theology of the First Letter to the Corinthians (Cambridge: CUP, 1999). Hafemann, S., Suffering and Ministry in the Spirit: Paul’s Defence of His Ministry in 1 Corinthians 2:14–3:3 (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2000). Welborn, L. L., Paul, the Full of Chirst (London/New York: T&T Clark, 2005). Winter, B. W., After Paul Left Corinth: The Influence of Secular Ethics and Social Change (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2001). Classics: Banks, R., Paul's Idea of Community (Rev. ed.; Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1994). Forbes, C. B., Prophecy and Inspired Speech in Early Christianity and its Hellenistic Environment (Tübingen: Mohr, 1995). Martin, D. B., The Corinthian Body (New Haven: Yale University, 1995). Pickett, R., The Cross in Corinth: The Social Significance of the Death of Jesus (Sheffield: SAP, 1997). Savage, T. B., Power through Weakness: Paul’s Understanding of the Christian Ministry in 2 Corinthians (New York: CUP, 1996). Theissen, G., The Social Setting of Pauline Christianity: Essays on Corinth. (Philadelphia: Fortress Press, 1982).

MDiv Unit Outlines

88

Welborn, L. L., Politics and Rhetoric in the Corinthians Epistles (Macon, GA: Mercer University, 1996). Commentaries Collins, R. F., First Corinthians (Collegeville: Liturgical, 1999). Dunn, J. D. G., 1 Corinthians (Sheffield: Continuum, 2003). Garland, D., 1 Corinthians (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2003). Horsley, R. A., 1 Corinthians (Nashville: Abingdon, 1998). Keener, C. S., 1- 2 Corinthians (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2005). Thiselton, A. C., The First Epistle to the Corinthians (NIGTC). (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Classics: Fee, G. D., The First Epistle to the Corinthians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1987). Hays, R. B., First Corinthians (Louisville: John Knox, 1997). Witherington, B., Conflict and Community in Corinth: A Socio–Rhetorical Commentary on 1 and 2 Corinthians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1994).  NT622 The Epistle to the Hebrews (English Text) Status Elective Pre/co-requisites NT502 Exclusions This unit may not be taken if Hebrews has been taken in unit NT628/NT638. Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to exegete large sections of the text from the Epistles to the Hebrews. (b) To develop in candidates the skills of appropriate exegetical methodology, employing the various interpretative methods of biblical criticism and socio-cultural considerations. (c) To assist candidates to reflect upon significant themes in Hebrews, and the writer’s pastoral and exhortatory expression. (d) To explore the imagery and scriptural allusions as integrated and applied within the text of Hebrews. (e) To help candidates think through the implications of their studies for the contemporary world and issues that challenge the church of today. Content Candidates are required to learn and employ exegetical methods of modern critical scholarship. Candidates may not take any unit in which they repeat material completed in another unit.

1 2

3

An introduction to Hebrews, including questions of authorship, date, destination. The theology of the epistle, including such themes as the old and new covenants, sacrifice, perfection, apostasy, the use of the Old Testament, Christology, cross and ascension, and eschatology. Exegesis of the English text of Hebrews 1–13.

Bibliography General Studies Hagner, D. A., Encountering the Book of Hebrews (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2002). Schenck, K. L., Understanding the Book of Hebrews (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2003). Classic: Isaacs, M. E., Sacred Space: An Approach to the Theology of the Epistle to the Hebrews (Sheffield: SAP, 1992). Commentaries Attridge, H., The Epistle to the Hebrews .(Philadelphia: Fortress, 1989). de Silva, D. A., Perseverance in Gratitude: A Socio– Rhetorical Commentary on the Epistle “to the Hebrews” (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Guthrie, G. H., Hebrews (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1998). Johnson, L. T., Hebrews: A Commentary (Louisville: Westminster/John Knox, 2006). Koester, C. R., Hebrews (New York: Doubleday, 2001). Lane, W. L., Hebrews (2 Vols; Dallas, TX: Word, 1991). Pfitzner, V. C., Hebrews (Nashville: Abingdon, 1997). Witherington, B., III. Letters and Homilies for Jewish Christians: A Socio-Rhetorical Commentary on Hebrews, James and Jude. (Downers Grove, IL: InterVarsity, 2007). Classic: Lane, W. L., Hebrews: A Call to Commitment (Peabody: Hendrickson, 1985).  NT623 The Pastoral Epistles (English Text) Status Elective Pre/co-requisites NT502 Exclusions This unit may not be taken if the Pastoral Epistles have been taken in NT628/NT638 Learning Outcomes (a) Critically evaluate the issues of of authorship, setting and purpose of the Pastoral Epistles. (b) Demonstrate skills in appropriate exegetical methodology, employing the various interpretive

MDiv Unit Outlines

methods of biblical criticism and socio-cultural consideration to significant portions of the correspondence, with reference to a wider body of biblical and extra biblical sources of relevance to the passage on view. (c) Understand the significant themes in the Pastoral Epistles, viewed in the context of the issues facing the churches that are recipients of the letters drawing on interdisciplinary skills and perspectives. (d) Understand the implications of the content of the Pastoral Epistles for contemporary leadership, ministry and ministry preparation on the basis of analytical skills and the ability to contextualize. Content 1 An introduction to the Pastoral Epistles to be studied, including questions of authorship, date, destination and occasion with attention to the wider social and cultural context of the recipient churches. 2 Exegesis of the English text of the whole of the Pastoral Epistles. 3 Exploration of the theology of the Pastoral Epistles including their understanding of Christ, salavation, the church and ministry 4 Contemporary implications of the Pastoral Epistles for leadership, ministry, cross-cultural ministry and ministry preparation including engagement with the text on specific issues students are facing in their ministry. Bibliography Recommended: Campbell, A., “’Do the work of an Evangelist’” EQ 64 (1992), 117-29. Donfried, K. P. and I. H. Marshall, The Theology of the Shorter Pauline Epistles (Cambridge: CUP, 1993). Ellis, E. E., Pauline Theology: Mininstry and Society. (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1989). Harding, M., What Are They Saying About the Pastoral Epistles? (New York : Paulist Press, 2001). Harding, M., Tradition and Rhetoric in the Pastoral Epistles. Studies in Biblical Literature 3. (New York: Peter Lang, 1998). Kidd, R. M., Wealth and Beneficence in the Pastoral Epistles. SBLDS 122. (Atlanta: Scholars, 1990). Kostenberger, A. J. and T. L. Wilder, Entrusted with the Gospel: Paul’s Theology in the Pastoral Epistles. (B&H Publishing, 2010). Marshall, I. H., “The Christology of the Pastoral Epistles.” SNT(SU) 13 (1988), 157-77. Marshall, I. H., “Faith and Works in the Pastoral Epistles.” SNT(SU) 9 (1984), 203-18. Prior, M., Paul the Letter Writer and the Second Letter to Timothy. JSNTS 23 (Sheffield: JSOT, 1989). Towner, P. H., “Christology in the letters to Timothy and Titus” in Contours of Christology in the New Testament. R. N. Longenecker (ed.) McMaster New Testament Studies 7. (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2005), 219-44.

89

Towner, P. H., “Gnosis and Realised Eschatology in Ephesus (of the Pastoral Epistles) and the Corinthian Enthusiasm.” JSNT 31 (1987), 95-124. Witherington, B. III. A Socio-Rhetorical Commentary on Titus, 1-2 Timothy and 1-3 John. Letters and Homilies for Hellenized Christians, Volume 1. (Downers Grove: IVP, 2006). Young, F., The Theology of the Pastoral Letters (Cambridge: CUP, 1994). Commentaries Bassler, J. M., 1 Timothy, 2 Timothy, Titus (Nashville: Abingdon, 1996). Fee, G. D., 1 and 2 Timothy, Titus. New International Biblical Commentary. (Peabody, MA: Henrikson, 1988). Fiore, B., The Pastoral Epistles: First Timothy, Second Timothy, Titus. (Collegeville, MN: Liturgical Press, 2007). Johnson, L. T., The First and Second Letters to Timothy (New York: Doubleday, 2001). Knight, G. W. III., Commentary on the Pastoral Epistles. NIGTC. (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1992). Marshall, I. H., The Pastoral Epistles (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1999). Mounce, W. D., The Pastoral Epistles (Waco: Word, 2000). Quinn, J. D., The Letter to Titus. (New York: Doubleday, 1990). Quinn, J. D and W. C. Wacker, First and Second Letters to Timothy (Grand Rapids, Eerdmans, 2000). Towner, P. H., The Letters to Timothy and Titus (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2006). Cultural Context Baugh, S. M., “A Foreign World: Ephesus in the First Century” in A. J. Kostenberger et. al. Women in the Church: A Fresh Analysis of 1 Timothy 2.9-15. (Grand Rapids, Baker, 1995). pp. 13-52. Harding, M., Early Christian Life and Thought in Social Context : A Reader. (London : T & T Clark, 2003). Osiek, C. and D. L. Balch, Families in the New Testament World: Households and House Churches. (Louisville, KY: John Knox, 1997). Theissen, G., The Social Setting of Pauline Christianity. (Philadelphia: Fortress, 1982). Verner, D. C., The Household of God: The Social World of the Pastoral Epistles. (SBLDS 71. Chico, CA: Scholars, 1983). Winter, B. W., Roman Wives, Roman Widows: The Appearance of New Women and the Pauline Communities. (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2003).  NT624 The Fourth Gospel (English Text) Status Elective

MDiv Unit Outlines

90

Pre/co-requisites NT501 Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to exegete large sections of the text from John’s Gospel. (b) To develop in candidates the skills of appropriate exegetical methodology, employing the various interpretative methods of biblical criticism and structural analysis. (c) To assist candidates to reflect upon significant themes and stylistic features in John’s Gospel, and indications of the writer’s purpose in writing. (d) To explore the interplay between narrative, encounter, sign and teaching in the text of John’s Gospel. (e) To help candidates think through the implications of their studies for the contemporary world and issues that challenge the church of today. Content Candidates are required to learn and employ exegetical methods of modern critical scholarship. Candidates may not take any unit in which they repeat material completed in another unit. 1

2

3

The theology of the Fourth Gospel, including such topics as: Christology; pneumatology; the church; eschatology; salvation/life/judgement; sacraments; faith and signs. The critical issues in the Fourth Gospel, such as: authorship; dating; provenance; formation of and historical background to the gospel; John and the synoptic gospels and the gospel tradition. Exegesis of the English text of John 1–8, 14–16 (or a comparable block of chapters).

Bibliography General Studies Carter, W., John: Storyteller, Interpreter, Evangelist (Peabody: Hendrickson, 2006). Ferreira, J., Johannine Ecclesiology (Sheffield: SAP, 1998). Fortna, R. T. and T. Thatcher (eds), Jesus in Johannine Tradition (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2001). Lincoln, A. T., The Gospel According to Saint John. (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 2005). Malina, B. J. and R. L. Rohrbaugh, Social Science Commentary on the Gospel of John (Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 1998). Orton, D. E., The Composition of John’s Gospel: Selected Studies from Novum Testamentum (Leiden: Brill, 1999). Painter, J., R. A. Culpepper and F. Segovia (eds), Word, Theology and Community in John (St. Louis: Chalice, 2002). Thatcher, T., Why John Wrote a Gospel: Jesus, Memory, History (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2006).

Classics: Ashton, J., (ed.), The Interpretation of John (2nd ed ; Edinburgh: T & T Clark,1997). Culpepper, R. A. and C. C. Black (eds), Exploring the Gospel of John (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1996). Porter, S. E. and C. A. Evans (eds), The Johannine Writings: A Sheffield Reader (Sheffield: SAP, 1995). Pryor, J. W., John: Evangelist of the Covenant People: The Narrative and Themes of the Fourth Gospel (Downers Grove: InterVarstiy Press, 1992). Smalley, S. S., John: Evangelist & Interpreter (Exeter: Paternoster, 1998). Smith, D. M., The Theology of the Gospel of John (Cambridge: CUP, 1995). Commentaries Brown, R. E. and F. J. Maloney, An Introduction to the Gospel of John (New York: Doubleday, 2003). Kruse, C. G., The Gospel according to John (rev.; Leicester: InterVarsity, 2004). Keener, C. S., The Gospel of John: A Commentary (2 Vols; Peabody: Hendrickson, 2003). Lincoln, A. T., The Gospel According to Saint John. (Peabody: Hendrickson, 2005). Köstenberger, A. J., John (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2004). Moloney, F. J., The Gospel of John (Collegeville, MN: Liturgical, 1998). Classics: Carson, D. A., The Gospel According to John (Leicester: IVP, 1991). Ridderbos, H., The Gospel of John: A Theological Commentary (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1997). Schnackenburg, R., The Gospel According to St. John (2 vol.; New York: Seabury Press, 1968, 1980). Witherington, B., John’s Wisdom: A Commentary on the Fourth Gospel (Lousville: Westminster John Knox, 1995).  NT625 Pauline Theology and Romans (English Text) Status Elective Pre/co-requisites NT502 Exclusions NT629 Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to study the theology of the Apostle Paul as it is reflected in his epistles. As an integrating unit, it is recommended that candidates have studied a Pauline Epistle at advanced level. (b) To gain an understanding of the purpose, literary shape, rhetorical form and argument of Paul’s letter to the Romans.

MDiv Unit Outlines

(c) To develop an understanding of the ‘new perspective’ on Paul, with a capacity to critically evaluate its strengths and weaknesses. (d) To consider questions of coherence in Pauline theology, and differing socio-cultural and rhetorical contexts. Content 1 Pauline theology: its integrating ideas and its major themes (e.g. Christology, eschatology, ecclesiology, Paul and the law, centrum Paulinum). 2 The major issues in contemporary study and the central themes of Romans. 3 Exegesis of the English text of eight chapters from Romans 1–11. Bibliography Pauline Theology Bassler, J., Navigating Paul: An Introduction to Key Theological Concepts (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2007). Dunn, J. D. G., The Theology of Paul the Apostle (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1998). Dunn, J. D. G. (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to St. Paul (Cambridge: CUP, 2003). Esler, P. F., Conflict and Identity in Romans: The Social Setting of Paul's Letter (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2003). Fee, G. D., Pauline Christology: An ExegeticalTheological Study (Peabody: Hendrickson, 2007). Fitzmyer, J. A., “Pauline Theology” in The New Jerome Biblical Commentary (Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1990). Gorman, M. J., Apostle of the Crucified Lord: A Theological Introduction to Paul and His Letters (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Horsley, R. A., Paul and Empire: Religion and Power in Roman Imperial Society (Harrisburg, PA: TPI, 1997). Westerholm, S., Perspectives Old and New on Paul (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Wright, N. T., The Climax of the Covenant (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1991). Classics: Fee, G. D., God’s Empowering Presence (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1994). Pate, C. M., The End of the Age Has Come: The Theology of Paul (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1995). Penna, R., Paul the Apostle (Vols I & II; Collegeville,: Liturgical, 1996). Sanders, E. P., Paul and Palestinian Judaism (London: SCM, 1977). Stowers, S. K., Rereading of Romans: Justice, Jews and Gentiles (New Haven: Yale University, 1994). Wright, N. T., The Climax of the Covenant: Christ and the Law in Pauline Theology (Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 1992). Romans – Studies and Commentaries Byrne, B., Romans (Collegeville: Liturgical, 1996).

91

Chae, D. J–S., Paul as Apostle to the Gentiles: His Apostolic Self–Awareness and its Influence on the Soteriological Argument of Romans (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1997). Dunn, J. D. G., Romans 2 vols. (Dallas: Word, 1988). Jewett, R. K., Romans: A Commentary. Hermeneia (Ed. E. J. Epp; Augsburg: Fortress Press, 2006). Moo, D. J., The Epistle to the Romans (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1996). Schreiner, T. R., Romans (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1998). Soderlund, S. K. and N. T. Wright (eds), Romans and the People of God (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1999). Westerholm, S., Understanding Paul: The Early Christian Worldview of the Letter to the Romans (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Baker, 2004). Witherington, B., Paul’s Letter to the Romans: A Socio-Rhetorical Commentary (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Classics: Cranfield, C. E. B., Romans: A Shorter Commentary (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1985). Donfried, K. P., The Romans Debate (Peabody: Hendrickson, 1991). Nanos, M. D., The Mystery of Romans: The Jewish Context of Paul's Letter (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1996). Stendahl, K., The Final Account: Paul’s Letter to the Romans (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1995). Walters, J. C., Ethnic Issues in Paul’s Letter to the Romans: Changing Self–Definitions in Earliest Roman Christianity (Valley Forge: TPI, 1993). Wedderburn, A. J. M., The Reasons for Romans (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1991).  NT626 General Epistles (English Text) Status Elective Pre/co-requisites NT502 Exclusions This unit may not be taken if 1 Peter has been taken in unit NT628/638. Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to interpret and exegete a range of non-Pauline books of the New Testament. (b) To develop in candidates the skills of appropriate exegetical methodology, employing the various interpretative methods of biblical criticism. (c) To assist candidates to reflect upon particular aspects of the theology of certain New Testament writers. (d) To help candidates think through the implications of their studies for New Testament exposition in ministry.

92

MDiv Unit Outlines

Content 1 An introduction to the Epistles to be studied, including questions of authorship, date, destination. 2 The theology of the Epistles to be studied, including their relationship to the gospel traditions (written and oral) and other theologians of the early church. 3 This unit require coverage of two of James , 1 Peter, 1-3 John. The full English text be required from the two chosen. Bibliography James Johnson, L. T., The Epistle of James (New York: Doubleday, 1995). Laws, S., The Epistle of James (San Francisco: Harper & Row, 1980). Martin, R. P., James (Waco: Word, 1988). Bauckham, R., James (Oxford: Routledge, 1999). Moo, D. J., James (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Penner, T. C., The Epistle of James and Eschatology: Re–reading an Ancient Christian Letter (Sheffield: SAP, 1996) Witherington, B. III., Letters and Homilies for Jewish Christians: A Socio-Rhetorical Commentary on Hebrews, James and Jude. (Downers Grove: InterVarsity, 2007). Classics: Adamson, J. B., James: The Man and His Message (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1989). Davids, P. H., The Epistle of James (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1982). 1 and 2 Peter, Jude Elliott, J. H., 1 Peter (New York: Doubleday, 2000). Horrell, D. G., The Epistles of Peter and Jude (London: Epworth, 1998). Senior, D. P. and D. J. Harrington, 1 Peter, Jude and 2 Peter (Collegeville: Liturgical, 2003). Witherington, B. III., Letters and Homilies for Hellenized Christians, vol. 2: A Socio-Rhetorical Commentary on 1-2 Peter. (Downers Grove: InterVarsity, 2007). Classics: Achtemeier, P. J., 1 Peter (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1996). Davids, P. H., The Letters of Second Peter and Jude (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2006). Michaels, J. R., 1 Peter (Dallas: Word, 1988). Neyrey, J. H., 2 Peter, Jude (New York: Doubleday, 1993). Johannine Epistles Painter, J., 1, 2 and 3 John (Collegeville, MN: Liturgical, 2002). Witherington, B. III., Letters and Homilies for Hellenized Christians, vol. 1: A Socio-Rhetorical Commentary on Titus, 1-2 Timothy and 1-3 John. (Downers Grove: InterVarsity, 2006).

Classics: Burge, G. M., Letters of John (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1996). Lieu, J., The Theology of the Johannine Epistles (Cambridge: CUP, 1991). Schnackenburg, R., The Johannine Epistles. (New York: Crossroad, 1992). Strecker, G., The Johannine Letters (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1993). Thompson, M. M., 1-3 John (Downers Grove: InterVarsity, 1992).  NT627 New Testament Apocalyptic (English Text) Status Elective Pre/co-requisites NT502 Exclusion This unit may not be taken if Revelation has been taken in unit NT628/638. Learning Outcomes (a) To explore evidence for the literary, socio-cultural, political and historical context reflected in Revelation (b) To gain an understanding of broad structural form of Revelation, and the variety of interpretations addressing the eschatological perspectives reflected in Revelation (c) To consider the interplay between godly worship, warnings and idolatry (d) To gain an appreciation for the sweep of God’s purposes, and the employment of prophetic and apocalyptic genres Content 1 The historical, social and theological roots of New Testament Apocalyptic writings, especially the Book of Revelation. 2 The theology of the Book of Revelation, including such themes as Christology, doctrine of God, judgement and hope. 3 Exegesis of the English text of Revelation 1–15, 19– 21. Bibliography General Studies Allison, D. C., Jesus of Nazareth: Millenarian Prophet (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1998). Bloomquist, L. G. and G. Carey, Vision and Persuasion: Rhetorical Dimensions of Apocalyptic Discourse (St Louis, MO: Chalice, 1999). McGinn, B. (ed.), The Encyclopedia of Apocalypticism. Vol. II: Apocalypticism in Western History and Culture (New York: Continuum, 1998).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Classics: Collins, J. J., The Apocalyptic Imagination (New York: Crossroad, 1989). Russell, D. S., Divine Disclosure: An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic (London; SCM, 1992).

93

Learning Outcomes To enable candidates to study further the theology and major issues of two substantial blocks of New Testament material. Content

Commentaries and Studies on Revelation Barr, D. L., Tales of the End: A Narrative Commentary on the Book of Revelation (Santa Rosa, CA: Polebridge, 1998). Beale, G. K., John’s Use of the Old Testament in Revelation (Sheffield: SAP, 1999). Court, J. M., The Book of Revelation and the Johannine Apocalyptic Tradition (Sheffield: SAP, 2000). Duff, P. B., Who Rides the Beast? Prophetic Rivalry and the Rhetoric of Crisis in the Churches of the Apocalypse (Oxford, New York: OUP, 2001). Friesen, S. J., Imperial Cults and the Apocalypse of John: Reading Revelation in the Ruins (Oxford, New York: OUP, 2001). Hemer, C., The Letters to the Seven Churches of Asia in Their Local Setting. (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2001). Keener, C. S. Revelation (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2000). Koester, C. R., Revelation and the End of All Things (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2001). Malina, B. J. and J. J. Pilch, Social Science Commentary on the Revelation (Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 2000). Witherington, B., Revelation (Cambridge; New York: CUP, 2003). Classics: Bauckham, R., The Theology of Revelation (Cambridge; New York: CUP, 1996). Kraybill, J. N., Imperial Cult and Commerce in Apocalypse (Sheffield: SAP, 1996). Malina, B. J., On the Genre and Message of Revelation: Star Visions and Sky Journeys (Peabody: Hendrickson, 1995). Thompson, L. L., The Book of Revelation: Apocalypse and Empire (New York: OUP, 1990).

1

The major issues in contemporary study and the central themes of any two of— (a) Acts (b) 1 and/or 2 Corinthians (c) Galatians (d) Ephesians, Philippians, Colossians, Philemon (e) 1 and 2 Thessalonians (f) Pastoral Epistles (g) Hebrews (h) 1 Peter (i) Revelation

2

Exegesis of the English text of 11–12 chapters drawn from two of the following: (a) Acts (b) 1 Corinthians (c) 2 Corinthians (d) Galatians (e) Ephesians (f) 1 Thessalonians (g) 2 Timothy & Titus (h) Hebrews (i) 1 Peter (j) Revelation

Bibliography Acts Barrett, C. K., Acts (2 Vols; New York: T & T Clark, 2004). Dunn, J. D. G., The Acts of the Apostles (London: Epworth, 1996). Fitzmyer, J. A., The Acts of the Apostles (New York: Doubleday, 1998). Gaventa, B., Acts (Nashville: Abingdon, 2003). Witherington, B., The Acts of the Apostles: A Socio– Rhetorical Commentary (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1998).

 NT628 Other Writings (English Text) Status Elective Pre/co-requisites NT502 Exclusions No material may be chosen in this unit that duplicates material in units NT621/631, NT622/632, NT626/636 or NT627/637.

1 and 2 Corinthians Barnett, P. W., The Second Epistle to the Corinthians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1997). Collins, R. F., First Corinthians (Collegville, MN: Liturgical, 1999). Dunn, J. D. G., 1 Corinthians (Sheffield: Continuum, 2003). Garland, D,. 1 Corinthians (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2003). Harris, M., The Second Epistle to the Corinthians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2005). Horsley, R. A., 1 Corinthians (Nashville: Abingdon, 1998). Thiselton, A. C., The First Epistle to the Corinthians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2001).

94

MDiv Unit Outlines

Galatians Fung, R. K. Y., Galatians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1988). Longenecker, R. N., Galatians (Waco: Word, 1990). Martyn, J. L., Galatians (New York: Doubleday, 1997). Witherington, B., Grace in Galatia: A Commentary on Paul’s Letter to the Galatians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1998). Ephesians, Philippians, Colossians, Philemon Dunn, J. D. G., The Epistles to the Colossians and Philemon (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1996). Fee, G. D., Paul’s Letter to the Philippians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1995). O’Brien, P. T., The Letter to the Ephesians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1999). O’Brien, P. T., The Epistle to the Philippians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1991). 1 and 2 Thessalonians Green, G. L., The Letters to the Thessalonians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2002). Wanamaker, C. A., The Epistles to the Thessalonians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1990). Witherington, B., 1 and 2 Thessalonians: A SocioRhetorical Commentary (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2006).

Best, E., 1 Peter (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1996). Boring, M. E., 1 Peter (Nashville: Abingdon, 1999). Elliott, J. H., 1 Peter (New York: Doubleday, 2001). McKnight, S., 1 Peter (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1996). Revelation Aune, D. E., Revelation (3 Vols; Dallas, TX: Word, 1997–1999). Barr, D. L., Tales of the End: A Narrative Commentary on the Book of Revelation (Santa Rosa, CA: Polebridge, 1998). Bauckham, R., The Climax of Prophecy (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1998). Beale, G. K., Revelation (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1998). Court, J. M., The Book of Revelation and the Johannine Apocalyptic Tradition (Sheffield: SAP, 2000). Harrington, W. J., Revelation (Collegeville, MN: Michael Glazier, 1993). Osborne, G. R., Revelation (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2002). Witherington, Ben, Revelation (Cambridge; New York: CUP, 2003).  NT629 Romans (English Text)

The Pastoral Epistles Bassler, J. M., 1 Timothy, 2 Timothy, Titus (Nashville: Abingdon, 1996). Johnson, L. T., The First and Second Letters to Timothy (New York: Doubleday, 2001). Marshall, I. H., The Pastoral Epistles (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1999). Mounce, W. D., The Pastoral Epistles (Waco: Word, 2000). Towner, P. H., The Letters to Timothy and Titus (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2006). Young, F., The Theology of the Pastoral Letters (Cambridge: CUP, 1994). Hebrews Bruce, F. F., Hebrews (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1994). de Silva, D. A., Perseverance in Gratitude: A SocioRhetorical Commentary on the Epistle “to the Hebrews” (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Ellingworth, P., The Epistle to the Hebrews (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1993). Hagner, D. A., Encountering the Book of Hebrews (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2002). Hughes, G., Hebrews and Hermeneutics (Cambridge: CUP, 2004). Koester, C., The Epistle to the Hebrews (New York: Doubleday, 2001). Lane, W. L., Hebrews (2 Vols; Dallas, TX: Word, 1991). Pfitzner, V. C., Hebrews (Nashville: Abingdon, 1997). 1 Peter Achtemeier, P. J., 1 Peter (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1996).

Status Elective Pre/co-requisites NT502 Exclusions NT625/635 Learning Outcomes To enable candidates to study the theology of the Apostle Paul as it is reflected in this epistle. To gain an understanding of the purpose, literary shape, rhetorical form and argument of Paul’s letter to the Romans (a) To enable candidates to exegete large sections of the text of Romans (b) To develop in candidates the skills of appropriate exegetical methodology, employing the various interpretative methods of biblical criticism. (c) To assist candidates to reflect upon the distinctive character, styles, themes and interrelationship of Romans (d) To help candidates think through the implications of their studies for New Testament exposition in ministry. Content 1 Introductory issues: (a) the themes and purpose(s) of Romans in the context of the Pauline mission; (b) the major issues in contemporary study of the book of Romans; and

MDiv Unit Outlines

2

(c) the bearing of contemporary approaches to Pauline theology on the interpretation of Romans. Exegesis of the English text of Romans 1-11 (or equivalent passages).

Bibliography General studies Chae, D. J–S., Paul as Apostle to the Gentiles: His Apostolic Self–Awareness and its Influence on the Soteriological Argument of Romans (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1997). Esler, P. F., Conflict and Identity in Romans (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2003). Gathercole, S. J., Where is Boasting? (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2002). Miller, J. C., The Obedience of Faith, the Eschatological People of God, and the Purpose of Romans (Atlanta, GA: Society of Biblical Literature, 2000). Oakes, P. (ed.), Rome in The Bible and The Early Church (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2002). Soderlund, S. K. and N. T. Wright (eds), Romans and the People of God (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1999). Commentaries Bray, G. (ed.), Romans (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1998). Byrne, B., Romans (Sacra Pagina; Collegeville, MN: Liturgical, 1996). Moo, D. J., Romans (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1996). Stuhlmacher, P., Romans (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1994). Talbert, C. H., Romans (Macon, GA: Smith & Helwys, 2002). Witherington, B., Paul's Letter to the Romans: A Socio-Rhetorical Commentary (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Classics: Boers, H., The Justification of the Gentiles (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1994). Donfried, K. P. (ed.), The Romans Debate (Rev. Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1991). Wedderburn, A. J. M., The Reasons for Romans (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1991).  NT630 The Synoptic Gospels (Greek Text) Status Elective Pre-requisites LA004A, LA004B Pre/co-requisites NT501

95

Learning Outcomes This unit entails detailed studies of both the theology and the exegesis of various elements in the Synoptic Gospels, building upon the foundation laid in NT501 and 502. (a) To enable candidates to exegete large sections of the text of the Synoptic Gospels. (b) To develop in candidates the skills of appropriate exegetical methodology, employing the various interpretative methods of biblical criticism. (c) To assist candidates to reflect upon the distinctive character, styles, themes and interrelationship of the Synoptic Gospels. (d) To appreciate the literary forms and socio-cultural context of the Synoptic Gospels. (e) To help candidates think through the implications of their studies for New Testament exposition in ministry. Content Candidates are required to learn and employ exegetical methods of modern critical scholarship. Candidates who pursue exegesis in the Greek text are also urged to include OT647 in their studies, as Greek exegesis will expect an acquaintance with the issues in the major textual variants Candidates may not take any unit in which they repeat material completed in another unit. 1. The theology and critical issues in modern study of the gospel chosen. 2. Translation and exegesis of the Greek text of Luke 19–24 (or a comparable block of chapters from a synoptic gospel). Bibliography General Works Black, D. A. and D. R. Beck (eds), Rethinking the Synoptic Problem (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic 2001). Bockmuehl, M. and D. A. Hagner (eds), The Written Gospel. (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2005). Blomberg, C. L., Jesus and the Gospels (Leicester: Apollos, 2002 repr). Burridge, R. A., Four Gospels One Jesus (2nd & updated ed.; London: SPCK, 2005). Burridge, R. A., What Are the Gospels?: A Comparison with Graeco-Roman Biography (2nd & updated ed.; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Goodacre, M., The Synoptic Problem: A Way Through the Maze (Sheffield: SAP, 2001). Goodacre, M., The Case Against Q (Harrisburg, PA: TPI, 2002). McKnight, S. and G Osborne (eds.), The Face of New Testament Studies: A Survey of Recent Research (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, and Leicester: Apollos, 2004). Classic: Sanders, E. and M. Davies, Studying the Synoptic Gospels (London: SCM, 1989).

MDiv Unit Outlines

96

Studies on Luke Bartholomew, G. C., J. B. Green, and A. C. Thiselton, (eds), Reading Luke: Interpretation, Reflection, Formation, Scripture and Hermeneutic 6 (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2005). Bovon, F., Luke the Theologian: Fifty-five Years of Research (1950-2005). (Waco: Baylor University Press, 2006). Byrne, B., The Hospitality of God: A Reading of Luke’s Gospel (Strathfield: Liturgical Press, 2000). Forbes, G. W., The God of Old: The Role of the Lukan Parables in the Purpose of Luke’s Gospel (Sheffield: SAP, 2000). Hur, J., A Dynamic Reading of the Holy Spirit in LukeActs JSNTS 211 (London: Continuum, 2004). Marshall, I. H., Luke: Historian & Theologian (repr & updated; Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1998). Turner, M., Power from on High: The Spirit in Israel's Restoration and Witness in Luke-Acts (Sheffield: SAP, 1996). Classics: Bailey, K. E., Poet and Peasant and Through Peasant Eyes: A Literary-Cultural Approach to the Parables in Luke (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1983). Turner, M., Power from on High: The Spirit in Israel's Restoration and Witness in Luke-Acts (Sheffield: SAP, 1996). Commentaries Bovon, F., Luke 1: A Commentary on the Gospel of Luke 1:1-9:50 (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2002). Green, J. B., The Gospel of Luke (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1997).

Exclusions This unit may not be taken if Corinthians has been taken in unit NT628/638. Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to exegete large sections of the text from the Corinthian correspondence. (b) To develop in candidates the skills of appropriate exegetical methodology, employing the various interpretative methods of biblical criticism and socio-cultural considerations. (c) To assist candidates to reflect upon significant themes in 1 and 2 Corinthians, and Paul’s pastoral theology viewed in context of issues facing the Corinthian church. (d) To help candidates think through the implications of their studies for the contemporary world and issues that challenge the church of today. Content Candidates are required to learn and employ exegetical methods of modern critical scholarship. Candidates who pursue exegesis in the Greek text are also urged to include OT647 in their studies, as Greek exegesis will expect an acquaintance with the issues in the major textual variants. Candidates may not take any unit in which they repeat material completed in another unit. 1

2

The church at Corinth: its foundation, the influences upon its life, and the theological and ethical issues reflected in the Pauline letters. Translation and exegesis of the Greek text of 1 Corinthians 1–4, 12–15 (or a comparable block of chapters from 1 and 2 Corinthians).

Bibliography Classics: Bock, D. L., Luke (2 Vols; Grand Rapids: Baker, 1994,1996). Fitzmyer, J. A., The Gospel According to Luke (2 Vols; New York: Doubleday, 1979, 1985). Johnson, L. T., The Gospel of Luke (Collegeville: Liturgical, 1991). Nolland, J., Luke (3 Vols; Dallas, TX: Word, 1990, 1993). Talbert, C. H., Reading Luke: A Literary and Theological Commentary on the Third Gospel (New York: Crossroad, 1988).  NT631 Text)

Paul and Corinthian Christianity (Greek

Status Elective Pre-requisites LA004A, LA004B Pre/co-requisites NT502

Theological and General Studies Adams, E. and D. G. Horrell (eds), Christianity at Corinth: The Quest for the Pauline Church (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2004). Cheng, A. T., Idol Food in Corinth: Jewish Background and Pauline Legacy (Sheffield: SAP, 1999). Furnish, V. P., The Theology of the First Letter to the Corinthians (Cambridge: CUP, 1999). Hafemann, S., Suffering and Ministry in the Spirit: Paul’s Defence of his Ministry in 1 Corinthians 2:14–3:3 (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2000). Welborn, L. L., Paul, the Full of Chirst (London/New York: T&T Clark, 2005). Winter, B. W., After Paul Left Corinth: The Influence of Secular Ethics and Social Change (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2001). Classics: Banks, R., Paul's Idea of Community (Rev. ed.; Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1994). Chow, J. K., Patronage and Power: Studies on Social Networks in Corinth (Sheffield: SAP, 1992). Clarke, A. D., Secular and Christian Leadership in Corinth; A Socio–Historical and Exegetical Study of 1 Corinthians 1–6 (Leiden: Brill, 1993).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Forbes, C. B., Prophecy and Inspired Speech in Early Christianity and Its Hellenistic Environment (Tübingen: Mohr, 1995). Litfin, D., St Paul’s Theology of Proclamation: 1 Corinthians 1–4 and Greco–Roman Rhetoric (Cambridge: CUP, 1994). Martin, D. B., The Corinthian Body (New Haven: Yale University, 1995). Pickett, R., The Cross in Corinth: The Social Significance of the Death of Jesus (Sheffield: SAP, 1997). Savage, T. B., Power through Weakness: Paul’s Understanding of the Christian Ministry in 2 Corinthians (New York: CUP, 1996). Theissen, G., The Social Setting of Pauline Christianity: Essays on Corinth. (Philadelphia: Fortress Press, 1982). Welborn, L. L., Politics and Rhetoric in the Corinthians Epistles (Macon, GA: Mercer University, 1996). Commentaries Collins, R. F., First Corinthians (Collegeville: Liturgical, 1999). Dunn, J. D. G., 1 Corinthians (Sheffield: Continuum, 2003). Garland, D., 1 Corinthians (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2003). Harris, M. J., The Second Epistle to the Corinthians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2005). Horsley, R. A., 1 Corinthians (Nashville: Abingdon, 1998). Keener, C. S., 1- 2 Corinthians (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2005). Thiselton, A. C., The First Epistle to the Corinthians (NIGTC). (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Thrall, M. E., A Critical and Exegetical Commentary on the Second Epistle to the Corinthians (2 Vols. Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1994-2000). Classics: Fee, G. D., The First Epistle to the Corinthians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1987). Hays, R. B., First Corinthians (Louisville: John Knox, 1997). Witherington, B., Conflict and Community in Corinth: A Socio–Rhetorical Commentary on 1 and 2 Corinthians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1994).  NT632 The Epistle to the Hebrews (Greek Text) Status Elective Pre-requisites LA004A, LA004B Pre/co-requisites NT502

97

Exclusions This unit may not be taken if Hebrews has been taken in unit NT628/638. Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to exegete large sections of the text from the Epistles to the Hebrews. (b) To develop in candidates the skills of appropriate exegetical methodology, employing the various interpretative methods of biblical criticism and socio-cultural considerations. (c) To assist candidates to reflect upon significant themes in Hebrews, and the writer’s pastoral and exhortatory expression. (d) To explore the imagery and scriptural allusions as integrated and applied within the text of Hebrews. (e) To help candidates think through the implications of their studies for the contemporary world and issues that challenge the church of today. Content 1 An introduction to Hebrews, including questions of authorship, date, destination. 2 The theology of the epistle, including such themes as the old and new covenants, sacrifice, perfection, apostasy, the use of the Old Testament, Christology, cross and ascension, and eschatology. 3 Translation and exegesis of the Greek text of Hebrews 1–8, 12. Bibliography General Studies Hagner, D. A., Encountering the Book of Hebrews (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2002). Schenck, K. L., Understanding the Book of Hebrews (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2003). Classic: Isaacs, M. E., Sacred Space: An Approach to the Theology of the Epistle to the Hebrews (Sheffield: SAP, 1992). Commentaries de Silva, D. A., Perseverance in Gratitude: A Socio– Rhetorical Commentary on the Epistle “to the Hebrews” (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Guthrie, G. H., Hebrews (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1998). Johnson, L. T., Hebrews: A Commentary (Louisville: Westminster/John Knox, 2006). Koester, C. R., Hebrews (New York: Doubleday, 2001). Pfitzner, V. C., Hebrews (Nashville: Abingdon, 1997). Witherington, B., III. Letters and Homilies for Jewish Christians: A Socio-Rhetorical Commentary on Hebrews, James and Jude. (Downers Grove, IL: InterVarsity, 2007). Classics: Attridge, H., The Epistle to the Hebrews .(Philadelphia: Fortress, 1989). Ellingworth, P., The Epistle to the Hebrews (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1993).

MDiv Unit Outlines

98

Lane, W. L., Hebrews: A Call to Commitment (Peabody: Hendrickson, 1985). Lane, W. L., Hebrews (2 Vols; Dallas, TX: Word, 1991).  NT633 The Pastoral Epistles (Greek Text) Status Elective Pre-requisites LA004A and LA004B Pre/co-requisites NT302 Exclusions This unit may not be taken if the Pastoral Epistles have been taken in NT628/NT638 Learning Outcomes (a) Critically evaluate the issues of of authorship, setting and purpose of the Pastoral Epistles. (b) Demonstrate skills in appropriate exegetical methodology, employing the various interpretive methods of biblical criticism and socio-cultural consideration to significant portions of the correspondence, with reference to a wider body of biblical and extra biblical sources of relevance to the passage on view. (c) Understand the significant themes in the Pastoral Epistles, viewed in the context of the issues facing the churches that are recipients of the letters drawing on interdisciplinary skills and perspectives. (d) Understand the implications of the content of the Pastoral Epistles for contemporary leadership, ministry and ministry preparation on the basis of analytical skills and the ability to contextualize. Content 1 An introduction to the Pastoral Epistles to be studied, including questions of authorship, date, destination and occasion with attention to the wider social and cultural context of the recipient churches. 2 Exegesis and translation of 8 chapters, including at least one chapter from each of the Pastoral Epistles. 3 Exploration of the theology of the Pastoral Epistles including their understanding of Christ, salavation, the church and ministry 4 Contemporary implications of the Pastoral Epistles for leadership, ministry, cross-cultural ministry and ministry preparation including engagement with the text on specific issues students are facing in their ministry.

Donfried, K. P. and I. H. Marshall, The Theology of the Shorter Pauline Epistles (Cambridge: CUP, 1993). Ellis, E. E., Pauline Theology: Mininstry and Society. (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1989). Harding, M., What Are They Saying About the Pastoral Epistles? (New York : Paulist Press, 2001). Harding, M., Tradition and Rhetoric in the Pastoral Epistles. Studies in Biblical Literature 3. (New York: Peter Lang, 1998). Kidd, R. M., Wealth and Beneficence in the Pastoral Epistles. SBLDS 122. (Atlanta: Scholars, 1990). Kostenberger, A. J. and T. L. Wilder, Entrusted with the Gospel: Paul’s Theology in the Pastoral Epistles. (B&H Publishing, 2010). Marshall, I. H., “The Christology of the Pastoral Epistles.” SNT(SU) 13 (1988), 157-77. Marshall, I. H., “Faith and Works in the Pastoral Epistles.” SNT(SU) 9 (1984), 203-18. Prior, M., Paul the Letter Writer and the Second Letter to Timothy. JSNTS 23 (Sheffield: JSOT, 1989). Towner, P. H., “Christology in the letters to Timothy and Titus” in Contours of Christology in the New Testament. R. N. Longenecker (ed.) McMaster New Testament Studies 7. (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2005), 219-44. Towner, P. H., “Gnosis and Realised Eschatology in Ephesus (of the Pastoral Epistles) and the Corinthian Enthusiasm.” JSNT 31 (1987), 95-124. Witherington, B. III., A Socio-Rhetorical Commentary on Titus, 1-2 Timothy and 1-3 John. Letters and Homilies for Hellenized Christians, Volume 1. (Downers Grove: IVP, 2006). Young, F., The Theology of the Pastoral Letters (Cambridge: CUP, 1994). Commentaries Bassler, J. M., 1 Timothy, 2 Timothy, Titus (Nashville: Abingdon, 1996). Fee, G. D., 1 and 2 Timothy, Titus. New International Biblical Commentary. (Peabody, MA: Henrikson, 1988). Fiore, B., The Pastoral Epistles: First Timothy, Second Timothy, Titus. (Collegeville, MN: Liturgical Press, 2007). Johnson, L. T., The First and Second Letters to Timothy (New York: Doubleday, 2001). Knight, G. W. III., Commentary on the Pastoral Epistles. NIGTC. (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1992). Marshall, I. H., The Pastoral Epistles (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1999). Mounce, W. D., The Pastoral Epistles (Waco: Word, 2000). Quinn, J. D., The Letter to Titus. (New York: Doubleday, 1990). Quinn, J. D. and W. C. Wacker, First and Second Letters to Timothy (Grand Rapids, Eerdmans, 2000). Towner, P. H., The Letters to Timothy and Titus (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2006).

Bibliography Recommended: Campbell, A., “’Do the work of an Evangelist’” EQ 64 (1992), 117-29.

Cultural Context Baugh, S. M., “A Foreign World: Ephesus in the First Century” in A. J. Kostenberger et. al. Women in the

MDiv Unit Outlines

Church: A Fresh Analysis of 1 Timothy 2.9-15 (Grand Rapids, Baker, 1995). pp. 13-52. Harding, M., Early Christian Life and Thought in Social Context : A Reader (London : T & T Clark, 2003). Osiek, C. and D. L. Balch, Families in the New Testament World: Households and House Churches (Louisville, KY: John Knox, 1997). Theissen, G., The Social Setting of Pauline Christianity. (Philadelphia: Fortress, 1982). Verner, D. C., The Household of God: The Social World of the Pastoral Epistles (SBLDS 71. Chico, CA: Scholars, 1983). Winter, B. W., Roman Wives, Roman Widows: The Appearance of New Women and the Pauline Communities (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2003).  NT634 The Fourth Gospel (Greek Text) Status Elective Pre-requisites LA004A, LA004B Pre/co-requisites NT501 Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to exegete large sections of the text from John’s Gospel (b) To develop in candidates the skills of appropriate exegetical methodology, employing the various interpretative methods of biblical criticism and structural analysis (c) To assist candidates to reflect upon significant themes and stylistic features in John’s Gospel, and indications of the writer’s purpose in writing (d) To explore the interplay between narrative, encounter, sign and teaching in the text of John’s Gospel (e) To help candidates think through the implications of their studies for the contemporary world and issues that challenge the church of today Content Candidates are required to learn and employ exegetical methods of modern critical scholarship. Candidates who pursue exegesis in the Greek text are also urged to include OT647 in their studies, as Greek exegesis will expect an acquaintance with the issues in the major textual variants. Candidates may not take any unit in which they repeat material completed in another unit. 1

The theology of the Fourth Gospel, including such topics as: Christology; pneumatology; the church; eschatology; salvation/life/judgement; sacraments; faith and signs.

2

3

99

The critical issues in the Fourth Gospel, such as: authorship; dating; provenance; formation of and historical background to the gospel; John and the synoptic gospels and the gospel tradition. Translation and exegesis of the Greek text of John 1–3, 5–6, 15–16 (or a comparable block of chapters).

General Studies Carter, W., John: Storyteller, Interpreter, Evangelist (Peabody: Hendrickson, 2006). Ferreira, J., Johannine Ecclesiology (Sheffield: SAP, 1998). Fortna, R. T. and T. Thatcher (eds), Jesus in Johannine Tradition (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2001). Lincoln, A. T., The Gospel According to Saint John. (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 2005). Malina, B. J. and R. L. Rohrbaugh, Social Science Commentary on the Gospel of John (Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 1998). Orton, D. E., The Composition of John’s Gospel: Selected Studies from Novum Testamentum (Leiden: Brill, 1999). Painter, J., R. A. Culpepper & F. Segovia (eds), Word, Theology and Community in John (St. Louis: Chalice, 2002). Thatcher, T., Why John Wrote a Gospel: Jesus, Memory, History (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2006). Classics: Ashton, J., (ed.), The Interpretation of John (2nd ed ; Edinburgh: T & T Clark,1997). Culpepper, R. A. and C. C. Black (eds), Exploring the Gospel of John (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1996). Porter, S. E. and C. A. Evans (eds), The Johannine Writings: A Sheffield Reader (Sheffield: SAP, 1995). Pryor, J. W., John: Evangelist of the Covenant People: The Narrative and Themes of the Fourth Gospel (Downers Grove: InterVarstiy Press, 1992). Smalley, S. S., John: Evangelist & Interpreter (Exeter: Paternoster, 1998). Smith, D. M., The Theology of the Gospel of John (Cambridge: CUP, 1995). Commentaries Brown, R. E. and F. J. Maloney, An Introduction to the Gospel of John (New York: Doubleday, 2003). Kruse, C. G., The Gospel according to John (rev.; Leicester: InterVarsity, 2004. Keener, C. S., The Gospel of John: A Commentary (2 Vols; Peabody: Hendrickson, 2003). Lincoln, A. T., The Gospel According to Saint John. (Peabody: Hendrickson, 2005). Köstenberger, A. J., John (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2004). Moloney, F. J., The Gospel of John (Collegeville, MN: Liturgical, 1998).

MDiv Unit Outlines

100

Classics: Carson, D. A., The Gospel According to John (Leicester: IVP, 1991). Ridderbos, H., The Gospel of John: A Theological Commentary (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1997). Schnackenburg, R., The Gospel According to St. John, 2 vol. (New York: Seabury Press, 1968, 1980). Witherington, B., John’s Wisdom: A Commentary on the Fourth Gospel (Lousville: Westminster John Knox, 1995).  NT635 Pauline Theology and Romans (Greek Text) Status Elective Pre-requisites LA004A, LA004B Pre/co-requisites NT502 Exclusions NT629/639 Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to study the theology of the Apostle Paul as it is reflected in his epistles. As an integrating unit, it is recommended that candidates have studied a Pauline Epistle at advanced level. (b) To gain an understanding of the purpose, literary shape, rhetorical form and argument of Paul’s letter to the Romans. (c) To develop an understanding of the ‘new perspective’ on Paul, with a capacity to critically evaluate its strengths and weaknesses. (d) To consider questions of coherence in Pauline theology, and differing socio-cultural and rhetorical contexts. Content 1 Pauline theology: its integrating ideas and its major themes (e.g. Christology, eschatology, ecclesiology, Paul and the law, centrum Paulinum). 2 The major issues in contemporary study and the central themes of Romans. 3 Translation and exegesis of the Greek text of six chapters from Romans 1–8. Bibliography Pauline Theology Bassler, J., Navigating Paul: An Introduction to Key Theological Concepts (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2007). Dunn, J. D. G., The Theology of Paul the Apostle (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1998). Dunn, J. D. G. (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to St. Paul (Cambridge: CUP, 2003).

Esler, P. F., Conflict and Identity in Romans: The Social Setting of Paul's Letter (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2003). Fee, G. D., Pauline Christology: An ExegeticalTheological Study (Peabody: Hendrickson, 2007). Fitzmyer, J. A., “Pauline Theology” in The New Jerome Biblical Commentary (Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1990). Gorman, M. J., Apostle of the Crucified Lord: A Theological Introduction to Paul and His Letters (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Horsley, R. A., Paul and Empire: Religion and Power in Roman Imperial Society (Harrisburg, PA: TPI, 1997). Westerholm, S., Perspectives Old and New on Paul (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Wright, N. T., The Climax of the Covenant (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1991). Classics: Fee, G. D., God’s Empowering Presence (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1994). Pate, C. M., The End of the Age Has Come: The Theology of Paul (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1995). Penna, R., Paul the Apostle (Vols I & II; Collegeville,: Liturgical, 1996). Sanders, E. P., Paul and Palestinian Judaism (London: SCM, 1977). Stowers, S. K., Rereading of Romans: Justice, Jews and Gentiles (New Haven: Yale University, 1994). Wright, N. T., The Climax of the Covenant: Christ and the Law in Pauline Theology (Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 1992). Romans – Studies and Commentaries Byrne, B., Romans (Collegeville: Liturgical, 1996). Chae, D. J–S., Paul as Apostle to the Gentiles: His Apostolic Self–Awareness and its Influence on the Soteriological Argument of Romans (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1997). Dunn, J. D. G., Romans 2 vols. (Dallas: Word, 1988). Gathercole, S. J., Where is Boasting? (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2002). Jewett, R. K., Romans: A Commentary. Hermeneia (Ed. E.J. Epp; Augsburg: Fortress Press, 2006). Miller, J. C., The Obedience of Faith, the Eschatological People of God, and the Purpose of Romans (Atlanta: Society of Biblical Literature, 2000). Moo, D. J., The Epistle to the Romans (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1996). Schreiner, T. R., Romans (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1998). Soderlund, S. K. and N. T. Wright (eds), Romans and the People of God (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1999). Stowers, S. K., Rereading of Romans: Justice, Jews and Gentiles (New Haven: Yale University, 1994). Westerholm, S., Understanding Paul: The Early Christian Worldview of the Letter to the Romans (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Baker, 2004).

MDiv Unit Outlines

101

Witherington, B., Paul's Letter to the Romans: A Socio-Rhetorical Commentary (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Wright, N. T., ‘Romans’ in The New Interpreter's Bible (Vol. X; Nashville: Abingdon, 2002).

3

Classics: Cranfield, C. E. B., Romans: A Shorter Commentary (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1985). Cranfield, C. E. B., The Epistle to the Romans 2 vols. (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark. 1975-79). Donfried, K. P., The Romans Debate (Peabody: Hendrickson, 1991). Hay, D. M. and E. E. Johnson (eds), Pauline Theology III: Romans (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1995). Nanos, M. D., The Mystery of Romans: The Jewish Context of Paul's Letter (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1996). Stendahl, K., The Final Account: Paul’s Letter to the Romans (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1995). Walters, J. C., Ethnic Issues in Paul’s Letter to the Romans: Changing Self–Definitions in Earliest Roman Christianity (Valley Forge: TPI, 1993). Wedderburn, A. J. M., The Reasons for Romans (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1991).

James Bauckham, R., James (Oxford: Routledge, 1999). Moo, D. J., James (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Penner, T. C., The Epistle of James and Eschatology: Re–reading an Ancient Christian Letter (Sheffield: SAP, 1996). Witherington, B. III., Letters and Homilies for Jewish Christians: A Socio-Rhetorical Commentary on Hebrews, James and Jude. (Downers Grove: InterVarsity, 2007).

 NT636 General Epistles (Greek Text) Status Elective Pre-requisites LA004A and LA004B Pre/co-requisites NT502 Exclusions This unit may not be taken if 1 Peter has been taken in unit NT628/NT638. Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to interpret and exegete a range of non-Pauline books of the New Testament. (b) To develop in candidates the skills of appropriate exegetical methodology, employing the various interpretative methods of biblical criticism. (c) To assist candidates to reflect upon particular aspects of the theology of certain New Testament writers. (d) To help candidates think through the implications of their studies for New Testament exposition in ministry. Content 1 An introduction to the Epistles to be studied, including questions of authorship, date, destination. 2 The theology of the Epistles to be studied, including their relationship to the gospel traditions (written and oral) and other theologians of the early church.

This unit requires coverage of two of James, 1 Peter, 1-3 John. Four chapters in Greek be required from each of the two chosen.

Bibliography

Classics: Adamson, J. B., James: The Man and His Message (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1989). Davids, P. H., The Epistle of James (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1982). Johnson, L. T., The Epistle of James (New York: Doubleday, 1995). Laws, S., The Epistle of James (San Francisco: Harper & Row, 1980). Martin, R. P., James (Waco: Word, 1988). 1 and 2 Peter, Jude Elliott, J. H., 1 Peter (New York: Doubleday, 2000). Horrell, D. G., The Epistles of Peter and Jude (London: Epworth, 1998). Schreiner, T. R., 1, 2 Peter, Jude (Nashville: Broadman & Holman, 2003). Senior, D. P. and D. J. Harrington, 1 Peter, Jude and 2 Peter (Collegeville: Liturgical, 2003). Witherington, B. III., Letters and Homilies for Hellenized Christians, vol. 2: A Socio-Rhetorical Commentary on 1-2 Peter. (Downers Grove: InterVarsity, 2007). Classics: Achtemeier, P. J., 1 Peter (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1996). Davids, P. H., The First Epistle of Peter (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1990). Davids, P. H., The Letters of Second Peter and Jude (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2006). Michaels, J. R., 1 Peter (Dallas: Word, 1988). Neyrey, J. H., 2 Peter, Jude (New York: Doubleday, 1993). Johannine Epistles Painter, J., 1, 2 and 3 John (Collegeville, MN: Liturgical, 2002). Witherington, B. III., Letters and Homilies for Hellenized Christians, vol. 1: A Socio-Rhetorical Commentary on Titus, 1-2 Timothy and 1-3 John. (Downers Grove: InterVarsity, 2006). Classics: Burge, G. M., Letters of John (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1996).

MDiv Unit Outlines

102

Lieu, J., The Theology of the Johannine Epistles (Cambridge: CUP, 1991). Schnackenburg, R., The Johannine Epistles. (New York: Crossroad, 1992). Smalley, S. S., 1, 2, 3 John (Waco: Word, 1984). Strecker, G., The Johannine Letters (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1993). Thompson, M. M., 1- 3 John (Downers Grove: InterVarsity, 1992).  NT637 New Testament Apocalyptic (Greek Text) Status Elective Pre-requisites LA004A, LA004B Pre/co-requisites NT502 Exclusions This unit may not be taken if Revelation has been taken in unit NT628/NT638. Learning Outcomes (a) To explore evidence for the literary, socio-cultural, political and historical context reflected in Revelation; (b) To gain an understanding of broad structural form of Revelation, and the variety of interpretations addressing the eschatological perspectives reflected in revelation ; (c) To consider the interplay between godly worship, warnings and idolatry; (d) To gain an appreciation for the sweep of God’s purposes, and the employment of prophetic and apocalyptic genres. Content 1 The historical, social and theological roots of New Testament Apocalyptic writings, especially the Book of Revelation. 2 The theology of the Book of Revelation, including such themes as Christology, doctrine of God, judgement and hope. 3 Translation and exegesis of the Greek text of Revelation 1, 4–7, 12–14, 20–21 (or a comparable block of chapters). Bibliography General Studies Allison, D. C., Jesus of Nazareth: Millenarian Prophet (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1998). Bloomquist, L. G. and G. Carey, Vision and Persuasion: Rhetorical Dimensions of Apocalyptic Discourse (St Louis, MO: Chalice, 1999). McGinn, B. (ed.), The Encyclopedia of Apocalypticism. Vol. II: Apocalypticism in

Western History and Culture (New York: Continuum, 1998). Classics: Brown, A. R., The Cross and Human Transformation: Paul’s Apocalyptic Work in 1 Corinthians (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1995). Collins, J. J., The Apocalyptic Imagination (New York: Crossroad, 1989). Russell, D. S., Divine Disclosure: An Introduction to Jewish Apocalyptic (London; SCM, 1992). Commentaries and Studies on Revelation Barr, D. L., Tales of the End: A Narrative Commentary on the Book of Revelation (Santa Rosa, CA: Polebridge, 1998). Beale, G. K., John’s Use of the Old Testament in Revelation (Sheffield: SAP, 1999). Beale, G. K., The Book of Revelation (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1999). Court, J. M., The Book of Revelation and the Johannine Apocalyptic Tradition (Sheffield: SAP, 2000). Duff, P. B., Who Rides the Beast? Prophetic Rivalry and the Rhetoric of Crisis in the Churches of the Apocalypse (Oxford, New York: OUP, 2001). Friesen, S. J., Imperial Cults and the Apocalypse of John: Reading Revelation in the Ruins (Oxford, New York: OUP, 2001). Hemer, C., The Letters to the Seven Churches of Asia in Their Local Setting. (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2001). Keener, C. S., Revelation (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2000). Koester, C. R., Revelation and the End of All Things (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2001). Malina, B. J. and J J. Pilch, Social Science Commentary on the Revelation (Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 2000) Witherington, B., Revelation (Cambridge; New York: CUP, 2003). Classics: Aune, D., Revelation, 3 Vols (Waco: Word Books, 1997). Bauckham, R., The Theology of Revelation (Cambridge; New York: CUP, 1996). Kraybill, J. N., Imperial Cult and Commerce in Apocalypse (Sheffield: SAP, 1996). Malina, B. J., On the Genre and Message of Revelation: Star Visions and Sky Journeys (Peabody: Hendrickson, 1995). Thompson, L. L., The Book of Revelation: Apocalypse and Empire (New York: OUP, 1990).  NT638 Other Writings (Greek Text) Status Elective

MDiv Unit Outlines

Pre-requisites LA004A, LA004B Pre/co-requisites NT502 Exclusions No material may be chosen in this unit that duplicates material in units NT621/631, NT622/632, NT626/636 or NT627/637. Learning Outcomes To enable candidates to study further the theology and major issues of two substantial blocks of New Testament material Content 1 The major issues in contemporary study and the central themes of any two of— (a) Acts (b) 1 and/or 2 Corinthians (c) Galatians (d) Ephesians, Philippians, Colossians, Philemon (e) 1 and 2 Thessalonians (f) Pastoral Epistles (g) Hebrews (h) 1 Peter (i) Revelation 2

Translation and exegesis of 7–8 chapters of the Greek text of two of the following: (a) Acts 1–3, 17 (b) 1 Corinthians 12–15 (c) 2 Corinthians 1–3 (d) Galatians 1–3 (e) Ephesians 1–3 (f) 1 Thessalonians 1–4 (g) 2 Timothy or Titus (h) Hebrews 1–4 (i) 1 Peter 1–3 (j) Revelation 1–3, 20

Bibliography Acts Barrett, C. K., Acts (2 Vols; New York: T & T Clark, 2004). Dunn, J. D. G., The Acts of the Apostles (London: Epworth, 1996). Fitzmyer, J. A., The Acts of the Apostles (New York: Doubleday, 1998). Gaventa, B., Acts (Nashville: Abingdon, 2003). 1 and 2 Corinthians Barnett, P. W., The Second Epistle to the Corinthians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1997). Collins, R. F., First Corinthians (Collegville, MN: Liturgical, 1999). Dunn, J. D. G., 1 Corinthians (Sheffield: Continuum, 2003). Garland, D,. 1 Corinthians (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2003).

103

Harris, M., The Second Epistle to the Corinthians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2005). Horsley, R. A., 1 Corinthians (Nashville: Abingdon, 1998). Thiselton, A. C., The First Epistle to the Corinthians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2001). Witherington, B., Conflict and Community in Corinth: A Socio–Rhetorical Commentary on 1 and 2 Corinthians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1994). Galatians Fung, R. K. Y., Galatians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1988). Longenecker, R. N., Galatians (Waco: Word, 1990). Martyn, J. L., Galatians (New York: Doubleday, 1997). Witherington, B., Grace in Galatia: A Commentary on Paul’s Letter to the Galatians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1998). Ephesians, Philippians, Colossians, Philemon Dunn, J. D. G., The Epistles to the Colossians and Philemon (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1996). Fee, G. D., Paul’s Letter to the Philippians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1995). O’Brien, P. T., The Letter to the Ephesians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1999). O’Brien, P. T., The Epistle to the Philippians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1991). 1 and 2 Thessalonians Green, G. L., The Letters to the Thessalonians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2002). Wanamaker, C. A., The Epistles to the Thessalonians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1990). Witherington, B., 1 and 2 Thessalonians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2006). The Pastoral Epistles Bassler, J. M., 1 Timothy, 2 Timothy, Titus (Nashville: Abingdon, 1996). Johnson, L. T., The First and Second Letters to Timothy (New York: Doubleday, 2001). Marshall, I. H., The Pastoral Epistles (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1999). Mounce, W. D., The Pastoral Epistles (Waco: Word, 2000). Towner, P. H., The Letters to Timothy and Titus (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2006). Young, F., The Theology of the Pastoral Letters (Cambridge: CUP, 1994). Hebrews Bruce, F. F., Hebrews (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1994). de Silva, D. A., Perseverance in Gratitude (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Ellingworth, P., The Epistle to the Hebrews (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1993). Hagner, D. A., Encountering the Book of Hebrews (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2002). Hughes, G., Hebrews and Hermeneutics (Cambridge: CUP, 2004).

MDiv Unit Outlines

104

Koester, C., The Epistle to the Hebrews (New York: Doubleday, 2001). Lane, W. L., Hebrews (2 Vols; Dallas, TX: Word, 1991). Pfitzner, V. C., Hebrews (Nashville: Abingdon, 1997). 1 Peter Achtemeier, P. J., 1 Peter (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1996). Best, E., 1 Peter (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1996). Boring, M. E., 1 Peter (Nashville: Abingdon, 1999). Elliott, J. H., 1 Peter (New York: Doubleday, 2001). McKnight, S., 1 Peter (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1996). Revelation Aune, D. E., Revelation (3 Vols; Dallas, TX: Word, 1997–1999). Barr, D. L., Tales of the End: A Narrative Commentary on the Book of Revelation (Santa Rosa, CA: Polebridge, 1998). Bauckham, R., The Climax of Prophecy (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1998). Beale, G. K., Revelation (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1998). Court, J. M., The Book of Revelation and the Johannine Apocalyptic Tradition (Sheffield: SAP, 2000). Harrington, W. J., Revelation (Collegeville, MN: Michael Glazier, 1993). Osborne, G. R., Revelation (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2002). Witherington, B., Revelation (Cambridge; New York: CUP, 2003).  NT639 Romans (Greek Text) Status Elective Pre-requisites LA004A, LA004B Pre/co-requisites NT502 Exclusions NT625/635. Learning Outcomes To enable candidates to study the theology of the Apostle Paul as it is reflected in this epistle. To gain an understanding of the purpose, literary shape, rhetorical form and argument of Paul’s letter to the Romans. (a) To enable candidates to exegete and consider the range of interpretive options in key sections of the text of Romans. (b) To develop in candidates the skills of appropriate exegetical methodology, employing the various interpretative methods of biblical criticism.

(c) To assist candidates to reflect upon the distinctive character, styles, themes and interrelationship of Romans. (d) To help candidates think through the implications of their studies for New Testament exposition in ministry. Content 1 Introductory issues: (a) the themes and purpose(s) of Romans in the context of the Pauline mission; (b) the major issues in contemporary study of the book of Romans; and (c) the bearing of contemporary approaches to Pauline theology on the interpretation of Romans. 2 Translation and exegesis of the Greek text of Romans 1-8 (or equivalent passages). Bibliography General studies Chae, D. J–S., Paul as Apostle to the Gentiles: His Apostolic Self–Awareness and its Influence on the Soteriological Argument of Romans (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1997). Esler, P. F., Conflict and Identity in Romans (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2003). Gathercole, S. J., Where is Boasting? (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2002). Miller, J. C., The Obedience of Faith, the Eschatological People of God, and the Purpose of Romans (Atlanta, GA: Society of Biblical Literature, 2000). Oakes, P. (ed.), Rome in The Bible and The Early Church (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2002). Soderlund, S. K. and N. T. Wright (eds), Romans and the People of God (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1999). Commentaries Bray, G. (ed.) Romans (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1998). Byrne, B., Romans (Sacra Pagina; Collegeville, MN: Liturgical, 1996). Moo, D. J., Romans (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1996). Stuhlmacher, P., Romans (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1994). Talbert, C. H., Romans (Macon, GA: Smith & Helwys, 2002). Witherington, B., Paul's Letter to the Romans: A Socio-Rhetorical Commentary (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Classics: Boers, H., The Justification of the Gentiles (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1994). Donfried, K. P. (ed.), The Romans Debate (Rev. Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1991). Wedderburn, A. J. M., The Reasons for Romans (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1991). 

MDiv Unit Outlines

NT645 The Bible in Context Status Elective Learning outcomes (a) To enable candidates to spend a significant period of time in one or more of the lands associated with biblical history. (b) To assist candidates to gain an appreciation of the geographical and topographical factors and perspectives in the understanding of the biblical narratives. (c) To help candidates appreciate the impact of archaeological findings on the understanding of the biblical narratives. Content This unit is available to candidates who spend a period of time in one or more of the lands associated with the biblical documents. The criteria for eligibility for credit for the unit shall be: 1 A minimum of 80 hours work, including lectures, field trips and/or an archaeological dig, in an integrated programme conducted by a person or teaching body endorsed by the candidate’s approved institution. 2 Assessment should include a substantial project (including captioned diagrams and/or photographs) relating a significant section of the biblical documents to the land(s) visited by the candidate. 3 The project could include a daily journal as part of the documentary evidence for it.

105

proposed unit outline along with assessment plans to the moderator for New Testament. The unit is taught, conducted as a seminar involving class discussion as well as lectures and individual reading. The unit is not an individual research topic. It is strongly recommended that the unit include set reading of approximately 15 chapters of Greek or 25 chapters of English New Testament texts. 1 2 3

4

The total amount of work expected is that equivalent to an essay of approximately 6,000 words; Candidates must demonstrate a thorough grasp of the New Testament issues involved; Assessment should be designed to encourage exploration of the personal and pastoral implications of New Testament perspectives discerned in candidates’ learning; Units approved for the Master of Arts (Theology) may be used as the basis for this unit, adjusted appropriately to reflect major level undergraduate study for candidates enrolled in the undergraduate degrees.

Bibliography The texts and readings will be as necessary for the particular topic set. 

DEPARTMENT

OF

CHRISTIAN THOUGHT

THEOLOGY (TH) Bibliography None  NT689 New Testament Seminar Status Elective Pre-requisites NT501 and NT502, plus any other unit deemed necessary for the given seminar Learning Outcomes (a) To provide candidates with the opportunity to study in depth biblical texts in Greek or English not covered in the candidates’ course; (b) To give candidates the opportunity to develop cooperative research skills; (c) To assist candidates in the application of New Testament insights to personal and pastoral needs. Content The choice of the topic or theme to be studied is left to approved institutions but they must have staff and library support sufficient to sustain the unit. The course coordinator is responsible for submitting for approval a

In all Theology units, in addition to the primary biblical documents, candidates will be expected to be familiar with the relevant sections of the three Creeds and of confessional documents such as the 39 Articles and the Westminster Confession. Learning Outcomes These units, taken as a whole, are designed to (a) Assist candidates in gaining an integrated Christian theological perspective and methodology; (b) Introduce candidates to the main areas of theological study, so as to provide a solid foundation for further theological exploration and reflection; (c) Help candidates reflect on the various aspects of Christian faith, thus gaining insights on the great questions of life; (d) Deepen candidates’ understanding of what relationship with God entails and implies. General Recommended Readings: Primary Texts Leith, J. (ed.), Creeds of the Churches (3rd ed.; Atlanta: John Knox, 1982). Pelikan, J. (ed.), Creeds & Confessions of Faith in the Christian Tradition (New Haven: Yale University, 2003).

106

MDiv Unit Outlines

Orientations to Systematic Theology Ford, D. F., Theology: A Very Short Introduction (Oxford: OUP, 1999). Grenz, S. and R. E. Olson, Who Needs Theology? (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1996). Hill, C., Making Sense of Faith: An Introduction to Theology (Sydney: EJ Dwyer, 1995). McGrath, A. E., Understanding Doctrine (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1990). Muller, R., The Study of Theology (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1991). General texts Barth, K., Church Dogmatics (Vols I–IV; New York: Harper, 1956–1970). Bloesch, D., Essentials of Evangelical Theology (Rev. ed.; Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 2006). English, D. and G. Fackre (eds), An Introduction to the Christian Faith (Oxford: Lion, 1992). Erickson, M., Christian Theology (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Baker, 1998). Ford, D. F., Modern Theologians: An Introduction to Christian Theology Since 1918 (3rd ed.; Cambridge, MA: Blackwell, 1997). Grenz, S., Theology for the Community of God (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Guthrie, S. C., Christian Doctrine (Rev ed.; Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1994). Hodgson P. and R. King, Christian Theology: An Introduction to its Traditions and Tasks (Rev. ed.; Minneapolis: Fortress, 1994). Livingston, J. C. and F. S. Fiorenza (eds), Modern Christian Thought (2 Vols, Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 2000). McGrath, A. E., Christian Theology: An Introduction (3rd ed.; Oxford; Malden, MA: Blackwell, 2001). McGrath, A. E., Historical Theology: An Introduction to the History of Christian Thought (Oxford; Malden, MA: Blackwell, 1998). Migliore, D., Faith Seeking Understanding (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1992). Olson, R. E., The Story of Christian Theology: Twenty Centuries of Tradition and Reform (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1999). Placher, W. C. (ed.), Essentials of Christian theology (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2003). Reymond, R., A New Systematic Theology of the Christian Faith (Nashville: Thomas Nelson, 1998). The Person and Work of the Holy Spirit Badcock, G., Light of Truth and Fire of Love (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1997). Bloesch, D., The Holy Spirit: Works & Gifts (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2000). Ferguson, S., The Holy Spirit (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1996). Kärkkäinen, V.-M., Pneumatology: The Holy Spirit in Ecumenical, International, and Contextual Perspective (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2002). Keener, C., Gift and Giver: The Holy Spirit for Today (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2001).

Moltmann, J., The Spirit of Life: A Universal Affirmation (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1992). McIntyre, J., The Shape of Pneumatology: Studies in the Doctrine of the Holy Spirit (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1997). Pinnock, C., Flame of Love: A Theology of the Holy Spirit (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1996). Smail, T., A. Walker and N. Wright, Charismatic Renewal: the Search for a Theology (London: SPCK, 1995). Suurmond, J.-J., Word and Spirit at Play: Towards a Charismatic Theology (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1995). Welker, M., God the Spirit (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1994).  TH504 Introduction to Systematic Theology Status Elective Learning Outcomes The purpose of this unit is to introduce students to the study of Systematic Theology At the end of the unit students should be: (a) able to critically assess the role and method of Systematic Theology and its relation to other disciplines; (b) able to make a critical assessment of different theological traditions and their distinctive approaches to systematic theological reflection; (c) able to present and defend their own theological reflections in one topic area of theology and defend the theological method which they have used; (d) motivated to continue to use Systematic Theology as part of their own Christian thinking in both formal and informal study. Content 1 What is Systematic Theology? A critical assessment of various descriptions of Systematic Theology. 2 The theological foundations of Systematic Theology- redemptive revelation including Scripture and the work of the Spirit, Doctrine of God, Christology, Anthropology, Ecclesiology. 3 Role of Systematic Theology in the church and the academy and the place of formal and lay theology. 4 An examination of case studies and student exercises in theological reflection dealing with the following areas • the relation of Systematic theology and scripture and the role of exegesis and Biblical theology in Systematic Theology; • the role of Christian tradition, historical theology, and creeds and confessions in Systematic Theology; • the relation of loci within Systematic Theology;

MDiv Unit Outlines •

5

6

7

the role of reason and philosophy in Systematic Theology; • the relationship of Systematic Theology to non-theological disciplines (e.g. science, anthropology, psychology, religious studies); • contextualisation; • the relation of practical theology, ethics, evangelism and Public Theology to Systematic Theology. A survey of at least three (3) different theological traditions: • Roman Catholicism • Orthodoxy • Lutheran • Reformed • Anglican • Anabaptist • Free Church • Wesleyan • Evangelical • Pentecostal • Non-western theology The study of a topic or topics in Systematic Theology nominated by the college with explicit reference to theological method and in interaction with the theological traditions which have been examined. An introduction to at least two recent developments in Systematic Theology such as: • Feminist theology • Post-liberal theology • Post-metaphysical theology • Liberation theology • Process theology • Radical Orthodoxy • Eco-theology • Open theism • Emerging church

Bibliography Prescribed: Clark, D. K., To Know and Love God: Method for Theology. (Wheaton: Crossway Books, 2003). Stackhouse, J. Jr., (ed.), Evangelical Futures: A Conversation on Theological Method (Grand Rapids, Baker, 2000). Webster, J. “Introduction: Systematic Theology” pp 1-15 in J. Webster, K. Tanner, I. Torrance (eds), The Oxford handbook of Systematic Theology (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2007). Recommended: Ford, D. F. (ed.), The Modern Theologians : An Introduction to Christian Theology in the Twentieth Century. 2 Volumes (Oxford : Basil Blackwell, 1989). Frame, J. M., Salvation Belongs to the Lord: An Introduction to Systematic Theology (Phillipsburg: P&R Publishing, 2006).

107

Franke, J. R., The Character of Theology: An Introduction to its Nature, Task, and Purpose (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, 2005). Gunton, C. (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to Christian Doctrine. (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1997). Healy, N. M., “What is Systematic Theology?” International Journal of Systematic Theology 11/ 1, ( January 2009), 24-39 Larsen. T. and D. J. Treier, The Cambridge Companion to Evangelical Theology (Cambridge : Cambridge University Press, 2007). McGowan A. T. B. (ed), Always Reforming: Explorations in Systematic Theology (Leicester : Apollos, 2006). McGrath, A. E., Christian Theology: An Introduction. (Oxford: Blackwell Publishing, 2001). Migliore, D., Faith Seeking Understanding: An Introduction to Christian Theology. 2nd ed. (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Olson, R. E., Reformed and Always Reforming: the Postconservative Approach to Evangelical Theology (Grand Rapids, MI: Baker Academic, 2007). Olson, R. E., Mosaic of Christian Beliefs. (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2002). Schwarz, H., Theology in a Global Context The Last Two Hundred Years (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans 2005). Stone, H. W. and J. O. Duke, How to Think Theologically. (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1996). Vanhoozer, K. J., The Cambridge Companion to Postmodern Theology (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003). Vanhoozer, K. J., The Drama of Doctrine: A Canonical-Linguistic Approach to Christian Theology (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2005). Warrington, K., Pentecostal Theology: A Theology of Encounter (London : T&T Clark, 2008). Classics: Barth, K., Evangelical Theology: An Introduction G. Foley (trans). (London : Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1968). Bavinck, H., Reformed Dogmatics. Volume 1. Prolegomena J. Bolt (ed.), J. Vriend, (trans) (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, 2003). Calvin, J., Institutes of the Christian Religion, 2 vols. trans. F. Battles (trans) J. McNeill (ed.), (Philadelphia: Westminster, 1960). Catechism of the Catholic Church (San Francisco: Ignatius Press, Rev. ed. 2000). Dulles, A., The Craft of Theology: From Symbol to System, (Crossroad, 1995). Frei, H. W., The Eclipse of Biblical Narrative: A Study in Eighteenth and Nineteenth Century Hermeneutics (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1974). Frei, H. W., Types of Christian Theology G. Hunsinger and W. C Placher (eds) (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1992).

MDiv Unit Outlines

108

Kolb, R. and T. J. Wengert (eds), The Book of Concord: The Confessions of the Evangelical Lutheran Church Translated by C. Arand et al (trans) (Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 2000). Kung, H., Theology for the Third Millenium: An Ecumenical View (Anchor, 1990). Langford, T. A., (ed) Wesleyan Theology: A Sourcebook (Durham,: Labyrinth Press, 1984). McGrath, A. E., Genesis of Doctrine: A Study in the Foundation of Doctrinal Criticism (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1997). Nichols, A., The Shape of Catholic Theology: An Introduction to Its Sources, Principles and History, (Liturgical Press, 1991). Pannenberg, W., An Introduction to Systematic Theology (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1991). Richard, L., The Fabric of Theology. A Prolegomenon to Evangelical Theology, (Eerdmans, 1993). Schleiermacher, F., The Christian Faith H.R. Mackintosh and J.S. Stewart (eds) (Edinburgh : T.&T. Clark, 1960). The Westminster Confession of Faith and Larger and Shorter Catechisms (Glasgow, Free Presbyterian Publications, 1981). Woodridge J. and T. E McComiskey (eds), Doing Theology in Today's World, (Zondervan, 1991). Young, P. D., Feminist Theology /Christian Theology: In Search of a Method, (Fortress, 1990).  TH505 Foundational Christian Beliefs Status Elective Exclusions TH401–404 or TH601–604. This unit can only be taken by Grad Dip Div or Grad Dip Chr St students.

6 7 8

The doctrine of the Holy Spirit The doctrine of the Church Eschatology

Bibliography Prescribed: Barth, K., Dogmatics in Outline (London: SCM, 2001). Erickson, M. J., Christian Theology (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2nd ed. 2003). Frame, J., Salvation Belongs to the Lord: An Introduction to Systematic Theology (Phillipsburg NJ: P&R, 2006). Grudem, W., Systematic Theology, (Downers Grove IL: IVP, 2007). Gunton, C. E., The Christian Faith (Oxford; Malden, MA: Blackwell, 2002). Jinkins, M., Invitation to Theology (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2001). McGrath, A., Christian Theology: An Introduction (London: Wiley-Blackwell 3rd ed. 2006). Migliore, D., Faith with Understanding, (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2nd ed. 2004). Milne, B., Know the Truth, (Downers Grove IL: IVP, 2nd ed. 1998). Oden, T. C., Classic Christianity: A Systematic Theology, (New York: Harper Collins, 2009). Recommended: Bloesch, D. G., Christian Foundations series, vol.1-7 (Downers Grove IL: IVP, 1994-2005). Bray, G., Creeds, Councils and Christ (Fearn: Mentor, 1997). Seitz, C. R. (ed.), Nicene Christianity: The Future for a New Ecumenism (Grand Rapids: Baker-Brazos, 2002).  TH601 The Knowledge of God

Learning Outcomes The purpose of the course is to give an overview of the central doctrines of Christian faith following the outline given in the Creeds. It is designed to provide a single semester outline of theology for candidates for the Graduate Diploma of Divinity. On completion of this unit, a student will be able to: (a) Name and outline the content of the major theological loci as set out in the Creeds; (b) Describe why it is useful to be able to describe beliefs; and (c) Locate their own beliefs in the wider spread of Christian understandings. Content 1 Why beliefs matter, and why the Creeds were created 2 The doctrine of God the Father 3 The doctrine of God the Creator 4 The doctrine of God the Son 5 The doctrine of Jesus the Saviour

Status Elective Pre/co-requisites 8cps of foundational OT and/or NT study, plus 4cps of CH or TH Learning Outcomes (a) Assist candidates in gaining an integrated Christian theological perspective and methodology; (b) Introduce candidates to the main areas of theological study, so as to provide a solid foundation for further theological exploration and reflection; (c) Help candidates reflect on the various aspects of Christian faith, thus gaining insights on the great questions of life; (d) Deepen students’ understanding of what relationship with God entails and implies. (e) Apply the above to the loci of human knowledge of God and God’s relationship with the world.

MDiv Unit Outlines

On completion of this unit, a student will be able to: 1. Identify and describe the content of the major theological loci; 2. Explain the interaction and interdependence between at least some of these loci; 3. Demonstrate how different approaches to describing knowledge of God affect how Christian life is lived; 4. Demonstrate how knowledge of God and knowledge about God’s world are interrelated; and 5 Identify and illustrate how this knowledge is appropriated in their own life and the life of their community. Content Foundation 1. The main loci of theological knowledge and their interaction 2. Connections between the content of theology and the practice of faith Section A : The Knowledge of God 1 The concepts of revelation and inspiration; 2 The place and nature of Scripture and natural theology 3 The issues raised by reason, authority and experience. Section B : God and the World 1 Creation and providence 2 Humanity as created 3 Sin and evil Bibliography In all Theology units, in addition to the primary biblical documents, candidates will be expected to be familiar with the relevant sections of the three Creeds and of confessional documents such as the 39 Articles and the Westminster Confession. Prescribed: student should become familiar with the relevant sections of one of the following: Erickson, M. J., Christian Theology (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2nd ed. 2003). Frame, J., Salvation Belongs to the Lord: An Introduction to Systematic Theology (Phillipsburg NJ: P&R, 2006). Grenz, S. J., Theology for the Community of God (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Grudem, W., Systematic Theology (Downers Grove IL: IVP, 2007). Kärkkäinen, V.-M., The Doctrine of God: A Global Introduction. (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2004). McGrath, A., Christian Theology: An Introduction (London: Wiley-Blackwell 3rd ed. 2006). Migliore, D., Faith with Understanding (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2nd ed. 2004).

109

Recommended: The Knowledge of God Achtemeier, P., Inspiration and Authority: Nature and Function of Christian Scripture (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1999). Adam, P., Written for Us (Leicester UK: IVP, 2008). Bloesch, D., A Theology of Word and Spiri: Authority & Method in Theology (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2005). Gunton, C. G., A Brief Theology of Revelation (London/New York: Continuum: T. & T. Clark 2005). Harris, G. E., “Revelation in Christian Theology”, The Churchman 120/1 (2006) 11-34. Jensen, P., The Revelation of God, Contours of Christian Theology (Downers Grove IL: IVP, 2002). Niebuhr, H. R., The Meaning of Revelation (Louisville: Westminster John Knox Press, 2006, Library of Theological Ethics reprint edition of MacMillan Coy 1941). Packer, J. I., Honouring the Written Word of God (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1999). Sherman, S. S., Revitalizing Holistic Theological Epistemology: Evangelical Approaches to the Knowledge of God, Princeton Theological Monographs, (Princeton: Pickwick Publications, 2008). Vanhoozer, K. J., First Theology: God, Scripture & Hermeneutics, (Downers Grove IL: IVP, 2002). God and the World Blocher, H., Original Sin: Illuminating the Riddle (Downers Grove IL: 2000). Davies, O., The Creativity of God: World, Eucharist, Reason (Cambridge/New York: CUP, 2004). Feinberg, J. S., Many Faces of Evil (Wheaton: Crossway, 2004). Kärkkäinen, V.-M., The Doctrine of God: A Global Introduction. (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2004). Kaufman, G. D., In the Beginning—Creativity (Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 2004). Keller, J. A., Problems of Evil and the Power of God (Burlington VT: Ashgate, 2007). McFadyen, A., Bound to Sin: Abuse, Holocaust, and the Christian Doctrine of Sin (New York: CUP, 2000). Pannenberg, W., Anthropology in Theological Perspective, (London/New York: T & T Clark 2004). Pinnock, C. H., Most Moved Mover: A Theology of God’s Openness (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, 2001). Piper, J., and J. Taylor, Suffering and the Sovereignty of God, (Wheaton: Crossway, 2006). Weinandy, T. G., Does God Suffer? (Edinburgh: T & T. Clark, 2000). Wright, N. T., Evil and the Justice of God, (London: SPCK/ Downers Grove IL:IVP, 2006). Classic: Dulles, A., Models of Revelation (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1992).

110

MDiv Unit Outlines

TH602 The Doctrine of God and the Work of Christ Status Elective Pre/co-requisites 8cps of foundational OT and/or NT study, plus 4cps of CH or TH Learning Outcomes (a) Assist candidates in gaining a grounding in the triune nature of God; (b) Introduce candidates to the characteristics of each of the three “persons” and their work; (c) Help students develop an integrated understanding of the work of Christ; and (d) Deepen candidates’ understanding of what the work of Christ means for them. On completion of this unit, a student will be able to: 1. Describe the major characteristics of God in Christian thought; 2. Outline the historical development of trinitarian thought; 3. Describe the major characteristics of the person and work of Father and the Holy Spirit; 4. Describe the major issues of the person and aspects of the work of Christ and show how these undergird Christian ministry; 5. Compare and critique the various theological interpretations of the work of Christ with reference to their own context; and 6. Identify how their own life demonstrates their understanding of the work of Christ. Content Section A : The Christian Doctrine of God 1 The being and attributes of God; 2 The Person of Christ, his humanity and deity; 3 The Holy Spirit; 4 The Holy Trinity; Section B : The Work of Christ 1 His incarnation and ministry; 2 The death and resurrection of Jesus; 3 His ascension and session. Bibliography In all Theology units, in addition to the primary biblical documents, candidates will be expected to be familiar with the relevant sections of the three Creeds and of confessional documents such as the 39 Articles and the Westminster Confession. Prescribed: student should become familiar with the relevant sections of one of the following: Erickson, M. J., Christian Theology (Grand Rapids: Baker,2nd ed. 2003). Frame, J., Salvation Belongs to the Lord: An Introduction to Systematic Theology (Phillipsburg NJ: P&R, 2006). Grenz, S. J., Theology for the Community of God (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000).

Grudem, W., Systematic Theology (Downers Grove IL: IVP, 2007). Kärkkäinen, V-M., The Doctrine of God: A Global Introduction. (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2004). McGrath, A., Christian Theology: An Introduction (London: Wiley-Blackwell 3rd ed. 2006). Migliore, D., Faith with Understanding (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2nd ed. 2004). Oden, T. C., Classic Christianity: A Systematic Theology (New York: Harper Collins, 2009). Recommended: The Doctrine of God Bloesch, D., God the Almighty (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2005). Erickson. M. J., God the Father Almighty (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, 2006). Cole, G., He Who Gives Life: The Doctrine of the Holy Spirit (Wheaton: Crossway, 2007). Crisp, O., Divinity and Humanity: The Incarnation Reconsidered (Cambridge: CUP 2007). George, T., God the Holy Trinity (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, 2006). Grenz, S. J., Rediscovering the Triune God: the Trinity in Contemporary Theology (Minneapolis: Augsburg Fortress Press, 2004). Gunton, C. E., Act and Being: Towards a Theology of the Divine Attributes (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2003). Gunton, C. E., Father, Son and Holy Spirit: Toward a Fully Trinitarian Theology (London/New York: T. and T. Clark, 2003). Johnston, E. A., She Who Is (New York: Crossroad,2002). Kärkkäinen, V.-M., Christology. A Global Introduction (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2003). Letham, R., The Holy Trinity: In Scripture, History, Theology, and Worship (Phillipsburg NJ: P & R, 2004). Torrance, T. F., The Christian Doctrine of God: One Being, Three Persons (Edinburgh/New York: T & T Clark,1996, Paperback ed. 2001). The Work of Christ Bloesch, D., Jesus Christ: Savior and Lord (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2005). Boersma, H., Violence, Hospitality and the Cross: Reappropriating the Atonement Tradition (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, 2004). Ford, D. F. and M. Higton (eds), Jesus (Oxford; New York: OUP, 2002). Gunton, C. (ed), The Theology of Reconciliation: Essays in Biblical and Systematic Theology (London/New York: T. & T. Clark, 2003). Hill, C. E. and F. A. James (eds.), The Glory of the Atonement: Biblical, Theological and Practical Perspectives (Downers Grove: IVP, 2004). Holmes, S., The Wondrous Cross (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2007). Marshall, I. H., Aspects of the Atonement: Cross and Resurrection in the Reconciliation of Humanity (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2008).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Mattes, M. C., The Role of Justification in Contemporary Theology (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Peterson, D. (ed.), Where Wrath and Mercy Meet (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2001). Sherman, R. J., King, Priest and Prophet :A Trinitarian Theology of Atonement (Edinburgh: T.& T. Clark , 2004). Stott, J., The Cross of Christ (Leicester UK/Downers Grove IL: IVP, 20th Anniversary edition, 2007).

1.

2.

3.

4. Classics: Aulen, G., A G Herbert (trans), Christus Victor: A Historical Study of the Three Main Types of the Idea of the Atonement (London: SPCK 1965 reprint of 1931 ed.). Brunner, E., (trans. Olive Wyon), Mediator: A Study of the Central Doctrine of the Christian Faith (Philadelphia: The Westminster Press, 1947 (1st ed. (1927). Moltmann, J., The Crucified God (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1993). Moltmann, J., The Trinity and the Kingdom of God (London: SCM, 1981). Morris, L., The Apostolic Preaching of the Cross (London: Tyndale, 1960). Morris, L., The Lord From Heaven (Rev. ed.; London:IVP, 1995). Owen, J., “The Death of Death in the Death of Christ”, in W. H. Goold (ed), The Works of John Owen (London/ Edinburgh: Johnstone and Hunter,1852 Vol X, III, VI, 2 61-264). Schillebeeckx, E., Jesus (New York: Crossroad, 1990). Wand, J. W. C., The Atonement (London: SPCK, 1963). Wright, N. T., Jesus and the Victory of God (London: SPCK, 1996).  TH603 The Doctrines of Grace and Eschatology Status Elective Pre/co-requisites 8cps of foundational OT and/or NT study, plus 4cps of CH or TH Learning Outcomes (a) Assist candidates in gaining a grounding in the outworking of the grace of the triune God and the implications of this for Christian hope; (b) Introduce candidates to the implications of the work of grace in human life and particularly to the work and ministry of the Holy Spirit; (c) Help students appreciate the nature of the Kingdom of God and Christian eschatology; and (d) Deepen candidates’ understanding of what the work of the Spirit means for them. On completion of this unit, a student will be able to:

5.

111

Define the major historical understandings of the Gospel of God, Kingdom of God and the return of Christ; Describe the place of repentance, faith, forgiveness, justification, election and grace in the economy of God and the life of Christians; Describe the major understandings of the work of the Spirit, especially in regeneration, sanctification and fellowship; Compare and critique the various historical and theological interpretations of the Kingdom of God, future and present judgement, and the final consummation of all things in Christ; and Identify how their own life demonstrates the grace of God and points to future hope.

Content Section A : The Doctrine of Grace 1 The Gospel of God; 2 Repentance, faith, forgiveness, justification, election and grace; 3 The work of the Spirit: regeneration, sanctification and fellowship; Section B : Eschatology 1 The kingdom present and future; 2 Judgement present and future; 3 Consummation of all things in Christ; 4 Death, intermediate state, resurrection; 5 Heaven and hell. Bibliography Suitable textbooks include: Erickson, M. J., Christian Theology (Grand Rapids, MI: Baker, 1992). Grenz, S. J., Theology for the Community of God (Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans, 2000). McGrath, A. E., Christian theology: An Introduction (Oxford: Blackwell, 2002). Reymond, R. L. A New Systematic Theology of the Christian Faith. (Nelson, 1998) Prescribed Reading In addition to the primary biblical documents, candidates will be expected to be familiar with the relevant sections of the three Creeds and of confessional documents such as the 39 Articles and the Westminster Confession. A The Doctrines of Grace Recommended: Basinger, D. (ed.), The Case For Freewill Theism. (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1996). Bird, M. F., The Saving Righteousness of God: sTudies on Paul, Justification and the New Testament. (Eugene: Wipf & Stock, 2007). Bloesch, D. G., The Holy Spirit: Works and Gifts. (Downers Grove, IL. : InterVarsity Press, 2000). Boice, J. M. and P. G. Ryken, The Doctrines of Grace: Rediscovering the Evangelical Gospel. (Wheaton, IL: Crossway, 2002).

112

MDiv Unit Outlines

Boice, J. M., Whatever Happened to the Gospel of Grace? (Wheaton: Crossway, 2001). Carson, D. A. and J. D. Woodbridge (eds), Hermeneutics, Authority and Canon. (Leicester: IVP, 1986. Carson, D. A. and J. D. Woodbridge (eds), Scripture and Truth (Leicester: IVP, 1983). Cole, G. A., He Who Gives Life: The Doctrine of the Holy Spirit. (Wheaton: Crossway, 2007). Eveson, P., Justification By Faith Alone. (Leominster, UK: Day One, 1998). Frame, J., Evangelical Reunion. (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1991). Ferguson, S., The Holy Spirit. (Leicester: IVP, 1996). Horton, M., Four Views on Eternal Security. (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2002). Jensen, P., At the Heart of the Universe. (Wheaton, IL: Crossway, 1997). Kruse, C. G., Paul, the Law and Justification. (Leicester: Apollos, 1996). Lane, A. N. S., Justification by Faith in CatholicProtestant Dialogue: An Evangelical Assessment. (Edinburgh: T&T Clark, 2002). McCormack, B. (ed.), Justification in Perspective. (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2006). Oden, T., The Justification Reader. (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2002). Peterson, D., Possessed by God: A New Testament Theology of Sanctification and Holiness. New Studies in Biblical Theology. (Leicester: Apollos, 1995). Pinnock, C. H. (ed.), Grace Unlimited. (Eugene: Wipf & Stock, 1999). Pinnock, C. H. (ed.), The Grace of God, the Will of Man. (Grand Rapids: Academie, 1989). Piper, J., Counted Righteous in Christ: Should We Abandon the Imputation of Christ’s Righteousness? (Leicester: IVP, 2003). Piper, J., The Future of Justification: A Response to N.T. Wright. (Wheaton, IL : Crossway Books, 2007). Schreiner, T. R. and Ware, B. A. (eds.). Still Sovereign: Contemporary Perspectives on Election. Foreknowledge and Grace (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2000). Seifrid, M., Christ our Righteousness: Paul’s Theology of Justification. (Leicester: Apollos, 2000). Smith, R., “Justification in ‘the New Perspective on Paul.’” Reformed Theological Review 58 (1999): 16-30. Smith, R., “A Critique of the ‘New Perspective’ on Justification.” Reformed Theological Review 58 (1999): 98-113. Smith, R., Justification and Eschatology: A Dialogue with ‘The New Perspective on Paul’. Reformed Theological Supplement Series 1. May 2001). Sproul, R. C., Justification by Faith Alone. (Orlando: Ligonier Ministries, 1998). Treier, M., Justification: What’s at Stake in the Current Debates. (Downers Grove: IVP, 2004).

‘What’s the Good News? Nine Evangelical Leaders Define the Gospel’. Christianity Today 44/2 (2000): 46-51 Classics: Augustine, “The Spirit and the Letter” Augustine: Later Works. L.C.C. (ed John Burnaby; Philadelphia: Westminster, 1955.) Barth, K., Chapter VII “The Election of God” Church Dogmatics. II.2; (trans G.W. Bromiley et al; Edinburgh: T&T Clark, 1957). Calvin, J., Volume 3 “The way in which we receive the grace of Christ: what benefits come to us from it and what effects follow” Institutes of the Christian Religion. (Edited by John T McNeill. 2 vols, Library of Christian Classics. Philadelphia: Westminster Pr, 1960). Edwards, J., ‘Treatise on Grace’. Pages 149-197 in Writings on the Trinity, Grace and Faith. (Ed Sang Hyun Lee. New Haven: Yale University Press, 2003). Erasmus, D., “On the Freedom of the Will” Luther and Erasmus: Free Will and Salvation. L.C.C. (Eds E. Gordon Rupp & Philip S. Watson; Philadelphia: Westminster, 1969). Luther, M., “On the Bondage of the Will” Luther and Erasmus: Free Will and Salvation. L.C.C. (eds E. Gordon Rupp and P. S. Watson; Philadelphia: Westminster, 1969). Luther, M., “The Two Kinds of Righteousness” Martin Luther: Selections from His Writings. (Ed John Dillenberger; New York: Doubleday, 1961). Pink, A. W., The Sovereignty of God. (Edinburgh: Banner of Truth, 1928, 1959). Hoekema, A. A., Saved by Grace. (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1989). B. Eschatology Recommended: Bauckham, R. (ed.), God Will be All in All: The Eschatology of Jürgen Moltmann. (Edinburgh: T&T Clark, 1999). Bauckham R. and T. Hart, Hope Against Hope. (London: Darton, Longman and Todd, 1997). Beasley-Murray, P., The Message of the Resurrection: Christ Is Risen! The Bible Speaks Today: Bible Themes Series. (Leicester: IVP, 2000). Bloesch, D. G., Essentials of Evangelical Theology, Volume 2: Life, Ministry, & Hope. (London: Harper & Row, 1978). Bloesch, D. G., The Last Things: Resurrection, Judgment, Glory. (Downers Grove: IVP, 2004). Cameron, N. M. de S. (ed.) Universalism and the Doctrine of Hell: Papers Presented at the Fourth Edinburgh Conference in Christian Dogmatics, 1991. (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1992). Carson, D. A., ‘On Banishing the Lake of Fire’, The Gagging of God, (Leicester: IVP, 1996) pp. 515536. Daley, B. E., The Hope of the Early Church: A Handbook of Patristic Eschatology. (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1991).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Doyle, R. C., Eschatology and the Shape of Christian Belief. (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1999). Dumbrell, W., The Search for Order: Biblical Eschatology in Focus. (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1994). Fudge, E., et. al., Two views of hell. (Downers Grove: IVP, 2000). Johnston, P., Shades of Sheol: Death and Afterlife in the Old Testament. (Leicester: IVP, 2002). Kik, M., The Eschatology of Victory. (Philadelphia: Presbyterian and Reformed, 1971). König, A., The Eclipse of Christ in Eschatology. (Blackwood: New Creation Publications Inc, 1999). Milne, B., The Message of Heaven and Hell: Grace and Destiny. The Bible Speaks Today: Bible Themes Series. (Leicester: IVP, 2002). O'Donovan, O., Resurrection and Moral Order. (Leicester: IVP, 1986). Petterson, A., ‘Antecedents of the Christian Hope of Resurrection’. Reformed Theological Review 59/1 and 59/2 (2000): 1-15, 53-64. Shedd, W. G. T., The Doctrine of Endless Punishment. (Edinburgh: Banner of Truth, 1986). Vos, G., The Pauline eschatology. (Phillipsburg, NJ: Presbyterian & Reformed, 1986). Wright, N. T., Jesus and the Victory of God. (London: SPCK, 1996). Wright, N. T., New Heavens, New Earth. (Cambridge: CUP, 1999). Classics: Aquinas, T., ‘Treatise on the Resurrection’ and ‘Treatise on the Last Things’ Q69-99 Supplement to the Summa Theologica. (Benziger Bros. edition, 1947). Augustine, “The City of God”. Nicene and Post Nicene Fathers of the Christian Church. (Vol II; ed. Philip Schaff; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1979). Barth, K., Commentary on chapter 13, The Epistle to the Romans. (6th ed. London OUP, 1933). Berkouwer, G. C., The Return of Christ. (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1966). Calvin, J., “Chapter IX, Meditation on the Future Life”. Institutes of the Christian Religion. (Edited by John T McNeill. 2 vols, Library of Christian Classics. Philadelphia: Westminster Pr, 1960). Cullmann, O., Salvation in History (New York: Harper and Row, 1967). Dodd, C. H., The Parables of the Kingdom (London: Fontana, 1961). Edwards, J., The History of Redemption: Including a History of the Jews to the Destruction of Jerusalem ([London]: Religious Tract Society, [18--]). Harris, M. J., Raised Immortal: Resurrection and Immortality in the New Testament (Basingstoke: Marshall Morgan & Scott, 1983). Hoekema, A. A., The Bible and the Future (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1979). Ladd, G. E., The Presence of the Future (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1974).

113

Moltmann, J., Theology of Hope: On the Ground and the Implications of a Christian Eschatology (Trans James W. Leitch. London: SCM, 1967). Moltmann, J., The Coming of God: Christian Eschatology (London: SCM, 1996). Moltmann, J., Trinity and the Kingdom of God (London: SCM, 1981). Schweitzer, A., The Quest of the Historical Jesus: A Critical Study of Its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (London: Black, 1926).  TH604 Church, Sacraments and Ministry Status Elective Pre/co-requisites 8cps of foundational OT and/or NT study, plus 4cps of CH or TH Learning Outcomes (a) Assist candidates in gaining an integrated Christian theological perspective and methodology in areas of church life and ministry; (b) Help students to reflect on their own place in God’s work and purposes. On completion of this unit, a student will be able to: 1. Describe and critique the options for connecting and differentiating Church and Kingdom; 2. Describe the major characteristics and contrast the various ways of describing the nature of the church, its ministry and mission ; 3. Identify the place of sacraments and prayer in the life of the Christian people, drawing out implications for the student’s own context; and 4. Reflect on how this knowledge and experience shapes their own Christian life and the life of their community. Section A: The People of God 1 Kingdom and church 2 The church: its nature, authority and mission 3 Marks: notes, visibility and invisibility 4 The nature and forms of ministry 5 Denominations Section B: Prayer, Worship and Sacraments 1 Word and Sacrament: efficacy and validity, the number of sacraments 2 Christian initiation 3 The Lord’s Supper 4 Christian Worship 5 Prayer Bibliography Prescribed Textbook: Students should become familiar with the relevant sections of one of the following:

114

MDiv Unit Outlines

Erickson, M. J., Christian Theology (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2nd ed. 2003). Frame, J., Salvation Belongs to the Lord: An Introduction to Systematic Theology (Phillipsburg NJ: P&R, 2006). Grenz, S. J., Theology for the Community of God (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Grudem, W., Systematic Theology (Downers Grove IL: IVP, 2007). Kärkkäinen, V.-M., The Doctrine of God: A Global Introduction. (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2004). McGrath, A., Christian Theology: An Introduction (London: Wiley-Blackwell 3rd ed. 2006). Migliore, D., Faith with Understanding (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2nd ed. 2004). Oden, T. C., Classic Christianity: A Systematic Theology (New York: Harper Collins, 2009). Recommended: The People of God Avis, P. (ed.), The Christian Church: An Introduction to the Major Traditions (London: SPCK, 2002). Goosen, G., Bringing Churches Together (Geneva: WCC, 2001). Harper, B., and P. L. Metzger, Exploring Ecclesiology: An evangelical and Ecumenical Introduction (Grand Rapids: Brazos/ Baker, 2009). Husbands, M. and D. J. Treier (eds), The Community of the Word: Toward an Evangelical Ecclesiology (Downers Grove IL: IVP, 2005). Kärkkäinen, V.-M., An Introduction to Ecclesiology. Ecumenical, Historical & Global Perspectives (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2003). Kung, H., The Church, (London: Continuum, new ed. 2001). Laniak, T., Shepherds After My Own Heart (Downers Grove IL: IVP, 2006). Longenecker, R. N., Community Formation in the Early Church and in the Church Today (Peabody MA, Hendrickson, 2002). McLaren, B., The Church on the Other Side: Doing Ministry in the Postmodern Matrix (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, rev. ed. 2006). Newbigin, L., The Household of God, Biblica Classics Library (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2002). Snyder, H., The Community of the King, (Downers Grove IL: IVP, 2004). Stackhouse, J. G. (ed.), Evangelical Ecclesiology: Reality or Illusion? (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2003). Wright, C. J. H., The Mission of God: Unlocking the Bible’s Grand Narrative (Downers Grove IL: IVP, 2006). Prayer, Worship and Sacraments Armstrong, J. H. (ed.), Understanding Four Views of Baptism (Grand Rapids: Zondervan: 2007). Bloesch, D. G., The Church: Sacraments, Worship, Ministry, Mission (Downers Grove IL: IVP, 2006). Chan, S., Liturgical Theology: The Church as Worshipping Community (Downers Grove IL: IVP, 2006).

Goldsworthy, G., Prayer and the Knowledge of God (Leicester: IVP, 2004). Kasper, W., Sacrament of Unity: The Eucharist and the Church (New York: Crossroad, 2004). Peterson, D., Engaging with God: A Biblical Theology of Worship (Downers Grove IL: IVP,2002). Vander Zee, L. J., Christ, Baptism, and the Lord’s Supper : Recovering Sacraments for Evangelical Worship (Downers Grove IL: IVP, 2004). Welker, M., What Happens in Holy Communion? (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Classics: ARCIC, The Church as Communion (London: SPCK, 1991). Banks, R., Paul’s Idea of Community (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1994). Beasley-Murray, P., Anyone For Ordination? (Tunbridge Wells: MARC, 1993). Dulles, A., Models of the Church (New York: Image, 1987). Schrotenboer, P., An Evangelical Response to Baptism, Eucharist & Ministry (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1992) Volf, M., After our Likeness: The Church as Image of the Trinity (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1998).  TH610 The Westminster Confession Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) examine in detail the Westminster Confession of Faith in its 17th century context; (b) consider the continuing significance of the Confession in the life of Presbyterian Church of Australia; (c) encourage students to develop their own theological thinking in interaction with the Confession. On completion of this unit, a student will be able to: 1. Describe the historical development and 17th Century importance of the Westminster Confession of Faith; 2. Outline the content and form of the Confession and explain why this is so and its significance; 3. Describe and critique the various views of the significance of the Confession in the Church today, with particular reference to the Presbyterian Church of Australia; and 4. Identify how this knowledge is and could be appropriated in their own life and the life of their community. Content 1 Confessions of the Continental Reformation and the British Reformation; the Scots Confession and the Irish Articles 2 The historical circumstances of the Westminster Assembly

MDiv Unit Outlines

3

The relation of the Westminster Confession to other Westminster Documents 4 The adoption of the Westminster Confession by the Church of Scotland and its relation to later Scottish theology; moderatism, evangelicalism and modernism; the adoption of the Confession by Presbyterian churches in the nineteenth century 5 The structure of the Westminster Confession 6 Chapter 1 on the doctrine of Scripture, the use Confession makes of Scripture and the theological methodology used by the Confession. 7 A detailed examination of theological topics in the Confession 8 The covenantal and decreetal schema of the Confession 9 The Confession’s view of church and state 10 The Basis of Union of the Presbyterian Church of Australia and the place of the Westminster Confession in the denomination Bibliography Prescribed: The various primary documents referred to in the Content section above. Recommended: Carson, J. and D. Hall, To Glorify and Enjoy God (Edinburgh: Banner of Truth, 1994). Duncan, L. (ed.), The Westminster Confession into the 21st Century (Fearn: Mentor, 2003). Letham, R., The Westminster Assembly: Reading its Theology in Historical Context, (Phillipsburg NJ: P & R Publishing, 2009). Milne, D. J. W., The Westminster Confession of Faith for the Twenty-first Century (Sydney: Presbyterian Church of Australia, 2001). Reymond, R. L., A New Systematic Theology of the Christian Faith (Nashville: Thomas Nelson, rev.ed. 1998). Torrance, T. F., Scottish Theology (esp. 125-53; Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1996).  TH620 Theological Issues of the Reformation Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) Assist candidates to examine part of the rich theological heritage of the Reformation; (b) Provide an introduction to the Reformation heritage in the light of contemporary approaches to the central issues in theology raised in the sixteenth century; (c) Enable candidates to reflect theologically in areas of direct relevance to Christian ministry. On completion of this unit, a student will be able to:

1

2 3

4

115

Describe the historical importance of the major theological developments of the Reformation and show how they are interconnected; Outline the continuing importance and significance of some of these issues; Describe the significance of at least one of these issues for the Church today, and critique its use in the life and ministry of at least on part of the church Australia; and Identify how this knowledge is and could be appropriated in their own life and the life of their community.

Content Section A: 1 Justification: Augustine; Luther; Trent; Hooker; Newman; contemporary ecumenical discussion (for example, Salvation and the Church). 2 Grace and election: Augustine; Luther, Calvin and Arminius; Wesley and Whitefield; contemporary approaches. 3 Sacraments: Luther, Zwingli, Calvin and Cranmer; contemporary ecumenical discussions (for example, Baptism, Eucharist and Ministry). Section B: The study of TWO major documents of the Reformation, in particular considering their relevance in contemporary Christian ministry. One document is to be chosen from each of the following sections: Group A: Cranmer Homily on Salvation Luther, The Freedom of a Christian Man Luther, Two Kinds of Righteousness Zwingli, Commentary on True and False Religion Group B: Calvin, Institutes III, 21–24; IV, 14–19 Cranmer, A Defence of the True and Catholic Doctrine of the Sacrament Luther, Sermons on the Catechism, sections on sacraments. Bibliography Recommended: In addition to works listed in Groups A and B of Section B above, Avis, P. D., The Church in the Theology of the Reformers (Eugene OR: Wipf & Stock Publishers, 2002). Boice, J. M., Whatever Happened to the Gospel of Grace? – Rediscovering the Doctrines That Shook the World (Wheaton: Crossway, 2001). Davis, T. J., This is My Body: The Presence of Christ in Reformation Thought (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2008). Hill, C. E., and F. A. James, Glory of the Atonement, (Downers Grove Il: IVP, 2004). Kärkkäinen, V.-M., An Introduction to Ecclesiology. Ecumenical, Historical & Global Perspectives (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2003). Kasper, W., Sacrament of Unity: The Eucharist and the Church (New York: Crossroad, 2004).

MDiv Unit Outlines

116

Lindberg, C., The Reformation Theologians: An Introduction to the Theology of the Early Modern Period, The Great Theologians (Oxford: Blackwell, 2002). McCormack, B., Justification in Perspective (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, 2006). McGrath, A. E., Reformation Thought: An Introduction (Cambridge, MA: Blackwell, 3rd edition 1999). Pinnock, C. H. (ed.) Grace Unlimited (Eugene OR: Wipf & Stock, 1999). Schreiner, T. R. and B. A. Ware (eds.), Still Sovereign: Contemporary Perspectives on Election, Foreknowledge and Grace (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2000). Stackhouse, J. G. (ed.), Evangelical Ecclesiology: Reality or Illusion? (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2003). Welker, M., What Happens in Holy Communion? (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Classics: ARCIC, Clarifications (London: SPCK; CTS, 1993). Dulles, A., Models of the Church (New York: Image, 1987). Barth, K., Chapter VII “The Election of God”, Church Dogmatics. II.2 (trans G.W. Bromiley et al; Edinburgh: T&T Clark, 1957). McGrath, A. E., Iustitia Dei: A History of the Doctrine of Justification (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2nd ed. 1998). Schrotenboer, P., An Evangelical Response to Baptism, Eucharist & Ministry (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1992).  TH621 God as Trinity Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) Acquaint candidates with the rich heritage of the doctrine of God in selected Church fathers; (b) Provide candidates with an opportunity to reflect in some depth on the central doctrine of the Christian Faith, the doctrine of the Trinity; (c) Enable candidates to recognise the pastoral implications of Trinitarian spirituality. Unit Outline 1. A study of the doctrine of the Trinity as presented in the following Fathers: Athanasius, The Cappadocian Fathers, Augustine of Hippo 2. An examination of the relevance of the doctrine of the Trinity to faith and life. In this regard texts of the above Fathers are to be studied in company with TWO of the modern writers.

Bibliography Prescribed: Augustine, “On the Holy Trinity” in Nicene and PostNicene Fathers of the Christian Church,Series1, Vol.3 (Edinburgh: T & T Clark/ Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1979-). CCEL online, http://www.ccel.org/ccel/schaff/npnf103.html Athanasius – see Hardy, Edward R., (ed.), Christology of the Later Fathers, Library of Christian Classics 3, Louisville KY: Westminster John Knox, 2006, reprint of 1954 ed.). Also good for the Cappadocians. Barth, K., Church Dogmatics (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1994, I.1). Nazianzen, G. “Five Theological Orations”, NPNF S2, vol.7, CCEL online, http://www.ccel.org/ccel/schaff/npnf207.i.html Rahner, K., “Remarks on the Dogmatic Treatise ‘De Trinitate’”, in Theological Investigations IV, London: Darton, Longman & Todd 1966, 77-102. Rahner, K., ‘Towards an Understanding of the Doctrine of the Trinity” in Rahner, Foundations of the Christian Faith: An Introduction to the Idea of Christianity (London: Darton Longman & Todd, 1978, 133-137). Zizioulis, J. B., “The Doctrine of the Holy Trinity: The Significance of the Cappadocian Contribution”, in Christoph Schwobel (ed.), Trinitarian Theology Today: Essays on Divine Being and Act, (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark 1995, 44-60). Recommended: Ayres, L., Nicaea and Its Legacy: An Approach to Fourth-Century Trinitarian Theology (Oxford: OUP, 2004). Beeley, C. A., Gregory of Nazianzus on the Trinity and the Knowledge of God: In Your Light we See Light (New York/London: OUP, 2007). Boff, L., Holy Trinity: Perfect Community (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 2000). Brümmer, V., Atonement, Christology and the Trinity : Making Sense of Christian Doctrine, (Aldershot: Ashgate Publishing, 2005). Coppedge, A., The God who is Triune: Revisioning the Christian Doctrine of God (Downers Grove IL: IVP, 2007). Crisp, O., “Problems with Perichoresis”, Tyndale Bulletin 56/1 (2005) 119-140. Davis, S. T., et al (eds), The Trinity: An Interdisciplinary Symposium on the Trinity, (Oxford: OUP, 2002; Oxford Scholarship Online, 2003, www.oxfordscholarshp.com). Del C., R., “ ‘Person’ and ‘Being’ in John Zizioulas’ Trinitarian Theology: Conversations with Thomas Torrance and Thomas Aquinas”, Scottish Journal of Theology 54 (2000) 70-86. Dunzl, F., trans. John Bowden, A Brief History of the Doctrine of the Trinity in the Early Church (London/New York: T & T Clark, 2007). Fiddes, P., Participating in God: A Pastoral Doctrine of the Trinity (Westminster: John Knox,2000).

MDiv Unit Outlines

George, T., God the Holy Trinity (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, 2006). Grenz, S. J., Rediscovering the Triune God: the Trinity in Contemporary Theology (Minneapolis: Augsburg Fortress Press, 2004). Grenz, S. J., The Social God and thee Relational Self: A Trinitarian Theology of the Imago Dei (Louisville: Westminster John Knox Press, 2001). Gunton, C. E., Father, Son and Holy Spirit: Toward a Fully Trinitarian Theology (London/New York: T. and T. Clark, 2003) Gunton, C. E., The Promise of Trinitarian Theology (London/New York: T & T Clark, 3rd ed. 2003). Hanson, R. P., Search for the Christian Doctrine of God: The Arian Controversy (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, 2006). Heim, M., The Depth of the Riches: A Trinitarian Theology of Religious Ends (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2001). Kärkkäinen, V-M., The Trinity: Global Perspectives (Louisville/London: Westminster John Knox Press, 2007). Kay, B., Trinitarian Spirituality: John Owen and the Doctrine of God in Western Devotion (Waynesboro GA: Paternoster, 2007). Johnston, E. A., She Who Is (New York: Crossroad, 2002). Jowers, D. W., “The Theology of the Cross as Theology of The Trinity: A Critique of Jurgen Moltmann’s Staurocentric Trinitarianism”, Tyndale Bulletin 52.2 (2001) 245-266. Letham, R., The Holy Trinity: In Scripture, History, Theology, and Worship (Phillipsburg NJ: P & R, 2004). Leupp, R. T., The Renewal of Trinitarian Theology: Themes, Patterns, and Explorations (Downers Grove IL: IVP, 2008). Metzger, P., Trinitarian Soundings in Systematic Theology (London/New York: T. and T. Clark, 2005). Molnar, P. D., Divine Freedom and the Doctrine of the Immanent Trinity: In Dialogue with Karl Barth and Contemporary Theology (London/New York: T. T. Clark, 2002). Molnar, P., “The Trinity and the Freedom of God”, Journal for Christian Theological Research 8 (2003) 59-66. Olson, R., and H. Christopher, The Trinity (Grand Rapids/ Cambridge: Eerdmans, 2002). Seamands, S. A., Ministry in the Image of God: The Trinitarian Shape of Christian Service (Downers Grove Il: IVP, 2005). Sherman, R. J., King, Priest and Prophet : A Trinitarian Theology of Atonement (Edinburgh: T.& T. Clark , 2004). Smail, T. A., Like Father, Like Son: The Trinity Imaged in our Humanity (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2006). Sokolowski, R., Christian Faith and Human Understanding: Studies on the Eucharist, Trinity, and the Human Person (Washington DC: CUA Press, 2006).

117

Torrance, T. F., The Christian Doctrine of God: One Being, Three Persons (Edinburgh/New York: T & T Clark,1996, Paperback ed. 2001). Weinandy, T. G., Does God Suffer? (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 2000). Classics: Jenson, R., “Justification as a Triune Event”, Modern Theology 11/4 (1995) 421-427. LaCugna, C. M., God for Us: The Trinity and the Christian Life (New York: Harper SanFransisco, 1993). Moltmann, J., The Trinity and the Kingdom: The Doctrine of God (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1993). Moltmann, J., The Crucified God: The Cross of Christ as the Foundation and Criticism of Christian Theology , R. A. Wilson and John Bowden (trans.) (London: SCM/New York: Harper and Row, 1974). Sherman, R. J., “Toward a Trinitarian Theology of The Atonement”, Scottish Journal of Theology 52 (1999) 346-374. Schwobel, C., Trinitarian Theology Today: Essays on Divine Being and Act (Edinburgh: T.& T. Clark, 1995). Torrance, T. F., “The Atonement and the Holy Trinity”, in The Mediation of Christ (Edinburgh: T&T Clark, 1992; 99-125). Torrance, A. J., Persons in Communion: An Essay on Trinitarian Description and Human Participation with Special Reference to Volume One of Karl Barth’s Church Dogmatics (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1996). Torrance, J. B., Worship, Community, and the Triune God of Grace (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1996). Volf, M., After our Likeness: The Church as Image of the Trinity (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1998). Wainwright, G., “The Doctrine of the Trinity: Where the Church Stands or Falls”, Interpretation 45 (1991) 117-132. Wright, N. T., Jesus and the Victory of God (London: SPCK, 1996). Zizioulas, J. B., Being as Communion: Studies in Personhood and the Church (Crestwood: St Vladimir’s Seminary Press 1985).  TH689 Theology Seminar Status Elective Pre-requisites To be determined on a seminar-by-seminar basis, linked to content and focus Learning Outcomes 1 Provide candidates with the opportunity to study in depth a topic or theme of interest; 2 Provide candidates with an opportunity to develop co-operative research skills;

MDiv Unit Outlines

118

Enable candidates to explore the application of theological insights to personal and pastoral needs.

specialisation, so that candidates are not expected to study each general topic in detail.

On completion of this unit, a student will be able to: 1. Describe and critically evaluate the major characteristics, concerns and implications of the theological topic or theme studied; 2. Outline and appraise how cooperative theological research skills work in practice and show how these were used in the research undertaken; and 3. Appraise the value of study in this area for pastoral or missional tasks and personal faith and spirituality.

General Recommended Readings: These works are useful for a variety of units in the Church History Field, especially the Survey units CH501 and CH502.

3

Content Detailed study in a topic or them of theological interest. (a) The total amount of work expected is that equivalent to an essay of approximately 6,000 words; (b) Candidates must demonstrate a thorough grasp of the theological issues involved; (c) Assessment should be designed to encourage exploration of the personal and pastoral implications of theological perspectives discerned in candidates’ learning; (d) Units approved for the Master of Arts (Theology) may be used as the basis for this unit, adjusted appropriately to reflect major level undergraduate study for candidates enrolled in the undergraduate degrees. Bibliography The texts and readings will be as necessary for the particular topic set. 

Primary Documents Bettenson, H. and C. Maunder (eds), Documents of the Christian Church (3rd ed.; Oxford: OUP, 1999). Coakley, J. W. and A. Sterk (eds), Readings in World History (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 2004). Library of Christian Classics. Secondary References Chidester, D., Christianity: A Global History (London: Penguin, 2000). Cross, F. L. and E. A. Livingstone (eds), The Oxford Dictionary of the Christian Church (London: OUP, 1997). Gonzalez, J. L., The Changing Shape of Church History (Louisville, MO: Chalice, 2002). Harris, R. and H. Mayr-Harling, Christianity: Two Thousand Years (Oxford: OUP, 2001). Hastings, A. (ed.), A World History of Christianity. (London: Cassell, 1999). Hillerbrand, H. J. (ed.), The Encyclopedia of Protestantism (New York: Routledge, 2003). Kung, H., The Catholic Church: A Short History (London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 2001). Norris, F. W., Christianity: a Short Global History (Oxford: Oneworld Publications, 2002). Yates, T., The Expansion of Christianity (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2004). 

CHURCH HISTORY (CH) CH501 The Church to 1550 CH501 and CH502 Church History Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, candidates should be able to: (a) Survey the major developments in the history of the Christian churches, so that they understand the major trends in this history; (b) Analyse the problems, opportunities and attitudes of past Christians in their interaction with the societies in which they lived and the manner in which individual incidents relate to the major trends that emerge in the history of the churches; (c) Evaluate the contribution of selected people and movements to the development of the church’s thought and structures;. (d) Interpret primary historical documents in their social context. It should be noted that these are survey units. Students are required to study the whole syllabus, which includes selected key people or case studies for more focussed study (listed in italics in the Unit Outlines). Assessment procedures shall allow for a certain amount of

Status Core Exclusions CH505 Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, candidates should be able to: (a) Survey the major developments in the history of the Christian churches to 1550, so that they understand the major trends in this history; (b) Analyse the problems, opportunities and attitudes of past Christians in their interaction with the societies in which they lived and the manner in which individual incidents relate to the major trends that emerge in the history of the churches; (c) Evaluate the contribution of selected people and movements to the development of the church’s thought and structures; (d) Interpret primary historical documents in their social context.

MDiv Unit Outlines

119

(d)

Assessment will include a written examination worth 50% and further written work of 3000 words also worth 50%. It is recommended that students be required to answer only 3 questions in a two-hour examination, one question from each of the three sections of the paper. Examiners should feel free to set selections from documents for comment in examinations if they consider it appropriate. Lecturers may choose to assess parts of the syllabus by instruments other than examination. Lecturers may assess reports on documents separately from examinations or essays. For example, three assessment instruments may be used: examination (50%), essay (40%), document report (10%).

Content Section A: The Church in Imperial Rome: 1 Christians in society: the spread of Christianity to 312 Justin Martyr OR Tertullian 2 The challenge of other religions and ideologies, especially Judaism and Gnosticism. Irenaeus OR Athenagoras. 3 Caesar: enemy or friend? Decius, Diocletian, Constantine. Pliny & Trajan OR Cyprian. 4 Wrestling with the faith: Origen, Arianism, Chalcedon Origen OR Athanasius. 5 Worship and popular religion in a collapsing society: 4th and 5th century trends: asceticism, pilgrimage, liturgy, icons. Augustine of Hippo.

(e)

(f)

(g) (h)

Bibliography: Section B: The Church as Christendom 6 The conversion of Europe 600–900. The Holy Roman Empire. Boniface of Crediton OR Alcuin of York. 7 Christendom triumphant: the Western church in the 13th and 14th centuries. The development of scholasticism. Innocent III OR Thomas Aquinas. 8 Byzantium, Islam and the Crusades. 9 Christendom challenged; protest and spiritual renewal mysticism. The conciliar movement. Francis of Assisi OR Thomas a Kempis. Section C: The Continental Churches and Reform 10 Reform precursors; renaissance and new learning. John Hus OR Erasmus 11 Reformation as massive change: (a) in Germany (1517–1530) (b) in Geneva (1536–1564) Martin Luther & John Calvin (c) Anabaptist groups Menno Simons 12 The Counter Reformation: Trent; the Jesuits; the papacy reformed. Ignatius Loyola OR Teresa of Avila Notes: (a) (b)

(c)

Colleges are required to teach at least 10 out of the 12 topics above. Lecturers should feel free to substitute a major figure in the place of those named, and, since history at this level requires the use of primary sources, all major figures should be studied wherever possible through their own writings. Lecturers should feel free to exchange with lecturers from other colleges advice on documents which have worked well for them. Les Ball, Church History Moderator, has made available for all colleges an 8-page guide on how to study a document.

As well as the works listed in General Recommended Readings, the following provide more detailed treatments of sections of this unit. The Church in Imperial Rome Bryan, C., Render to Caesar: Jesus, the Early Church, and the Roman Superpower (Oxford: OUP., 2005). Davidson, I. J., The Birth of the Church: From Jesus to Constantine AD 30-312 (Baker History of the Church, Vol 1; Grand Rapids/ Oxford: Baker/Monarch, 2004). Evans, G. R. (ed.), The First Christian Theologians: An Introduction to Theology in the Early Church (Mulden: Blackwell, 2004). Frend, W. H. C., From Dogma to History: How our Understanding of the Early Church Developed (London: SCM, 2003). Hall, S. G., Doctrine and Practice in the Early Church (London: SPCK, 2005). McKechnie, P., The First Christian Centuries. Perspectives on the Early Church (Leicester: Apollos, 2001). The Church as Christendom Bassett, P., The Medieval Church (Baker History of the Church, Vol 3; Grand Rapids/ Oxford: Baker/Monarch, 2006). Brown, P., The Rise of Western Christendom: Triumph and Diversity, AD200-1000 (2nd ed.; Oxford: Blackwell, 2003). Cusack, C. M., Conversion Among Germanic Peoples (London: Cassell, 1998). Davidson, I. J., A Public Faith: From Constantine to the Medieval World: AD 312-600 (Baker History of the Church, Vol 2; Grand Rapids/ Oxford: Baker/Monarch, 2005). Madden, T. F. (ed.), The Crusades: the Essential Readings (Oxford: Blackwell, 2002). Milne, K., A Short History of the Church of Ireland (Dublin: Columbia, 2003). Riley-Smith, J., The Crusades – A History (2nd ed.; London: Continuum, 2005).

MDiv Unit Outlines

120

Wood, I. N., The Missionary Life: Saints and the Evangelisation of Europe, 400-1050 (New York: Longman, 2001). The Continental Churches and Reform Cottret, B., Calvin: A Biography (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Heinze, R. W., Reform and Conflict: From the Medieval World to the Wars of Religion AD 13501648 (Baker History of the Church, Vol 4; Grand Rapids/ Oxford: Baker/Monarch, 2005). Mullett, M., The Catholic Reformation (New York: Routledge, 1999). Scribner, R. W. and C. Scott Dixon, The German Reformation (2nd ed.; Basingstoke: Macmillan, 2003).  CH502 The Church from 1550 to Modern Times Status Core Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, candidates should be able to: (a) survey the major developments in the history of the Christian churches from 1550 to the modern times, so that they understand the major trends in this history; (b) analyse the problems, opportunities and attitudes of past Christians in their interaction with the societies in which they lived and the manner in which individual incidents relate to the major trends that emerge in the history of the churches; (c) evaluate the contribution of selected people and movements to the development of the church’s thought and structures; (d) interpret primary historical documents in their social context. Content Section A: Reform, Revolution and Renewal 1 Reformation:England and Scotland (1533–1588) Thomas Cranmer OR John Knox 2 Puritanism in England and America (1563– 1662) Oliver Cromwell OR RichardBaxter OR John Winthrop OR Roger Williams 3 Revolutionary Learning & Radical Politics 3.1 Deism and the Enlightenment 3.2 Jansenism 3.3 The Church in the French Revolution John Locke OR Blaise Pascal Lecturers must focus on at least 2 of the topics Section B: Change & Renewal 4 Renewal: 4.1 Pietism, 4.2 the Evangelical Revival in Britain 4.3 the Great Awakening in America 4.4 The Oxford Movement

5

6

John Wesley OR George Whitefield OR Jonathan Edwards OR John Henry Newman Lecturers must focus on at least 2 of the topics Responding to the changing Social Order: 5.1 Frontier Religion in America 5.2 The abolition of slavery 5.3 Christian Socialism 5.4 Salvation Army 5.5 Women in the Church Francis Asbury OR William Wilberforce OR F. D. Maurice OR William & Catherine Booth OR Lecturers must focus on at least 2 of the topics Responding to challenges to Faith 6.1 The Rise of Biblical Criticism 6.2 Science and Religion 6.3 The First Vatican Council 6.4 Fundamentalism Friedrich Schleiermacher OR Charles Darwin OR Pius IX OR John Gresham Machen Lecturers must focus on at least 2 of the topics

Section C: The Church Universal 7 Christianity as a World Religion: 7.1 The birth of modern missions, 7.2 Christian missions in India OR China OR the Pacific OR Africa (nineteenth century) 7.3 Christian missions & the rise of nationalism (twentieth century) 7.4 Ecumenical movements 7.5 Vatican II 7.6 The History of Pentecostalism William Carey OR David Livingstone OR Hudson Taylor OR J. R. Mott OR John XXIII Lecturers must focus on at least 3 of the topics 8 Christians in a Totalitarian State: the church in Germany (1931-1950) OR The Soviet Union (1917-1990) Dietrich Bonhoeffer OR Alexander Solzhenitsyn 9 A history of the church in Australia: 9.1 Building a Christian Country 17881901 9.2 The Church in Secular Australia 1901 to the present 9.3 Ministry to Indigenous communities Lecturers must focus on at least 1 of the topics Notes: (a) Students are expected to cover all nine areas covered in the syllabus outline. But there are considerable options within all sections, and lecturers should take full advantage of this flexibility to design a coherent program which best addresses the needs of students and the philosophy of the college offering the unit. (b) Students taking this unit will be expected to engage seriously with primary sources. The names of prominent figures in Christian history, named above in italics, are to encourage lecturers to set

MDiv Unit Outlines

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f) (g)

documents for study written by or about those people. Lecturers should feel free to substitute a major figure in the place of those named. Lecturers should feel free to exchange with lecturers from other colleges advice on documents which have worked well for them. The ACT Church History Moderator has made available for all colleges an 8-page guide on how to study a document. Assessment will include a written examination worth 50% and further written work of 3000 words also worth 50%. It is recommended that students be required to answer only 3 questions in a two-hour examination, one question from each of the three sections of the paper. Examiners should feel free to set selections from documents for comment in examinations if they consider it appropriate. Lecturers may choose to assess parts of the syllabus by instruments other than examination. Lecturers may assess reports on documents separately from examinations or essays. For example, three assessment instruments may be used: examination (50%), essay (40%), document report (10%).

Bibliography: As well as the works listed in General Recommended Readings, the following provide more detailed treatments of sections of this unit. Secondary References Chidester, D., Christianity: a Global History (London: Penguin, 2000). Cross, F. L. and E. A. Livingstone (eds), The Oxford Dictionary of the Christian Church (London: OUP, 1997). Harris, R. and H. Mayr-Harling, Christianity: Two Thousand Years (Oxford: OUP, 2001). Hillerbrand, H. J. (ed.), The Encyclopedia of Protestantism (New York: Routledge, 2003). Norris, F. W., Christianity: a short global history (Oxford: Oneworld Publications, 2002). Yates, T., The Expansion of Christianity (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2004). Reform and Revolution Brown, J., The English Puritans (Fearn: Christian Heritage, 1998). Dickens, A. G., The English Reformation (2nd ed.; University Park, PA: Pennsylvania State University, 1989). Kellar, C., Scotland, England & the Reformation 1534-61 (Oxford: Clarendon, 2003). Pearse, M., The Great Restoration: the Religious Radicals of the Sixteenth and Seventeenth Centuries (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1998). Change and Renewal Askew, T. A. and R. V. Pierard, The American Church Experience: A Concise History (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2004).

121

Harding, A., The Countess of Huntingdon’s Connexion: a Sect in Eighteenth-Century England (Oxford: OUP, 2003). Heitzenrater, R. P., Wesley and the People Called Methodists (Nashville: Abingdon, 1995). Herring, G., What was the Oxford Movement? (London: Continuum, 2002). Kent, J., Wesley and the Wesleyans: Religion in Eighteenth Century Britain (Cambridge: CUP, 2002). Kimbrough, S. T. Jr (ed.), Orthodoxy and Wesleyan Spirituality (Crestmead, NY: St. Vladimir’s Seminary Press, 2002). Knight, F., The Church in the Nineteenth Century (London: I. B. Tauris, 2008). Noll, M. A., America’s God: from Jonathan Edwards to Abraham Lincoln (Oxford/NY: OUP, 2002). Noll, M. A., The Old Religion in the New World: the history of North American Christianity (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2002). Numbers, R. L., Science and Christianity in Pulpit and Pew (NY: OUP, 2007). Pearse, M., The Age of Reason: from the Wars of Religion to the French Revolution, 1670-1789 Oxford: Monarch, 2007). Rosnan, D., The Evolution of the English Churches, 1500-2000 (Cambridge: CUP, 2003). Sorkin, D. J., The Religious Enlightenment: Protestants, Jews, and Catholics from London to Vienna (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 2008). The Church Universal Bellito, C. M., Renewing Christianity: A History of Church Reform from Day One to Vatican II (New York: Paulist, 2001). Bergen, D. L., Twisted Cross: the German Christian Movement in the Third Reich (Chapel Hill, NC: University of North Carolina, 1996). Breward, I., A History of the Churches in Australasia (Oxford: OUP, 2001). Briggs, J., M. A. Oduyoye and G. Tsetsis (eds), History of the Ecumenical Movement Vol III: 1968-2000 (Geneva: WCC, 2004). Gilley, S. and B. Stanley (eds), World Christianities, c1815-1914 (Cambridge/NY: CUP, 2006). Holmes, D. J. and B. W. Bickers, A Short History of the Catholic Church (3rd ed.; London: Burns & Oates, 2002). Kung, H., The Catholic Church (London: Orion, 2002). Moffett, S. H., A History of Christianity in Asia (Vol. I, 2nd Rev. ed.; Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1998). O’Malley, J. W., Trent and all that: renaming Catholicism in the Early Modern Era (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University, 2000). Rittner, C. and J. K. Roth (eds), Pope Pius XII and the Holocaust (London: Leicester University, 2002). 

122

MDiv Unit Outlines

CH505 Early Church History (30–451) Status Elective Exclusions CH501 Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, candidates should be able to: (a) explain the theological, structural and pastoral developments of the Early Church, especially in terms of the Church’s interaction with its social, political and cultural context; (b) analyse the theological, political and ecclesiastical developments of the Early Church; (c) evaluate contemporary theological, political and ecclesiastical issues in light of their historical development; (d) interpret primary historical documents in terms of both their social context and their significance for today. Content 1 The First Churches 2 The Apostolic Fathers and Apologists 3 The Early Theological Issues 4 The Expansion and Development of the Church 5 Church and Empire to Constantine 6 The Interaction of Church and Society after Constantine 7 The Christological and Trinitarian Controversies 8 Augustine and his times Bibliography As well as the works listed in General Recommended Readings, the following provide more detailed treatments of sections of this unit. Primary Documents Augustine, Confessions (Books I–VIII, Trans. E. M. Blaiklock; London: Hodder & Stoughton, 1987). Bettenson, H. (ed.), The Early Christian Fathers (London: OUP, 1956). Bettenson, H. (ed.), The Later Christian Fathers (London: OUP, 1970). Harding, M. (ed.), Early Christian Life and Thought in Social Context: a Reader (London; New York: T & T Clark, 2003). Kelly, J. N. D., Early Christian Creeds (London; New York: Longman, 1972). Stevenson, J. (ed.), Creeds, Councils and Controversies (Rev. Ed.; London, SPCK, 1989; 7th impression, 2003). Stevenson, J. and W. H. C. Frend (eds), A New Eusebius (Rev. Ed.; London: SPCK, 1987) The Nicene and Post-Nicene Fathers (2 series). Secondary References Ayres, L., Nicaea and its Legacy: an Approach to Fourth-Century Trinitarian Theology (Oxford: OUP, 2004).

Brown, P., Augustine of Hippo: A Biography (Berkeley: University of California, 2000). Cary, P., Augustine’s Invention of the Inner-Self (Oxford: OUP, 2000). Chadwick, H., The Church in Ancient Society: from Galilee to Gregory the Great (Oxford; New York: OUP, 2001). Davidson, I. J., The Birth of the Church: From Jesus to Constantine AD 30-312 (Baker History of the Church, Vol 1; Grand Rapids/ Oxford: Baker/Monarch, 2004). Davidson, I. J., A Public Faith: From Constantine to the Medieval World: AD 312-600 (Baker History of the Church, Vol 2; Grand Rapids/ Oxford: Baker/Monarch, 2005). Dunn-Wilson, D., A Mirror for the Church: Preaching in the First Five Centuries (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2005). Dunzl, F., A Brief History of the Doctrine of the Trinity in the Early Church (trans. John Bowden; T .& T Clark, 2007). Eusebius of Caesarea, Eusebius: The Church History: A New Translation with Commentary (Trans. Paul L. Maier; Grand Rapids: Regel, 1999). Frend, W. H. C., From Dogma to History (London: SCM, 2003). Hall, S. G., Doctrine and Practice in the Early Church (London: SPCK, 2005). Harrison, C., Augustine: Christian Truth and Fractured Humanity (Oxford: OUP, 2002). Hilhorst, A. (ed.), The Apostolic Age in Patristic Thought (Leiden/Boston: Brill, 2004). Kesick, V., Formation and Struggles: the Church AD33-450 (Crestwood, NY: St. Vladimir’s Seminary Press, 2007; Vol 1 AD32-200) McKechnie, P., The First Christian Centuries. Perspectives on the Early Church (Leicester: Apollos, 2001). Rankin, D., From Clement to Origen: the Social and Historical Context of the Church Fathers (Aldershot, Hants/Burlington, VT: Ashgate, 2006). Wedderburn, A. J. M., A History of the First Christians (London; New York: T & T Clark, 2004). Williams, R., Arius: Heresy & Tradition (London: SCM, 2001). Young, F. M. and M. M. Mitchell (eds), Origins to Constantine (Cambridge/NY: CUP, 2006).  CH609 Australian Church History Status Elective Pre/co-requisites 4cps CH5xx

MDiv Unit Outlines

Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, candidates should be able to: (a) Analyse the major developments and issues in the history of the Church in Australia, with particular reference to the introduction and consolidation of Christianity in Australia; (b) Evaluate contemporary elements of Christian life, thought, ministry and worship in Australia in terms of their historical development; (c) Apply lessons learnt from the history of the churches in Australia to their ministry; (d) Apply their experience of Australian churches to develop spiritual life. Content Section A 1 The Church as the Convict Chaplaincy (1788–1833) (a) British background, early New South Wales and Van Diemen’s Land settlements. (b) Colonial chaplaincy: moral and penal reform problems; relations with civil authorities. (c) Establishment disputes, recognition of nonAnglican churches; the Church Acts. (d) Policies on education; convicts and emancipists; transportation; (e) Missions to the Aborigines. 2 The Churches consolidate (1833–1880) (a) Development from chaplaincy to organised religion with an indigenous ministry. (b) Denominationalism and sectarianism; liberalism and secularism; voluntarism. (c) The churches in an expanding community; the Gold rushes and their influence. (d) The abolition of State Aid; the churches, State education and the universities. (e) The beginnings and consolidation of one denomination in Australia. 3 The Churches confronted by the twentieth century (1880–1960) (a) Denominational consolidation: relations with Home churches; new religious forms. (b) Socio-political issues 1880–1914: Sunday; Temperance; Federation. (c) The churches and World War I: conscription and sectarianism. (d) The churches and the 1920s and the Depression. (e) The churches and World War II; the Jewish question. (f) The impact of post-war immigration; “White Australia”; the Catholic Groupers; secularism. 4 The Churches today (1960–) (a) The rise of the Bible College movement; the charismatic movement; sectarianism and mass media religion; para-church groups (e.g. Scripture Union, IVF, YMCA, Bible Society). (b) The ecumenical movement and the Australian Council of Churches; (c) Missions to Aborigines and overseas. (d) The churches’ involvement in debates over community issues (eg state aid, divorce, abortion, IVF, conscription; nuclear power, capital punishment, conservation, poverty).

123

(e) Issues with the churches (e.g. church union, women in ministry, baptism). Section B 5 The study and analysis of set texts: Woolmington, J. (ed.), Religion in Early Australia: the Problem of Church and State (Sydney: Cassell, 1976) and Aborigines in Australian History (Sydney: Cassell, 1973). In addition, students are to study each topic in close relation to primary documents: Austin, A. G. (ed.), Select Documents in Australian Education 1788–1900 (Melbourne: Pitman, 1963). Clark, C. M. H. (ed.), Select Documents in Australian History, 1788–1900, (2nd ed.; Sydney: Angus & Robertson, 1965). Crowley, F. K. (ed.), Modern Australia in Documents Vol. I: 1901–1939 (Melbourne: Wren, 1973). Crowley, F. K. (ed.), Modern Australia in Documents Vol. II: 1939-1970 (Melbourne: Wren, 1973). O’Farrell, P. J., Documents in Australian Catholic History (2 Vols; Melbourne: Chapman, 1969). Bibliography Documents Collections of documents on Australian church history now available on the web, include documents on the Anglican Church of Australia at www.anglican.org.au/archive/ and for the Pentecostal churches, see aps.webjournals.org General Works Piggin, S., Evangelical Christianity in Australia: Spirit, Word and World (Melbourne, Oxford: OUP, 1996). Second edition is entitled: Spirit of a Nation: The Story of Australia’s Christian Heritage (Sydney: Strand, 2003). Thompson, R. C., Religion in Australia: a History (2nd ed.; Melbourne: OUP, 2002). Reference Works Dickey, B. (ed.), Australian Dictionary of Evangelical Biography (Adelaide: Evangelical History Association, 1994). Pike, D. (ed.), Australian Dictionary of Biography (Melbourne: Melbourne University, 1961-). Books covering more than one period Breward, I., A History of the Churches in Australasia (Oxford: OUP, 2001). Carey, H. M., Believing in Australia: A Cultural History of Religions (Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1996). Harris, J., One Blood, 200 Years of Aboriginal Encounter with Christianity, a Story of Hope (Sydney: Albatross, 1990). Hutchinson, M., S. Piggin and E. Campion (eds), Reviving Australia: Essays in the Historical of Revival and Revivalism in Australian Christian

MDiv Unit Outlines

124

Experience (Sydney: Centre for the Study of Australian Christianity, 1994). Kaye, B. (ed.), Anglicanism in Australia (Melbourne: Melbourne University, 2002). Kaye, B. et al (eds), Wonderfully and Confessedly Strange: Australian Essays in Anglican Ecclesiology (Melbourne: MUP, 2006). Manley, K., From Woolloomooloo to ‘Eternity’ (SBHT Vol. 16; Carlisle: Paternoster, 2006). O’Brien, A., God’s Willing Workers (Sydney: University of New South Wales, 2006). O'Farrell, P. J., The Catholic Church and Community in Australia (Melbourne: Nelson, 1977). West, J., Daughters of Freedom (Sydney: Albatross, 1997). Convict Chaplaincy: Grocott, A. M., Convicts, Clergymen and Churches: Attitudes of Convicts and Ex-Convicts towards the Churches and Clergy in New South Wales from 1788 to 1851 (Sydney: SUP, 1980). Hughes, R., The Fatal Shore (London: Collins Harvall, 1987). The Churches Consolidate (1833–1880) Hutchinson, M. and E. Campion (eds), Long Patient Suffering: Studies in the Role of Women in Australian Christianity (Sydney: Centre for the Study of Australian Christianity, 1994). Phillips, W., James Jefferis: Prophet of Federation (Melbourne: Australian Scholarly, 1993). The Churches Confronted by the 20th Century: Habel, N. C. (ed.), Religion and Multiculturalism in Australia: Essays in Honour of Victor C. Hayes (AASR, 1992). Lawton, W. J., The Better Time to Be: Utopian Attitudes to Society Among Sydney Anglicans, 1885 to 1914 (Sydney: UNSW, 1990). Zwartz, M., Fractured Families (Melbourne: Parenesis, 2005). Churches Today: Black, A. (ed.), Religion in Australia (Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1991). Hughes, P., Religion: A View From the Australian Census (Melbourne: Christian Research Association, 1993). Kaldor, P., et al, Views From the Pews – Australian Church Attenders Speak Out (Adelaide: OpenBook, 1995). Kaye, B., A Church Without Walls: Being Anglican in Australia (Melbourne: HarperCollins, 1995). Loos, N., White Christ Black Cross: the Emergence of a Black Church (Canberra: Aboriginal Studies Press, 2007). Maddox, M., God Under Howard: The Rise of the Religious Right in Australian Politics (Crows Nest, NSW: Allen & Unwin, 2005.) Porter, M., The New Puritans (Melbourne: MUP, 2006). 

CH621 The Continental Reformation Status Elective Pre/co-requisites 4cps CH5xx Exclusions CH624 Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, candidates should be able to: (a) Analyse the causes and nature of the Continental Reformation; (b) Evaluate the theological and ecclesiastical outcomes of the Reformation, especially in relation to today’s variety of churchly expressions; (c) Apply lessons learnt from the history of the Reformation to their ministry; (d) Interpret a variety of primary historical and theological documents of the Reformation in terms of both their social context and their significance for today. Content Section A Candidates study six of the following topics: 1 Medieval religious and intellectual questioning of the Church; the Avignon Captivity; the Conciliar Movement. 2 Political, ecclesiastical, economic and social setting of the Reformation and the Renaissance. 3 Martin Luther and the Reformation in Germany. 4 Huldrych Zwingli and the Swiss Reformation. 5 The Radical Reformation and the Anabaptists. 6 John Calvin and the Reformation in Geneva. 7 The Counter Reformation; the Jesuits, the Council of Trent. 8 Calvinism in France and the Netherlands. Section B 9 The study and analysis of TWO special texts related to the topic areas above, chosen from the following: M Luther, Three Treatises of 1520 J Calvin, Institutes of the Christian Religion, Bk IV H Bullinger, Of the Holy Catholic Church B Thompson, Liturgies of the Western Church, chs III–VII Bibliography As well as the works listed in General Recommended Readings, the following provide more detailed treatments of sections of this unit. Primary Documents Dixon, C. S. (ed.), The German Reformation: The Essential Readings (Oxford: Blackwell, 1999). Lindberg, C., The European Reformations Sourcebook (Oxford: Blackwell, 2000). McNeill, J. T. (ed.), Calvin: Institutes of the Christian Religion (2 Vols; London: SCM, 1961).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Naphy, W. G., Documents of the Continental Reformation (New York: Macmillan, 1996). Selections from works of Luther, Zwingli, Bullinger in Library of Christian Classics. Secondary References Birely, R., The Re-fashioning of Catholicism, 14501700: a Reassessment of the Counter Reformation (New York: Macmillan, St Martin’s, 1999). Cottret, B., Calvin: A Biography (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Dixon, C. S., The Reformation in Germany (Oxford: Blackwell, 2002). Evans, G. R., John Wyclif: Myth and Reality (Oxford: Lion, 2005). Gabler, U., Huldrych Zwingli: His Life and Work (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1986). Gritsch, E. W., A History of Lutheranism (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2002). Hillerbrand, H. J, The Division of Christendom: Christianity in the Sixteenth Century (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2007). Jenkins, A. K., Biblical Scholarship and the Church: a Sixteenth-Century Crisis of Authority (Aldershot, Hants: Ashgate, 2007). Kittelson, J. M., Luther the Reformer: The Story of the Man and his Career (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2003). Matheson, P., The Imaginative World of the Reformation (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 2001). Mullett, M., The Catholic Reformation (New York: Routledge, 1999). Nestingen, J. A., Martin Luther: A Life (Minneapolis: Augsburg, 2003). Nohl, F., Luther: Biography of a Reformer (St Louis, MO: Concordia, 2003). Pearse, M., The Great Restoration: the Religious Radicals of the Sixteenth and Seventeenth Centuries (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1998). Reymond, R. L., John Calvin: His Life and Influence (Fearn: Christian Focus, 2004). Scribner, R. W. and C. S. Dixon, The German Reformation (2nd ed.; Basingstoke: Macmillan 2003). Wengert, T. J. (ed.), Harvesting Martin Luther’s Reflections on theology, ethics, and the church (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Wright, A. D., the Counter-Reformation: Catholic Europe and the Non-Christian World (Aldershot, Hants/Burlington, VT: Ashgate, 2005).  CH622 The Reformation in Britain Status Elective Pre/co-requisites 4cps CH5xx Exclusions CH624

125

Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, candidates should be able to: (a) Analyse the causes and nature of the Reformation in Britain; (b) Evaluate the theological and ecclesiastical outcomes of the Reformation in Britain, especially in relation to today’s variety of churchly expressions; (c) Apply lessons learnt from the history of the Reformation in Britain to their ministry; (d) Interpret a variety of primary historical and theological documents of the Reformation in Britain in terms of both their social/political context and their significance for today. Content Section A 1 The context of the Reformation in Britain. 2 Roman Catholicism to Catholicism: the English Church during the reign of Henry VIII. 3 Protestantism: the English Church during the reign of Edward VI. 4 Catholicism revisited: the English Church and Mary I. 5 The Elizabethan Settlement. 6 Puritans and Recusants. 7 The Reformation in Scotland: John Knox; the rise of the Presbyterian Movement. Section B The study and analysis of TWO special texts related to the topic areas above: 8 The study and analysis of ONE of the following texts: Parliamentary Acts, in G.R. Elton, The Tudor Constitution, Documents 174–185. John Jewel, An Apologie for the Church of England. Homilies 1,3,4,5 of The First Book of Homilies John Knox, The Reformation in Scotland 9 The study and analysis of ONE of the following texts: Richard Hooker, Laws of Ecclesiastical Polity I–III Thomas Cranmer, A Defence of the True and Catholic Doctrine of the Sacrament. Bibliography As well as the works listed in General Recommended Readings, the following provide more detailed treatments of sections of this unit. Primary Documents Bray, G. (ed.), Documents of the English Reformation (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1994). Elton, G. E. (ed.), The Tudor Constitution (2nd ed.; Cambridge: CUP, 1983). King, J. N (ed.), Voices of the English Reformation: a Sourcebook (Fredericksburg: University of Pennsylvania Press, 2004). Selections from The Work of Thomas Cranmer and The Book of Common Prayer (1552).

MDiv Unit Outlines

126

Secondary References Bernard, G. W., The King’s Reformation: Henry VIII and the Re-making of the English Church (New Haven: Yale University Press, 2005). Brown, J., The English Puritans (Fearn, Ross-Shire: Christian Heritage, 1998). Dickens, A. G., The English Reformation (2nd ed.; University Park, PA: Pennsylvania State University, 1989). Duffy, E., The Stripping of the Altars: Traditional Religion in England, c1400-1580 (2nd ed.; New Haven/London: Yale University Press, 2005). Duffy, E., The Voices of Morebath: Reformation and Rebellion in an English Village (New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 2001. Heal, F., Reformation in Britain and Ireland (Oxford, New York: OUP, 2003). Jones, N., The English Reformation: Religion and Cultural Adaptation (Oxford: Blackwell, 2002). Kellar, C., Scotland, England & the Reformation 1534-61 (Oxford: Clarendon, 2003). MacCulloch, D., Thomas Cranmer (Yale: Yale University, 1996). Marshall, P. (ed.), The Impact of the English Reformation, 1500-1640 (London; New York: St Martin’s, 1997). Marshall, P. and A. Ryrie (eds), The Beginnings of English Protestantism (Cambridge: CUP, 2002). Mason, R. A. (ed.), John Knox and the British Reformations (Aldershot, Brookfield, VT: Ashgate, 1998). Newton, D., Papists, Protestants and Puritans, 15501714 (Cambridge: CUP, 1998). Rosman, D. M., The Evolution of the English Churches, 1500-2000 (New York: CUP, 2003). Tyack, N. (ed.), England’s Long Reformation, 15001800. (London; Bristol, PA: UCL, 1998). Wooding, L. E. C., Rethinking Catholicism in Reformation England (Oxford; New York: Clarendon; OUP, 2000).  CH624 The Reformation in Europe & Britain Status Elective Pre/co-requisites 4cps CH5xx Exclusions CH621 and CH622. Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, candidates should be able to: (a) Analyse the causes and nature of the Reformation in Europe and Britain; (b) Evaluate the theological and ecclesiastical outcomes of the Reformation in Europe and Britain, especially in relation to today’s variety of churchly expressions;

(c) Apply lessons learnt from the history of the Reformation in Europe and Britain to their ministry; (d) Interpret a variety of primary historical and theological documents of the Reformation in Europe and Britain in terms of both their social/political context and their significance for today. Content Section A: The Reformation in its Historical Contexts The study of at least five of the following topics: 1 The Medieval and Renaissance background. 2 Martin Luther and the German Reformation 3 Huldrych Zwingli; the Anabaptists 4 John Calvin and the Reformation in Geneva 5 The English Church under Henry VIII, Edward VI and Mary I 6 The Elizabethan Settlement; Cranmer; Puritanism; Hooker 7 The Catholic Reformation: Council of Trent and the Jesuits 8 The Reformation in Scotland Section B: The Reformation – Primary Sources 9 The study and analysis of TWO of the following texts: Luther, Three Treatises of 1520 Zwingli, Of the Clarity and Certainty of the Word of God Hubmaier, On Free Will Calvin, Ecclesiastical Ordinances, Institutes (part of Book IV) Elton, The Tudor Constitution (document numbers 174-185; 190-209) The First Book of Homilies (Homilies 1, 3, 4, 5) Bibliography As well as the works listed in General Recommended Readings, the following provide more detailed treatments of sections of this unit. General Hillerbrand, H. J. (ed.), The Oxford Encyclopedia of the Reformation (New York: OUP, 1996). MacCulloch, D., Reformation: Europe’s House Divided, 1490-1700 (London: Penguin, 2003). Europe Primary Documents Dixon, C. S. (ed.), The German Reformation: The Essential Readings (Oxford: Blackwell, 1999). Lindberg, C., The European Reformations Sourcebook (Oxford: Blackwell, 2000). McNeill, J. T. (ed.), Calvin: Institutes of the Christian Religion (2 Vols; London: SCM, 1961). Selections from works of Luther, Zwingli, Bullinger in Library of Christian Classics. Secondary References Cottret, B., Calvin: A Biography (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Dixon, C. S., The Reformation in Germany (Oxford: Blackwell, 2002).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Evans, G. R., John Wyclif: Myth and Reality (Oxford: Lion, 2005). Gabler, U., Huldrych Zwingli: His Life and Work (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1986). Hillerbrand, H. J., The Division of Christendom: Christianity in the Sixteenth Century (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2007). Jenkins, A. K., Biblical Scholarship and the Church: A Sixteenth-Century Crisis of Authority (Aldershot, Hants: Ashgate, 2007). Mullett, M., The Catholic Reformation (New York: Routledge, 1999). Nohl, F., Luther: Biography of a Reformer (St Louis, MO: Concordia, 2003). Pearse, M., The Great Restoration: The Religious Radicals of the Sixteenth and Seventeenth Centuries (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1998). Reymond, R. L., John Calvin: His life and Influence (Fearn: Christian Focus, 2004). Wright, A. D., The Counter-Reformation: Catholic Europe and the Non-Christian World (Aldershot, Hants/Burlington, VT: Ashgate, 2005). Britain Primary Documents Bray, G. (ed.), Documents of the English Reformation (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1994). Elton, G. E. (ed.), The Tudor Constitution (2nd ed.; Cambridge: CUP, 1983). King, J. N (ed.), Voices of the English Reformation: a Sourcebook (Fredericksburg: University of Pennsylvania Press, 2004). Secondary References Bernard, G. W., The King’s Reformation: Henry VIII and the Re-making of the English Church (New Haven: Yale University Press, 2005). Dickens, A. G., The English Reformation (2nd ed.; University Park, PA: Pennsylvania State University, 1989). Duffy, E., The Stripping of the Altars: Traditional Religion in England, c1400-1580 (2nd ed.; New Haven/London: Yale University Press, 2005). Duffy, E., The Voices of Morebath: Reformation and Rebellion in an English Village (New Haven/London: Yale University Press, 2001). Jones, N. L., The English Reformation: Religion and Cultural Adaptation (Oxford: Blackwell, 2002). Kellar, C., Scotland, England & the Reformation 1534-61 (Oxford: Clarendon, 2003). MacCulloch, D., Thomas Cranmer (Yale: Yale University, 1996). Newton, D., Papists, Protestants and Puritans, 15501714 (Cambridge: CUP, 1998).  CH625 History of Evangelical Christianity Status Elective

127

Pre/co-requisites 4cps CH5xx Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, candidates should be able to: (a) Analyse the development of the evangelical movement in the aftermath of the 16th century reformations within the context of Christianity of the last two millennia; (b) Identify and analyse the interactions between social, economic and intellectual forces and evangelical faith; (c) Express evangelical Christianity in its own social and theological context; (d) Interpret a variety of historical theological documents in terms of their intellectual and ecclesiastical contexts, in the development of historiographical skills. Content Section A: The Evangelical Movement in its Historical Contexts 1 Beyond the Reformation: Puritanism, Pietism and Jansenism 2 The Enlightenment: friend or foe to the evangelical movement? 3 The Wesleys, Whitefield, and the rise of Methodism 4 Settler societies and the Great Awakenings in the USA 5 Civil War, revivalism, and the end of the American Evangelical consensus 6 The Oxford Movement, the Evangelical Party and the Clapham Sect 7 The impact of biblical criticism (science, liberalism, neo-Orthodoxy and fundamentalism) 8 The Australian colonies and evangelical ministry 9 Evangelicalism and ecumenism, world missions, and totalitarianism 10 English Evangelicalism in the 20th century 11 Australian Evangelicalism in the 20th century 12 Pressure points in Evangelicalism today: eg., ecclesiology, millennial expectations, pentecostalism and postmodernity Section B: The Evangelical Movement – Primary Sources Study of NOT LESS THAN TWO of the following documents: Dietrich Bonhoeffer, The cost of discipleship. William Carey, An Enquiry into the Obligations of Christians to use Means for the Conversion of the Heathens. Jonathan Edwards, Treatise of the Religious Affections (selections). John Dunmore Lang, The question of questions 1841. The Lausanne Covenant (1974). J. Gresham Machen, Christianity and Liberalism. James Packer, Fundamentalism and the Word of God. John Stott, A plea for evangelical unity. John Stott, The Cross of Christ. John Wesley, 44 Sermons (selections). Charles Simeon, “Preface” to Horae Homileticae

128

MDiv Unit Outlines

William Wilberforce, A Practical View of the Prevailing Religious System (Selections) Mark Noll (ed.), The Princenton Theology 1812-1921 (Selections) Charles Spurgeon, Lectures to my students (Selections) Charles Finney, Lectures on revivals (Selections) Bibliography As well as the works listed in General Recommended Readings, the following provide more detailed treatments of sections of this unit. Bebbington, D., Evangelicalism in Modern Britain: a History From the 1730s to the 1980s (London: Unwin Hyman, 1989). Dudley-Smith, T., John Stott: the Making of a Leader (Leicester: IVP, 1999). Harding, A., The Countess of Huntingdon’s Connexion: a Sect in Eighteenth-Century England (Oxford: OUP, 2003). Kimbrough, S. T. Jr (ed.), Orthodoxy and Wesleyan Spirituality (Crestmead, NY: St. Vladimir’s Seminary Press, 2002). Marsden, G. M., Fundamentalism and American Culture: the Shaping of 20th century Evangelicalism (Oxford: OUP, 1980). Marsden, G. M., Jonathan Edwards: A Life (New Haven: Yale University, 2003). Murray, I. H., Evangelicalism Divided, A Record of Crucial Change in the Years 1950 to 2000 (Edinburgh: Banner of Truth, 2000). Noll, M. A., A History of Christianity in the United States and Canada (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1999). Noll, M. A., The Scandal of the Evangelical Mind (Grand Rapids, Mi.: Eerdmans, 1994). Noll, M. A. and R. F. Thiemann (eds), Where Shall My Wond'ring Soul Begin? The Landscape of Evangelical Piety and Thought (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Piggin, S., Evangelical Christianity in Australia: Spirit, Word and World (Melbourne, Oxford: OUP, 1996). Second edition is entitled: Spirit of a Nation: The Story of Australia’s Christian Heritage (Sydney: Strand, 2003). Piggin, S., Firestorm of the Lord: the History of and Prospects for Revival in the Church and the World (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2000). Rack, H. D., Reasonable Enthusiast: John Wesley and the Rise of Methodism (3rd ed.; London: Epworth, 2002). Ramm, B., The Evangelical Heritage: a Study in Historical Theology (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1981, 2000). Randall, I. M., Evangelical Experiences: a Study of the Spirituality of English Evangelicalism 1918-1939 (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1999). Treloar, G. R. and R. D. Linder (eds), Making History for God: Essays on Evangelicalism, Revival and Mission in Honour of Stuart Piggin (Sydney: Robert Menzies College, 2004). Ward, W. R., The Protestant Evangelical Awakening (Cambridge: CUP, 1992).

CH645 Reformation History in Context Status Elective Pre/co-requisites 4cps CH5xx Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to spend a significant period of time in one or more of the lands associated with a key period of Church History, such as the English and/or European Reformations of the 16th century (b) To assist candidates gain an appreciation of geographical, political, social and linguistic perspectives relating to the period visited (c) To help candidates appreciate the built environment as a means of understanding theological and ecclesiastical worldviews Content This unit is available to candidates who spend a period of time in one or more of the lands associated with the Reformation. The criteria for eligibility for credit for the unit shall be: 1 A minimum of 80 hours work, including lectures, seminars and field trips in an integrated programme conducted by a person or teaching body endorsed by the candidate’s approved institution. 2 Assessment should include a substantial project (including captioned diagrams and/or photographs) relating to an understanding of the historical background to the site(s) visited by the candidate as part of the documentary evidence for it. 3 Study and review of a number of books on the period relevant to the site(s) visited to be completed before the tour commences. Bibliography Collinson, P., The Reformation. Universal History. (London: Weidenfeld & Nicholson, 2003). Estep, W. R., The Anabaptist Story: An Introduction to Sixteenth-Century Anabaptism. (3rd ed. Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1996). Gäbler, U., Huldrych Zwingli: His Life and Work. (Edinburgh: T&T Clark, 1986). Lindberg, C., The European Reformations. (Oxford: Blackwell, 1996). MacCulloch, D., Reformation: Europe's House Divided 1490-1700. (London: Penguin, 2004). McGrath, A. E., A Life of John Calvin: A Study in the Shaping of Western Culture. (Oxford: Blackwell, 1990). Moeller, B. Imperial Cities and the Reformation: Three Essays. (Durham: Labyrinth Press, 1982). Oberman, H. A., Luther: Man between God and the Devil. (New York, NY: Doubleday, 1992). Rupp, G., Luther's Progress to the Diet of Worms. (New York: Harper & Row, 1964). Scribner, R. W., The German Reformation. Studies in European History. (Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1986).

MDiv Unit Outlines

CH689 Church History Seminar Status Elective

3

Pre-requisites To be determined on a seminar-by-seminar basis, linked to content and focus Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, candidates should be able to: (a) study in depth a particular historical theme or topic; (b) develop co-operative research skills; (c) apply historical insights to social and pastoral issues. Content The choice of the topic or theme to be studied is left to approved institutions but they must have staff and library support sufficient to sustain the unit. The lecturer concerned is to submit a proposed unit outline along with assessment plans for approval by the moderator for Church History. Bibliography Given the nature of this unit, specialised reading lists will be generated according to the individual topic for study. 

129

(a) Framework: creation, sin, covenant, prophecy and wisdom; (b) Ethical themes in the Old Testament; New Testament Ethics: (a) Sermon on the Mount, Pauline ethics, 1 Peter, James. (b) Ethical themes: Kingdom and eschatology, righteousness/justice, love command.

Section B: Philosophical Ethics 1 Introducing Ethics as a discipline: its nature and function. 2 Types of Ethical Theories: (a) Theories of Obligation: deontological & teleological; (b) Theories of Virtue: traits, character, motivation, disposition; (c) The relationship between obligation and virtue. Section C: Ethical Issues Candidates choose two of the following areas for study: Divorce and re-marriage Sexual morality: fidelity, adultery, homosexuality Sexism and racism Wealth and poverty Cohabitation Note Sections A, B and C are weighted approximately 40%, 30% and 30%.

PHILOSOPHY AND ETHICS (PE)

Bibliography

PE501 Introduction to Christian Ethics

Prescribed: Atkinson, D. H. and D. H. Field (eds), New Dictionary of Ethics and Pastoral Theology (Leicester: IVP, 1995). Banner, M., Christian Ethics and Contemporary Moral Problems (Cambridge; New York: CUP, 1999). Colwell, J. E., Living the Christian Story (Edinburgh: T&T Clark, 2001). Reuschling, W. C., Reviving Evangelical Ethics : The Promises and Pitfalls of Classic Models of Morality (Grand Rapids: Brazos, 2008). Wright, C. J. H., Old Testament Ethics for the People of God (Leicester: IVP, 2004).

Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to identify, explain and utilise the framework and major themes of biblical ethics; (b) To enable candidates to understand and appraise the key questions, theories and tools of philosophical ethics in order to increase skills in ethical reasoning and decision making; (c) To raise candidates’ awareness of the various historical traditions of theological ethics and to enable integration of biblical and philosophical approaches; (d) To enable candidates to appraise various approaches to some contemporary ethical questions in the light of the Bible, various historical and theological approaches and the contemporary context. Content Section A: Biblical Ethics 1 Using the Bible in Ethics: (a) Methodological issues raised in moving from the Bible to modern ethical issues. (b) A brief survey of how the Bible has been used in ethics. 2 Old Testament Ethics:

Recommended: Section A: Biblical Ethics 1. Using the Bible in Ethics Clark, D. C. and R. V. Rakestraw (eds), Readings in Christian Ethics 2 Vols. (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1994). Cosgrove, C. H., Appealing to Scripture in Moral Debate (Grand Radpis: Eerdmans, 2002). Fedler, K. D., Exploring Christian Ethic: Biblical Foundations for Morality. (Louisville: Westminster John Knox Press, 2006).

130

MDiv Unit Outlines

Hill, M., The How and Why of Love: An Introduction to Evangelical Ethics (Kingsford: Matthias Media, 2002). Rogerson, J. W., Davies M. and Carroll M. Daniel R. (ed), The Bible in Ethics (Sheffield: Academic Press, 1995). Siker, J. S., Scripture and Ethics: Twentieth Century Portraits (New York: OUP, 1997). 2. Old Testament Ethics Barton, J., Understanding Old Testament Ethics (Louisville: Westminster John Knox Press 2003). Middleton, J. R., The Liberating Image: the imago dei in Genesis 1 (Grand Rapids: Brazos, 2005). Sloane, A., At Home in a Strange Land: Using the Old Testament in Christian Ethics (Peabody: Hendrickson, 2008). Wenham, G. J., Story as Torah (Edinburgh T&T Clark, 2000). 3. New Testament Ethics Burridge, R. A., Imitating Jesus: An Inclusive Approach to New Testament Ethics (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2007). Hayes, R. B., Moral Vision of the New Testament (San Fransisco; HarperSanFransisco, 1996). Lohse, E., Theological Ethics in the New Testament (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1991). Longenecker, R. N., New Testament Social Ethics for Today (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1984). Matera, F. J., New Testament Ethics (Louisville: Westminster/John Knox, 1996). Stassen G. H. and D. P. Gushee, Kingdom Ethic: Following Jesus in Contemporary Context (Downers Grove ; IVP, 2002). Strickland, W.G. (ed.), The Law, the Gospel and the Modern Christian: Five Views (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1993). Verhey, A., The Great Reversal: Ethics and the New Testament (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1984). Section B: Philosophical Ethics Layman, S. C., Shape of the Good (Notre Dame, IN: University of Notre Dame, 1994). Messer, N., SCM Studyguide to Christian Ethics (London: SCM, 2006). Rachels J. and S. Rachels, The Elements of Moral Philosophy, (Columbus: McGraw-Hill Co., 6th ed. 2009). Reuschling, W. C., Reviving Evangelical Ethics: The Promises and Pitfalls of Classic Models of Morality (Grand Rapids: Brazos, 2008). Vardy, P. and P. Grosch, The Puzzle of Ethics (London: HarperCollins, 1999). Section C: Issues Marriage, cohabitation, divorce and re-marriage Forster, G., Cohabitation and Marriage: A Pastoral Response (London: Marshall Pickering, 1994). Instone-Brewer, D., Divorce and Remarriage in the Bible (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2002). Instone-Brewer, D., Divorce and Remarriage in the Church (Carlisle; Paternoster, 2003).

Sexual morality: fidelity, adultery, homosexuality Balswick, J. K. and J. O. Balswick, Authentic Human Sexuality: An Integrated Christian Approach (Downers Grove: IVP, 1999). Cahill, L. S., Sex, Gender, and Christian Ethics. (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1996). Court, J. H., Pornography: A Christian Critique (Downers Grove /Exeter: IVP /Paternoster Press, 1980). Gaddy, C. W., Adultery and Grace - Tthe Ultimate Scandal (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1996). Grenz, S. J., Sexual Ethics: An Evangelical Perspective (Louisville: WJK, 1997). Isherwood, L. (ed.), The Good News of the Body: Sexual Theology and Feminism. (New York: New York University Press, 2000). Köstenberger A. J., God, Marriage and Family: Rebuilding the Biblical Foundation (Wheaton: Crossway Books, 2004). Preece, G., “Sex and the City of God: a narrative theology of sexuality in the context of creation, fall and redemption” Zadok Paper S125 Winter 2003. Smith, A., C. Rissel, J. A. Grulich and R. de Visser, Australian Study of Health and Relationships (2003) http://www.latrobe.edu.au/ashr/ Via, D. O., and R. A. J. Gagnon, Homosexuality and the Bible: Two Views (Minneapolis: Augsburg Fortress, 2003). Webb, B. G. (ed.), Theological and Pastoral Responses to Homosexuality Explorations 6 (Adelaide: Openbook, 1994). Sexism and racism Cronin, K., Rights and Christian Ethics (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1992). Hays, J. D., From Every People And Nation: A Biblical Theology Of Race (Leicester/ Downers Grove,: Apollos/ IVP, 2003). Montgomery, J. W., Human Rights and Human Dignity (Grand Rapids: Zondervan/Probe, 1986). Wealth and poverty Cavanaugh, W. T., “The Myth of Globalization as Catholicity” pp. 97-121 in W. T. Cavanaugh Theopolitical Imagination: Christian Practices of Space and Time. (Edinburgh and New York: T & T Clark, 2002). Childs, J. M., Greed: Economics and Ethics in Conflict. (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2000). Claar, V. V., and R. J. Klay, Economics in Christian Perspective: Theory, Policy and Life Choices. (Downers Grove: IVP; 2007). Hay, D. A., Economics Today: A Christian Critique. (Vancouver: Regent College, 2004). Long, D. S., N. R. Fox and T. York, Calculated Futures: Theology, Ethics, and Economics. (Waco: Baylor, 2007). Ray, D. K., (ed.) Theology that Matters: Ecology, Economy, and God. (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2006).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Schweiker, W., and C. T. Mathewes (eds), Having: Property and Possession in Religious and Social Life (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Sider, R. J., and S. Mott, “Economic Justice: A Biblical Paradigm” pp. 180-204 in S. B. Rae &. K. L Wong (eds), Beyond Integrity: A JudeoChristian Approach to Business Ethics (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2004). Stapleford, J. E., Bulls, Bears & Golden Calves: Applying Christian Ethics in Economics (Downers Grove: IVP; 2002). Van Til, K. A., Less Than Two Dollars a Day: A Christian View of World Poverty and the Free Market (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans; 2007). Classics: Birch B. C. and L. L. Rasmussen, Bible and Ethics in the Christian Life (Minneapolis: Augsburg, 1976). Bonhoeffer, D., Ethics (New York: Macmillan, 1965). Finnis, J., Natural Law and Natural Rights. (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1980). Hauervas, S., “On Keeping Theological Ethics Theological” (1983) pp51-74 in S. Hauerwas, J. Berkman, M. G. Cartwright The Hauerwas reader (Durham: Duke University Press: 2001). Meilaender, G. C., Faith and Faithfulness: Basic Themes in Christian Ethics. (Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press, 1991). Meilaender, G. C., The Theory and Practice of Virtue (Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press, 1984). Mitchell, B., Law, Morality, and Religion in a Secular Society (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1970). Niebuhr, R., The Nature and Destiny of Man: I. Human Nature (New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1941). O’Donovan, O., Resurrection and Moral Order (Leicester: IVP, 2nd edition. 1986). Ramsey, P., Basic Christian Ethics (Louisville: Westminster/John Knox, 1950). Yoder, J. H., The Politics of Jesus (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1972).  PE510 Christian Worldview Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to develop (i) an understanding of worldviews in general (ii) the ability to assess specific views in particular, and (iii) skills in explaining and justifying a Christian worldview; (b) To equip candidates to critically assess the implications of a Christian worldview as applied to a variety of areas relevant to Christian ministry and life; (c) To provide candidates the opportunity to apply in detail a Christian worldview to one particular area of study.

131

Content Section A: What is a worldview? The functions of worldviews in human thought and action, how a world view is formed and how it is changed or transformed, non-Christian worldviews, a review of the history of reflection on worldviews. Reflection on issues involved in the development of a Christian worldview from Scripture, including the place of Christian scholarship. Section B The description of a Christian worldview, with consideration of the possible variety among Christian worldviews and the similarity and differences of theology and worldview, and the general principles underlying its application to Christian life and ministry. A brief review of the history of reflection on worldviews. Section C Reflection on the expression of a Christian worldview in the Christian life and in various vocations and disciplines. Application of a Christian worldview to at least three of the following: (i) history, (ii) science, (iii) the study of human culture, (iv) literature and the arts, (v) education, (vi) apologetics, (vii) cross cultural ministry, (vii) economics, (viii) politics, (ix) law, (x) health, (xi) recreation, (xii) technology, and (xiii) media and/or communication. One of the topics in Section C (or another not covered in the list above and approved by the lecturer) should be the subject of a self-study unit for each student, and this unit should form a significant part of the assessment. Bibliography Prescribed: Hiebert, P. G., Transforming Worldviews: An Anthropological Understanding of How People Change (Baker Academic, 2008). Naugle, D. K., Worldview: The History of a Concept (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2002). Sire, J., Naming the Elephant: Worldview as a Concept (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2004). Recommended: On worldview Dockery, D., Shaping a Christian Worldview (Nashville: Broadman & Holman, 2002). Eckman, J. P., The Truth About Worldviews: A Biblical Understanding of Worldview Alternatives (Wheaton: Crossway, 2004). Holmes, A. F., Contours of a World View (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans; 1983).

132

MDiv Unit Outlines

Meade, D. R. “Unlocking Worldview as the Means of Empowering Evangelistic” Evangelical Missions Quarterly, 43/ 4 Oct 2007, 476-482 Padgett, A. G., “The Relationship between Theology and Philosophy: Constructing a Christian Worldview” pp25-44 in J. Beilby (ed) For Faith and Clarity (Grand Rapids : Baker Academic, 2006). Palmer, M. D. (ed), Elements of a Christian Worldview (Springfield: Logion, 1998). Sire, J., The Universe Next Door: A Basic Worldview Catalog (Downers Grove: IVP, 4th ed 2004). Tarnas, R., The Passion of the Western Mind (London: Pimlico, 1996). Wolters, A. M., Creation Regained (Downers Grove: IVP, 2nd Ed 2005). Topics Banks R. and B. M. Ledbetter, Reviewing Leadership A Christian Evaluation of Current Approaches (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, 2004). Begbie, J. S., Resounding Truth: Christian Wisdom in the World of Music (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, 2007) .| Bouma-Prediger, S., For the Beauty of the Earth: A Christian Vision for Creation Care (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic 2001). Cavanaugh,W. T., Being Consumed: Economics and Christian Desire (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2008). Claar, V. V. and R. Klay, Economics in Christian Perspective: Theory, Policy, and Life Choices (Downer Grove: IVP, 2007). Deane-Drummond, C. E., Biology and Theology (London: SCM, 2001). Detweiler, C., A Matrix of Meanings, Finding God in Pop Culture (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic 2003). Dyrness, W.A., Visual Faith: Art, Theology, and Worship in Dialogue (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, 2001). Halteman, J., The Clashing Worlds of Economics and Faith (Scottdale: Herald, 1995). Johnson, T. E. and D. Savidge, Performing the Sacred, Theology and Theatre in Dialogue (Grand Rapids : Baker Academic, 2009). Johnston, R. K., Reel Spirituality: Theology and Film in Dialogue, 2nd ed. (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, 2006). McConnell, M. W. et al, Christian Perspectives on Legal Thought (New Haven: Yale University, 2001). McGrath, A. E., The Foundations of Dialogue in Science and Religion (London: Blackwell, 1996). McIlroy, D., A Biblical View of Law and Justice (Waynesboro: Paternoster, 2004). Perks, S., Christian Philosophy of Education Explained (Moscow: Canon, 1992). Stahl, W. A., God and the Chip: Religion and the Culture of Technology (Ontario: Wilfrid Laurier University, 1999). Staub, D., The Culturally Savvy Christian: A Manifesto for Deepening Faith and Enriching Popular Culture in an age of Christianity Lite (San Francisco; John Wiley & Sons, 2007).

Veith, G., State of the Arts: From Bezalel to Mapplethorpe (Wheaton: Crossway, 1991). Vroom, H. M., A Spectrum of Worldviews: An Introduction to Philosophy of Religion in a Pluralistic World, M. Greidanus & A. Greidanus (trans) (Amsterdam and New York: Rodopi, 2006). Warren, M., Seeing Through the Media: A Religious View of Communications and the Media (Harrisburg, PA: TPI, 1997) Wells, R. (ed.), History and The Christian Historian (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1998) Classics: Bratt, J. D., Abraham Kuyper: A Centennial Reader (Eerdmans/Paternoster, 1998). Dooyeweerd, H., A new Critique of Theoretical Thought 2 Vol. David H. Freeman, William S. Young and H. de Jongste (trans) (Ontario: Paideia, 2nd English ed. 1984). Hasker, W., Metaphysics: Constructing a Worldview (Downers Grove: IVP, 1983) Hoffecker W. A. and G. S. Smith (eds), Building a Christian Worldview (2 Vols; Phillipsburg: P&R, 1986, 1988). Jordan, J., Through New Eyes: Developing a Biblical View of the World (Brentwood: Wolgemuth & Hyatt, 1988). Kuyper, A., Lectures on Calvinism (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1931). Moreland, J. P. and W. L. Craig, Philosophical Foundations for a Christian Worldview (Downers Grove: IVP, 2003). Orr, J., The Christian View of God and the World: As Centring in the Incarnation (Edinburgh: Andrew Elliott, 1892). Ruegsegger, R. W. (ed.) Reflections on Francis Schaeffer (Grand Rapids: Academic, 1986). Schaeffer, F. The Complete Works of Francis Schaeffer 5 vols (Westchester: Crossway, 1982). Walsh, B. J., and R. J. Middleton, The Transforming Vision (Downers Grove: IVP, 1984).  PE602 Theological Ethics Status Elective Pre/co-requisites 8cp of 500-level OT and/or NT and/or CH and/or PE and/or TH Co-requisites If PE501 has not been taken as a prerequisite the lecturer should deal with the issue of hermeneutics and the use of the Bible in Christian Ethics. Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to develop their own theological foundations for the task of ethics and to be able to critically assess alternative approaches;

MDiv Unit Outlines

(b) To equip candidates to explore and critically assess the connections between theological and philosophical ethics; (c) To provide candidates with the skills to assess the key issues and the theological and philosophical aspects of some contemporary ethical questions. Content Section A: Theological Ethics 1 A Theological Outline for Christian Ethics. (a) The relationship between biblical, historical and systematic theology and ethics; (b) Theological foundations for Christian ethics: revelation, Trinity, character of God, command of God, action of God. 2 An Outline of Christian Ethics (a) Ethical virtues, principles and values drawn from the Bible and theology; (b) Developing a theory of ethics incorporating the following elements: Christian character, principles, world-view and contextual significance. Section B: Philosophical Ethics 3 Major themes in philosophical ethics; religion and ethics, objectivism and subjectivism, divine command theory, moral knowledge (its basis and nature), the “is/ought” controversy, value theory, the place and freedom of the will. 4 Continuities and discontinuities between theological and philosophical ethics. Section C: Ethical Issues 5 Candidates choose two of the following topics for study, with special reference to the dialogue between philosophical and theological ethics: Abortion and Euthanasia Bio-ethics—genetic engineering, IVF, surrogacy. Work and Leisure Note Sections A, B and C are weighted approximately 40%, 30% and 30%. Bibliography Prescribed: Meilaender, G. and W. Werpehowski (eds), The Oxford Handbook of Theological Ethics (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2005). O’Donovan, O., Resurrection and Moral Order (Leicester/Grand Rapids: Apollos/Eerdmans, 1994). Reuschling, W. C., Reviving Evangelical Ethics: The Promises and Pitfalls of Classic Models of Morality (Grand Rapids: Brazos, 2008). Section A: Theological Ethics Banner M. C. and A. J. Torrance, The Doctrine of God and Theological Ethics (London and New York: T&T Clark, 2006).

133

Brawley, R. (ed.), Character Ethics and the New Testament: Moral Dimensions of Scripture (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2007). Brock, B., Singing the ethos of God (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2007). Brown, W. P., The Ten Commandments: The Reciprocity of Faithfulness. (Louisville: John Knox Press, 2004). Burridge, R. A., Imitating Jesus: An Inclusive Approach to New Testament Ethics (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2007). C. Bartholomew, J. Chaplin, R. Song and A.Wolters (eds), A Royal Priesthood? : The Use of the Bible Ethically and Politically : A Dialogue with Oliver O'Donovan (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2002). Carroll, R., M. Daniel and J. E. Lapsley (eds), Character Ethics and the Old Testament: Moral Dimensions of Scripture (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2007). Carson T. L. and P. K. Moser (eds), Morality and the good life (New York: Oxford University Press, 1997). Chiba, S., G. Hunsberger and J. Ruiz, Christian Ethics in Ecumenical Context (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1995). Colwell, J. E., Living the Christian Story (Edinburgh: T&T Clark, 2001). Cosgrove, C. H., Appealing to Scripture in Moral Debate (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2002). Dutney, A., Playing God: Ethics and Faith (Sydney: HarperCollins, 2001). Grabill, S. J., Rediscovering the Natural Law in Reformed Theological Ethics (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2006). Grenz, S., The Moral Quest, (Downers Grove: IVP, 1997). Hauerwas, S., Christians Among the Virtues: Theological Conversations with Ancient and Modern Ethics (Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame, 1997). Hill, M., “Biblical Theology and Ethics” pp91-109 in R.J. Gibson (ed) Interpreting God's plan (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1998). Hogan, L. (ed.), Applied Ethics in a World Church (Maryknoll: Orbis, 2008). Keeling, M., The Mandate of Heaven: The Divine Command and the Natural Order (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1995). McDonald, J., Christian Values: Theory and Practice in Christian Ethics Today (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1995). Meilaender, G. C., The Theory and Practice of Virtue (Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press, 1984). Meilander, G., Faith and Faithfulness (Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame, 1991). Mouw, R., The God Who Commands (Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame, 1990). Murphy, N., et al, Virtues & Practices in the Christian Tradition (Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame, 2003). Ogletree, T. W., The Use of the Bible in Christian Ethics (Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1984).

134

MDiv Unit Outlines

Rogerson, J. W., M. Davies and M. D. Carroll Rodas (ed.) The Bible in Ethics (Sheffiled: Sheffield Academic Press, 1995). S. Hauerwas and S. Wells (eds), The Blackwell Companion to Christian Ethics (Oxford: Blackwell, 2004). Siker, J. S., Scripture and Ethics: Twentieth-century Portraits (New York: Oxford University Press, 1997). Tödt, H. E., Authentic Faith (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2007). Wells, S., God's Companions: Reimagining Christian Ethics (Oxford: Blackwell, 2006). Wogaman, P., Christian Ethics: A Historical Introduction (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1993). Section B: Philosophical Ethics Darwall, S. (ed.), Consequentialism (Oxford: Blackwell, 2003). Darwall, S. (ed.), Deontology (Oxford: Blackwell, 2003). Darwall, S. (ed), Virtue ethics (Oxford: Blackwell, 2003). Gascoigne, R., Freedom and Purpose (Sydney: EJ Dwyer, 1993). Gula, R. M., Reason Informed by Faith (New York: Paulist, 1997). Kenny, A., A New History of Western Philosophy 4 vols (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2004). MacIntyre, A., Three Rival Versions of Moral Enquiry (Notre Dame, IN: University of Notre Dame, 1990). Porter, J., Natural and Divine Law (Ottawa: Novalis, 1999). Preston, N., Understanding Ethics (Annadale: Federation Press, 2nd ed. 2001). Rachels J. and S. Rachels, The Elements of Moral Philosophy, (Columbus: McGraw-Hill Companies, 6th ed. 2009). Section C: Ethical Issues Abortion and Euthanasia Beckwith, F. J., Abortion and the Sanctity of Human Life (Joplin, MO: College, 2000). Dyck, A., Life’s Worth: The Case Against Assisted Suicide (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2002). Gill, R., Health Care and Christian Ethics (Cambridge: Cambridge Univ Pr, 2006). Gula, R. M., Euthanasia: Moral and Pastoral Perspectives (New York: Paulist, 1994). Johnston, G. F. (ed.), Abortion from the Religious and Moral Perspective: An Annotated Bibliography (Westport and London: Greenwood, 2003). Nichols, A., Life and Death Decisions (Melbourne: Acorn, 1997). Preece, G. R. (ed.), Rethinking Peter Singer: A Christian Critique (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2002). Webb, B. G. (ed.), The Ethics of Life and Death (Sydney: Lancer, 1990).

Bio-ethics—genetic engineering, IVF, surrogacy Beauchamp, T. L. and J. F. Childress, Principles of Biomedical Ethics (New York: Oxford University Press, 5th ed. 2001). Engelhardt, H. T., The Foundations of Christian Bioethics (Lisse: Swets & Zeitlinger, 2000). Fukuyama, F., Our Posthuman Future: Consequences of the Biotechnology Revolution (New York: Farrar, Straus, and Giroux, 2002). Gill, R., Health Care and Christian Ethics. (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press; 2006). Hauerwas, S., Naming the Silences: God, Medicine, and the Problem of Suffering. (New York: Continuum; 2004). Hui, E. C., At the Beginning of Life: Dilemmas in Theological Bioethics (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2002). Jeesves, M. (ed.), From Cells to Souls and Beyond: Changing Portraits of Human Nature (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Jonsen, A. R., R. M. Veatch and L. Walters (eds), Source Book in Bioethics: A Documentary History (Washington: Georgetown University Press, 2000). Kilner, J. F. et al. (eds), The Reproduction Revolution: A Christian Appraisal of Sexuality, Reproductive Technologies and the Family. (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000) Mappes, T. and D. Degrazia, Biomedical Ethics (Boston: McGraw Hill, 5thed. 2001) Meilaender, G., Bioethics (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, Rev. ed. 2005). Messer, N. (ed.), Theological Issues in Bioethics: An Introduction with Readings (London: Darton, Longman & Todd, 2002). Miller, R., B. Brubaker, and J. Peterson, Viewing New Creations with Anabaptist Eyes: Ethics of Biotechnology (Telford: Cascadia, 2005). Peters, T., The Stem Cell Debate (Minneapolis: Fortress Pr, 2007). Peterson, J. C., Genetic Turning Points: The Ethics of Human Genetic Intervention (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2001). Rae, S. and P. M. Cox, Bioethics: A Christian Approach in a Pluralistic Age (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1999). Sherlock, R. and J. Morrey (eds), Ethical Issues in Biotechnology (Lanham: Rowman & Littlefield, 2002). Shuman, J. and B. Bolck, Reclaiming the Body: Christians and the Faithful Use of Modern Medicine. (Grand Rapids: Brazos, 2006). Verhey, A. (ed.), Reading the Bible in the Strange World of Medicine. (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans; 2003) Waters, B. and R. Cole-Turner (eds), God and the Embryo: Religious Voices on Stem Cells and Coning (Washington, DC: Georgetown University, 2003). Work and Leisure Cosden, D., A Theology of Work (Exeter: Paternoster, 2005).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Countryman, L. W., Dirt, Greed, and Sex: Sexual Ethics in the New Testament and Their Implications for Today (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2nd ed. 2007). Heintzman, P. et al, Christianity and Leisure: Issues in a Pluralistic Society (Sioux Centre, IN: Dordt College, 1994). Hilgert, R. L., P. H. Lochhaas and J. L. Truesdell, Christian Ethics in the Workplace (St. Louis, MO: Concordia, 2001). Jensen, J., Ethical Dimensions of the Prophets (Collegeville: Liturgical Press, 2006). Miller, D. W., God at Work: The History and Promise of the Faith at Work Movement (Oxford: Oxford University Press; 2007). Stevens, R. P., Doing God's Business: Meaning and Motivation for the Marketplace. (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans: 2006). Via, D. O., and R. A. J. Gagnon, Homosexuality and the Bible: Two Views (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2003). Classics: Birch B. C. and L. L. Rasmussen, Bible and Ethics in the Christian Life (Minneapolis: Augsburg, 1976). Bonhoeffer, D., Ethics (New York: Macmillan, 1965). Finnis, J., Natural Law and Natural Rights. (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1980). Hauervas, S., “On Keeping Theological Ethics Theological” (1983) pp51-74 in S. Hauerwas, J. Berkman, M. G. Cartwright The Hauerwas reader (Durham: Duke University Press: 2001). Meilaender, G. C., Faith and Faithfulness: Basic Themes in Christian Ethics. (Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press, 1991). Meilaender, G. C., The Theory and Practice of Virtue (Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press, 1984). Mitchell, B., Law, Morality, and Religion in a Secular Society (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1970). Niebuhr, R., The Nature and Destiny of Man: I. Human Nature (New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1941). O’Donovan, O., Resurrection and Moral Order (Leicester: IVP, 2nd edition. 1986). Ramsey, P., Basic Christian Ethics (Louisville: Westminster/John Knox, 1950). Yoder, J. H., The Politics of Jesus (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1972). 

135

be able to appropriately utilise them in specific situations; (b) To enable candidates to understand, and be able to compare, contrast and assess historical approaches to social ethics and their implications today; (c) To make students aware of historical and contemporary approaches to methods of social change in Christian history and be able to appropriately observe and evaluate those found in contemporary culture; (d) To enable candidates to theologically and critically assess some contemporary ethical issues. Content Section A: Developing a Christian Social Ethic 1 Social ethics: its nature, biblical basis and principles; personal and social ethics. 2 Social structures and institutions: their nature; persons and roles; responsibility and social structures. 3 Concepts of justice; sin and society. Section B: Historical Approaches to Social Ethics A study and comparison of four of the following: 1 Catholic 2 Lutheran 3 Reformed 4 Anabaptist 5 Anglican 6 Evangelical Section C: Ethical Evaluation of Alternative Methods of Social Change. Ethical evaluation of the following aspects of Christian involvement in social change: (a) Evangelism (b) Social action (c) Counter-culture and alternative communities (d) Non-co-operation and civil disobedience (e) Revolution (f) Reform Section D: Ethical Issues Candidates choose two of the following topics for study: Government and the State War and Nuclear Arms Business and economic ethics Punishment (including capital punishment) Law and Liberty Population and Ecology.

PE603 Christian Social Ethics Status Elective

Note Sections A, B, C and D are weighted approximately 25% each.

Pre/co-requisites 8cp of 500-level OT and/or NT and/or CH and/or PE and/or TH

Bibliography In addition to the set texts, and appropriate works listed in Bibliography for PE 403 and PE 501 and PE 602:

Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to evaluate the foundations of various approaches to Christian social ethics and to

Section A: Developing a Social Ethic Preston, N., Understanding Ethics (3rd edition; Annandale, NSW: Federation Press, 2007).

136

MDiv Unit Outlines

Storrar, W. F. and A. R. Morton (eds), Public Theology for the 21st Century: Essays in Honour of Duncan B. Forrester (London: T. & T. Clark, 2004). Sweetman, B., Why Politics Needs Religion: The Place of Religious Arguments in the Public Square (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2006). Section B: Historical Approaches to Social Ethics Niebuhr, H. R., Christ and Culture (New York: Harper, 1951). Niebuhr, R., The Essential Reinhold Niebuhr: Selected Essays and Addresses (ed. R. McA. Brown; New Haven, NY: Yale University Press, 1986). Troeltsch, E., The Social Teaching of the Christian Churches (2 vols; Louisville, KY: Westminster John Knox Press, 1992 [1912]). Wogaman, J. P. and D. M. Strong (eds), Readings in Christian Ethics: A Historical Sourcebook (Louisville, KY: Westminster John Knox Press, 1996). Section C: Ethical Evaluation of Alternative Methods of Social Change Niebuhr, R., Moral Man and Immoral Society: A Study in Ethics and Politics (Rev. ed.; Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2001). Scott, P. and W. T. Cavanaugh (eds), The Blackwell Companion to Political Theology (Oxford, UK: Blackwell Publishing, 2007). Section D: Ethical Issues Government and state Clark, S. (ed.), Tales of Two Cities: Christianity and Politics (Leicester, UK: IVP, 2005). Frame, T., Church and State: Australia’s Imaginary Wall (Sydney: University of NSW Press, 2006). Mott, S. C., A Christian Perspective on Political Thought (Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press, 1993). O’Donovan, O., The Ways of Judgment (Grand Rapids, MI: Wm B. Eerdmans, 2005). Wogaman, J. P., Christian Perspectives on Politics (2nd ed.; Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2000). War and nuclear war O’Donovan, O., The Just War Revisited (Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 2003). Reichberg, G. M. et al (eds), The Ethics of War: Classic and Contemporary Readings (Oxford, UK: Blackwell Publishing, 2006). Business and economic ethics Byron, W. J., The Power of Principles: Ethics for the New Corporate Culture (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis Books, 2006). Grace, D. and S. Cohen, Business Ethics: Australian Problems and Cases (2nd edn; South Melbourne, Vic: Oxford University Press, 1998).

Punishment Magivern, J. J., The Death Penalty: An Historical and Theological Survey (New York: Paulist, 1997). Sanders, A. and R. Young, Criminal Justice (3rd ed.; Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press, 2007). Law and liberty Audi, R., Religious Commitment and Secular Reason (Cambridge, UK: Cabridge University Press, 2000). Taylor, P. M., Freedom of Religion: UN and European Human Rights Law and Practice (Cambridge University Press, 2005). Population and ecology Jenkins, W., Ecologies of Grace: Environmental Ethics and Christian Theology (Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press, 2008). Northcott, M. S., A Moral Climate: The Ethics of Global Warming (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis Books, 2007). Rasmussen, L. L., Earth Community, Earth Ethics (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis Books, 1996). Scott, P., A Political Theology of Nature (Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 2003).  PE617 Church in Australian Society Status Elective Pre/co-requisites 8cp of 500-level OT and/or NT and/or CH and/or PE and/or TH Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to understand the interaction of church and Australian society and be able to utilise conceptual tools for social analysis; (b) To equip candidates to interpret and respond to the dynamics of changing social patterns in contemporary Australia and to be able to assess their impact on the life of the church; (c) To provide a conceptual and methodological foundation for candidates’ evaluation of particular aspects of church-society relationships in Australia. Content Section A: Australian History and Society An introduction to Australian history and society, including: 1 A brief outline of pre-European history and from European arrival to the present day, with special reference to the Christian churches. 2 Australian identity; images of self and national consciousness; literature and the arts. 3 An introduction to conceptual tools for social analysis, including basic sociological theory and method and the sociology of religion.

MDiv Unit Outlines

Section B: Interaction of Church and Society The impact of the following factors in society upon the churches and the churches’ responses: 4 Growth, change and decline in patterns of religious belief and behaviour; the churches and sectarianism; pluralism. 5 Migration and its effects; multi-culturalism; government and community organisations. 6 Power structures; politics, economics, education, mass media, social class, minorities. 7 Family life and sex roles; typical life-cycles; household patterns; women’s movements. 8 Welfare; ethical decision-making; wowserism; social policy concerns. 9 Work and leisure; voluntary associations; sport. 10 A research-based project on some aspect of the empirical interaction of church and Australian society. Notes (a) Sections A and B are weighted approximately 30% and 70%; (b) Candidates who have not undertaken a study of Australian history (e.g. CH609) will need to undertake some general reading apart from the overview provided for in the unit. Bibliography Prescribed: Bouma, G. D., Australian Soul: Religion and Spirituality in the Twenty-first Century (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2006). Davie, G., The Sociology of Religion (Los Angeles: SAGE, 2007). Milbank, J., Theology and Social Theory: Beyond Secular Reason. (Oxford: Blackwell, 1990). Section A: Australian History and Society Black, A. W. (ed.), Religion in Australia: Sociological Perspectives (Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1991). Breward, I., A History of Australian Churches (Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1993). Carey, H. M., Believing in Australia: A Cultural History of Religions (Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1996). Furze, B., Society and Change: A Sociological Introduction to Contemporary Australia (Melbourne: Macmillan, 1994). Gare, D., Making Australian History: Perspectives on the Past Since 1788 (South Melbourne: Thomson Learning Australia, 2008). Graetz, B. and I. McAllister, Dimensions of Australian Society (Melbourne: Macmillan, 1994). Macintyre S., A Concise History of Australia, (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press 2004). Section B: Interaction of Church and Society Ballas, P. H. and G. D. Bouma (ed.), Religion in an Age of Change (Melbourne: Christian Research Association, 1999).

137

Bentley, P. and P. J. Hughes, Australian Life and the Christian Faith (Melbourne: Christian Research Association, 1998). Bouma, G. D. (ed.), Many Religions, All Australian: Religious Settlement, Identity and Cultural Diversity (Melbourne: Christian Research Association, 1996). Cowdell, S., “Who Speaks for the Church? Anglican Voices and Australian Public Life” St Mark's Review, no 203 N 2007, p 71-79. Cowdell, S., God's Next Big Thing: Discovering the Future church (Melbourne: John Garratt Pub, 2004). Emilsen, W. W. and S. E. Emilsen (eds), The Uniting Church in Australia: The First 25 years (Armadale, Vic: Circa, 2003). Fox, C., Working Australia (Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1991). Frame, T., Church and State: Australia's Imaginary Wall (Sydney: UNSW Pr, 2006). Frame, T., Anglicans in Australia (Sydney: UNSW Pr, 2007). Frost, M. and A. Hirsch, The Shaping of Things to Come: Innovation and Mission for the 21stCentury Church (Peabody/ Erina: Hendrickson/Strand, 2003). Harris, J., One Blood: 200 Years of Aboriginal Encounter with Christianity: a Story of Hope (Sydney: Albatross, 1990). Howe, B., Weighing up Australian Values (Sydney: UNSW Press, 2007). Hughes, P. J., et al, Believe It or Not: Australian Spirituality and the Churches in the 90s (Melbourne: Christian Research Association, 1995). Hughes, P. J., Religion in Australia: Facts and Figures (Melbourne: Christian Research Association, 1997). Kaldor, P. et al, Shaping a Future: Characteristics of Vital Congregations (Adelaide: OpenBook, 1997). Kaldor, P. et al, Taking Stock: A Profile of Australian Church Attenders (Adelaide: OpenBook, 1999). Maddox, M., For God and Country: Religious Dynamics in Australian Federal Politics (Canberra: Department of the Parliamentary Library, 2001). Maddox, M., God under Howard: The Rise of the Religious Right in Australian Politics (Allen and Unwin, 2005). Manley, K., From Woolloomooloo to "Eternity": A History of Australian Baptists (Milton Keynes: Paternoster, 2006). O'Brien A., God's Willing Workers: Women and Religion in Australia (Sydney: UNSW Press, 2005). Thompson, R., Religion in Australia (Melbourne: OUP, 2nd ed. 2002). Wilson, B., Reasons of the Heart: A Vision for the New Millennium (Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1998).

MDiv Unit Outlines

138

Section B: Interaction of Church and Society Ballas, P. H. and G. D. Bouma (ed.), Religion in an Age of Change (Melbourne: Christian Research Association, 1999). Bouma, G. D. (ed.), Many Religions, All Australian: Religious Settlement, Identity and Cultural Diversity (Melbourne: Christian Research Association, 1996). Bentley, P. and P. J. Hughes, Australian Life and the Christian Faith (Melbourne: Christian Research Association, 1998). Fox, C., Working Australia (Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1991). Harris, J., One Blood: 200 Years of Aboriginal Encounter with Christianity: a Story of Hope (Sydney: Albatross, 1990). Hughes, P. J., Religion in Australia: Facts and Figures (Melbourne: Christian Research Association, 1997). Hughes, P. J. et al, Believe It or Not: Australian Spirituality and the Churches in the 90s (Melbourne: Christian Research Association, 1995). Hughes, P. J. and T Blomberry, Patterns of Faith in Australian Churches, (CRA, 1990). Kaldor, P., et al, Taking Stock: A Profile of Australian Church Attenders (Adelaide: OpenBook, 1999). Kaldor, P., et al, Shaping a Future: Characteristics of Vital Congregations (Adelaide: OpenBook, 1997). Kaldor, P., et al, Mission Under the Microscope: Keys to Effective and Sutainable Mission, (Adelaide: OpenBook, 1995). Kelly, A., A New Imagining, (Collins Dove, 1990). McKay, H., Reinventing Australia: The Mind and Mood of Australia in the 90s (Sydney: Angus & Robertson, 1993). Summers, A., Damned Whores and God’s Police (3rd ed.; Melbourne: Penguin, 2002). Thompson, R., Religion in Australia (2nd ed.; Melbourne: OUP, 2002). Wilson, B., Reasons of the Heart: A Vision for the New Millennium (Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1998).

(d) To help candidates form a coherent Christian world view in response to currents in Western thought; (e) To enable candidates to develop the knowledge and skills necessary to communicate to others essential aspects of Christian apologetics.



Prescribed: Campbell-Jack, C.; G. J. McGrath, C. S. Evans and S. Carter (eds), New Dictionary of Christian Apologetics (Leicester, Downers Grove: IVP, 2006). Craig, W. L., Reasonable Faith: Christian Truth and Apologetics. (Wheaton: Crossway Books 3rd ed, 2008). Hiebert, P. G., Transforming Worldviews: An Anthropological Understanding of How People Change (Baker Academic, 2008).

PE620 Christian Apologetics Status Elective Pre/co-requisites 8cp of 500-level OT and/or NT and/or CH and/or PE and/or TH Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to be able to understand and evaluate apologetic systems within a Christian framework; (b) To assist candidates to explain and critique issues raised by critics of Christian belief; (c) To impart to candidates the knowledge and skills to develop intelligent defences of the truth claims of Christian faith;

Content Section A: Apologetics and the Nature of Truth 1 The definition of apologetics; its relation to theology, study of religion and mission. 2 A brief review of intellectual attacks upon Christian faith and Christian responses, including the Apologists, Augustine, Aquinas, the Enlightenment, Darwinianism, secular humanism. 3 A review of Christian faith and its bearing upon truth as discerned in history, nature and society; the uniqueness of Christian revelation; the questions of truth, presuppositions and verification; epistemology. Section B: Critiques of Christian Faith 4 Historical: the reliability of the Scriptures; the historicity of Christ and his Resurrection; the emergence of the church. 5 Philosophical: atheism, pantheism, monism, deism, divine providence and miracles; scientific method; evil and suffering. 6 Behavioural: anthropological, sociological and psychological; behaviourism; Freudianism. Section C: Alternatives to Christian Belief 7 Non-supernatural alternatives: agnostic humanism; atheistic existentialism; Marxism; moralism; scientism and technocracy. 8 Supernatural alternatives: occultism; religious relativism; syncretism; New Age movements. Note Sections A, B and C are weighted approximately 20%, 40% and 40%. Bibliography

Section A: Apologetics and the Nature of Truth Alexander, D. (ed.), Can We be Sure About Anything?: Science, Faith and Postmodernism (Leicester: Apollos, 2005). Chang, C., Engaging Unbelief: a Captivating Strategy From Augustine and Aquinas (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2000).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Cowan, S. B., (ed.), Five Views on Apologetics (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2000). Dulles, A. R., A History of Apologetics (San Francisco: Ignatius Press, 2nd ed 2005). Edgar, W., Reasons of the Heart; Recovering Christian Persuasion (Phillipsburg, New Jersey: P&R Publishing Company, 2nd ed 2003). McGrath, A., Scientific Theology Vol. II; Reality (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2002). Oliphint K. S. and L. G. Tipton (eds), Revelation and Reason: New Essays in Reformed Apologetics (Phillipsburg: Presbyterian and Reformed, 2007). Oliphint, K. S., The Battle Belongs to the Lord: The Power of Scripture for Defending Our Faith (Phillipsburgh: P&R, 2003). Sire, J. W., Why Good Arguments Often Fail: Making a More Persuasive Case for Christ (Downers Grove : IVP, 2006) Stackhouse, J. G., Humble Apologetics: Defending the Faith Today (Oxford : Oxford University Press, 2002). Taylor, J., Introducing Apologetics: Cultivating Christian Commitment (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, 2006). Section B: Critiques of the Christian Faith Astley, J., et al, Problems in Theology: Science and Religion (London; New York: T & T Clark, 2004). Barnett, P., Finding the Historical Christ (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2009). Copan, P. and Craig, W. L.,. Contending with Christianity’s Critics: Answering New Atheists & Other Objectors (Nashville, TN: Broadman and Holman Academic, 2009) Demski, W. A. & J. M. Kushiner (eds), Signs of Intelligence: Understanding Intelligent Design (Grand Rapids: Brazos, 2001). Falk, D. R., Coming to Peace with Science : Bridging the Worlds Between Faith and Biology (Downers Grove: IVP, 2004). Hunter, C. M., Darwin’s God: Evolution and the Problem of Evil (Grand Rapids: Brazos, 2001). Johnson, P., The Wedge of Truth: Splitting the Foundations of Naturalism (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2000). Kaiser, W. C. Jr., The Old Testament Documents: Are They Reliable and Relevant? (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2001). Keller T., The Reason for God: Belief in an Age of Skepticism (Penguin, 2008) McGrath A. and J. C. McGrath, The Dawkins Delusion? Atheist Fundamentalism and the Denial of the Divine (Downers Grove: IVP, 2004). Samples K. R., World of Difference, A: Putting Christian Truth-Claims to the Worldview Test (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2007). Stackhouse, J. G., Jr., Can God Be Trusted? Faith and the Challenge of Evil (Downers Grove: IVP, 2008, 2nd ed). van Inwagen, P., (ed.), Christian Faith and the Problem of Evil (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004).

139

Section C: Alternatives to Christian Belief Baggini, J., Atheism: A Very Short Introduction (Oxford: OUP, 2003). Clifford, R. and P. Johnson, Jesus and the Gods of the New Age : Communicating Christ in Today's Spiritual Supermarket (Oxford: Lion Publishing, 2001). Dickson, J., A Spectator's Guide to World Religions : An Introduction to the Big Five (Sydney ; Blue Bottle Books, 2004). Glaser I., The Bible and Other Faiths, Christian Doctrine in Global Perspective (Downers Grove: IVP, 2004). Green, M., But Don’t All Religions Lead to God?: Navigating the Multi-faith Maze (Leicester: IVP, 2002). Hart, K., Postmodernism: A Beginner's Guide (Oxford: Oneworld Publications, 2004). Johnson, E. L. and S.L. Stanton (eds), Psychology and Christianity (Downers Grove: IVP, 2000). Netland H., Encountering Religious Pluralism The Challenge to Christian Faith & Mission (Downers Grove: IVP, 2001). Partridge, C., The Re-enchantment of the West: Alternative Spiritualities, Sacralization, Popular Culture, and occulture 2 Volumes (London: T&T Clark International, 2004, 2005). Smart, S., A Spectator's Guide to Worldviews : Ten Ways of Understanding Life Five (Sydney: Blue Bottle, 2007). Zacharias, R., Jesus Among Other Gods: The Absolute Claims of the Christian Message (Nashville: Word, 2000). Classics: Bush, L. R. (ed), Classical Readings in Christian Apologetics, A.D. 100-1800. (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1983). Lewis, C. S., Miracles : A Preliminary Study (London: Geoffrey Bles, 1948). Lewis, C. S., The Abolition of Man (New York: Macmillan; 1975, 1st published 1947). McGrath, A. E., Bridge-building: Effective Christian Apologetics (Leicester: IVP, 1992). Montgomery, J. W., Faith Founded On Fact: Essays in Evidential Apologetics (Nashville and New York: Thomas Nelson; 1978). Newbigin, L., Truth to Tell: The Gospel as Public Truth (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1991). Richardson, A., Christian apologetics (London: S.C.M., 1955) Schaeffer, F., The God Who is There: Speaking Historic Christianity into the Twentieth Century (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1998). Van Til, C. The Defense of the Faith (Phillipsburg: Presbyterian and Reformed, 3rd edition 1967). 

MDiv Unit Outlines

140

PE625–PE628 Philosophy of Religion Learning Outcomes (a) To help candidates to examine the form of Christian belief in its character, inner logic and validity in comparison with other forms of knowledge. (b) To encourage candidates to grapple with the philosophical problems inherent in the Christian faith by developing their powers of descriptive and critical analysis; (c) To provide candidates with tools for the exercise of a profound ministry with clarity, confidence and simplicity.  PE625 Philosophy of Religion Status Elective Pre/co-requisites 8cp of 500-level OT and/or NT and/or CH and/or PE and/or TH Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to be able to compare, contrast, interpret and critique a range of philosophical approaches to religion adopted throughout history; (b) To equip candidates to effectively critique different approaches to philosophical problems of knowledge, reality and morality from a Christian perspective; (c) To help candidates appreciate and critique various ways of responding to different philosophical approaches to religion; (d) To help candidates develop a coherent and integrated approach to Christian faith by developing their powers of descriptive and critical analysis. Content 1 A brief historical survey: Plato, Aristotle, Origen, Augustine, Aquinas, Occam, Reformation and Renaissance, Empiricism and Rationalism, Idealism, Existentialism, Positivism, Marxism, postmodernism and contemporary developments. 2 An introduction to the philosophical problems of the nature of knowledge, reality and morality. Bibliography Prescribed: Brown, C., Christianity and Western Thought (Downers Grove: IVP, 1990). Ganssle, G. E., Thinking About God First Steps in Philosophy (IVP, 2004). Davies, B., An Introduction to the Philosophy of Religion (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 3rd ed. 2003).

Wilkins, S. and A. G. Padgett, Christianity and Western Thought (Vol. II; Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2000). Recommended: Audi, R., Epistemology: A Contemporary Introduction to the Theory of Knowledge (London: Routledge, 1998). Audi, R., (ed.), The Cambridge Dictionary of Philosophy (Cambridge University Press, 2nd ed. 1999). Clark, S., God, Religion and Reality (London: SPCK, 1999). Davies, B., (ed.), Philosophy of Religion: A Guide and Anthology (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2000). Grenz, S. J., A Primer on Postmodernism (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1996). Hill, D. J., and R. D. Rauser (eds) Christian Philosophy A-Z (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 2006). Hoffecker, W. A. (ed.), Revolutions in Worldview (P&R Publishing, 2007). Kenny, A., A New History of Western Philosophy 4 volumes (Oxford: Oxford University, 2004-2007). Le Poidevin, R., Arguing for Atheism: An Introduction to the Philosophy of Religion.(London: Routledge, 1996). Loux, M., Metaphysics: A Contemporary Introduction. (London and New York: Routledge, 2006) Mann, W. E., The Blackwell Guide to the Philosophy of Religion (Hoboken: Wiley-Blackwell, 2005). Peterson, M. L. and R. J. VanArragon (eds), Contemporary Debates in Philosophy of Religion (Oxford: Blackwell, 2004). Plantinga, A., Warranted Christian Belief (Oxford University Press, 2000). Rachels J. and S. Rachels, The Elements of Moral Philosophy (Columbus: McGraw-Hill Companies, 6th ed. 2009). Stiver, D., Philosophy of Religious Language (Cambridge, MA: Blackwell, 1996). Taliaferro, C., Contemporary Philosophy of Religion: An Introduction (Malden: Blackwell, 1997). Tarnas, R., The Passion of the Western Mind (Pimlico, 1996). Thiselton, A. C., A Concise Encyclopedia of the Philosophy of Religion (Oneworld, 2003). Vardy, P. and P. Grosch, The Puzzle of Ethics (London: HarperCollins, 1999). Vardy, P. and J. Arliss, The Thinker's Guide to God (Ropley, O-Books, 2003). Wainwright, W., (ed) The Oxford Handbook of Philosophy of Religion(Oxford: Oxford University Press 2001). Wood, W. J., Epistemology: Becoming Intellectually Virtuous (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1998). Classics: Allen, D., Philosophy for Understanding Religion (SCM, 1985). Hick, J., Philosophy of Religion, Englewood (Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 3rd ed. 1983).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Mackie, J. L., The Miracle of Theism (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1982).  PE626 Issues in Philosophy of Religion Status Elective Pre/co-requisites 8cp of 500-level OT and/or NT and/or CH and/or PE and/or TH Learning Outcomes (a) To introduce candidates to a number of issues in philosophy of religion; (b) To enable candidates to be able to evaluate the significance of these for faith and to appropriately critique them logically and theologically; (c) To explore in some depth the ongoing implications of these issues for Christian faith; (d) To apply and develop pastoral, apologetic, evangelistic and educational implications of philosophical insights gained. Content 1 The knowledge of God, including the idea of deity and “proofs” of the existence of God. 2 The nature of religious experience; faith, revelation and reason. 3 Religious language, analogy, metaphor, parable, language-games, cognitive/emotive etc. 4 The nature of God’s relation to the world: creation; providence; miracles. 5 The problem of evil and suffering; theodicy. 6 Human nature: body and soul; mind; death and immorality. Candidates are to study four of the six topics outlined above. Candidates should pay particular attention to the pastoral, apologetic, evangelistic and educational implications of the insights gained in the specific issues studied. Bibliography General works (and see Bibliography for PE425) Davies, B., (ed.), Philosophy of Religion: a Guide and Anthology (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2000). Hick, J., Philosophy of Religion, (3rd ed Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1983). Le Poidevin, R., Arguing for Atheism: An Introduction to the Philosophy of Religion. (London: Routledge, 1996). Mackie, J. L., The Miracle of Theism (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1982). Mann W. E., The Blackwell Guide to the Philosophy of Religion (Hoboken: Wiley-Blackwell, 2005). Peterson M. L. and VanArragon R. J. (eds), Contemporary Debates in Philosophy of Religion (Oxford: Blackwell, 2004).

141

Sharma, A., The Philosophy of Religion: A Buddhist Perspective (Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1997). Stump, E., Aquinas (New York: Routledge Press, 2003). Taliaferro, C., Contemporary Philosophy of Religion: An Introduction (Malden, MA: Blackwell, 1997). Wainwright, W. (ed.) The Oxford Handbook of Philosophy of Religion (Oxford: Oxford University Press 2001). The knowledge of God, including the idea of deity and “proofs” of the existence of God. Clark, S., God, Religion and Reality (London: SPCK, 1999). Clayton, P., The Problem of God in Modern Thought (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Collins, R., "A Scientific Argument for the Existence of God: The Fine-Tuning Design Argument" pp. 47-75 in Michael J. Murray (ed), Reason for the Hope Within (Grand Rapids, Eerdmans, 1999). Dawkins, R., The God Delusion (London : Bantam Press, 2006). Glynn, P., God: The Evidence; The Reconciliation of Faith & Reason in a Postsecular World (Rocklin: Forum, 1997). Hunter, C. G., Darwin’s Proof: the Triumph of Religion over Science (Grand Rapids: Brazos, 2002). Kenny, A., "Knowledge, Belief, and Faith" Philosophy 82/3 (July 2007), 381–397 Markham, I., Truth & the Reality of God: An Essay in Natural Theology (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1998). Markham, I., Truth & the Reality of God: an Essay in Natural Theology (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1998). McGrath, A., Scientific Theology Vol. II; Reality (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2002). McGrath, A. and J. McGrath, The Dawkins Delusion (London: SPCK, 2007). Pennock, R. T. (ed.), Intelligent Design Creationism and Its Critics: Philosophical, Theological, and Scientific Perspectives (Cambridge: MIT Press, 2001). Plantinga, A., "The Dawkins Confusion - Naturalism ad absurdum" Books & Culture March 2007 available at http://www.christianitytoday.com/bc/2007/marapr /1.21.html Swinburne, R., The Existence of God (2nd ed., Clarendon Press, Oxford, 2004). Swinburne, R., The Resurrection of God Incarnate (Oxford: Clarendon Press,2003). Swinburne, R., Was Jesus God? (Oxford University Press, 2008). Vardy, P., The Puzzle of God (London: Fount, 1999). The nature of religious experience; faith, revelation and reason. Audi, R. and W. J. Wainwright, (ed.) Rationality, Religious Belief, and Moral Commitment, (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1987).

142

MDiv Unit Outlines

Dulles, A., Models of Revelation (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1992). Evans, C. S., Faith beyond Reason. (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 1998). Gula, R. M., Reason Informed by Faith (New York: Paulist, 1989). Helm, P. (ed.), Faith and Reason (Oxford; New York: OUP, 1999). Oliphint K. S., Reasons for Faith: Philosophy in the Service of Theology (P&R, 2006). Sire, J. W., Why Good Arguments Often Fail (Leicester: IVP, 2006). Stump, E. (ed.), Reasoned Faith (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1993). Swinburne, R., Faith and Reason (2nd ed. Clarendon Press: Oxford, 2005). Swinburne, R., Revelation (2nd ed. Clarendon Press: Oxford, 2007). Wood, W. J., Epistemology: Becoming Intellectually Virtuous (Downers Grove: IVP, 1998). Religious language, analogy, metaphor, parable, language-games, cognitive/emotive etc. Alston, W. P., Divine Nature and Human Language: Essays in Philosophical Theology (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1989). Hicks, P., Evangelicals and Truth: A Creative Proposal for a Postmodern Age. (Apollos, 1998). Kenneson, P. D., “There’s no such thing as objective truth, and it’s a good thing, too” pp 155-70 in Christian Apologetics in the Postmodern World edited by T. R. Phillips and D. L. Okholm (eds) IVP, 1995. Porter, S. E., Nature of Religious Language (Sheffield: SAP, 1996). Stiver, D., Philosophy of Religious Language (Cambridge: Blackwell, 1996) The nature of God’s relation to the world: creation; providence; miracles. Collins, C. J., The God of Miracles (Leicester: Apollos, 2001). Earman J., Hume’s Abject Failure: The Argument Against Miracles (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2000). Larmer, R. A., Water into Wine? An Investigation of the Concept of Miracle (Montreal: McGillQueen’s UP, 1995). Peters, T. and N. Hallanger, (eds) God’s Action in Nature’s World (Burlington: Ashgate, 2006). Swinburne, R., The Concept of Miracle. (2nd ed, London: MacMillan and Co, 1981). Swinburne, R., Providence and the Problem of God. (Oxford: Clarendon Press 1998). The problem of evil and suffering; theodicy. Adams, M. M., Horrendous Evils and the Goodness of God (Ithaca: Cornell University Press. 1999). Blocher, H., Evil and the Cross (Leicester: Apollos, 1994). Brand, P. and P. Yancy, Pain: The Gift Nobody Wants (New York: HarperCollins, 1993).

Howard-Snyder, D. (ed.), The Evidential Argument from Evil (Bloomington and Indianapolis: Indiana University Press, 1996). Lucien, R., What Are They Saying About the Theology of Suffering? (New York: Paulist, 1992). van Inwagen, P. (ed.), Christian Faith and the Problem of Evil (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Human nature: body and soul; mind; death and immorality. Baker, L. R., Persons and Bodies: A Constitution View (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000). Edwards, P. (ed.), Immortality (New York: Macmillan, 1992). Green, J. B. and S. Palmer (eds), In Search of the Soul: Four Views of the Mind-Body Problem. (Downers Grove: IVP, 2005). Habermas, G. R. and J. P. Moreland, Beyond Death: Exploring the Evidence of Immortality (Wheaton, IL: Crossway, 1998). Habermas, G. R., 1996. “Near Death Experiences and the Evidence — A Review Essay.” Christian Scholar's Review 26:1, pp. 78-85 Hasker, W., The Emergent Self (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1999). Ward, K., Religion and Human Nature (Oxford; New York: Clarendon; OUP, 1998). Classics: Anselm, St., St. Anselm's Proslogion with a Reply on Behalf of the Fool by Gaunilo and the Author's Reply to Gaunilo, M. J. Charlesworth (trans) (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1965). Aquinas, St. T., Summa Theologiae. Trans. by Fathers of the English Dominican Province (New York: Benziger Bros., 1948). Aquinas, St. T., On the Truth of the Catholic Faith: Summa Contra Gentiles, Anton C. Pegis (trans.), (Garden City, NY: Doubleday Image Books, 1955). Aristotle. Categories and On Interpretation Hugh Tredinnick (trans) (Loeb Classical Library. (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1938). Augustine, St., Concerning the City of God Against the Pagans Henry Bettenson trans. (Harmondsworth, Middlesex: Penguin Books, 1972). Ayer, A. J. Language, Truth and Logic. (2nd ed., New York: Dover Publications: 1946). Butler, J.,. The Analogy of Religion. (1st pub. London, 1736. New York: Frederick Ungar, 1961). Hartshorne, C., The Divine Relativity (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1948). Hick, J. Evil and the God of Love, (rev, ed. New York: Harper and Row, 1978). Hick, J., Philosophy of Religion (3rd ed. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall. 1983). Hume, D., A Treatise of Human Nature L.A. SelbyBigge (ed) (2nd ed. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1975). Hume, D., David Hume: Writings on Religion. A. Flew (ed) (Peru: Open Court, 1992).

MDiv Unit Outlines

143

Hume, D., Dialogues Concerning Natural Religion N. Kemp-Smith (ed) New York: Bobbs-Merrill, 1947). Hume, D., Enquiries Concerning Human Understanding. Ed. L.A. Selby-Bigge. 3rd ed. (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1975). James, W., The Varieties of Religious Experience (1st pub.1902, Mineola: Courier Dover Publications, 2002). Kant, I., Religion within the boundaries of mere reason and other writings A. W. Wood, G. Di Giovanni, R. M. Adams (contributors); A.W. Wood, G. Di Giovanni (trans); (Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 1998). Lewis, C. S., The Problem of Pain, (London: Fontana Books. 1957). Lewis, C. S., Miracles. (New York: Macmillan, 1947). Locke, J., A Discourse on Miracles. I.T. Ramsey(ed) (1st Pub 1706, London: A. and C. Black, 1958). Maimonides, M., The Guide of the Perplexed. 2 vols. S. Pines. (trans) (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1963). Owen, H. P., Concepts of Deity (New York: Herder and Herder. 1971). Paley, W., A View of The Evidences of Christianity (1st pub. 1794 New York: James Miller, 1849). Plantinga, A., God, Freedom, and Evil (New York: Harper and Row; 1974). Plato, “Euthyphro”, in Euthyphro, Apology of Socrates, Crito John Burnet (ed) (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1986).

community and social ethics. The particular topics are to be chosen by the approved teaching institution concerned, in consultation with candidates. The course coordinator is responsible for submitting for approval a proposed unit outline along with assessment plans to the moderator for Philosophy and Ethics.



Learning Outcomes (a) To prepare candidates for active engagement in philosophy through the intensive study of contemporary issues and classical readings in philosophy of religion; (b) To enable candidates to develop an advanced level of philosophical understanding in two specific areas of study; (c) To develop the candidates’ understanding of the skills involved in philosophy and enable them to effectively utilise those skills in the research process; (d) To enhance collegial skills in analysis and research; (e) To enable candidates to be able to comprehend and effectively respond to the personal and pastoral implications of the areas studied.

PE688 Ethics Seminar Status Elective Pre/co-requisites 4cps PE Learning Outcomes (a) To prepare candidates for active engagement in ethical analysis through the intensive study of contemporary issues and classical readings in Christian ethics; (b) To enable candidates to develop an advanced level of ethical understanding in two specific areas of study; (c) To develop the candidates’ understanding of the skills involved in ethical analysis and enable them to effectively utilise those skills in the research process; (d) To enhance collegial skills in analysis and research; (e) To enable candidates to be able to comprehend and effectively respond to the personal and pastoral implications of the areas studied. Content Section A: Issues study A detailed study of two ethical issues—one from the area of personal and medical ethics and one from

Section B: Readings in Ethics The study of texts in Christian ethics. Units approved for the Master of Arts (Theology) may be used as the basis for this unit, adjusted appropriately to reflect advanced level undergraduate study for candidates enrolled in the undergraduate degrees. Bibliography The course coordinator is responsible for submitting for approval a proposed unit outline with set texts and recommended reading in Christian ethics and assessment plans to the moderator for Philosophy and Ethics.  PE689 Philosophy Seminar Status Elective Pre/co-requisites 4cps PE

Content Section A: Issues study A detailed study of two philosophical issues—one from the area of science and religion and one from the area of epistemology. The particular topics are to be chosen by the approved teaching institution concerned, in consultation with candidates. The course coordinator is responsible for submitting for approval a proposed unit outline along with assessment plans to the moderator for Philosophy and Ethics. Section B: Readings in Ethics The study of texts in philosophy of religion.

MDiv Unit Outlines

144

Units approved for the Master of Arts (Theology) may be used as the basis for this unit, adjusted appropriately to reflect advanced level undergraduate study for candidates enrolled in the undergraduate degrees.

Note: This topic should complement, not repeat, students’ studies in CH301 and CH302, or CH305. 3

An introduction to the cultural factors which affect mission today, including: (a) Culture and worldview; beliefs, values and behaviour; ethnocentrism; cultural change; (b) Culture and communication; dynamically equivalent communication; culture shock; (c) Indigeneity, contextualisation, inculturation.

4

A survey of strategies and issues in contemporary Christian world mission, including: (a) World needs and strategies to meet them; (b) Strategies for evangelism and church planting among different people groups; (c) Urban mission and development priorities; evangelism and justice; (d) Pluralism; dialogue with those of other faiths.

5

Mobilising local churches in support of world mission: (a) Types of mission agencies; resource policies, operational structures, denominational links; (b) Mission education and training in local churches; (c) The care of missionaries: pre-departure, home assignment, permanent return; (d) Developing active prayer, finance and other support activities.

Bibliography The course coordinator is responsible for submitting for approval a proposed unit outline with set texts and recommended reading in philosophy of religion and assessment plans to the moderator for Philosophy and Ethics. 

DEPARTMENT OF MINISTRY AND P RACTICE EVANGELISM AND MISSIOLOGY (EM) EM501 Mission Perspectives Status Elective Exclusions EM505 and EM506. Learning Outcomes This unit is primarily designed for students who do not plan further mission studies. However, it can function as a general introduction for other units in this Field.

Bibliography At the end of this unit, the student should be able to: (a) Summarise the biblical, historical, cultural and strategic perspectives on mission in the contemporary world; (b) Critically appraise the past, present and future development of world Christian movements; (c) Devise potential responses to the cultural challenges confronted in communicating the Christian gospel cross-culturally; (d) Generate a mission awareness and education program appropriate for their own local church. Content 1 A basic study of the biblical witness to the mission of God to humanity, including: (a) God’s desire to be known; global perspective; (b) Abraham, Israel and the divine intention for all nations; (c) Teaching of Jesus: salvation to Jews and Gentiles; (d) the post-Easter church: obligations to all nations; (e) The nature of mission in the New Testament. 2 An introduction to the expansion of the Christian movement, including: (a) Key developments in mission history; (b) Pioneers in Christian mission; (c) The current status of the world Christian movement: statistics; problem areas; challenges.

Prescribed: Conn, H., The Urban Face of Mission (Phillipsburg, NJ: Presbyterian & Reformed, 2002). Elmer, D., Cross-cultural Connections: Stepping Out and Fitting In Around the World (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2002). Guthrie, S., Missions in the Third Millennium: 21 Key Trends for the 21st Century (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2002). Hiebert, P. and E. H. Meneses, Incarnational Ministry: Planting Churches in Band, Tribal, Peasant, and Urban Societies (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1995). Köstenberger, A. J. and P. O’Brien, Salvation to the Ends of the Earth: A Biblical Theology of Mission (Leicester: Apollos, 2001). Moreau, A. S., et al (eds.), Deliver Us from Evil: an Uneasy Frontier in Christian Mission (Monrovia: MARC, 2002). Moreau, A. S., G. R. Corwin and G. B. McGee, Introducing World Missions: A Biblical, Historical, and Practical Survey (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2004). Pocock, M., G. Van Rheenen and D. McConnell, The Changing Face of World Missions: Engaging Contemporary Issues and Trends (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, 2005). Smith, D. W., Against the Stream: Christianity and Mission on an Age of Globalization (Leicester: IVP, 2003).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Taylor, W. D. (ed.), Global Missiology for the 21st Century (Grand Rapids, Baker Academic, 2000). Tucker, R. A., From Jerusalem to Irian Jaya: A Biographical History of Christian Missions (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2004). Walls, A., The Missionary Movement in Christian History: Studies in Transmission of Faith (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1996). Webb, A., Your Church Can Make a World of Difference (Sydney: OMF, 2005). Winter, R., et al (eds), Perspectives on the World Christian Movement: A Reader (3rd ed.; Pasadena, CA: William Carey, 1999). Wright, C. J., The Mission of God: Unlocking the Bible’s Grand Narrative (Nottingham: IVP, 2006). Recommended: Haugen, G. A., Good News About Injustice: A Witness of Courage in a Hurting World (Leister: IVP, 1999). Hiebert, P., Anthropological Reflections on Missiological Issues (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1994). Tiplady, R. One World or Many? The Impact of Globalization on Mission (Pasadena: William Carey, 2003). Classics: Kirk, J. A., What is Mission? (London: Darton, Longman and Todd , 1994.) Samuel, V and C. Sugden, Mission as Transformation (Oxford: Regnum, 1999). Yates, T., Christian Mission in the Twentieth Century (Cambridge University Press, 1994).  EM502 History of Christian Mission Status Elective Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, the student should be able to: (a) Relate the expansion of the church from the apostolic age to the present day, including key individuals and movements; (b) Evaluate the motives and methodologies involved in the mission outreach of the church; (c) Analyse the continuing influences of previous mission policies on the subsequent development of the mission ministry of the church; (d) Reconstruct the history of mission in a particular area or amongst a particular people group. Content Section A: The Apostolic Age to the 19th Century 1 The spread of Christianity to AD 500 (especially in the Roman Empire); the conversion of Europe (to AD 1500); the effects of the rise of Islam. 2 Reformation and Counter Reformation (1500– 1750), including missions in the colonial empires of Portugal, Spain and France especially the Jesuits in Asia and the Americas; initial Protestant efforts.

3

145

Reawakening and development of missionary concern in churches in Europe, Britain and the USA in the 18th and 19th centuries.

Section B: The Church Planted in Different Continents Students are expected to study one topic in this Section in detail. 4 Missions in the Indian sub-continent in the 19th century, including Serampore and the early Baptists; Duff and education; mass movements in South India. 5 Missions in China from 1807, including the relationship of missions to the political situation in the 19th century; Hudson Taylor and the CIM; the church under communism after 1949. 6 Missions in Africa, south of the Sahara, including Creole Christianity; Moffatt, Livingstone; the church in Uganda and the Niger Delta to 1914; African Independent churches. 7 Missions in the Muslim world. 8 Missions in Latin America since 1800, including Roman Catholic and Protestant work. 9 Missions in the Pacific. 10 Missionary endeavour in Australia and New Zealand. Section C: Developments in the 20th Century 11 Colonialism, nationalism and mission to 1945. 12 The effects of World Wars I and II on missions. 13 The Edinburgh Missionary Conference 1910; the International Missionary Council to 1961; the work of Mott and Oldham. 14 Trends in missionary work since 1945, including the Roman Catholic Church since Vatican II, the Church Growth movement, ecumenical mission, the Lausanne Movement and international conferences. Bibliography Prescribed: Anderson, G. H., et al, Mission Legacies: Biographical Studies of Leaders of the Modern Missionary Movement (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1994). Ellis, I. M., A Century of Mission and Unity: A Centernary Perspective on the 1910 Edinburgh World Missionary Conference (Dublin: Columba Press, 2010). Harris, J., One Blood: 200 Years of Aboriginal Contact With Christianity (rev. ed.; Sydney: Albatross, 1994). Irvin, D. T. and S. W. Sunquist, History of the World Christian Movement: Earliest Christianity to 1453 (Vol. I; Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 2001). Lewis, D. M. (ed.), Christianity Reborn: The Global Expansion of Evangelicalism in the Twentieth Century (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Sanneh, L., Whose Religion is Christianity? The Gospel Beyond the West (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2003). Sanneh, L., The Changing Face of Christianity (New York: OUP, 2005). Schnabel, E. J., Early Christian Mission (2 vols.; Leicester: Appollos, 2004).

MDiv Unit Outlines

146

Shenk, W. (ed.), Enlarging the Story: Perspectives on Writing World Christian History (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 2002). Stanley, B., The World Missionary Conference, Edinburg 1910 (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2009). Stanley, B. (ed.), Christian Missions and the Enlightenment (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1995). Tucker, R. A., From Jerusalem to Irian Jaya: A Biographical History of Christian Missions (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2004). Walls, A., The Missionary Movement in Christian History: Studies in Transmission of Faith (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1996). Walls, A., The Cross-cultural Process in Christian History (Maryknoll: Orbis, 2002). Recommended: Jenkins, P., The Next Christendom: The Coming of Global Christianity (Oxford; New York: OUP, 2002). Thomas, N., Classic Texts in Mission and World Christianity (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1995). Classics: Neill, S. C. and O. Chadwick, A History of Christian Missions (rev.; 2nd ed.; New York: Penguin, 1991).

Content Section A: Biblical Theology of Mission 1 Israel’s election and missional role in the Old Testament 2 God and the nations in the Old Testament 3 The prophets, the nations and God’s missional purpose. 4 Jesus, the gospel and the nations. 5 Mission in the Early Church. 6 The Pauline perspective on mission. 7 The church, the individual and ‘sentness’. Section B: Contemporary Theology of Mission 8 The Missionary Conferences of the twentieth century. 9 Development of ecumenical, evangelical and Roman Catholic theologies of mission. 10 Religious pluralism and relationships with other faiths. 11 Salvation, dialogue and the communication role of the church. 12 Evangelism and social justice. 13 Contextualisation, presence and proclamation. 14 Development of indigenous theologies. Bibliography

 EM505 and EM506 Missiology These two units provide an introduction to the study of missiology, including mission theology, history and practice. Learning Outcomes (a) To enable candidates to gain an awareness of the major issues in biblical and contemporary theologies of mission; (b) To inform candidates of the scope and development of Christian missionary activity to the present day, in the light of the cultural and sociological factors which affect mission today; (c) To provide opportunity for candidates to study a particular area of Christian mission in greater depth.  EM505 Theology of Mission Status Elective Exclusions EM501 Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, students should be able to: (a) Relate a biblical theology of mission from both the Old and the New Testaments. (b) Compare and contrast the key issues in the diversity of contemporary theologies of mission. (c) Appraise contemporary theologies of mission in the light of a biblical theology.

Prescribed: Bolt, P. and M. Thompson (eds), The Gospel to the Nations: Perspectives on Paul's Mission (Leicester; Downers Grove, IL: Apollos; IVP, 2000). Corrie, J., Dictionary of Mission Theology (Nottingham: IVP, 2007). Engel, J. F. and W. A. Dyrness. Changing the Mind of Missions: Where Have We Gone Wrong? (Downers Grove: IVP, 2000). Glasser, A., Announcing the Kingdom: the Story of God's Mission in the Bible (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2003). Guthrie, S., Missions in the Third Millenium: 21 Key trends for the 21st Century (Carlisle: Paternoster Press, 2000). Kaiser, W. C., Mission in the Old Testament: Israel as a Light to the Nations (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2000). Kirk, J. A., What is Mission? Theological Explorations (London: Darton, Longman & Todd, 1999). Köstenberger, A. J. and P. O’Brien, Salvation to the Ends of the Earth: A Biblical Theology of Mission (Leicester: Apollos, 2001). Packer, J. I. and T. C. Oden, One Faith: The Evangelical Consensus (Downers Grove:IVP, 2004). Peskett, H. and V. Ramachandra, The Message of Missions: The Glory of Christ in All Time and Space (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2003). Piper, J., Let the Nations Be Glad! The Supremacy of God in Missions (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Baker, 2003). Senior, D. and C. Stuhlmueller, The Biblical Foundations for Mission (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1983).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Tennent, T., Theology in the Context of World Christianity: How the Global Church is Influencing the Way We Think about and Discuss Theology, (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2007). Van Engen, C. E. et al, The Good News of the Kingdom: Mission Theology for the Third Millennium (Eugene, OR: Wipf & Stock, 1998). Recommended: Petrella, I., Latin American Liberation Theology: The Next Generation (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 2005). Taylor, W. (ed.), Global Missiology for the 21st Century: the Iguassu Dialogue (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2000). Classics: Bosch, D., Transforming Mission: Paradigm Shifts in Theology of Mission (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1991).  EM506 Issues in Missiology Status Elective Exclusions EM501 Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, students should be able to: (a) Relate the development of Christian missionary activity to the present day; so as to identify the key movements and individuals; (b) Compare and contrast the key cultural and sociological factors which affect mission theory and practice today; (c) Undertake an analytical study of the development and current status of Christian mission in a particular geographical region. Content Section A: Selected Topics in the History of Christian Mission 1 The expansion of Christianity to AD 312 and the rise of monasticism; 2 Celtic monasticism (Patrick) and the work of Irish peregrini in the British Isles and on the Continent (Columba, Aidan, Columbanus, Gallus); 3 The Roman mission to England (Augustine) and the work of Anglo-Saxon missionaries on the Continent (Boniface); 4 The rise of Islam and early Franciscan attempts to win Muslim people (Francis himself, Ramon Lull); 5 The founding of the Society of Jesus and the work of notable Jesuits (Xavier, de Nobili, Ricci); 6 The rise of Pietism and early Protestant endeavours from the Continent (the Danish-Halle mission and the Moravian movement); 7 William Carey and the foundation of the voluntary societies

8 9

147

James Hudson Taylor and the beginnings of the faith mission movement. Key developments in the late 19th century and 20th centuries (eg. Student Volunteer Movement, “tentmaking”, unreached peoples, Third World mission, etc.)

Section B: Gospel and Culture 10 What is Culture? 11 A Theology of Gospel and Culture. 12 Processes by which Cultures change 13 Conversion and Culture 14 The Indigenous Church 15 Ancestor Worship 16 Mission in Australian Culture 17 Aboriginal Culture and the Gospel. Section C: Area Study A study of the history of mission, patterns of thought of the peoples, and the results of missionary activity in one of the following areas: 1 Africa (south of the Sahara) 2 Middle East 3 Indian subcontinent 4 East Asia 5 South America 6 Australia, or New Zealand and the Pacific. Alternatively, an in depth study of a country or smaller areas may be submitted. Bibliography Prescribed: Anderson, G. H., et al, Mission Legacies: Biographical Studies of Leaders of the Modern Missionary Movement (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1994). Athyal, S., Church in Asia Today: Challenges and Opportunities (Singapore: Asia Lausanne Committee for World Evangelization, 1996). Burnett, D., Clash of Worlds (London: Monarch, 2002). Bjarati, D., Living Water and Indian Bowl: An Analysis of Christian Failings in Communicating, Christ to Hindus, with Suggestions Toward Improvements (Pasadena: William Carey, 2004). Christian, J., God of the Empty Handed: Poverty, Power and the Kingdom of God (Monrovia: MARC,1999). Escobar, S., The New Global Mission: The Gospel from Everywhere to Everywhere (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2003). Harris, J., We Wish We’d Done More (Adelaide: Open Book, 1998). Hiebert, P., Anthropological Reflections on Missiological Issues (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1994). Iraola, A E., True Confucians, Bold Christians: Korean Missionary Experience; A Model for the Third Millenium, (New York: Rodopi, 2007). Irvin, D. T. and S. W. Sunquist, History of the World Christian Movement: Earliest Christianity to 1453 (Vol. I; Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 2001).

MDiv Unit Outlines

148

Lewis, D. M. (ed.), Christianity Reborn: The Global Expansion of Evangelicalism in the Twentieth Century (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Lingenfelter, S., Transforming Culture: A Challenge for Christian Missions (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Baker, 1990). McDonald, H., Blood, Bones and Spirit: Aboriginal Christianity in an East Kimberley Town (Melbourne: Melbourne University, 2002). Ramachandra, V. Gods That Fail, (Downers Grove: IVP,1996). Sanneh, L., Disciples of all Nations: Pillars of World Christianity (Oxford: OUP, 2008). Tucker, R. A., From Jerusalem to Irian Jaya: A Biographical History of Christian Missions (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2004). Walls, A., The Missionary Movement in Christian History: Studies in Transmission of Faith (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1996). Recommended: Jenkins, P., The Next Christendom: The Coming of Global Christianity (Oxford; New York: OUP, 2002). Sweet, L. (ed.), The Church in Emerging Culture: Five Perspectives (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2003). Wells, D., God in the Wasteland (Grand Rapids: Wm.B. Eerdmans, 1994). Classics: Neill, S. C. and O. Chadwick, A History of Christian Missions, (Rev. 2nd ed.; London; New York: Penguin, 1990). Nicholls, B., Contextualization: A Theology of Gospel and Culture (Vancouver: Regent College, 1979). Stott, J., Making Christ Known, Carlisle: (Paternoster Press, 1996).

2 3 4 5

attention to what constitutes the gospel message and varied approaches according to audience; Divine sovereignty and human response, faith, conversion and baptism. Motivations for evangelism; the relation of proclamation to meeting human need. Proclamation, witness and presence; the place of evangelism in Christian education and worship. Hindrances to evangelism, including brief consideration of common objections to the gospel.

Section B: Principles of Evangelism 6 The role of the evangelist: the vocation to be an evangelist; lifestyle and message; the role(s) of the congregation in the evangelist’s ministry. 7 Communicating faith: person to person; through relationships; small groups; life networks; earning the right to speak; mass evangelism. 8 Evangelism of various groups: for example youth, nominal church members, ethnic groups, secular humanists, factory workers. 9 Appropriate evangelistic methods for different situations and contexts (including dialogue meetings, evangelistic church services, distinctive approaches for women and men); examination of two methods of personal evangelism. Section C: Field Work 10 Personal involvement (with supervision) in not less than 20 hours in specifically evangelistic programmes, including at least 5 hours of direct evangelism by the student. These hours exclude preparation and writing-up time. This work should include both inter-personal and small group contexts, using the methods studied in topic 9. This work should include people known to the student as evangelist, and those unknown. Large group and media settings may also be used.

 Bibliography EM524 Principles of Evangelism Status Elective Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, the student should be able to: (a) Summarise a biblical basis and definition of evangelism that takes into account related key theological issues; (b) Relate the task of evangelism to various generational and social groupings, and identify appropriate forms of communication that allow for cultural and worldview factors; (c) Appraise various programs of evangelism through personal involvement and critique, and identify their own areas of competency and any areas needing development. Content Section A: Biblical and Theological Perspectives 1 An examination of evangelistic proclamation in Acts and the other New Testament texts, with

Prescribed Allison, L. and M. Anderson, Going Public With the Gospel: Reviving Evangelistic Proclamation (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2004). Chapman, J., Know and Tell the Gospel (Sydney: Matthias Media, 1998). Claydon, D., Connecting Across Cultures (Melbourne: Acorn Press, 2000.) Claydon, D. (ed.), A New Vision, A New Heart, A Renewed Call (Pasadena: William Carey, 2005). Cowan, S. B. and W. L. Craig, Five Views on Apologetics (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2000). Drummond, L., Reaching GenerationNext: Effective Evangelism in Today’s Culture (Grand Rapids: Baker 2002). Finney, J., Emerging Evangelism (London: Darton, Longman & Todd, 2004). Hughes, B. and J. Bellamy, A Passion for Evangelism: Turning Vision into Action (Adelaide: OpenBook, 2004). Kallenberg, B. J., Live to Tell: Evangelism for a Postmodern Age (Grand Rapids: Brazos, 2002).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Long, J., Emerging Hope: A Strategy for Reaching Postmodern Generations (2nd ed.; Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2004). McQuoid, S., Sharing the Good News in C21: Evangelism in a Local Church Context (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2002). Mittelberg, M., Building a Contagious Church: Revolutionizing the Way We View and Do Evangelism (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2000). Pippert, R. M., Saltshaker Resources: An Evangelism Toolkit (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2003). Richardson, R., Evangelism Outside the Box: New Ways to Help People Experience the Good News (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2000). Sire, J. W., The Universe Next Door (4th ed.; Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2004). Recommended: Little, P. & M. Little, Know Why You Believe (5th ed.; Wheaton, IL: Victor, 2003).  EM603 Biblical Theology of Mission Status Elective Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, the student should be able to: (a) Relate the nature of God as a missionary God, concerned for the salvation of the whole creation; (b) Demonstrate the constant intention of God, throughout the period of biblical revelation, to redeem humanity and restore creation; (c) Summarise the divine intention and enablement for human co-operation in the universal purposes of God; (d) Integrate their study of the Scriptures, theology and personal understanding of vocation in mission. Content Section A: Old Testament Perspectives 1 God, Creation and the world; human sin and the effects of the fall. 2 The missiological significance of Babel and the Flood. 3 The Abrahamic covenant; God and Israel: election, covenant and responsibility. 4 Yahweh versus Baal; Israel and the nations; universal hope in the Psalms. 5 The missionary emphasis of the prophets; the Servant of the Lord. 6 The kingdom of God in the Old Testament; intertestamental hopes, nationalistic and universal. Section B: New Testament Perspectives 7 The synoptic Gospels and the ministry of Jesus; the Kingdom of God and the ministry to Israel; the place of the gentiles; the missionary mandate. 8 The Gospel of John: the “world” and its need; the children of God; Abrahamic sonship; Jesus and his own as “sent”.

149

9

The Holy Spirit in the mission of the church; missionary principles in Acts; ethnic barriers and cross cultural mission. 10 The Pauline theology of mission: (a) Jew and Gentile in Christ; the new humanity and the renewal of creation. (b) The mission of the church and the powers; conflict, suffering and mission; (c) Mission and future hope; the consummation of all things in Christ. Bibliography Prescribed: Blauw, J., The Missionary Nature of the Church; A Survey of the Biblical Theology of Mission (London: Lutterworth, 2003). Bolt, P. and M. Thompson (eds), The Gospel to the Nations: Perspectives on Paul's Mission: in honour of Peter T. O'Brien (Leicester: Apollos, 2000). Glasser, A., Announcing the Kingdom: the Story of God's Mission in the Bible (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2003). Kaiser, W. C., Mission in the Old Testament: Israel as a Light to the Nations (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2000). Köstenberger, A. J. and P. O’Brien, Salvation to the Ends of the Earth: A Biblical Theology of Mission (Leicester: Apollos, 2001). Larkin, W. J., et al, Mission in the New Testament: An Evangelical Approach (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1998). O’Brien, P. T., Gospel and Mission in the Writings of Paul: An Exegetical and Theological Analysis (Grand Rapids; Carlisle: Baker; Paternoster, 1995). Okoye, J. C., Israel and the Nations: A Mission Theology of the Old Testament (Maryknoll: Orbis Books, 2006). Peskett, H. and V. Ramachandra, The Message of Mission: The Glory of Christ in All Time and Space (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2003). Sanders, J., No Other Name: An Investigation Into the Destiny of the Unevangelized (Eugene, OR: Wipf & Stock, 2001). Sanneh, L., Disciples of all Nations: Pillars of World Christianity (Oxford: OUP, 2008). Senior, D. and C. Stuhlmueller, The Biblical Foundations for Mission (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1983). Van Engen, C. E., et al, The Good News of the Kingdom: Mission Theology for the Third Millennium (Eugene, OR: Wipf & Stock, 1998). Recommended: Park, Joon-Sik, Missional Ecclesiologies in Creative Tension: H Richard Niebuhr and John Howard Yoder (New York: Peter Lang, 2007).

MDiv Unit Outlines

150

Classic: Bosch, D., Transforming Mission: Paradigm Shifts in Theology of Mission (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1991).  EM604 Contemporary Theology of Mission Status Elective Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, students should be able to: (a) Outline the changing world situation since 1945, especially the emergence of post-colonialism; (b) Delineate the relationship between post 1945 missiological perspectives and the emergence of various socio-political situations and movements; (c) Compare and contrast the key issues present in the development of the diversity of theologies of mission. (d) Evaluate these contemporary developments in the light of a biblical understanding of mission. Content A study of the theological issues arising in the Missionary and Ecumenical Conferences of the 20th century, with special reference to post-1961 conferences, including: 1 The nature of mission; Missio Dei; holistic mission; evangelism and social justice; development; humanisation. 2 Holistic salvation; liberation theology; the poor in God’s mission; evangelism; education, social responsibility, medicine and development. 3 Conversion in a pluralistic world; syncretism; universalism. 4 The church in relation to other faiths: dialogue; Christian presence; anonymous Christians. 5 Developments in ecumenical, evangelical, charismatic, and Roman Catholic theologies of mission. Bibliography Prescribed: Ajulu, D., Holism in Development (Monrovia: MARC, 2001). Bevans, S. B. and R. P. Schroeder, Constants in Context: A Theology of Mission for Today (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 2004). Eitel, K. E. (ed.), Missions in Contexts of Violence, (Pasadena: William Carey, 2007). Guthrie, S., Missions in the Third Millennium, (Carlisle: Paternoster Press, 2000). Hiebert, P. G., Missiological Implications of Epistemological Shifts (Harrisburg, PA: TPI, 1999).

Kirk, J. A., What is Mission?: Theological Explorations (London: Darton, Longman & Todd, 1999). Lewis, D. M. (ed.), Christianity Reborn: The Global Expansion of Evangelicalism in the Twentieth Century (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Myers, B. L., Walking with the Poor: Principles and Practices of Transformational Development, (Maryknoll: Orbis, 1999). Packer, J. I. and T. C. Oden, One Faith:The Evangelical Consensus (Downers Grove: IVP, 2004). Petrella, I., Latin American Liberation Theology: The Next Generation (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 2005). Ram, E. (ed.), Transforming Health, (Monrovia: MARC, 1995). Samuel, V. and C. Sugden (eds), The Church in Response to Human Need (Eugene, OR: Wipf & Stock, 2003). Samuel, V. and A. Hauser, Proclaiming Christ in Christ’s Way: Studies in Integral Evangelism, (Oxford: Regnum Books, 1989). Sanneh, L., Whose Religion Is Christianity? The Gospel Beyond the West (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2003). Stone, B., Evangelism After Christendom: The Theology and Practice of Christian Witness, (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2007). Thomas, N., Classic Texts in Mission and World Christianity (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1995). Recommended: Schreiter, R., Constructing Local Theologies (Maryknoll: Orbis 1996). Taylor, W. (ed.), Global Missiology for the 21st Century: the Iguassu Dialogue (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2000). Classics: Bosch, D., Transforming Mission: Paradigm Shifts in Theology of Mission (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1991). Nicholls, B. J., In Word and Deed: Evangelism and Social Responsibility, (Carlisle: Paternoster Press, 1985). Samuel, V. & C. Sugden, Mission as Transformation, (Oxford:Regnum, 1999).  EM608 Cross-cultural Communication Status Elective Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, the student should be able to: (a) Outline the dynamics of the communication process and their place in communication theory;

MDiv Unit Outlines

(b) Identify the divine usage of communication patterns, and understand the Bible from a communicational perspective; (c) Compare and contrast the principles and patterns involved in cross-cultural missionary witness with a view to being able to employ them in a ministry context. (d) Analyse their own past and present communicational activity with a view to improving their communication skills in diverse contexts; (e) Predict the process and meaning of the contextualisation of the gospel in particular cultural situations. Content 1 Theories and models of cross-cultural communication: Culture (Nida); Incarnational (Kraft); Bonding (Brewster & Brewster); Christ and Culture (Niebuhr). 2 World views and their significance for cross-cultural communication, with reference to: naturalist; animist; folk religion; Hindu-Buddhist; Chinese; monotheist; syncretistic and multi-religious worldviews. 3 Cognitive processes: conceptual, intuitional, concrete relational; language and communication; cultural distance and audience response. 4 Behavioural patterns: cultural norms and values; body language, space, time, para-language, artefacts and the environment. 5 The influence of social structures on communication; indigenous modes of communication: music; drama; sports; puppetry etc. 6 Media influences: media and message; audience response. 7 Contextualisation: (a) Its necessity; biblical mandate and examples ; (b) The process of contextualisation: criteria, stage and limitations; (c) Cultural examples of contextualisation critically evaluated. Bibliography Prescribed: Claydon, D., Connecting Across Cultures (Melbourne: Acorn Press, 2000). Claydon, D (ed.), A New Vision, A New Heart, A Renewed Call ( Pasadena: William Carey, 2005). Bevans, S. B., Models of Contextual Theology Rev. ed. (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 2004). Burnett, D., Clash of Worlds (London: Monarch, 2002). Carson, D. A. (ed.), Biblical Interpretation and the Church: The Problem of Contextualization (Eugene, OR: Wipf & Stock, 2002). Elmer, D., Cross-Cultural Connections: Stepping Out and Fitting in Around the World (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2002). Fleming, D. E., Contextualisation in the New Testament: Patterns for Theology and Mission (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2005).

151

Hesselgrave, D. J., Communicating Christ CrossCulturally (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1991). Hesselgrave, D. J. and E. Rommen, Contextualization: Meanings, Methods, Models (Pasadena, CA: William Carey, 2000). Kraft, C. H., Culture, Communication, and Christianity: A Selection of Writings (Pasadena, CA: William Carey, 2001). Lingenfelter, J. E. and S. G. Lingenfelter, Teaching Cross-Culturally: An Incarnation Model for Learning and Teaching (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2003). Lingenfelter, S. G. and M. K. Mayers, Ministering Cross-culturally: An Incarnational Model for Personal Relationships (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Baker, 2003). Sweet, L. (ed.), The Church in Emerging Culture: Five Perspectives (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2003). Weaver, G., Culture, Communication and Conflict: Readings in Intercultural Relations (Boston: Pearson, 2000). Recommended: Gilliland, D. S. (ed.), The Word Among Us: Contextualizing Theology for Mission Today (Eugene, OR: Wipf & Stock, 2002). Hofstede, G. H. and G. J. Hofstede, Cultures and Organizations: Software of the mind (2nd ed.; New York: McGraw-Hill, 2005). Sire, J. W., Naming the Elephant: Worldview As a Concept (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2004).  EM609 Cultural Anthropology Status Elective Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, the student should be able to: (a) Illustrate the value and potential ways of utilising the insights and knowledge of cultural anthropology as a tool in Christian mission; (b) Present a Christian perspective upon anthropology and an anthropological perspective upon Christianity; (c) Compare and contrast the patterns and processes of culture and cultural change, thus enabling them to understand their own cultural context and to accept the validity of different cultures; (d) Explain culture as the context within which God interacts with people and the significance of this to the mission of the church in the world today. Content Section A: Introduction to Cultural Anthropology 1 The nature of anthropology, its presuppositions and the concept of culture.

MDiv Unit Outlines

152

2

3 4

People, culture and society: world views; verbal and non-verbal communication; life cycles and education; kinship, marriage and family; technology and the economy; art and music; political and community leadership; magic, science and religion. Cultural stability, innovation and change; form, function and meaning. Anthropological research and field methods.

Section B: Anthropology for Cross-cultural Ministry 5 Anthropology and the Bible: examples of the structures studied in Section A. 6 Cultural and anthropological factors that influence church planting and development. 7 Missionary/national relationships and leadership development in anthropological perspective. 8 Students undertake an anthropological case study in cross-cultural ministry. Bibliography Prescribed: Angeloni, E. (ed.), Annual Editions: Anthropology 05/06 (Guilford, CT: McGraw Hill/Dushkin, 2004). Burnett, D., Clash of Worlds (London: Monarch, 2002). Grunlan, S. A. and M. K. Mayers, Cultural Anthropology (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Academie, 1988). Hiebert, P. G., Cultural Anthropology (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Baker, 1983). Hiebert, P. G., Anthropological Reflections on Missiological Issues (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1994). Kraft, C. H., Anthropology for Christian Witness (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1997). Lingenfelter, S., Agents of Transformation: a Guide for Effective Cross-cultural Ministry (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1996). Park, M. A., Introducing Anthropology: An Integrated Approach (2nd ed.; Guilford, CT: McGraw-Hill, 2002). Price, D., Karl Barth’s Anthropology in Light of Modern Thought (Grand Rapids: Wm B. Eerdmans, 2002). Sweet, L. (ed.), The Church in Emerging Culture: Five Perspectives. (El Cajon, CA: EmergentYS, 2003). Womack, M., Being Human: An Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (2nd ed.; Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 2001). Recommended Hofstede, G. H. and G. J. Hofstede, Cultures and Organizations: Software of the Mind (2nd ed.; Guilford, CT: McGraw-Hill, 2005).  EM610 Aid and Development Status Elective

Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, the student should be able to: (a) Identify and explain within its context the biblical material that relates to aid and development, including its relationship to gospel presentation; (b) Apply biblical perspectives to the role of aid and development within the context of cross-cultural ministry; while giving recognition to other views based on different hermeneutical perspectives; (c) Explain the general theories related to the issues impacting aid and development in the contemporary world in both urban and rural situations, and show how they affect implementation; (d) Evaluate the diversity of approaches to the concept of ‘holistic ministries’ and show how they impact the delivery of aid and development in crosscultural contexts around the world; (e) Appraise the issues involved in planning, implementing and evaluating community development projects. Content Section A: Philosophical and Theological Perspectives 1 Biblical perspectives on aid and development: creation, the people of God, divine provision for the poor and needy; the example and teaching of Jesus; those in need in New Testament churches. 2 Aid and development perspectives: descriptive analysis of international aid and agencies, Christian and secular; multilateral and bilateral programs; north-south debates; rural and urban situations. 3 Economic issues: causes of poverty (local and in a country as a whole); international monetary policy and developing countries; third world debt; cycles of poverty; justice and social structures. 4 Theological analysis: philosophies of development and aid; participatory community perspectives; development programmes in Christian missionary strategy; holism in current discussion. Section B: Field Application 5 Understanding an area before beginning a project; baseline surveys. 6 Developing and evaluating community projects; equipping local people for leadership in aid and development projects; analysing and responding to their problems and needs. 7 The role of outside organisations: philosophy; financial and human resources. 8 Project evaluation; the people evaluating their own project; the outside organisation and its evaluation; 9 Detailed examination of one case study of an aid or development project. Bibliography Prescribed: Ajulu, D., Holism in Development, (Monrovia: MARC, 2001).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Blomberg, C. L., Neither Poverty Nor Riches: A Biblical Theology of Possessions (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2001). Bradshaw, B., Change Across Cultures: A Narrative Approach to Social Transformation (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2002). Bussau, D. and R. Mask, Christian Microenterprise Development: An Introduction (Oxford: Regnum, 2003). Chambers, R., Whose Reality Counts? (London: ITDG, 2003). Chester, T. (ed.), Justice, Mercy and Humility: Integral mission and the poor (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2002). Degnbol-Martinussen, J. and P. Engberg-Pedersen, Aid: Understanding International Development Cooperation (London: Zed, 2003). Eade, D. (ed.), Development Methods and Approaches: Critical Reflections (London: Oxfam, 2003). Grigg, V., Cry of the Urban Poor: Reaching the Slums of Today's Megacities (Milton Keynes: Authentic Media, 2005). Grigg, V., Companion to the Poor: Christ in the Urban Slums (Milton Keynes: Authentic Media, 2004). Kilbourn, P., Street Children: A Guide to Effective Ministry, (Monrovia: MARC, 1997). Myers, B. L., Walking With the Poor: Principles and Practices of Transformational Development (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1999). Samuel, V. and C. Sugden, The Church in Response to Human Need (Eugene, OR: Wipf & Stock, 2003). Sider, R. J., Good News and Good Works: A Theology for the Whole Gospel (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1999). Thomas, J., From Lausanne to Manila: Evangelical Social Thought (Delhi: ISPCK, 2003). Yamamori, T., B. Meyers and K. Luscombe (eds.), Serving with the Urban Poor (Monrovia: MARC, 1998). Recommended: Grigg, V., Companion to the Poor: Christ in the Urban Slums (Milton Keynes: Authentic Media, 2004). Classics: Nicholls, B. J., In Word and Deed, Evangelism and Social Responsibility (Exeter: Paternoster Press,1985) Van Engen C. and J. Tiersma, God So Loves the City: Seeking A Theology for Urban Mission (Monrovia: MARC, 1994).  EM611 Mission in the Urban Context Status Elective

153

Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, the student should be able to: (a) Define urbanisation in the modern world and outline the historical development of urbanism and urban culture around the world; (b) Identify and explain within its context the biblical material that relates to the various aspects of urbanisation; (c) Appraise on the basis of theological principles, past and present forms of mission in urban contexts around the world, particularly in relation to their capacity to communicate the gospel; (d) Formulate a contextually appropriate proposal for planning, implementing and evaluating an effective approach to mission in a contemporary urban context, including the ongoing structure and leadership needs of the Christian community that is established. Content Section A: Biblical Foundations 1 Biblical views of creation, the city; aspects of the prophetic message; corporate sin and structural evil; 2 The life, ministry and teaching of Jesus, with special reference to the issues of poverty, wealth, justice and power; the theology of the cross; responses of the early church to gospel ministry and discipleship in urban contexts. 3 Theological perspectives on concepts such as ‘incarnational’, ‘sign and agent’, and ‘Kingdom of God’ within the context of urban mission. Section B: Understanding the Urban Context 4 An overview of the history of urbanisation around the world; 5 Urbanisation as a cultural phenomenon; the impact of pluralism, mobility and anonymity on church structures in the urban context; 6 Approaches to mission which have been and are being applied in the urban context; Section C: Evaluation of Mission Structures in Urban Contexts 7 Traditional approaches to urban mission and their relevance to different urban contexts today; 8 Evaluating the necessity of, and approaches to the reformation of church structures; urban church models, including adaptations of parish models; base communities; house churches; cell churches. 9 Proclaiming the gospel in urban language, symbols and life-style that are appropriate to the specific cultural context. Bibliography Prescribed: Ajulu, D., Holism in Development, (Monrovia: MARC, 2001).

MDiv Unit Outlines

154

Barker, A. and J. Hayes, Submerge: Living Deep in a Shallow World (Mellbourne: GoAlliance Springvale, 2002). Bakke, R., A Theology as Big as the City (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1997). Conn, H., et al, The Urban Face of Mission (Phillipsburg, NJ: Presbyterian & Reformed, 2002). Conn, H. and M. Ortiz, Urban Ministry: The Kingdom, the City, and the People of God (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2001). Conn, H. (ed.), Planting and Growing Urban Churches (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1997). Claerbaut, D., Urban Ministry in a New Millenium (Milton Keynes: Authentic, 2005). Green, L., Urban Ministry and the Kingdom of God (London: SPCK, 2003). Gornick, M., To Live in Peace: Biblical Faith and the Changing Inner City (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2003). Kilbourn, P., Street Children: A Guide to effective Ministry, (Monrovia: MARC, 1997). Lebacqz, K., Six Theories of Justice (Minneapolis: Augsburg, 1986). Linthicum, R., Transforming Power: Biblical Strategies for Making a Difference in Your Community (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2003). Lupton, R. D., Renewing the City: Reflections on Community Development and Urban Renewal (Downers Grove IL: IVP, 2005). Recommended: Davey, A., Urban Christianity and the Global Order (Peabody, MA: Hendrikson, 2002). Fuder, J. (ed.), A Heart for the City (Chicago, IL: Moody, 1999). Murray, S., Church Planting: Laying Foundations (Scottdale, PA: Herald, 2001). Classic: Van Engen C. and J. Tiersma, God So Loves the City: Seeking A theology for Urban Mission, (Monrovia: MARC, 1994).  EM615 Christian Ministry in Islamic Contexts Status Elective Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, students should be able to: (a) Explain Islamic faith and practice, including biblical and theological perspectives on Islam (b) Compare and contrast the diversity of Muslim world views and practice in the modern world and the implications for Christian witness; (c) Identify and respond to contemporary points of encounter and challenge arising out of the interface between Christian and Muslim faiths, including the place and practice of dialogue;

(d) Appraise various forms of Christian witness among the broad spectrum of Muslim peoples and suggest possible modifications that might make those forms more contextually appropriate; (e) Summarise the various spiritual and socio-cultural factors involved in the growth of Christianity in Islamic contexts and how they might guide the planning of future ministry. Content 1. Biblical and theological perspectives of Islam; Muslim beliefs and practices; Christian-Muslim worldview comparison; 2. Contemporary trends in Islam: reform movements; political Islam; popular Islam; modernisation; secularisation; 3. Diversification of 20th Century Islam; Muslim world views; significance to Christian witness; 4. Christianity in Muslim majority countries; Christward movements; Messianic Muslims; secret believers; persecution; 5. Issues in contextualisation among Muslims: doctrine; practice; church forms; 6. Christian conversion among Muslims: theological and sociological factors in religious change: belief; power; Christian lifestyle; mission approaches; socio-political factors; 7. Mission strategy among Muslims: evangelism; church-planting; holistic ministry; issues in Christian-Muslim dialogue; 8. Muslims in Australia; local church relations. Bibliography Prescribed: Ahmed, A., Discovering Islam (London: Routledge, 2002). Caner, E. M. and E. F. Caner, Unveiling Islam: An Insider’s Look at Muslim Life and Beliefs (Grand Rapids: Kregel, 2002). Catherwood, C., Christians, Muslims and Islamic Rage (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2003). Chapman, C. G., Cross and Crescent: Responding to the Challenge of Islam (IVP, 2003). Claydon, D. (ed.). Islam, Human Rights and Public Policy (Melbourne: Acorn Press, 2009). Durie, M., Revelation: Do We worship the Same God? (Upper Mt Gravatt: City Harvest, 2006). Greenlee, D., From the Straight Path to the Narrow Way: Journeys of Faith (STL, 2005). Husain, E., The Islamist, (Camberwell, Vic: Penguin Books, 2007). Livingstone, G., Planting Churches in Muslim Cities: A Team Approach (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2001) Love, R., Muslims, Magic and the Kingdom of God: Church Planting Among Folk Muslims (Pasadena: William Carey, 2000). Mallouhi, C., Mini-Skirts, Mothers & Muslims: a Christian Woman in a Muslim Land (Oxford: Monarch Books, 2004).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Musk, B., Touching the Soul of Islam: Sharing the Gospel in Muslim Cultures (Great Britain: Monarch Books, 2003). Robinson, S., Mosques & Miracles: Revealing Islam and God’s Grace (2nd ed.; Upper Mt. Gravatt: City Harvest, 2003). Sookhdeo, P., Faith, Power and Territory, (McLean, VA: Isaac Publishing, 2008). Spencer, R., The Politically Incorrect Guide to Islam and the Crusades, (Washington: Regnery Pub., 2005). Woodberry, J. D., Muslims and Christians on the Emmaus Road: Crucial Issues in Witness Among Muslims (MARC, 1989). Ye’or, B., Islam and Dhimmitude (Lancaster: Gazelle Books, 2002). Recommended: Ibn Ishaq, Life of Muhammad, (OUP ,15th Impression 2001). Karsh, E., Islamic Imperialism, (New Haven: Yale Uni Press, 2007). Manji, I., The Trouble with Islam, (Milson’s Point: RandomHouse, 2003). Parshall, P., Muslim Evangelism: Contemporary Approaches to Contextualization (Waynesboro: Gabriel, 2003). Saeed, A., Islam in Australia, (Crows Nest: Allen & Unwin, 2003). Warraq, I., Why I Am Not A Muslim, (Amherst: Prometheus Books, 2003). Classic: Cragg, K., The Call of the Minaret (Oxford: One World, 2000).  EM617 Spiritual Formation for Cross-Cultural Ministries Status Elective Exclusions PC608. Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, students should be able to: (a) Relate the key issues and pressures that will be confronted by a person or a family making the transition into cross-cultural ministry and the strategies that can be employed in dealing with them. (b) Distinguish how their relationship with Christ and the ministry of the Word of God relate to their ability to cope within those pressures and to develop meaningful relationships within the new context. (c) Devise a program that will help them prepare for effective exit from their own culture and entry in to a new culture, including strategies appropriate for a family and its individual members.

155

(d) Describe and appreciate how they can learn from the experience of others past and present, both from within their own culture and from within the host culture. Content Section A: Personal Spiritual Development 1 Research that identifies the issues; concept of a ‘call’, sentness, giftedness; role of the home church; role of selection procedures used by agencies. 2 Maintaining spiritual vitality in cross-cultural ministry settings, including patterns of personal prayer and Bible study; and fellowship with Christians across cultures; 3 Dealing with stress and its spiritual consequences; culture shock; conflict resolution; avoiding burnout; material possessions and money; physical health and recreation; 4 Doubt, temptation and testing, confronting spiritual warfare; maintaining spiritual wholeness. Section B: Relationships in Cross-Cultural Ministry 5 Personal security and significance; relational skills in cross-cultural ministry, including listening, selfdisclosure, empathy. 6 Relations with others in cross-cultural ministry, including national Christians, co-workers from similar and different Christian traditions and those in authority. 7 Relations in the missionary household; the single missionary; the missionary family; spiritual factors affecting the spouse and children. 8 Roles and role conflict; authority and team-work; issues arising from different ministry models. Section C: Distinctive Factors in Cross-Cultural Ministries 9 Adjusting to cross-cultural living and lifestyle; relating to those with different living standards; confronting the wealth/poverty issues. 10 Relations with sponsoring churches and mission society, including prayer and financial support, supervision, encouragement; home assignment and ministry; the re-entry process, preparing for permanent resettlement and retirement. 11 Missionary perceptions of “obedience”, “faith”, “service”, “sacrifice”, “hardship” “missionary power” and related themes. 12 The influence of missionary biography on missionary commitment, including an evaluation of the theology and practical spirituality of selected missionary writings. Bibliography Prescribed: Daniels, G., Searching for the Indigenous Church (Pasadena, CA: William Carey, 2005). O’Donnell, K. (ed.), Doing Member Care Well (Pasadena, CA: William Carey, 2002).

MDiv Unit Outlines

156

Elmer, D., Cross Cultural Connections: Stepping Out and Fitting in Around the World (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2002). Fawcett, J., Stress and Trauma Handbook (Monrovia, CA: World Vision, 2003). Foyle, M. F., Honourably Wounded (Grand Rapids: Kregel, 2001). Griffiths, M., Lambs Dancing with Wolves: A Manual For Christian Workers Overseas (London: Monarch, 2001). Kraft, M., Frontline Women: Negotiating Crosscultural Issues in Ministry (Pasadena, CA: William Carey Library, 2003). Lingenfelter, S. and M. Mayers, Ministering CrossCulturally: An Incarnational Model for Personal Relationships (2nd ed.; Baker, 2003). McGrath, A. E., Christian Spirituality: An Introduction (Oxford: Blackwell, 1999). Pollock, D. C., Third Culture Kids (Yarmouth, ME: Nicholas Brealey, 2001). Roembke, L., Building Credible Multicultural Teams (Pasadena, CA: William Carey, 2000). Storti, C., The Art of Crossing Cultures (Yarmouth, ME: Nicholas Brealey, 2001). Taylor, W. D. (ed.), Too Valuable To Lose: The Causes and Cures of Missionary Attrition (Pasadena, CA: William Carey, 1997). Recommended: Hale, T., On Being a Missionary (Pasadena, CA: William Carey Library, 2000). Pascoe, R., A Moveable Marriage: Relocate Your Relationship Without Breaking It (Vancouver: Expatriate, 2003).  EM618 Ministry in a Culturally Diverse Context Status Elective Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, the student should be able to: (a) Engage with appropriate biblical, historical, cultural and strategic perspectives on ministry in a context of cultural diversity (b) Build the understanding and cultural sensitivity needed for ministry engagement with a community in a context of cultural diversity (c) Identify and interact with the challenges and opportunities in communicating the Christian gospel and establishing the church in an environment of cultural diversity; (d) Devise appropriate ministry approaches for a context of cultural diversity, including planning, implementation and evaluation, assisted by exposure to, and evaluation of existing multicultural ministry models.

Content Section A: Principles 1 Culture and ethnicity, unity and division, and individuality and community in the Bible; in particular within the context of New Testament teaching on evangelism and the body of Christ.. 2 Theological perspectives: Trinitarian implications for ministry in a culturally diverse context, theology of such ministry in the context of diversity, church and culture in the New Testament. 3 Assimilation, integration and multiculturalism in Australia: immigration and refugees; ethnic communities; history and directions of government policies with awareness of the limitations of these and their impacts on church life. 4 Models of ministry in a context of cultural diversity; relevant biblical and modern examples, including multi-congregational, mono-ethnic and culturally diverse churches; homogeneous unit and other church growth principles; relational, leadership, learning style, worship preference, language, areas of tension and conflict, and other cultural variables. 5 Review of the issues relating to cultural distance and its implications for the structure and ministry of a local church; case studies of different models being used by churches seeking to overcome cultural distance. 6 Strategies and resources for making the transition to a local church model that reflects the demographic realities of the locality; research, design, implementation and evaluation. Section B: Practice Candidates are for a minimum of 20 hours to: 1 Participate in either a culturally diverse congregation or mono-cultural congregation of a culture other than the student’s own; and 2 With the help of members of that church, observe non church attending people of that culture in their social and family contexts. Discern the challenges with regard to cultural variables, such as leadership patterns and processes, learning style and worship preferences. Consider possible strategies for the future ministry of the congregation. Bibliography Prescribed: Anderson, D., Multicultural Ministry: Finding Your Church’s Unique Rhythm (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2004). Brynjolfson, R. and J. Lewis (eds), Becoming an Intentionally Intercultural Church (Waynesboro, GA: World Evangelical Alliance Missions Commission, 2004). DeYmaz, M., Building a Healthy Multi-Ethnic Church: Mandate, Commitments, and Practices of a Diverse Congregation (Jossey-Bass, 2007). DeYoung, C. P., G. Yancey, et al, United by Faith: The Multiracial Congregation as an Answer to the Problem of Race (OUP, 2004).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Docker, J. and G. Fischer, Race, Colour and Identity in Australia and New Zealand (Sydney: UNSW, 2000). Foster, C., Embracing Diversity: Leadership in Multicultural Congregations (Bethesda, MD: Alban, 1997). Keneally, T. and R. Scott (eds), Another Country (Halstead, 2005). Kramer, L. J., The Multicultural Experiment: Immigrants, Refugees and National Identity (Sydney: Macleay, 2003). Rhodes, S., Where the Nations Meet: The Church in a Multicultural World (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1998). Richmond, H (ed.), Snapshots of Multicultural Ministry (UCA Assembly Multicultural and Cross-Cultural Ministry, 2006). Richmond, H. and M. D. Yang (eds), Crossing Borders: Shaping Faith, Ministry and Identity in Multicultural Australia (UCA Assembly and NSW Board of Mission, 2006). Wilson, M., Churches Crossing Cultures: A Practical Guide and Workbook for Cross Cultural Ministry in Your Church (Anglicare, 2002). Yancey, G., One Body, One Spirit: Principles of Successful Multiracial Churches (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2003). Recommended: Jupp, J., The Challenge of Diversity, (Canberra: AGPS-Office of Multicultural Affairs, 1989). Jupp, J., From White Australia to Woomera: the Story of Australian Immigration (Cambridge: CUP, 2003). Multicultural Australia: United in Diversity (Canberra: Australian Government Department of Immigration and Multicultural and Indigenous Affairs, 2003). New Agenda for Multicultural Australia (Canberra: Australian Government Department of Immigration and Multicultural and Indigenous Affairs, 1999). Robinson, S. P., C. Smith and M. K. Wilson, Mission Action Planning (Anglicare, 2004).  EM621 Living Faiths Status Elective Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, the student should be able to: (a) Relate with a significant level of detail the historical development of at least two living faiths; (b) Explain with sensitivity the beliefs of at least two living faiths, highlighting where necessary the key variations between different traditions within that faith, and drawing upon writings of those within that faith;

157

(c) Appreciate and summarise the practices of at least two living faiths as consequences of the belief system and cultural worldview of the participant. (d) Identify and analyse within at least two living faiths the contemporary reforms and responses to change in global culture, including an awareness of the challenges those reforms offer to the Christian faith. Content The historical roots, beliefs, practices, cultural influences and contemporary reforms in TWO, THREE or FOUR of the following living faiths: Hinduism, Buddhism, Judaism, Islam, Australian Aboriginal religions, primal religions. Bibliography Bhaskarananda, S., The Essentials of Hinduism (Seattle: Viveka, 2002). Burnett, D., The Spirit of Buddhism (Sussex: Monarch 2003). Catherwood, C., Christians, Muslims and Islamic Rage (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2003). Gross, R. M. and T. C. Muck (eds), Buddhists Talk about Jesus, Christians Talk about the Buddha (New York: Continuum, 2000). Partridge, C. H. and D. R. Groothius Dictionary of Contemporary Religion in the Western World: Exploring Living Faiths in Postmodern Contexts (Leicester; Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2002). Ludwig, T. M., The Sacred Paths (3rd ed.; Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 2001). Lehmann, A. C. et al, Magic, Witchcraft, and Religion: An Anthropological Study of the Supernatural (6th ed.; New York: McGraw-Hill, 2004). Noss, D. S., A History of the World’s Religions (11th ed.; Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 2002). Robinson, G., Essential Judaism (New York: Simon & Shuster, 2000). Telushkin, J., Jewish Literacy (Tübingen: Mohr Siebeck, 2001).  EM622 Alternative Religious Movements Status Elective Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, students should be able to: (a) Explain the characteristics of modern alternative religious movements; (b) Analyse the factors involved in the growth and contemporary significance of such movements in the Western World;

158

MDiv Unit Outlines

(c) Summarise the history, beliefs, structures and growth strategies of four movements; (d) Devise for implementation a strategic Christian response to such movements, their teachings and their followers, that is both sensitive and biblically appropriate. Content Section A: Definitions, Terms, Characteristics 1 The contemporary growth and significance of alternative religious movements. 2 Definition of terms: cult; sect; church; denomination; religion; movement. 3 Categories and classifications of movements: eastern mysticism; Christian aberration; psychospiritual self-improvement; eclectic religion; the psychic; the occult; astrology. 4 Factors involved in the contemporary growth of alternative movements. 5 Common characteristics of alternative religious movements. 6 Christian responses to alternative religious movements and their followers. Section B: Particular Movements The history, beliefs, structures/organisation and means of propagation of four alternative religious movements, such as: Transcendental Meditation; Children of God; Church of Scientology; the Unification Church; New Age movements; Church of Jesus of Latter Day Saints (Mormons); Jehovah’s Witnesses.

Herrick, J. A., The Making of the New Spirituality: The Eclipse of the Western Religious Tradition (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2003). Hexham, I., S. Rost and J. W. Morehead II (eds), Encountering New Religious Movements: A Holistic Evangelical Approach (Grand Rapids: Kregel Academic & Professional, 2004). Rhodes, R., The Challenge of the Cults and New Religions: The Essential Guide to Their History, Their Doctrine, and Our Response (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2001). Sire, J. W., The Universe Next Door (4th ed.; Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2004). Wilson, B. R. and J. Cresswell, New Religious Movements: Challenge and Response (London; New York: Routledge, 1999). Zaretsky, Y., Jewish Evangelism, Lausanne Occasional Paper 60 (and in A New Vision, A New Heart, A Renewed Call) Zacharias, R., Jesus Among Other Gods, (Nashville: Word, 2000). Recommended: Karkkainen, V., An Introduction to the Theology of Religions (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2003). Lehmann, A. C., et al, Magic, Witchcraft, and Religion: An Anthropological Study of the Supernatural (6th ed.; New York: McGraw-Hill, 2004). Ludwig, T. M., The Sacred Paths (3rd ed.; Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 2001). 

Bibliography Prescribed: Ankerberg, J. and J. Weldon, The Facts on Jehovah's Witnesses (Eugene, OR: Harvest House, 2003). Ankerberg, J. and J. Weldon, What Do Mormons Really Believe? (Eugene, OR: Harvest House, 2002). Clifford, R. and P. Johnson, Jesus and the Gods of the New Age: Communicating Christ in Today’s Spiritual Supermarket (Wheaton, IL: Victor 2003). Clifford R., Religious and Non-Religious Spirituality in the Post Modern World, Lausanne Occasional Paper 45 (Lausanne as a separate paper & in Claydon, David (ed.), A New Vision, A New Heart, A Renewed Call, (Pasadena: William Carey, 2005). Drane, J. W., P. Johnson and R. Clifford, Beyond Prediction: the Tarot and your Spirituality (Oxford: Lion, 2001). Drury, N., Magic and Witchcraft: From Shamanism to the Technopagans (London: Thames & Hudson, 2003). Enroth, R., A Guide to New Religious Movements (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2005). Geisler, N. L. and R. Rhodes, Correcting the Cults: Expert Responses to their Scripture Twisting (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2005).

EM625 Applied Evangelism Status Elective Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, students should be able to: (a) Demonstrate the interaction of evangelism and society in different periods of the history of the church. (b) Analyse and propose biblical responses to the key issues that impact on evangelism in contemporary society. (c) Compare and contrast evangelistic strategies as appropriate for various contemporary contexts, including those suitable for use in both the local church and through evangelistic agencies; (d) Engage in an evangelistic program in a position of leadership, responding effectively to the social and cultural context within which the activity is undertaken. Content Section A: Evangelism in Context 1 A study of issues affecting evangelism at significant periods in church history:

MDiv Unit Outlines

2

3

4

(a) From the apostolic period to Nicea; (b) The fourth century: the coming of Christendom; (c) The sixteenth century: the Reformations; (d) Evangelical revivals: Edwards, Wesley and Whitefield; (e) Modern mass evangelism: Finney, Moody and Graham. N.B: This topic should complement, not repeat, students’ studies in CH301 and CH302, or CH305. Evangelism in the Christian church since 1960: (a) Ecumenical approaches, including the IMC Conferences (New Delhi, Bangkok, Melbourne and San Antonio); (b) The Lausanne Movement, including the Berlin, Lausanne I and II Conferences; (c) Roman Catholic work, including Vatican II and lay apostolate movements. A critical examination of issues touching evangelism in contemporary societies; (a) Religious pluralism and relativism; evangelism and dialogue; (b) Affluence, health and wealth; holism; (c) Social concern, justice and the integrity of creation; (d) The influence and use of the mass media. Evangelism and various life-contexts: (a) The stages of adult life; (b) Evangelism in urban, suburban, town and rural contexts

Section B: Strategies for Evangelism Choose the following field work projects set out in one of the clauses 5,6, 7 or 8 below. Each field report should include the candidate’s biblical reflection as well as a reflection on the projects in the light of the literature read and in the case of projects in paragraphs 5,6 or 7 in the light of the students’ reflection the other project being pursued in the clause. There should be a separate field report of not less than 1,500 words of each of the two projects in clauses 5,6 or 7. Alternatively, in clause 8 a log book of the 30 hour project is to be maintained and given to the lecturer for approval along with the field work report. 5 An examination of two comprehensive programmes of evangelism, at least one based in a local congregation and at least one conducted by an evangelistic agency (for example Scripture Union, the Church Army, the Navigators, the Bible League). Particular attention is to be paid to preevangelism, gospel presentation, means of followup and the relationships between discipleship and church membership. The programmes considered must be different to those already considered in the course; 6 The development of evangelistic strategies appropriate to two sub-culture groups (for example unchurched industrial workers; office workers; the disabled; those involved in sports or the arts; career women; the military); 7 Contemporary emphases in churches and denominations with regard to evangelistic programs. Choose any two of these areas:

8

159

(a) “Signs and wonders” and “power evangelism”, (b) Renewal of diaconal ministries (c) The Decade of Evangelism Participation in the development and conducting of an evangelistic programme, in either a local congregation or a particular sub-culture, of not less than 30 hours. Of this time, not less than 10 hours is to be spent in developing strategy and planning and not less than 5 hours in direct evangelism by the student. These hours exclude preparation and writing up time. Students are expected to take an active leadership role in the programme. A time log book indicating the way the 30 hours was used is to be maintained and shown to the unit lecturer who will indicate in a cover report with the field report that the time log has been examined and that the time requirement has been fulfilled.

Bibliography Prescribed: Allison, L. and M. Anderson, Going Public With the Gospel: Reviving Evangelistic Proclamation (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2004). Booker, M. and M. Ireland, Evangelism – Which Way Now?: An Evaluation of Alpha, Emmaus, Cell Church and Other Contemporary Strategies for Evangelism (London: Church House, 2003). Claydon, D., Connecting Across Cultures, (Melbourne: Acorn, 2000.) Claydon, D., (ed.), A New Vision, A New Heart, A Renewed Call (Pasadena: William Carey, 2005). Drummond, L., Reaching GenerationNext: Effective Evangelism in Today’s Culture (Grand Rapids: Baker 2002). Finney, J., Emerging Evangelism (London: Darton, Longman & Todd, 2004). Hughes, B. and J. Bellamy, A Passion for Evangelism: Turning Vision into Action (Adelaide: Open Book, 2004). Kallenberg, B. J., Live to Tell: Evangelism for a Postmodern Age (Grand Rapids: Brazos, 2002). Long, J., Emerging Hope: A Strategy for Reaching Postmodern Generations (2nd ed.; Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2004). McQuoid, S., Sharing the Good News in C21: Evangelism in a local church context (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2002). Mittelberg, M., Building a Contagious Church: Revolutionizing the Way We View and Do Evangelism (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2000). Pippert, R., Saltshaker Resources: An Evangelism Toolkit (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2003). Pitman, D. A., R. L. F. Habito and T. C. Muck (eds.) Ministry & Theology in Global Perspective: Contemporary Challenges for the Church, (Grand Rapids: Wm B Eerdmans, 1996). Richardson, R., Evangelism Outside the Box: New Ways to Help People Experience the Good News (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2000).

MDiv Unit Outlines

160

Recommended: Hedlund, R. E., Roots of the Great Debate in Mission (3rd ed.; Bangalore, India: Theological Book Trust, 1997). Webber, R., Ancient-Future Evangelism (Grand Rapids: Baker 2003).  EM626 Church Planting Status Elective Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, the student should be able to: (a) Prepare and present a biblical basis for church planting and the spiritual demands placed upon those involved in church planting ministry; (b) Compare and contrast different methodologies by which church planting can be undertaken in a given cultural context, such that church reproduction is the result; (c) Design a church planting program that is culturally appropriate for a particular context, including the necessary guidelines and rationale for planning, implementation and evaluation. Content Section A: Principles 1 Biblical perspectives on Church Planting: (a) Church planting and the teaching and example of Christ; (b) Theology of church; (c) New Testament approaches to church planting. 2 Personnel issues in church planting: (a) Personal factors: spiritual life, personality, call, aptitude, leadership styles, relational skills and philosophies of ministry; (b) Selection and preparation of teams for church planting. 3 Alternative models of church planting (eg solidarity, modality, migration): strengths and dangers; suitability for particular situations (urban, rural, tribal peoples etc). 4 Strategies for church planting at regional level: multiplying local churches or developing a central church; church planting movements.

7

(c) Maturity: becoming autonomous; church reproduction; second-generation believers. Case studies in various church planting models used in different cultural settings.

Bibliography Prescribed: Conn, H. M., Planting and Growing Urban Churches: From Dream to Reality (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1997). Garrison, D., Church Planting Movement (Midlothian, VA: WIGTake Resources, 2004). Gibbs, E. and I. Coffey, Church Next: Quantum Changes in Christian Ministry (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2001). Hesselgrave, D. J., Planting Churches Cross-culturally (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Baker, 2000). Hiebert, P. and E. H. Meneses, Incarnational Ministry: Planting Churches in Band, Tribal, Peasant, and Urban Societies (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1995). Malphurs, A., Planting Growing Churches for the 21st Century: A Comprehensive Guide for New Churches and Those Desiring Renewal (Grand Rapids: Baker 2004). Moore, R., Starting a New Church: The Church Planter's Guide to Success (Ventura, CA: Regal, 2002). Stetzer, E., Planting Churches in a Postmodern Age (Nashville: Broadman & Holman, 2003). Stuart, M., Church Planting: Laying Foundations (Carlisle: Paternoster,1998). Timmis, S. (ed.), Multiplying Churches: Reaching Today's Communities Through Church Planting (Fearn, Ross-shire: Christian Focus, 2000). Recommended: Nevius, J. L., Planting and Developing Missionary Churches (Manchester, NH: Monadnock, 2003). Suarez, G., Connections: Linking People and Principles for Dynamic Church Multiplication (Friendswood, TX: Baxter, 2003). Towns, E. L. and D. Porter, Churches That Multiply: A Bible study on Church Planting (Kansas City, MO: Beacon Hill, 2003).  EM627 Church Dynamics and Growth

Section B: Practice 5 Feasibility studies: gathering and interpreting relevant data; defining a people group, measuring receptivity; issues in location for ministry, transport, psycho-socio-cultural factors. 6 Stages in Church Planting: (a) Initial contacts; initial evangelism; name; home meetings; first services; (b) Embryonic stage: charter statement; building issues; structures, government, leadership;

Status Elective Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, the student should be able to: (a) Summarise the theology, principles and procedures of church growth and their significance for contemporary ministry theory and practice; (b) Compare and contrast contemporary approaches to, and philosophies of church growth and highlight their strengths and weaknesses in different cultural environments;

MDiv Unit Outlines

(c) Create a process of evaluation, select appropriate methodologies, and develop effective strategies for church growth in a congregational situation, such that emphasis is put as much on church health as on other aspects of church growth. Content Section A: Principles 1 The development of church growth thinking and its contemporary significance in mission thinking and practice; theological foundations and biblical examples; 2 Church growth concepts: homogeneous group principle; receptivity; people movements and networks; redemption-lift; house churches; cell churches; theological foundations; quantity and quality: 3 Problems in church growth: nominalism and attrition; follow-up and incorporation of new members; static, passive and declining churches; missional churches. Section B: Practice 4 Examination of contemporary models of church ministry and structure, evaluating philosophy, theological implications, and dynamics of operation; familiarisation with literature on congregational ministry methodologies and strategy development; structuring and staffing for different sized churches; 5 Making a local area survey; measurement of growth and decline: types; reporting and evaluating; survey techniques relating to: membership and attendance; attrition; nominalism; lay mobilisation; financial resources; 6 Growth factors: stimulants and retardants in the congregation, the wider church, the community, and the nation; 7 Growth goals: establishing objectives, setting goals, making plans, assessing results. Section C: Field Work 8 Conduct a case study of one particular congregation to ascertain patterns of growth and decline over a minimum period of five years, analyse the factors involved and make recommendations. OR Analyse some specific model of doing church, its philosophy, theological implications, methodologies and strategies. Bibliography Prescribed: Carson, D. A., Becoming Conversant with the Emerging Church: Understanding a Movement and Its Implications (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2005). Engle, P., et al (eds), Evaluating the Church Growth Movement: Five views (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2004).

161

Frazee, R., The Connecting Church (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2001). Gibbs, E. and I. Coffey, Church Next: Quantum Changes in Christian Ministry (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2001). Gibbs, E. and R. Bolger, Emerging Churches: Creating Christian Community in Postmodern Cultures (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2005). McGavran, D. A., Understanding Church Growth (3rd Rev. ed.; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1990). McIntosh, G. L., Biblical Church Growth: How you Can Work With God to Build a Faithful Church (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2003). Moynagh, M., Changing World, Changing Church (London: Monarch, 2001). Pritchard, G. A., Willow Creek Seeker Services: Evaluating a New Way of Doing Church (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1996). Roxburgh, A., The Missionary Congregation, Leadership and Liminality (Harrisburg, PA: TPI, 1997). Schwarz, C., Natural Church Development (4th ed.; Carol Stream, IL: Churchsmart Resources, 2000). Warren, R., The Purpose Driven Church: Growth Without Compromising Your Message or Mission (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1995). Recommended: Guder, D. and L. Barrett (eds), Missional Church: A Vision for the Sending of the Church in North America (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1998). Malphurs, A., Advanced Strategic Planning (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1999).  EM635 Linguistics and Language Learning Status Elective Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, the student should be able to: (a) Understand the value of language as a means of communicating culture and identity and the importance of a cross-cultural worker learning the language of those whom he/she is serving; (b) Outline a range of strategies and techniques for learning language from a native speaker; (c) Identify, transcribe phonetically and reproduce a range of sounds common in English and some other languages; (d) Recognise, explain and employ basic grammatical concepts and terminology. Content Section A: Principles 1 Introduction to general and applied linguistics 2 Phonetics: exploring place and manner of articulation of sounds, vowel and consonant charts, transcription using the International Phonetic Alphabet, prosodic features, tone, and the

162

3

4

5

6

MDiv Unit Outlines

interpretation of phonological descriptions of unfamiliar languages. Morphology: investigating the structure and forms of words, identifying the structure and forms of words, identifying and listing morphemes in various languages. Syntax: analysing and describing several common types of sentences, clauses and phrases, and understanding the terminology used. Semantics & Pragmatics: discussing the contextual and social aspects of meaning, and barriers to communication. Sociolinguistics: considering the relationship between language and society, understanding some of the non-linguistic issues which affect communication.

Section B: Practice Students participate in an integrated practicum working with native speakers of a language, where they work on planning, implementing and reflecting on various strategies and techniques for language learning. The practicum will also involve data management, transcription practice and basic linguistic analysis. Various issues relating to language learning in a wide range of situations are identified and explored, with an emphasis on learning practical skills that will assist the student in learning a language on the field. Assessment Methods Section A 1. Presentation of a written paper and a short oral presentation outlining some aspects of a chosen language. The following information must be included: a) Linguistic background of the language b) Cultural outline of the language area c) Brief phonological description of the language d) Summary of key grammatical features of the language Plus information on one of the followingtopics: e) Needs analysis for translation or literacy in that language f) A plan for learning this language g) A plan for teaching ESL to speakers of this language Section B Presentation of material and reflections from language learning practicum sessions. The following information must be included: a) A comprehensive plan outlining a single session in a small group with a native speaker of an unfamiliar language, incorporating revision, elicitation of the new information, cultural information b) Reflections on the process and outcomes of sessions, identifuing positive and degative spects of strategies used c) Transcribed language data using IPA d) An analysis of one aspect of the grammar of this language.

The major paper should be 4,000 words and the report 3,000 words and requires a deeper level of analysis of primary data and reflection and evaluation of source materials than studies at degree level. Section A constitutes approximately 60% of the unit and Section B 40%. Bibliography Prescribed: Akmajiah, A., et al, Linguistics: An Introduction to Language and Communication (3rd ed.; Cambridge: Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1990). Bickford, A. J., Tools for Analysing the World’s Languages: Morphology and Syntax (Dallas, TX: Summer Institute of Linguistics, 1998). Bickford, A. C. and R. Floyd, Articulatory Phonetics: Tools for Analysing the World’s Languages (Dallas, TX: Summer Institute of Linguistics, 2003). Brewster, T. E. and E. S. Brewster, Language Acquisition Made Practical (Colorado Springs: Lingua House, 1976). Brown, H. D., Principles of Language Learning and Teaching (3rd ed.; Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1994). Emmitt, M., J. Pollock and L. Komesaroff, Language and Learning: An Introduction (3rd ed.; Melbourne: Oxford University Press, 2003). Fromkin, V., et al, An Introduction to Language (5th Australian ed.; Sydney: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 2005). Ladefoged, P., A Course in Phonetics (6th ed.; New York: Harcourt Brace, 2005). Richards, J. C. and T. S. Rodgers, Approaches and Methods in Language Teaching (2nd ed.; New York: CUP, 2001). Yule, G., The Study of Language (2nd ed.; Cambridge: CUP, 1999). Recommended: Crystal, D., A Dictionary of Linguistics and Phonetics (5th ed.; Oxford, UK: Blackwell Publishers, 2003). Thomson, G., ‘Kick-starting your language learning: Becoming a Basic Speaker through Fun and Games inside a Secure Nest’ in Language Learning Bookshelf: LinguaLinks Library (SIL, 1993), and other articles by G. Thomson.  Field Education Units Student may take two only of units PC642 –PC647, DM642 and EM640

MDiv Unit Outlines

Notes (a) Units PC642–644, DM642, and EM640 will be assessed on a non-graded Pass/Fail basis, and will not be included in the calculation of grade point averages. (b) Units PC642–647, DM642, and EM640 will be moderated by the appropriate Field moderator. (c) An introduction to the ministry issues pertaining to the context in which the Field Work will be undertaken. The precise details of the content should be outlined in advance by the individual colleges for all their students. (d) Colleges should seek approval from the relevant field moderator for their methods of reflection and evaluation for field education units.

163

In each case, the following conditions apply: (a) The field work is to be approved by the student’s approved institution; (b) The student is to work under supervision of a person experienced in living in both the student’s culture and the culture in which the field work is taken; (c) At least 30 hours are to be spent in direct contact with the people of the culture concerned, in active participation and communication as well as observation; (d) The student is to observe the ways of life of the people of the culture visited and Christian ministries among them (by both nationals and others); (e) The field work is to be certified by a senior missionary or equivalent person with whom the student has served.

 EM640 Cross-cultural Field Education Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) To introduce students to the practical issues related to particular ministry settings. (b) To stimulate candidates’ reflection, integration and thinking with respect to philosophical issues, including cross-cultural education, pluralism and ethnicity and the exercise of informed critical judgement on programmes of education within church or nation; (c) To facilitate in candidates an understanding of the skills involved in practical ministry, and give opportunity for the acquisition and development of these skills in chosen areas; (d) To enable candidates to examine principles of education and educational insights from the social sciences in the light of biblical perspectives and contemporary theological understanding. Content Section A: Preparation Students must undertake supervised preparation for cross-cultural ministry exposure, so that they may benefit from their field experience. The unit should include input from people who have lived in the culture concerned, preferably from members of the culture, unless this is wholly impracticable. Section B: Field Work An experience of ONE of the following situations; (a) A missionary trip of not less than 4 weeks’ residence in a culture other than the student’s own; (b) Involvement of not less than 50 hours in some form of Christian work with people from a culture different than the student’s own (e.g., an overseas student group, ethnic church or fellowship); (c) Satisfactory completion of a period of not less than 3 months in some form of Christian work with people from a culture different from the student’s own.

Section C: Evaluation and Reflection Students are to spend some time in reflection upon their field work, including group discussion and a written individual reflection concerning problems encountered, issues raised and encouragements received, having regard to the literature on the subject and to the Scriptures. Bibliography Nil  EM689 Evangelism and Missiology Seminar Status Elective Learning Outcomes At the end of this unit, the student should be able to: (a) Develop a program of study that explores in depth a specific ministry topic or theme; (b) Cooperate with others in the utilisation of research skills to achieve specific study outcomes; (c) Apply to the chosen ministry topic appropriate evangelistic and/or missiological insights that draw upon a broad range of perspectives. Content The choice of the topic or theme to be studied is left to approved institutions but must have staff and library support sufficient to sustain the unit. The lecturer concerned is to submit a proposed unit outline along with assessment plans for approval by the moderator for Evangelism and Missiology. The unit is conducted as a seminar involving class discussion as well as lectures and individual reading. The unit is not an individual research topic. It is strongly recommended that the unit include set reading from classical as well as contemporary authors of at least 750 pages.

MDiv Unit Outlines

164

1 2 3

4

The total amount of work expected is that equivalent to an essay of approximately 6,000 words; Students must demonstrate a thorough grasp of the theological issues involved; Assessment should be designed to encourage exploration of the personal and pastoral implications of theological perspectives discerned in students’ learning; Units approved for the Master of Arts (Ministry) may be used as the basis for this unit, adjusted appropriately to reflect advanced level undergraduate study for those students enrolled in undergraduate degrees.

Bibliography Nil 

PASTORAL AND CHURCH-FOCUSSED MINISTRIES (PC) PC501 Ministry Formation Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) To help students develop a critical understanding of themselves as persons and of pastoral roles; (b) To provide opportunity for students to study and discuss biblical and other literature in order to gain insights concerning individual personhood and to determine appropriate pastoral roles; (c) To influence students towards an open, affirming style: an attitude toward persons, including children and the vulnerable, and ministry which is nondefensive, pro-active and positive, arising both from the student’s view of him/herself as a secure person and as one who understands these issues in the context of their pastoral tasks; (d) To help students develop their own ministerial code of conduct in the light of recent literature on this issue; (e) To give students a foundation for further studies in pastoral ministry. Content 1 Introduction to ministry formation; review of students’ past and present ministry experience as a resource for ministry formation. 2 Reflection upon biblical passages relevant to ministry call, style and pastoral perspectives such as Exodus 3:1–4:17; Isaiah 6; Ezekiel 1–3; Mark 10:35–45; Acts 20:17–35; 2 Corinthians 4–5; Ephesians 4:1–16; 1 Timothy 3:1–7; 1 Peter 5:1–11. 3 A brief historical overview of pastoral roles in Christian ministry. 4 Vocation and guidance in the Christian life. The relation between individual and corporate Christian ministries. 5 Personal security and identity; integrity; identifying strengths, limitations and uniqueness; developing a personable style; ministerial codes of ethics.

6

7

The search for a pastoral identity: who/what is a pastor; identifying and negotiating expectations, including disparate expectations. Ministry formation issues in theological education: critical study of the Scriptures; theological education and spiritual growth.

Bibliography Cohen, M., The Divided Self (London: Marshall Pickering, 1996). Cullinan, A., Sorting it Out: Discerning God’s Call to Ministry (Valley Forge, PA: Judson, 1999). Drescher, J., If I were Starting My Ministry Again (Nashville: Abingdon, 2002). Duce, P. and D. Strange, Keeping Your Balance (Leicester: Apollos, 2001). Fraser, E., Confessions of a Beginning Theologian (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1998). Hunt, R. A., et al, Clergy Assessment and Career Development (Nashville: Abingdon, 1990). Kinast, R. L., Let Ministry Teach (Collegeville, MN: Liturgical, 1996). Lewis, G. D., Meeting the Moment: Leadership and Well-being in Ministry (Nashville: Abingdon, 2002). McGrath, A. E., Understanding Doctrine: Its Relevance and Purpose for Today (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1990). Messer, D., Contemporary Images of Christian Ministry (Nashville: Abingdon, 1989). Peterson, E., Working the Angles (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1991). Schnase, R., Ambition in Ministry: Our Spiritual Struggle with Success, Achievement and Competition (Nashville: Abingdon, 1993). Tidball, D., Builders and Fools (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1999). Tovey, P., Growing in Ministry (UK: Grove, 2000). Willicom, W., Calling & Character: Virtues of the Ordained Life (Nashville: Abingdon, 2003).  PC515 Christian Worship Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) To explore and analyse the theology and practice of worship through a study of the Old and New Testaments. (b) To discriminate between the major current forms of worship in Australia through analysis of present practice and significant elements in the historical processes which have led to the present situation. (c) To enable students to reflect upon and work towards a personal resolution of contemporary issues in the theology, practice and leadership of worship. (d) To equip students with substantial skills in the leadership of worship.

MDiv Unit Outlines

Content Section A: Biblical Perspectives The theology and practice of worship through a study of the Old and New Testaments. This requires an examination of the theology and practice of worship in the Old and New Testaments (with reference to Jewish and early church patterns of worship, e.g., as in the Didache, Justin Martyr’s First Apology and the Apostolic Tradition of Hippolytus). It will involve reflection on themes such as sacrifice, service, the nature of praise, corporate prayer, adoration, confession and forgiveness, the confession of faith, the relationship of worship, discipleship and ethics, the Lord’s Supper, baptism, preaching and teaching, prayer and offerings and other elements of worship. Section B: Historical Developments The major, current forms of worship in Australia through reflection upon present practice and significant elements in the historical processes which have led to the present situation. The focus will be upon the principles and practice of worship in Protestant denominations and traditions but including reference to the Catholic and Orthodox traditions. These traditions should be interpreted in the light of their historical development, including the liturgical principles and practice of the Reformation and denominations. Cultural and other developments and influences which have led to the present forms of worship. Where possible opportunity should be given for particular study of one of these traditions. Section C: Contemporary Themes Reflection upon contemporary issues in the theology, practice and leadership of worship. This requires an examination of contemporary issues in worship in the light of scriptural principles, historical developments and cultural perspectives. To be included are: the forms of leadership; the style of liturgy; structure and freedom; doctrine and experience; the relationship of traditions of worship to contemporary culture and sub-cultures; receiving and offering; personal and communal dimensions; symbolism; architecture; music and the use of the creative arts and the influence of feminism, multiculturalism and the media. Section D: The Practice of Worship The aim is to equip students with basic skills in the leadership of worship. This involves a study of the basic principles of the planning, preparation and conduct of worship. Wherever possible students should be observers of the planning, conduct and evaluation of corporate worship and take an active part in the planning and leadership of at least three services of worship. Bibliography General Works Webber, R. E. (ed.), The Complete Library of Christian Worship (Vols I–VII; Nashville: Star Song, 1993-1994).

165

Particular Topics Basden, P., The Worship Maze (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1999). Carson, D. A. (ed.), Worship by the Book (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2002). Davies, H., Bread of Life & Cup of Joy (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1993). Dawn M. J., Reaching Out without Dumbing Down (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1995). Dawn, M. J., A Royal Waste of Time (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1999). Horton, M., Rediscovering the Drama of God Centred Worship (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2002). Hurtado, L. W., At the Origins of Christian Worship (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1999). Krieder, E., Given for You (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1998). Peterson, D., Engaging with God (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1992). Plantinga, C. and S. A. Rozeboom, Discerning the Spirits (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2003). Ray, D., Wonderful Worship in Smaller Churches (Cleveland, OH: Pilgrim, 2000). Wakefield G. S., An Outline of Christian Worship (Edinburgh: T & T Clark, 1998). Webber, R., Planning Blended Worship (Nashville: Abingdon, 1998).  PC527 Patterns of Spiritual Formation Status Elective Exclusions PC530. Learning Outcomes (a) To help students appreciate and appraise various approaches to Christian spirituality; (b) To enable students interpret the forms of Christian spirituality and thus set them in their biblical and theological contexts; (c) To equip students to discern and practise spiritual disciplines leading to maturity in Christ. Content Section A: Spirituality in Christian Life and Ministry 1 What is spirituality? Christian and non-Christian approaches. 2 Biblical patterns of spirituality; Old Testament and New Testament models, including “godliness”, “people of God”, “spirit”, “in Christ”, “indwelling of the Spirit”, “the communion of saints”. 3 Expressions of life in Christ as seen in contemporary Christian churches: e.g. contemplative, charismatic-pentecostal, evangelical, social justice oriented. 4 Spirituality as applied theology: the imitation of Christ, the beatific vision, godliness and the Christian doctrine of God.

MDiv Unit Outlines

166

Section B: Spiritual Disciplines for Maturity in Christ 5 Disciplines of the inner life, including prayer, Bible study, meditation, solitude, contemplation, fasting, keeping a spiritual journal. 6 Lifestyle disciplines: simplicity, loyalty, obedience, commitment service. 7 Corporate disciplines: public worship, confession, guidance and discernment, accountability and encouragement, community life, leadership. Bibliography Anderson, K. R. and R. D. Reese, Spiritual Mentoring (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1999). Benner, D., Surrender to Love (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2003). Chester, T., The Message of the Prayer (Leicester: IVP, 2003). Guenther, M., The Practice of Prayer (Boston: Cowley, 1998). Green, M. and R. P. Stevens, Living the Story, Biblical Spirituality for Everyday Christians (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2003). McGrath, A. E., Christian Spirituality (Oxford: Blackwell, 1998). Mayes, A. D., Spirituality and Struggle (London: SPCK, 2002). Nouwen, H. J., Ministry and Spirituality (New York: Continuum, 1996). Foster, R. J., Streams of Living Water (San Francisco: HarperSanFrancisco, 1998). Foster, R. J., Prayer: Finding the Heart's True Home (London: Hodder & Stoughton, 1992). Stevens, R. P., Down to Earth Spirituality (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2003). Tan, S. and D. H. Gregg, Disciplines of the Holy Spirit (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1997). Willard, D., The Renovation of the Heart: Putting on the Character of Christ (Colorado Springs: NavPress, 2002). Journals: Mogabah, J. S. (ed.), Weavings: A Journal of the Spiritual Life (Nashville: Upper Room). Benner, D. G. and G. W. Moon (eds), Conversations: A Forum for Authentic Transformation (Atlanta: Life Springs, 2003).  PC530 Christian Spirituality Status Elective Exclusions PC527 and PC628. Learning Outcomes 1 To lead students to appreciate and appraise the nature, function and dimensions of spirituality and Christian Spiritual Formation and their relationship to biblical and theological study.

2

3

4

To help students appreciate and critique the diversity of Christian spiritualities and understand what gives rise to such variety. To equip students to adapt ministry patterns in their churches in order to facilitate spiritual maturing in a changing society. To equip students to practice the spiritual disciplines as part of soul-care and spiritual development.

Content Section A: Spirituality for Christian Life and Ministry 1 Defining spirituality and spiritual formation: their nature, function and goals, and the factors that give rise to the variety of patterns of spirituality. 2 Biblical patterns of spirituality: Old Testament and New Testament models, elements such as encounter with God, renewal of the mind, vocation, accountability and community, recreation, work, spiritual warfare, justice and mercy. 3 Biblical patterns and their implications for contemporary spirituality with reference to expressions in contemporary Christian traditions: Contemplative, Evangelical, CharismaticPentecostal, Holiness, Puritan/Reformed, socialecological justice. 4 Theological study of biblical patterns: imitation of Christ, beatific vision, “in Christ”, “the communion of saints”, godliness, “indwelling of the spirit”, pilgrimage, etc. 5 Growing in a context of spiritual opposition and divine help. A study (biblical, theological and contemporary) of the influence of spirit beings (the Holy Spirit, angelic, and demonic) on personal spiritual growth. Section B: Historical Spirituality 6 A brief exposure to at least two historical expressions of Christian Spirituality with special focus on the contextual factors involved in their formation and the implications for today. Section C: Spiritual Disciplines for Spiritual Formation 7 The functions and misuse of the spiritual disciplines in spiritual formation. 8 Disciplines of the inner life, including prayer, silence, solitude, self-examination, confession, Bible study, meditation, contemplation, fasting, and journalling. Special attention should be given to the devotional use of Scripture in the context of biblical scholarship (Lectio Divina). 9 Lifestyle disciplines, including simplicity, giving, hospitality, chastity, Sabbath observance, and service. 10 Corporate disciplines, including worship, guidance and discernment, submission and authority, fellowship and community, confession and spiritual direction.

MDiv Unit Outlines

167

(c) To equip students for ministry to families and to people in various life stages and transitions.

Bibliography Journals: Weavings: A Journal of the Christian Spiritual Life (Nashville: Upper Room, 1986-). The Way: A Review of Contemporary Christian Spirituality (London: The Way, 1990). Grove Spirituality Series (Cambridge: Grove, 19821991). Monographs: Arnold, C., Three Crucial Questions About Spiritual Warfare (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1997). Barton, S., The Spirituality of the Gospels (London: SPCK, 1992). Gire, K., Windows of the Soul: Experiencing God in New Ways (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1996). Guenther, M., Holy Listening (London: Darton, Longman & Todd, 1994). Holt, B., A Brief History of Christian Spirituality (Oxford: Lion, 1993). Leonard, B. J. (ed.), Becoming Christian: Dimensions of Spiritual Formation (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1990). Maas, R. and G. O’Donnell, Spiritual Traditions for the Contemporary Church (Nashville: Abingdon, 1990). McGrath, A., Spirituality in an Age of Change (Grand Rapids, Zondervan, 1994). Mulholland, M. R., Invitation to a Journey (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1993). Murphy, E., The Handbook for Spiritual Warfare (Nashville: Thomas Nelson, 2003). Nouwen, H., Life of the Beloved (New York: Crossroad, 1992). Packer, J. and L. Wilkinson, Alive to God (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1992). Peterson, E., The Contemplative Pastor (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1993). Rice, H., Reformed Spirituality (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1991). Smith, M., The Word is Very Near You: A Guide to Praying with Scripture (London: Darton, Longman & Todd, 1990). Sheriffs, D., The Friendship of the Lord (Carlisle: Paternoster, 1996). Steere, D., Dimensions of Prayer (Nashville: Upper Room, 1997). Thompson, M., Soul Feast: An Invitation to the Christian Spiritual Life (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1995).  PC602 Foundations of Pastoral Care Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) To explore critical issues in pastoral theology; (b) To enable students to develop an integrated biblical and theological understanding of pastoral ministry;

Content Section A: Biblical and Theological Perspectives 1 Biblical and theological perspectives on the nature of persons and groups; the human predicament; salvation and wholeness. 2 Biblical patterns and models of pastoral care, including the roles of the people of God as a caring community. 3 The maturity theme, individual and corporate, within the New Testament; the relationships between pastor-teacher functions and pastoral care functions; proactive and reactive styles. 4 An overview of the history of pastoral care; the integration of insights from the social sciences. Section B: Pastoral Care in the Stages of Life 5 The distinction between pastoral care and pastoral counselling; the relationship between pastoral care and the regular life of the church, including Christian education and liturgy. 6 Caring for the carers; supervision; support groups; the role of the church and church leadership. 7 Pastoral care in major life-stages and transition; common crises of life in childhood, youth, early adulthood, middle age, old age, with attention to Christian initiation and nurture. 8 Pastoral care of families and single people; preparation for marriage; vocational guidance. 9 An introduction to cross-cultural factors in pastoral care; family patterns in various cultures and subcultures. Bibliography Bridges, W., Managing Transitions, Making the Most of Change (London: Nicholas Brealey, 2001). Capps, D., Agents of Hope: a Pastoral Psychology (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1995). Gerkin, C., An Introduction to Pastoral Care (Nashville: Abingdon, 1997). Moessner, J. S., Through the Eyes of Women: Insights for Pastoral Care (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1996). Oates, W., Grief, Transition and Loss (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1997). Peterson, E., Five Smooth Stones for Pastoral Work (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1992). Price, W., In Transition (Harrisburg: Morehouse, 2002). Proctor, S. and G. Taylor, We Have this Ministry (Nashville: Judson, 1996). Sell, C., Transitions (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1991). Smith, D., Empowering Ministry (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1996). Storms, C., To Love Mercy: Becoming a Person of Compassion, Acceptance and Forgiveness (Colorado: NavPress, 1991). Tidball, D., Builders and Fools (Leicester: IVP, 1999). White, P., The Effective Pastor (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2000). Willimon, W. H., Pastor: the Theology and Practice of Ordained Ministry (Nashville: Abingdon, 2002).

MDiv Unit Outlines

168

Willimon, W. H., Pastor: A Reader for Ordained Ministry (Nashville: Abingdon, 2002). Woodward, J. and S. Pattison, The Blackwell Reader in Pastoral and Practical Theology (Oxford: Blackwell, 2000). Journals, and periodicals of value Ames, S. (ed.), Ministry, Society and Theology (Victoria: Bullen). Beasley Murray, P., Ministry Today (Richard Baxter Institute for Ministry). Curkpatrick, S. (ed.), Ministry, Society and Theology (Mulgrave, Victoria: Australian Association of Supervised Pastoral Education). Honeycutt, R. (ed.), Review and Expositor (Louisville: Southern Baptist Theological Seminary). Marshall, H. I. (ed.), Evangelical Quarterly (Carlisle: Paternoster). Nuncarrow, T. (ed.), Ministry Digest (Unley, SA: South Australia Mediacom). Strunk and Orlo (eds), Journal of Pastoral Care (Kutztown: Journal of Pastoral Care). 

6

7

8

(c) handicapped and disabled persons. Pastoral care of people in the following situations: (a) marital disharmony and divorce; (b) dying, death and bereavement; the grief process; (c) depression. Pastoral care of those in crises, or with chronic conditions. Students study two of: (a) alcoholism & drug dependence (b) attempted suicide (c) long-term illness (d) child abuse and domestic violence (e) AIDS and sexually transmitted diseases (f) unemployment and work related stress (g) those in trouble with the law (h) financial or debt-related stress Community resources for pastoral care, including other helping professions; then to refer.

Note: (a) Sections A and B are weighted approximately 40% and 60% respectively. (b) If PC602 has not been taken, approved colleges are required to ensure that students have studied the unit matter of PC602 Section A.

PC603 Pastoral Skills and Methods Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) To explore and critique various aims and methods of pastoral care; (b) To help students identify, analyse, and develop people helping skills, so as to deliver pastoral care with the student’s own empathetic involvement; (c) To provide students with opportunities to appraise skills which they see modelled, and to role play, with supervision, such skills themselves, so as to enable them to help persons pastorally. Content Section A: Pastoral Skills and Methods 1 An introduction to aims and methods in pastoral care and pastoral counselling and their implications for Christian community. 2 Relational skills; empathy, respect, concreteness, genuineness; listening skills. 3 Equipping others; teaching, encouragement, recognition of abilities, training. 4 Mechanics of care; administration, publicity, the various settings of care, record-keeping. Section B: Pastoral Care in Particular Situations In the topics studied below, attention should be paid not only to the needs of those in care but the carers’ own lives. 5

Pastoral care of persons with special needs, including: (a) the recognition of normal and abnormal conditions; (b) the mentally ill;

Bibliography Augsburger, D. W., Helping People Forgive (Nashville: Westminster John Knox, 1996). Benner, D., Strategic Pastoral Counselling (2nd ed.; Grand Rapids: Baker, 2003). Buxton, G., Dancing in the Dark: the Privilege of Participating in the Ministry of Christ (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2001). Capps, D., Giving Counsel: A Minister’s Guidebook (St Louis: Chalice, 2001). Calhoun, G. J., Pastoral Companionship (New York: Paulist, 1986). Carr, W., Handbook of Pastoral Studies (London: SPCK, 1997). Claypool, J. R., The Hopeful Heart (Harrisburg: Morehouse, 2003). Cloud, H. and J. Townsend, Boundaries in Marriage (Sydney: Strand, 1999). Couture, P. D. and R. D. Hunter, Pastoral Care and Social Conflict (Nashville: Abingdon, 1995). Culbertson, P, Caring for God’s People (Minneapolis: Fortress, 2000). Dann, B., Addiction, Pastoral Responses (Nashville: Abingdon, 2002). Dawn, M. J., The Unnecessary Pastor (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). de Paulo, J. R., What we Know and What You Can do about Depression (New York: John Wiley & Sons, 2002). Everett, C. (ed.), Divorce and the Next Generation, Perspectives for Young Adults in the New Millennium (New York: Hawthorn, 2001). Fawcett, J. (ed.), Stress, Trauma Handbook (Monrovia: World Vision, 2003). Friberg, N. C. and M. R. Lasser, Before the Fall (Collegeville: Liturgical, 1998).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Goodliff, P., With Unveiled Face (London: Darton, Longman and Todd, 2005). Harvey, R. W. and Benner, D. G., Understanding and Facilitating Forgiveness (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1996). Howe, L., Comforting the Fearful (New York: Paulist, 2003). Jacobs M., Swift to Hear (London: Darton, Longman and Todd, 1993). Jacobs, M., Still Small Voice (London: SPCK, 2001). Kirkwood, N. A., Pastoral Care in Hospitals (Sydney: EJ Dwyer, 1995). Koenig, H. G. and A. J. Weaver, Pastoral Care of Older Adults (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1998). McMinn, M. R. and T. R. Phillips, Care For The Soul: Exploring the Intersection of Psychology & Theology (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2001). Moots, P., Becoming Barnabas (New York: Alban, 2004). Moran, F. M., Listening, A Pastoral Style (Sydney: EJ Dwyer, 1997). Shelp, E. E. and R. H. Sunderland, Sustaining Presence, A Model of Caring by People of Faith (Nashville: Abingdon, 2002). Stairs, J., Listening for the Soul Minneapolis: Fortress, 2000). TenBrook, G. W., Broken Bodies, Healing Hearts: Reflections of a Hospital Chaplain (New York: Haworth, 2000). Williams, D. R. and J. A. Sturzl (eds), Grief Ministry: Helping Others Mourn (San Jose, CA: Resource, 2001). Journals Ames, S. (ed.), Ministry Society and Theology (Victoria: Bulleen). Curkpatrick, S. (ed.), Ministry, Society and Theology (Mulgrave, Victoria: Australian Association of Supervised Pastoral Education). Honeycutt, R. H. (ed.), Review and Expositor (Louisville: Southern Baptist Theological Seminary). Marshall, I. H. (ed.), Evangelical Quarterly, (Carlisle: Paternoster). Nuncarrow, T. (ed.), Ministry Digest (Unley, SA: South Australia Mediacom). Strunk and Orlo (eds), Journal of Pastoral Care (Kutztown: Journal of Pastoral Care). Wallace, R. M. (ed.), Journal of Ministry in Addiction & Recovery (Bingamton: Haworth).  PC605 Principles of Christian Counselling Status Elective Learning Outcomes 1 To assist students to come to an understanding of and develop perspectives on lifespan development, through analysing the theory and practice of counselling.

2

3

4

169

To help students become familiar with major life stages and transitions, as well as common crises of life, with specific emphasis on issues of attachment, bonding, and relationships through the lifecycle and to integrate them into a Christian framework. To provide opportunity for students to reflect critically on their own Christian understanding in light of the social sciences and counselling theory. To provide students with extended opportunity to practice and develop microskills.

Content Section A 1 Developmental paradigms and lifespan development overviews. 2 Newer approaches to lifespan development – contextual, postmodern, constructivist, feminist and narrative perspectives. 3 Cultural factors in lifespan development. 4 Attachment theory, lifespan development, and implications for counselling. 5 The social sciences and Christian ministry. 6 Ethical, professional and legal issues in counselling. Section B 1 Development – working towards a biblical anthropology 2 Wholeness and health – working towards developing a biblical anthropology 3 Maturity and Community – developing biblical frameworks Section C: Practical 1 Counselling microskills practice – at least 14 hours of basic counselling skills, including attending, active listening, empathy and probing. 2 The taping of a counselling session, with 15 minute transcript showing joining, empathy and advanced empathy. Note: Sections A, B and C are weighted approximately 25%, 25% and 50%. Bibliography Bee, H., The Journey of Adulthood (4th ed.; Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 2000). Bee, H. and D. Boyd, Lifespan Development (Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 2002). Birren, J. E. and K. W. Schaie (eds), Handbook of the Psychology of Aging (5th ed.; San Diego: Academic, 2001). Bloom, S., Creating Sanctuary: Toward an Evolution of Sane Societies (New York: Routledge, 1997). Bowlby, J., Attachment and Loss (Vols I-III; London; New York: Penguin; Basic, 1969-1980). Cassidy, J. and P. R. Shaver (eds), Handbook of Attachment (New York: Guilford, 1999). Cavanaugh, J. C. and F. Blanchard-Fields, Adult Development and Aging (5th ed.; Belmont, CA: Wadsworth, 2006).

MDiv Unit Outlines

170

Clinton, T. and G. Sibcy, Attachments: Why You Love, Feel and Act the Way You Do (Brentwood, TN: Integrity, 2002). Corey, G., Student Manual for Theory and Practice of Counseling and Psychotherapy (6th ed.; Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks Cole, 2001). Culley, S. and T. Bond, Integrative Counselling Skills in Action (Pacific Grove, CA: Sage, 2004). Dryden, W. (ed.), Standards and Ethics for Counselling in Action (London: Sage, 1999). Egan, G. and R. McGourty, The Skilled Helper (7th ed.; Monterey, CA: Brooks Cole, 2002). Feeney, J. A. and P. Noller, Adult Attachment (Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, 1996). Holmes, J., John Bowlby and Attachment Theory (London: Routledge, 1993). Lemme, B. H., Development in adulthood (3rd ed.; Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 2002). Parkes, C. M., J. Stevenson-Hinde & P. Marris, Attachment Across the Lifecycle (New York: Routledge, 1996). Simpson, J. and W. S. Rhodes (eds), Attachment Theory and Close Relationships (New York: Guilford, 1998). Whitbourne, S. K., Adult Development and Aging: Biopsychological Perspectives (2nd Ed.; New York: Wiley, 2005). Additional Reading: Collins. G. R., The Biblical Basis of Counselling for People Helpers (Wheaton, IL: Tyndale House, 1993). Hurding, R. F., Roots and Shoots: (London: Hodder & Stoughton, 1993). Jacobs, M., Psychodynamic Counselling in Action (London: Sage, 2004). Jenkins, P., Counselling, Psychotherapy and the Law (London: Safe, 1997). Jones, S. L. and R. E. Butmann, Modern Psychotherapies (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1991). Kirwan, W. T., Biblical Concepts for Christian Counselling (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1984). McMinn, M. R., Psychology, Theology and Spirituality (Wheaton, IL: Tyndale House, 1996). Narramore, C. M., The Compact Encyclopaedia of Psychological Problems (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1984). Sanders, R. K. (ed.), Christian Counselling Ethics (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1997).  PC606 Applied Christian Counselling Status Elective Learning Outcomes 1 To assist students to come to a critical understanding of current models of the theory and practice of counselling.

2

3

To help students develop an integrated Christian approach to the dynamics of counselling and its place in Christian ministry. To assist students to build on their practical counselling microskills.

Content Section A 1 Four key therapeutic approaches to counselling and their applications: a analytic/psychodynamic b cognitive-behavioural c experiential-expressive d strategic-systemic 2 Perspectives on at least 3 current models of counselling: e.g., Person-centred counselling, Gestalt therapy, Transactional analysis, Cognitive Behavioural Therapies, Narrative Therapies. 3 Christian theology and counselling theory. 4 Ethical, professional and legal issues in counselling. Section B 5 At least 14 hours of intensive microskilling, building on the skills and frameworks of PC605. 6 A video of a 45 minute to 1 hour counselling session, with 15 minute transcript showing student’s growing ability in advanced empathy, probing, confronting and diagnostic skills. Note: Sections A and B are weighted approximately 40% and 60%. Bibliography Corey, G., Theory and Practice of Counselling and Psychotherapy (6th ed.; Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks Cole, 2000). Corey, G., Approach to Counselling and Psychotherapy (5th ed.; Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks Cole, 2001). Corey, G., Student Manual for Theory and Practice of Counselling Psychotherapy (5th ed.; Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks Cole, 2001). Egan, G. and R. McGourty, The Skilled Helper (7th ed.; Monterey, CA: Brooks Cole, 2002). Egan, G., Exercises in Helping Skills (7th ed.; Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks Cole, 2001). Jones, S. L. and R. E. Butman, Modern Psychotherapies (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1991). Legg, Psychology and the Reflective Counselor (London: Blackwell, 1998). Lynch, G. (ed.), Clinical Counselling in Pastoral Settings (London; New York: Routledge, 1999). Lynch, G., Pastoral Care and Counselling (London: Sage, 2002). O’Donohue, W., J. E. Fisher and S. C. Hayes, Cognitive Behavior Therapy: Applying Empirically Supported Techniques in Your Practice (Hoboken, NJ: Wiley, 2003). de Board, R., Counselling for Toads: A Psychological Adventure (London: Routledge, 1998). 

MDiv Unit Outlines

PC608 Spiritual Formation for Professional Ministries Status Elective Exclusions EM617 Learning Outcomes (a) To give students opportunity to discuss and work towards a personal resolution of issues facing a person in professional ministry; (b) To equip students to critically apply spirituality to major areas of Christian ministry; (c) To encourage increased self-awareness in students for professional ministries as to their own growth in maturity in Christ and as those ministering to others. Content Section A: Personal Spiritual Development 1 Vocation, call, giftedness, career choice; selection for professional ministries. 2 Maintaining spiritual vitality in professional ministry settings, including patterns of personal prayer and Bible study; the daily offices; fellowship with other Christians. 3 Dealing with stress and its spiritual consequences; conflict resolution; avoiding burnout; material possessions and money; recreation. 4 Doubt, temptation and testing, spiritual warfare; spiritual wholeness. Section B: Relationships in Ministry 5 Personal significance and security; relational skills, including listening, self-disclosure, empathy. 6 Relations with others in ministry, including congregational members and leaders, co-workers, other ministers, Christians from other traditions, those in authority. 7 Relationships in the professional minister’s household; the single professional minister; the Christian home; spiritual, relational and financial factors affecting the spouse and children. 8 Roles and role conflict; authority and team-work; servant ministries; taking responsibility. Note: Sections A and B are weighted approximately equally. Bibliography In addition to works listed in the Bibliography for PC525 & PC628: Journals: Leadership, Grid and Australian Ministry. Carson, D. A. and J. D. Woodbridge, Letters Along the Way (Wheaton, IL: Crossway, 1993). Chan, S., Spiritual Theology (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1998). Demarest, B., Satisfy Your Soul (Colorado Springs: NavPress, 1999). Foster, R., Streams of Living Water (San Francisco: HarperSanFrancisco, 1998).

171

Foster, R. and J. B. Smith (eds), Devotional Classics (San Francisco: HarperSanFrancisco, 1993). Kingham, R., Surprises of the Spirit (Canberra: Barnabas, 1991). McGrath, A. E., Christian Spirituality: An Introduction (Oxford; Malden, MA: Blackwell, 1999). McGrath, A. E., The Journey: A Pilgrim in the Lands of the Spirit (London: Hodder & Stoughton, 1999). Nouwen, H., In the Name of Jesus (New York: Crossroad, 1989). Peterson, E. H., Christ Plays in Ten Thousand Places (London: Hodder & Stoughton, 2005). Peterson, E. H., The Contemplative Pastor (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1993). Piper, J., Desiring God (Sisters, OR: Multnomah, 2003). Shawchuck, N. and R. Heuser, Managing the Congregation (Nashville: Abingdon, 1996). Stevens, R. P., The Abolition of the Laity: Vocation, Work & Ministry in a Biblical Perspective (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000).  PC616 Denominational Distinctives Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) To guide students towards a critical understanding of the historical, theological and spiritual roots of a significant Christian tradition; (b) To equip students to assess critically contemporary trends in the tradition studied; (c) To enable students to reflect upon their own attitudes towards formation and ministry in the tradition studied. Content 1 The historical origins of the tradition selected, taking account of both historical, sociological, cultural, ecclesial, theological and spiritual factors. 2 Major events significant for the formation of the pastoral ethos and distinctive theological and ministerial rationale of the tradition selected for study. 3 Significant figures in the tradition concerned, both men and women, at least one ‘lay’ and one “ordained”. 4 The distinctive theological motifs or beliefs of the tradition and their pastoral and structural consequences (local, national and global). 5 Relationships with other Christian traditions, the wider community and Australian society. 6 Contemporary tensions, growth points and opportunities in the tradition selected, illustrated by a case study of a particular congregation.

MDiv Unit Outlines

172

Note: The unit assumes that students will study the tradition of which they are a part but this is not a requirement. In either case, students should utilise the opportunity to explore their own vocation in relation to both opportunities and challenges presented to them by the tradition concerned.

(b) To enable students to focus in greater depth on selected periods through inductive study of primary sources from the Christian tradition and thus make an assessment of the tradition. (c) To equip students to make discriminating application of resources from the Christian tradition to present day spiritual life.

Bibliography

Content Section A: History of the Christian Spiritual Tradition A survey outlining broad spiritual traditions as a basis for further study of selected periods: biblical roots and perspectives, the Church Fathers, monasticism, the English mystics, Reformation and Counter-Reformation, Pietism, the Evangelical Revivals, the (Tractarian) Oxford Movement.

Baptist Primary sources: Brackney, W. H. (ed.), Baptist Life and Thought: A Source Book (Rev. ed.; Valley Forge, PA: Judson Press, 1998). Freeman, C. W., et al, Baptist Roots: A Reader in the Theology of a Christian People (Valley Forge, PA: Judson Press, 1999). Secondary sources: Brackney, W. H., A Genetic History of Baptist Thought: With Special Reference to Baptists in Britain and North America (Macon, GA: Mercer University Press, 2004). Goodwin, E. C., The New Hiscox Guide for Baptist Churches (Valley Forge,PA: Judson Press, 1995). Leonard, B. J., Baptist Ways: A History (Valley Forge, PA: Judson Press, 2003). Manley, K. R., From Woolloomooloo to ‘Eternity’: A History of Australian Baptists 2 vols. (Milton Keynes, U.K.: Paternoster, 2006). Pierard, R. V. (ed.), Baptists Together in Christ 19052005: A Hundred-Year History of the Baptist World Alliance (Birmingham, AL: Samford University Press, 2005). Weaver, C. D., In Search of the New Testament Church: The Baptist Story (Macon, GA: Mercer University Press, 2008). Wright, N., Free Church, Free State: The Positive Baptist Vision (Milton Keynes, U.K.: Paternoster, 2005). Classics: Lumpkin, W. L., Baptist Confessions of Faith (Rev. ed.; Valley Forge, PA: Judson Press, 1969). McBeth, H. L., The Baptist Heritage (Nashville, TN: Broadman, 1987). 

Section B: Readings in the Christian Spiritual Tradition The study of three primary texts selected from different periods. The particular themes for each text should be identified, discussed in their historical setting and related to their application to present day spirituality. The texts should be chosen from those listed in the Recommended Readings, or others approved by the Field moderator. Note Sections A and B are weighted approximately equally. Bibliography In addition to works listed in the recommended readings for PC327: Adam, P., Hearing God’s Words: Exploring Biblical Spirituality (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2004). Downey, M., Understanding Christian Spirituality (New York: Paulist, 1997). Mursell, G. (ed.), The Story of Christian Spirituality: Two Thousand Years, from East to West (Oxford: Lion, 2001). Nouwen, H. J. M., Life of the Beloved: Spiritual Living in a Secular World (New York: Crossroad, 2002). Rienstra, D., An Invitation to Christian Spirituality (San Francisco: Jossey Bass Wiley, 2005). Sheldrake, P. (ed.), The New SCM Dictionary of Spirituality (London: SCM, 2005). Williams, R., Christian Spirituality from the New Testament to St. John of the Cross (London: Darton, Longman and Todd, 1990).

PC628 The Christian Spiritual Tradition  Status Elective

PC629 Contemporary Trends in Spirituality

Exclusions This unit may not be taken if PC530 has been taken.

Status Core

Learning Outcomes (a) To guide students towards a critical understanding of Christian spirituality from the New Testament to the present;

Learning Outcomes (a) To assist students to analyse major influences in spirituality; (b) To enable students to critique the world-views behind contemporary spiritualities;

MDiv Unit Outlines

(c) To equip students to respond appropriately to contemporary trends in spirituality. Content Section A Includes a study of major Christian doctrines in the light of contemporary spiritualities. These include a doctrine of God, creation and human wholeness. Concerns to do with our understanding of the Kingdom of God; authentic spirituality; ecology; the place of scripture; meditation; contemplative prayer; and the place of religious experience. Section B From the perspective of biblical and theological insights and Christian practice students are encouraged to come to an appreciative and critical study of the Islamic, Buddhist, Aboriginal, Feminist and Creation spiritualities. Bibliography Recommended Readings: Abu-Rabi, I. M., The Blackwell Companion of Contemporary Islamic Thought (London: Blackwell, 2006). Augsburger, D., Dissident Discipleship (Grand Rapids: Brazos Press, 2005). Barket, L. L., Stone Crossings: Finding Grace in Hard and Hidden Places (Downers Grove: InterVarsity 2008). Clapp, R., Tortured Wonders (Grand Rapids: Brazos Press, 2004). Drane, J., Do Christians Know How to be Spiritual? The Rise of New Spirituality, and the Mission of the Church (London: Darton, Longman and Todd, 2005). Foster, R., Streams of Living Water: Celebrating the Great Traditions of Christian Faith (San Francisco: HarperSanFrancisco. 1998). Fox, M., Creation Spirituality (San Francisco: HarperSanFrancisco 1995). Hunt, S., Spiritual Mothering: Titus 2 Model for Women Mentoring Women (Wheaton: Crossway. 2008). King, U., The Search for Spirituality (Norwich: Canterbury Press, 2009). Liebelt P (ed), Gentle Rain on Parched Earth (Melbourne: JBCE 1996) McGrath, A. E, Christian Spirituality (London: Blackwells, 1999). Raiter, M., Stirrings of the Soul (Kingsford: Matthias Media, 2003). Rankin, M., An Introduction to Religious and Spiritual Experience (New York: Continuum, 2009). Sheldrake, P., A Brief History of Spirituality (London: Blackwell, 2006). Stevens, R. P., Down to Earth Spiritualty (Downers Grove: InterVarsity 2003). Storkey, E., Created or Constructed?(Sydney: UNSW Press, 2001). Tacey, D., ReEnchantment, (Pymble: Harper and Collins, 2000).

173

Tacey, D., The Spirituality Revolutionary (Pymble: Harper/Collins 2003). Thompson, M., Soul Feast (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2005). Whelan, R., J. Kirwan, and P. Haffner, The Cross and the Rain Forest (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1996) Whetham, P. and Libby, Hard to be Holy (Adelaide: Openbook Press, 2001). Reference Books Holder, A., The Blackwell Companion of Christian Spirituality (London: Blackwell, 2005) Howard, E. B., The Brazos Introduction to Christian Spirituality (Grand Rapids: Brazos, 2008) Partridge, C. (ed.), The World Religions 3rd Edition (Oxford: Lion Hudson, 2005) Brown, D. W., (2nd ed), The New Introduction to Islam (London: Blackwell, 2007). Dowson, M; M. Miner, S. Devenish (eds) Spirituality in Australia: Resurgence and Divergence (Roselands, NSW: Centre for Human Interaction, Learning and Development (CHILD) & Australasian Centre for Studies in Spirituality (ACSS), 2008). Journals Fiorenza, E. S. and E. M. Townes (eds), Journal of Feminist Studies in Religion (Edinburgh: T & T Clark). John, C. (ed.). Journal of Formation & Soul Care (La Mirada: Talbot School of Theology) Jordan, T. (ed.), Spirituality (Dublin: Dominican) Mogabah, J. S. (ed.), Weavings: A Journal of the Spiritual Life (Nashville: Upper Room). Singh, D. E., Transformation: an International Journal of Holistic Mission Studies (Exeter: Paternoster Press) Wagner, N., Presence: An International Journal on Spritual Direction (Bellevue: Spiritual)  PC634 Leadership in Christian Ministry Status Elective Exclusions PC635. Learning Outcomes To develop in students a critical appreciation of and practical competence in: (a) the principles of leadership (b) how to manage organizational culture (c) how to find, select, and nurture a leadership team (d) how to manage conflict (e) how to gain an understanding of their community using census data (f) how to think strategically about Christian ministry (g) the ethics of leadership (h) themselves and how to work with others.

174

MDiv Unit Outlines

Content Section A: Leadership Principles and Skills 1 Biblical principles of leadership 2 Leadership qualities and style 3 Understanding the health of your church or organisation 4 Visionary thinking and strategic planning; communicating vision 5 Being a “change agent” and influencing organisational culture 6 Ethics in leadership 7 Finding, selecting and investing in a team; writing job contracts 8 Running effective meetings and a small group 9 Conflict management and working with different personality types Section B: Understanding Australian Society and Personal Development 10 Societal make up. Use of census data. 11 Cultural and spiritual trends and how culture shapes outreach ministry 12 Personal disciplines and intentional character development 13 Understanding your personality and overcoming disappointments Section C: Field Work 14 At least 8 hours under the guidance of a Christian in a significant leadership position, observing and reflecting upon the principles and processes of leadership in operation. 15 Students undertake a personal evaluation, under supervision, of their own strengths and weaknesses in leadership. The evaluation may be in written or oral form. Note: Sections A, B and C are weighted 60%, 20% and 20% respectively in the assessment. Bibliography Baab, L., Personality Type in Congregations (Bethesda, MD: Alban, 1998). Banks, R. and B. Ledbetter, Reviewing Leadership (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2004). Blanchard, K., J. Carlos and A. Randolph, Empowerment Takes More than a Minute (San Francisco: Berrett-Koehler, 1996). Jones, G. and R. Jones, Teamwork: How to Build Relationships (London: Scripture Union, 2003). Malphurs, A., Advanced Strategic Planning (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1999). Malphurs, A., Being Leaders (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2003). Maxwell, J., Developing the Leaders Around You (Nashville: Thomas Nelson, 1995). Rendle, G., Leading Change in the Congregation (Bethesda, MD: Alban, 1998). Richardson, R., Creating a Healthier Church (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1996). Schaller, L., Tattered Trust: Is there Hope for Your Denomination? (Nashville: Abingdon, 1996).

Shawchuck and Heuser, Managing the Congregation (Nashville: Abingdon, 1996). Steinke, P., Healthy Congregations: a Systems Approach (Bethesda, MD: Alban, 1996). Tidball, D., Builders and Fools (Leicester, IVP, 1999). Wright, W., Relational Leadership (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2000).  PC635 Principles of Leadership and Management Status Elective Exclusions PC634. Learning Outcomes (a) To develop students’ capacity for the appraisal of the theology and dynamics of leadership, challenging them to a commitment to excellence; (b) To promote the process of personal development, assisting students to become facilitators in the leadership development of others; (c) To equip students with the ability through critical reflection to structure, reform and manage congregations and other Christian organisations. Content Section A: Principles of Christian Leadership 1 Biblical principles and patterns of leadership. 2 Leadership qualities; gifts and abilities; the process of leadership development. 3 Operating as a leader: appropriate styles for different situations and people; mentoring, delegating, motivating, communicating. 4 Power, authority, responsibility and influence. Section B: Managing Christian Institutions 5 Establishing purpose, objectives, philosophy of ministry, goals, plans, administration, feedback and problem-solving. 6 Principles of organisation: alternative structures, job-descriptions, decision-making, committees, accountability, time-management. 7 Managing conflict and implementing change. 8 Financial management; Christian principles in using money, understanding accounts, budgeting, accountability. 9 Institutional life-cycles and aging; bureaucracy and devitalisation. Section C: Field Work 10 At least 8 hours under the guidance of a Christian in a significant management position, observing and reflecting upon the principles and processes of management in operation. 11 Students undertake a personal evaluation, under supervision, of their own strengths and weaknesses in leadership; it may be in written or oral form.

MDiv Unit Outlines

Note Sections A, B and C are weighted approximately 40%, 40% and 20% respectively. Bibliography Prescribed: Anthony, M. J., Management Essentials for Christian Ministries (Nashville, Tenn; Broadman & Holman, 2005). Tidball, D. J., Builders and Fools: Leadership the Bible Way (Leicester: Inter-Varsity Press, 1999). Wright, W., Relational Leadership (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2000). Recommended: Bacher, R., Church Administration: Programs, Process and Purpose (Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 2007). Bass, R. W., Leadership in Congregations (Herndon, VA: Alban, 2006). Bolman, L. G., Reframing Organizations: Artistry, Choice and Leadership (San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 2003). Brand, C. O. and R. S. Norman, Perspectives on Church Government: Five Views of Church Polity (Nashville: B&H Academic, 2004). Clarke, A. D., Secular and Christian Leadership in Corinth: A Socio-Historical and Exegetical Study of 1 Corinthians 1-6 (Bletchley, Milton Keynes: Paternoster, 2006). Cole, N., Organic Leadership: Leading Naturally Right Where You Are (Grand Rapids, Mich: Baker, 2009). Collins, J., Built to Last: Successful Habits of Visionary Companies (London: Random House, 2005). Cowan, S. B. (ed.), Who Runs the Church: 4 Views on Church Government (Grand Rapids, Mich: Zondervan, 2004). Gerzon, M., Leading through Conflict: How Successful Leaders Transform Difference into Opportunity (Boston, Mass: Harvard, 2006). Hotchkiss, D., Governance and Ministry: Rethinking Board Leadership (Herndon, VA: Alban Institute, 2008). Johnson, B. C and A. Dreitcer, Beyond the Ordinary: Spirituality for Church Leaders (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2001). Kaiser, J. E., Winning on Purpose: How to Organize Congregations to Succeed in their Mission (Nashville, Tenn: Abingdon Press, 2006). Keel, T., Intuitive Leadership: Embracing a Paradigm of Narrative, Metaphor and Chaos (Grand Rapids, MI: Baker, 2007). Laniak, T. S., Shepherds after my Heart: Pastoral Traditions and Leadership in the Bible (Downers Grove, Ill: Intervarsity Press, 2006). Malphurs, A., Being Leaders (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2003). Malphurs, A., Leading Leaders: Empowering Church Boards for Ministry Excellence (Grand Rapids, MI: Baker, 2005).

175

McNeal, R., Practicing Greatness: Seven Disciplines of Extraordinary Spiritual Leaders (San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 2006). Nelson, J., How to Become a Creative Church Leader (London: Canterbury Press, 2008). Prosser, S., To be a Servant Leader (Mahwah, NJ: Paulist, 2007). Roxburgh, A. J., The Missional Leader: Equipping Your Church to Reach the World (San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 2006). Smith, D. P., Pathway for Renewal: Practical Steps for Congregations (Herndon, VA: Alban, 2008). Tidball, D. J., Ministry by the Book: New Testament Patterns for Pastoral Leadership (Nottingham: Apollos, 2008). Welch, R. H., Church Administration: Creating Efficiency for Effective Ministry (Nashville, Tenn: Broadman & Holman, 2005). Wright, W., Mentoring: The Promise of Relational Leadership (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2004).  PC636 Clinical Pastoral Education A basic unit in Clinical Pastoral Education Content The successful completion of a basic unit in Clinical Pastoral Education.  PC640 Communication Principles Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) To introduce students to communication theory and group dynamics and equip them to appraise the various theories; (b) To help students acquire communication skills, especially in relation to Bible study methods; (c) To provide opportunity for students to undertake more detailed study of particular areas of communication as applied to Christian ministries and assess their value. Content Section A: Communication Theory 1 Elements in communication: the source, message, medium and receptor in the communication process; the appropriateness of the medium to the message; the message intended and heard. 2 Group communication: group dynamics; verbal and non-verbal communication; factors which hinder communication in formal and informal gatherings (including corporate worship). 3 Verbal skills: types of spoken communication; presentations appropriate to different age groups, cultures and situations.

MDiv Unit Outlines

176

4

5 6

Group Bible study: deductive and inductive learning; group leadership roles; various methods and programmes of study. Group learning: in corporate worship, service, work, fellowship, body-life. Church communication with the modern world; use of the media; publicity and public relations.

Section B: Communication Practice 7 Practice of skills in public speaking and study group leadership. 8 A detailed consideration of the principles involved, the advantages and disadvantages for various situations and the practice of skills, in two of the following topics: (a) Printed materials: church newspapers, bulletins, tracts; notice-boards; (b) Audio-visual techniques: incorporating current technologies; (c) Radio: preparation and presentation of scripts; interviewing techniques; talk-back radio; (d) Music: appropriateness for various situations and people; available resources (including hymn books for choir and congregational use); music and ministry; copyright issues; (e) Drama and dance: opportunities and techniques for various situations and people; corporate and liturgical dance and movement. Section C: Field Work 9 Personal creative involvement (with supervision) in one of the areas studied in topic 8, including production of a sample project involving at least 20 hours’ work. Assessment Methods Sections A, B and C are weighted approximately 40%, 40% and 20% respectively. Bibliography General Works: Baker, J. D., Christian Cyberspace Companion: A Guide to the Internet and Christian Online Resources (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1997). Barker, L., Communication (Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 2000). Bluck, J., Christian Communications Reconsidered (Geneva: WCC, 1994). Crabb, L., Connecting (Nashville: Word, 1997). DeVito, J. A., The Interpersonal Communication Book (10th ed.; New York: Addison Wesley, 2004). Elder, B., Communication Skills (Melbourne: Macmillan, 1994). Kraft, C. H., Communication Theory For Christian Witness (Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 1991). Littlejohn, S. W., Theories Of Human Communication (Belmont: Wadsworth, 1996). Nash, T., The Christian Communicator’s Handbook (Victor, 1995).

Verbal Communication Bewes, R., Speaking In Public – Effectively (Great Britain: Christian Focus Publications, 1998). Chan, S., et al, How To Prepare A Bible Talk (Sydney: Sydney Missionary & Bible College, 2003). Cotter, H., Reading the Bible Aloud (Sydney: Aquila, 1998). DeVito, J. A., Messages Building Interpersonal Communication (4th ed.; New York: Longman, 1999). Warne, C. & P. White, How to Hold an Audience Without a Rope (Sydney: AIO, 1986). Small Groups Gudykunst, W. B., Bridging Differences: Effective Intergroup Communication (Thousand Oaks: Sage, 1994). Hestenes, R., Building Christian Community Trhough Small Groups (Pasadena, CA: Fuller, 1995). Hestenes, R., Using The Bible In Groups (Swindon, UK: British and Foreign Bible Society, 1990). Mallison, J., The Samll Group Leader (Adelaide: Open Book, 1996). Morris, K. and R. Morris, Leading Better Bible Studies: Essential Skills For Effective Small Groups (Sydney: Aquila, 1997). Mass Media Baker, J. D., Christian Cyberspace Companion: A Guide To The Internet And Christian Online Resources (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1997). Bausch, M. G., Silver Screen, Sacred Story: Using Multimedia in Worship (Washington: Alban, 2002). Eason, T., Media Ministry Made Easy: A Practical Guide To Visual Communication (Nashville: Abingdon, 2003). Schultze, Q. J., Communicating For Life: Christian Stewardship In Community And Media (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2000). Slaughter, M., Out On The Edge: A Wake-Up Call For Church Leaders On The Edge Of The Media Reformation (Nashville: Abingdon, 1998). Walsh, R., Reading the Gospels in the Dark: Portrayals of Jesus in Film (Harrisburg, PA: Trinity, 2003).  PC642–PC644 Field Education Units Candidate may not take more than 3 of units PC636, PC642-644, DM642, EM640 and not more than 2 designated Field Education units---PC642-644, DM642 and EM640. Notes (a) Units PC642–644, DM642, and EM640 will be assessed on a non-graded Pass/Fail basis, and will not be included in the calculation of grade point averages. (b) Units PC642–644, DM642, and EM640 will be moderated by the appropriate Field moderator.

MDiv Unit Outlines

(c) An introduction to the ministry issues pertaining to the context in which the Field Work will be undertaken. The precise details of the content should be outlined in advance by the individual colleges for all their students. (d) Colleges should seek approval from the relevant field moderator for their methods of reflection and evaluation for field education units.  PC642 Congregational Field Education Status Elective Exclusions Candidates may take two only of units PC642-644 and DM642. Co-requisites Colleges may require PC501 or PC537 as a co-requisite. Learning Outcomes (a) To introduce students to the practical issues related to particular ministry settings. (b) To stimulate candidates’ reflection, integration and thinking with respect to philosophical issues, including cross-cultural education, pluralism and ethnicity and the exercise of informed critical judgement on programmes of education within church or nation; (c) To facilitate in candidates an understanding of the skills involved in practical ministry, and give opportunity for the acquisition and development of these skills in chosen areas; (d) To enable candidates to examine principles of education and educational insights from the social sciences in the light of biblical perspectives and contemporary theological understanding Content Section A: Theoretical Study 1 An introduction to the planning and conduct of church services and other programmes connected with the life and work of a local congregation, and the pastoral opportunities they represent. 2 A basic study of church administration, including the role of ordained ministers, church secretary, treasurer and other leaders; church organisations; the conduct of business meetings. 3 Ministers as pro-active leaders and managers; strategy and goal-setting; appropriate leadership styles for different situations; anticipating and managing conflict. 4 Ministers as agents of social change; the local church in the local community. Section B: Field Work 5 The supervisory relationship; the supervisory session; learning covenants; evaluation; Field Committees.

6

177

EITHER not less than 200 hours’ experience (with supervision) in a local congregation. OR a period of continuous residence (with supervision) of not less than six weeks’ duration in a local congregation. In either case, (a) Approximately 120 hours are to be spent in actual ministry, including participation in the conduct of regular church services, and involvement in some aspect of the congregation’s service to its community; (b) Approximately 60 hours are to be spent in preparation, and writing up verbatims for supervisors; (c) Approximately 20 hours are to consist of reflection upon practical experience, at least 10 hours on an individual basis, with an approved supervisor. Such reflection must include comments from local congregation leaders.

Bibliography Prescribed: Bass, D. C. (ed.), For Life Abundant: Practical Theology, Theological Education, and Christian Ministry (Grand Rapids, Mich: Eerdmans, 2008). Johnson, A., Shaping Spiritual Leaders: Supervision and Formation in Congregations (Herndon, VA: Alan, 2007). Malphurs, A., A New Kind of Church: Understanding Models of Ministry for the 21st Century (Grand Rapids, Mich: Baker, 2007). Recommended: Allen, R. J., Preaching and Practical Ministry (St. Louis: Chalice, 2001). Brian, P. R., Going the Distance: How to Stay Fit for a Lifetime of Ministry (Kingsford: Matthias Media, 2006). Carl, W. J. (ed.), Best Advice: Wisdom on Ministry from 30 Leading Pastors and Preachers (Louisville, KY: Westminster John Know Press, 2009). Carroll, J. W., God’s Potters: Pastoral Leadership and the Shaping of Congregations (Grand Rapids, Mich: Eerdmans, 2006). Drane, J. W., After McDonaldization: Mission, Ministry and Christian Discipleship in an Age of Uncertainty (Grand Rapids, Mich: Baker, 2008). Elias, J. W., Remembering the Future: The Pastoral Theology of Paul the Apostle (Scottsdale, PA: Herald, 2006). Herrington, J., R. R. Creech and T. Taylor, The Leader’s Journey: Accepting the Call to Personal and Congregational Transformation (San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 2003). Hillman, G. M,. Preparing for Ministry: A Practical Guide for Theological Field Education (Grand Rapids, Mich: Kregel, 2008).

MDiv Unit Outlines

178

Hotchkiss, D., Governance and Ministry: Rethinking Board Leadership (Herndon, VA: Alban Institute, 2008). Laniak, T. S., Shepherds after my Heart: Pastoral Traditions and Leadership in the Bible (Downers Grove, Ill: Intervarsity Press, 2006). Piper, J., Brothers, We are Not Professionals: A Plea to Pastors for Radical Ministry (Nashville: Broadman and Holman, 2002). Steinke, P. L., Congregational Leadership in Anxious Times: Being Calm and Courageous No Matter What (Herndon, VA: Alban, 2006). Steinke, P. L., Healthy Congregations: A Systems Approach (Herndon, VA: Alban, 2006). Stott, J. R. W., The Living Church: Convictions of a Lifelong Pastor (Nottingham: IVP, 2007). Tidball, D. J., Ministry by the Book: New Testament Patterns for Pastoral Leadership (Nottingham: Apollos, 2008). Thompson, J., Pastoral Ministry According to Paul: A Biblical Vision (Grand Rapids, Mich: Baker, 2006). Willimon, W. H., Calling and Character: Virtues of the Ordained Life (Nashville: Abingdon, 2002). Willimon, W. H., Pastor: A Reader for Ordained Ministry (Nashville: Abingdon, 2002). Wood, C. M., Attentive to God: Thinking Theologically about Ministry (Nashville, TN: Abingdon, 2008).  PC643 Pastoral Care Field Education Status Elective Exclusions Candidates may take two only of units PC643-644 and DM642. Learning Outcomes (a) To introduce candidates to the practical issues related to pastoral care in a congregation or other ministry setting; (b) To provide candidates an opportunity to work with supervision in a church or other ministry setting for an extended period; (c) To allow candidates to reflect on the ministry they observe with an experienced practitioner(s); (d) To allow candidates to reflect on their own ministry with an experienced practitioner(s); Content Section A: Theoretical Study 1 Pastoral visitation: congregational members, families, the sick, the home-bound, and those with fringe contacts. 2 The pastoral care of new believers; assimilation into the life, work and witness of the church. 3 Pastoral opportunities provided by enquiries for the baptism or blessing of children; preparation of students for communicant membership.

4

An introduction to ministry to the dying and bereaved, including the preparation and conduct of funerals; follow-up or the bereaved.

Section B: Field Work 5 The supervisory relationship; the supervisory session, learning covenants; evaluation; Field Committees. 6

EITHER not less than 200 hours’ experience (with supervision) in a local congregation; OR a period of continuous residence (with supervisor) of not less than six weeks’ duration in a local congregation. In either case,

(a) Approximately 120 hours are to be spent in actual ministry, including participation in the conduct of church services for Christian initiation, and funerals, and involvement in pastoral visitation of different types of regular and fringe congregational members; (b) Approximately 60 hours are to be spent in preparation, and writing up verbatims for supervisors; (c) Approximately 20 hours are to consist of reflection upon practical experience, at least 10 hours on an individual basis, with an approved supervisor. Such reflection must include comments from local congregational leaders. Bibliography Prescribed: Bass, D. C. (ed.), For Life Abundant: Practical Theology, Theological Education, and Christian Ministry (Grand Rapids, Mich: Eerdmans, 2008). Johnson, A., Shaping Spiritual Leaders: Supervision and Formation in Congregations (Herndon, VA: Alan, 2007). Malphurs, A., A New Kind of Church: Understanding Models of Ministry for the 21st Century (Grand Rapids, Mich: Baker, 2007). Recommended: Allen, R. J., Preaching and Practical Ministry (St. Louis: Chalice, 2001). Brian, P. R., Going the Distance: How to Stay Fit for a Lifetime of Ministry (Kingsford: Matthias Media, 2006). Carl, W. J. (ed.), Best Advice: Wisdom on Ministry from 30 Leading Pastors and Preachers (Louisville, KY: Westminster John Know Press, 2009). Carroll, J. W., God’s Potters: Pastoral Leadership and the Shaping of Congregations (Grand Rapids, Mich: Eerdmans, 2006). Drane, J. W., After McDonaldization: Mission, Ministry and Christian Discipleship in an Age of Uncertainty (Grand Rapids, Mich: Baker, 2008).

MDiv Unit Outlines

Elias, J. W., Remembering the Future: The Pastoral Theology of Paul the Apostle (Scottsdale, PA: Herald, 2006). Herrington, J., R. R. Creech and T. Taylor, The Leader’s Journey: Accepting the Call to Personal and Congregational Transformation (San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 2003). Hillman, G. M., Preparing for Ministry: A Practical Guide for Theological Field Education (Grand Rapids, Mich: Kregel, 2008). Hotchkiss, D., Governance and Ministry: Rethinking Board Leadership (Herndon, VA: Alban Institute, 2008). Laniak, T. S., Shepherds After My Heart: Pastoral Traditions and Leadership in the Bible (Downers Grove, Ill: Intervarsity Press, 2006). Piper, J., Brothers, We Are Not Professionals: A Plea to Pastors for Radical Ministry (Nashville: Broadman and Holman, 2002). Steinke, P. L., Congregational Leadership in Anxious Times: Being Calm and Courageous No Matter What (Herndon, VA: Alban, 2006). Steinke, P. L., Healthy Congregations: A Systems Approach (Herndon, VA: Alban, 2006). Stott, J. R. W., The Living Church: Convictions of a Lifelong Pastor (Nottingham: IVP, 2007). Tidball, D. J., Ministry by the Book: New Testament Patterns for Pastoral Leadership (Nottingham: Apollos, 2008). Thompson, J., Pastoral Ministry According to Paul: A Biblical Vision (Grand Rapids, Mich: Baker, 2006). Willimon, W. H., Calling and Character: Virtues of the Ordained Life (Nashville: Abingdon, 2002). Willimon, W. H., Pastor: A Reader for Ordained Ministry (Nashville: Abingdon, 2002). Wood, C. M., Attentive to God: Thinking Theologically about Ministry (Nashville, TN: Abingdon, 2008). 

179

Content Section A: Theoretical Study 1 An introduction to the ministry issues pertaining to the context in which the Field Work will be undertaken. The precise details of the content should be outlined in advance by the individual colleges for their students. Section B: Field Work 2 The supervisory relationship; the supervisory session; learning covenant; evaluation; field committees. 3 A placement in a practical ministry situation, to include a minimum of 200 hours’ experience under supervision. Students may be placed in one of the following categories: EITHER (i) At least 120 hours cumulative experience in one non-congregation situation, such as an institutional or para-church ministry; OR (ii) A period of continuous residence and ministry of not less than six weeks duration in an institutional or para-church situation; OR (iii) A series of placements, in one or more settings, either congregational or non-congregational. In all cases, (a) Approximately 120 hours are to be spent in actual ministry, including active involvement in a variety of the organisation’s operations; (b) Approximately 60 hours are to be spent in preparation, and writing up verbatims and/or reports for supervisors; (c) Approximately 20 hours are to be spent in reflection upon practical experience, at least 10 hours on an individual basis, with an approved supervisor. Such reflections should include comments from members of the organisation or congregation where the field work was undertaken.

PC644 Practical Ministry Field Education

Bibliography

Status Elective

Prescribed: Bass, D. C. (ed.), For Life Abundant: Practical Theology, Theological Education, and Christian Ministry (Grand Rapids, Mich: Eerdmans, 2008). Johnson, A., Shaping Spiritual Leaders: Supervision and Formation in Congregations (Herndon, VA: Alan, 2007). Malphurs, A., A New Kind of Church: Understanding Models of Ministry for the 21st Century (Grand Rapids, Mich: Baker, 2007).

Exclusions Candidates may take two only of units PC642-644 and DM642. Learning Outcomes (a) To introduce candidates to the practical issues related to particular ministry settings. (b) To provide candidates an opportunity to work with supervision in a church or other ministry setting for an extended period; (c) To allow candidates to reflect on the ministry they observe with an experienced practitioner(s); (d) To allow candidates to reflect on their own ministry with an experienced practitioner(s);

Recommended: Allen, R. J., Preaching and Practical Ministry (St. Louis: Chalice, 2001). Brian, P. R., Going the Distance: How to Stay Fit for a Lifetime of Ministry (Kingsford: Matthias Media, 2006). Carl, W. J. (ed.), Best Advice: Wisdom on Ministry from 30 Leading Pastors and Preachers

MDiv Unit Outlines

180

(Louisville, KY: Westminster John Know Press, 2009). Carroll, J. W., God’s Potters: Pastoral Leadership and the Shaping of Congregations (Grand Rapids, Mich: Eerdmans, 2006). Drane, J. W., After McDonaldization: Mission, Ministry and Christian Discipleship in an Age of Uncertainty (Grand Rapids, Mich: Baker, 2008). Elias, J. W., Remembering the Future: The Pastoral Theology of Paul the Apostle (Scottsdale, PA: Herald, 2006). Herrington, J., R. R. Creech and T. Taylor, The Leader’s Journey: Accepting the Call to Personal and Congregational Transformation (San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 2003). Hillman, G. M., Preparing for Ministry: A Practical Guide for Theological Field Education (Grand Rapids, Mich: Kregel, 2008). Hotchkiss, D., Governance and Ministry: Rethinking Board Leadership (Herndon, VA: Alban Institute, 2008). Laniak, T. S., Shepherds after my Heart: Pastoral Traditions and Leadership in the Bible (Downers Grove, Ill: Intervarsity Press, 2006). Piper, J., Brothers, We Are Not Professionals: A Plea to Pastors for Radical Ministry (Nashville: Broadman and Holman, 2002). Steinke, P. L., Congregational Leadership in Anxious Times: Being Calm and Courageous No Matter What (Herndon, VA: Alban, 2006). Steinke, P. L., Healthy Congregations: A Systems Approach (Herndon, VA: Alban, 2006). Stott, J. R. W., The Living Church: Convictions of a Lifelong Pastor (Nottingham: IVP, 2007). Tidball, D. J., Ministry by the Book: New Testament Patterns for Pastoral Leadership (Nottingham: Apollos, 2008). Thompson, J., Pastoral Ministry According to Paul: A Biblical Vision (Grand Rapids, Mich: Baker, 2006). Willimon, W. H., Calling and Character: Virtues of the Ordained Life (Nashville: Abingdon, 2002). Willimon, W. H., Pastor: A Reader for Ordained Ministry (Nashville: Abingdon, 2002). Wood, C. M., Attentive to God: Thinking Theologically about Ministry (Nashville, TN: Abingdon, 2008).  PC647 Introductory Preaching Status Elective Aims (a) To assist candidates to explore theological and pastoral issues in preaching; (b) To enable candidates to understand and acquire substantial techniques for preaching; (c) To give candidates opportunities to practice preaching and further develop skills in its critique

and training, sufficient to begin a preaching ministry. Content Section A: An Introduction to Preaching 1 Preaching as the ministry of the Word; preaching and teaching; preaching and liturgy. 2 The aims, forms and context of preaching; consideration of classical models. 3 Preaching and the preacher; the person of the preacher; the relationship between preaching and personal spirituality. 4 Biblical Theology and its impact on the practice of preaching. Section B: Preaching in Practice 5 An introduction to basic principles in exposition. 6 The components of a sermon, including introductions and conclusions, outlining, illustrations, applications, transitions, climaxes. 7 Methods and techniques of public speaking; contemporary methods in preaching. Section C: Field Work 8 The preparation and delivery of a talk or portions of a sermon in class for critique e.g. introduction, illustrations. Where possible video recording is to be used to assist in the critique. This should be done early in the conduct of the unit. 9 (a) The preparation and delivery of at least two sermons preferably in a church or chapel context. (b) At least one should be expository. The other may be from a different text type or on a topic or given in an occasional or evangelistic context. (c) Full texts or notes are to be submitted to the supervisor, preferably before each sermon is preached. In each case comments are to be obtained from at least one regular preacher present and at least two congregational members. (d) The candidate is to write a 500 word critique of each sermon and/or reflect upon the sermon with a supervisor and others, where appropriate. Notes: (a) Where a candidate has regular preaching engagements outside the conduct of this unit the college may consider it appropriate for the candidate to prepare three or four sermons for critique. (b) Students must be capable of preaching a reasonable sermon before being granted a pass in this unit. If the supervisor believes it is necessary, a student may be required to undertake a program of voice production, public speaking, or additional preaching assignments before satisfactory completion of this unit is approved. (c) It is the responsibility of approved institutions to ensure that appropriately qualified and experienced supervisors are employed for the moderation and assessment of sermons, where

MDiv Unit Outlines

these people are not the staff member responsible for teaching the unit. (d) Sections A, B and C will be weighted 20%, 20% and 60% respectively. (e) Where the unit is conducted over more than one semester care should be taken not to overload the unit with assessments.

181

Stott, J., I Believe in Preaching (London: Hodder and Stoughton, 1998). Taylor, B. B., The Preaching Life (Cambridge, MA: Cowley, 1993). Wilson, P. S., A Concise History of Preaching (Nashville: Abingdon, 1992). 

Bibliography Adam, P., Speaking God’s Words: A Practical Theology of Preaching (Vancouver: Regent College, 2004). Brueggemann, W., Cadences of Home: Preaching Among Exiles (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1997). Brueggemann, W., Texts for Preaching (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1999). Chapell, B., Christ-Centred Preaching: Redeeming the Expository Sermon (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2005). Chapman, J., Setting Hearts on Fire (Sydney: Matthias, 1999). Childers, J., Purposes of Preaching (Cambridge, MA: Chalice, 2004). Craddock, F., Preaching (Nashville: Abingdon, 1990). Day, D., A Preaching Workbook (London: SPCK, 2004). Gibson, S., Preaching for Special Services (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2001). Goldsworthy, G., Preaching the Whole Bible as Christian Scripture: The Application of Biblical Theology to Expository Preaching (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Johnston, G., Preaching to a Postmodern World: A Guide to Reaching Twenty-First Century Listeners (Leicester: IVP, 2001). Larson, C. B. and H. W. Robinson (eds.), The Art and Craft of Biblical Preaching: A Comprehensive Resource for Today’s Communicators (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2005). Loscalzo, C. A., Evangelistic Preaching that Connects (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1995). Lowry, E. L., The Homiletical Plot: Sermon as Narrative Art Form (Rev. ed.; Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2001). Mitchell, J. P., Visually Speaking: Radio and the Renaissance of Preaching (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1999). Osborne, G. R., The Hermeneutical Spiral: A Comprehensive Introduction to Biblical Interpretation (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 1991). Pagitt, D., Preaching Re-Examined: The Role of the Sermon in Communities of Faith (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2005). Robinson, H., Biblical Preaching: The Development and Delivery of Expository Messages (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2001). Robinson, H. and B. Larson (eds), The Art and Craft of Biblical Preaching (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2005). Schlafer, D., Your Way with God’s Word: Discovering your Distinctive Preaching Voice (Cambridge, MA: Cowley, 1995).

PC648 Advanced Preaching Status Elective Pre-requisites PC647 Introductory Preaching Aims (a) To assist candidates to explore the theology of preaching in depth; (b) To equip candidates for significant preaching ministries; (c) To give candidates opportunity to study various styles of preaching and contemporary issues in preaching. (d) To give students the opportunity to practice various styles of preaching Content Section A: Topics 1 A consideration of several of the following topics, or in specialised cases the elaboration of one of the following topics: (a) Concepts relevant to preaching in the Old Testament; (b) The preaching of Jesus; (c) Preaching in the Book of Acts and the New Testament; (d) Preaching in the classical period: a study of John Chrysostom; (e) Reformation perspectives; (f) Significant post-reformation preachers e.g. Jay, Edwards, Wesley, Whitefield, Spurgeon; (g) Evangelistic preaching; (h) Apologetic preaching; (i) Occasional preaching such as weddings, baptisms, funerals; (j) Preaching to a particular demographic e.g nursing home residents, Generation Y, people with disabilities (k) Preaching in a church plant. Transitioning to an established church. Section B: Preaching in Practice 2 Preaching from various types of biblical literature, including Old Testament prophecy, narrative and poetry, New Testament gospels, epistles. 3 Preaching in particular circumstances, including evangelistic services, major seasons in the church year, occasional offices. 4 Various types of sermons: expository, biographical, doctrinal; the significance of hermeneutics;

182

MDiv Unit Outlines

contemporary approaches, including narrative approaches, preaching as art. 5 The construction of sermon series in the life of the church possibly including the use of lectionaries.

PC649A PC649B PC649C PC649D

Section C: Field Work 9 (a) The preparation and delivery of at least two sermons preferably in a church or chapel context. (b) Full texts or notes are to be submitted to the supervisor, preferably before each sermon is preached. In each case comments are to be obtained from at least one regular preacher present and at least two congregational members (c) The candidate is to write a 1000 word critique of each sermon and/or reflect upon the sermon with a supervisor, and others where appropriate.

Workload The total hours spent in these activities should not be less than 150 It is strongly recommended that work in this area be spread through a student’s MDiv course.

Notes: (a) Under the direction of the college, candidates may choose to focus on different topics in Section A and present material/ critiques etc in seminar style. (b) Where a candidate has regular preaching engagements outside the conduct of this unit the college may consider it appropriate for the candidate to prepare three or four sermons for critique. (c) It is the responsibility of approved institutions to ensure that appropriately qualified and experienced supervisors are employed for the moderation and assessment of sermons, where these people are not the staff member responsible for teaching the unit. (d) Appropriate Bibliography will need to be developed for each topic where the general bibliography is inadequate (e) Sections A, B and C will be weighted 20%, 20% and 60% respectively. Bibliography In addition to the works listed in the Recommended Readings for PC647: Allen, R. J. (ed.), Patterns of Preaching: A Sermon Sampler (St. Louis, MO: Chalice, 1998). Gaskell, K., Open-Air Evangelism Today (Cambridge: Grove, 1997). Goldsworthy, G., Preaching the Whole Bible as Christian Scripture (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Greidanus, S., Preaching Christ from the Old Testament (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2000). Hughes, R. G. and R. Kysar, Preaching Doctrine for the Twenty-First Century (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1997). Johnston, G., Preaching to a Postmodern World (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2001). Standing, R., Preaching for the Unchurched in an Entertainment Culture (Cambridge: Grove, 2002). Watson, N., Sorrow and Hope: Preaching at Funerals (Cambridge: Grove, 2001). Willimon, W. H., The Intrusive Word: Preaching to the Unbaptised (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1994).

Guided Spiritual Formation A Guided Spiritual Formation B Guided Spiritual Formation C Guided Spiritual Formation D

Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) The candidate has been deepened in their own intimacy with God, and are committed to their future ministry effectiveness being fed by repeated times of personal spiritual renewal. (b) The candidate has developed their philosophy of ministry so that its broad outline has begun to take shape. (c) The candidate has engaged, in the course of their theological education, in regular reflection on their own personhood and vocation in the light of the truths, skills and commitments gained through that formal education. (d) The candidate has experienced a model of growth through personal accountability, mentoring, reading and reflection, and through this the candidate has been supported and equipped to minister to others. Content GSF is designed to integrate the various disciplines of the student’s course that contribute to their spiritual formation. By “supervised learning” is meant assisting students to reflect upon their experience in the light of their studies. It does not mean merely supervising work done. Thus, placing a student in a local church is not sufficient of itself: it must be accompanied by reflection and feed-back in such a way that the student learns from his/her experience. The focus of GSF is to be reflection, self-evaluation and growth planning in relation to personal spiritual growth through college activities or ministry experience. While individual colleges will structure this unit in their own way, the program should include such elements as: 1. intentional participation in local Christian community 2. written reflection on a student’s unfolding spiritual journey 3. regular contact with an individual mentor 4. participation in a group reflective process Assessment GSF will be graded on pass/fail basis. There is no external moderation. Colleges should consider the following examples: 1. book reviews, primarily in the areas of spiritual formation 2. ministry formation portfolio that records and traces a student’s spiritual, academic and

MDiv Unit Outlines

3.

vocational development during their time at college personal journal with supervisor assessment

Bibliography Allen, R. J., Preaching and Practical Ministry (St. Louis: Chalice, 2001). Anderson, R. S., The Soul of Ministry: Forming Leaders for God’s People (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 1997). Borreson, G. L., A Case for Excellence: Case Studies in Congregational Ministry (Lima, Ohio: CSS, 1998). Copenhaver, M. B., et al, Good News In Exile: Three Pastors Offer a Hopeful Vision for the Church (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1999). Fisher, D., The 21st Century Pastor: A Vision Based on the Ministry of Paul (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1996). Heitink, G., Practical Theology (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1999). Jackson, G. E., Creating Something of Beauty: A Theology for Ministry (St. Louis: Chalice, 1998). Patton, J., From Ministry to Theology: Pastoral & Action Reflection (Nashville: Abingdon, 1995). Pohly, K. H., Transforming the Rough Places: The Ministry of Supervision (Dayton, OH: WhalePrints, 1993). Pyle, W. T. and M. A. Seals, Experiencing Ministry Supervision: A Field Base Approach (Nashville: Broadman & Holman, 1995). Sherlock, C., A Pastoral Handbook for Anglicans (Canberra: Acorn, 2001). Stone, H. W. and J. O. Duke, How to Think Theologically (Minneapolis: Fortress, 1996). Swetland, K. L., The Hidden World of the Pastor: Case Studies on Personal Issues of Real Pastors (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1995). Whitehead, J. D. and E. E. Whitehead, Method in Ministry: Theological Reflection and Christian Ministry (Kansas City: Sheed & Ward, 1995). Williamson, C. M. and R. J. Allen, The Vital Church: Teaching, Worship, Community, Service (St. Louis: Chalice, 1998). Willimon, W. H., Calling and Character: Virtues of the Ordained Life (Nashville: Abingdon, 2000).  PC651 Seniors Ministry Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) Compare various theories regarding the spiritual, social, emotional and developmental needs and challenges of seniors (b) Evaluate the theological, pastoral and ethical issues relating to ministry to seniors (c) Apply the basic principles of adult learning theory to pastoral and educational situations

183

(d) Construct a theology and practice of pastoral care that will be most beneficial to seniors (e) Devise ways that seniors can be encouraged to contribute to the life of the church Content 1. Theological and ethical issues in ministry to the ageing 2. Psychosocial and spiritual development and needs in older people 3. The aging person: challenges for body, mind and spirit 4. Theory and practice of adult learning amongst seniors 5. Ministry to and by seniors 6. The place of seniors in the life of the church 7. The pastoral care of older people including residential care, mental health and dementia 8. Pastoral ministry to the grieving and dying 9. Supporting carers of seniors Bibliography Recommended: Beck, J. R. and B. Demarest, The Human Person in Theology and Psychology: A Bbiblical Anthropology for the Twenty-first Century (Grand Rapids, MI: Kregel, 2005). Benner, D., Strategic Pastoral Counselling, 2ed. (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2003). Burrell, D., Deconstructing Theodicy: Why Job Has Nothing to Say to the Puzzle of Suffering (Grand Rapids, MI: Brazos Press, 2008). Corr, C. A., C. M. Nabe and D. M. Corr, Death and Dying: Life and Living (Stamford, CN: Wadsworth Publishing [Thomson Reuters], 2008). Driskell, J L., Adventures in Senior Living: Learning How to make Retirement Meaningful and Enjoyable (Brighampton, NY: Haworth Pastoral Press, 1997). Gerkin, C. An Introduction to Pastoral Care (Nashville, TN: Abingdon, 1997). Hall, E. T. and H. G. Koenig, Caring for a Loved One with Alzheimer’s Disease: A Christian Perspective (Brighampton, NY: Haworth Pastoral Press, 2000). Hasker, W., The Triumph of God over Evil: Theodicy for a World of Suffering (Downers Grove, IL: IVP Academic, 2008). Hoare, C. (ed.), Handbook of Adult Development and Learning (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2006). Jewell, A. (ed.), Spirituality and Ageing (London: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 1998). Jeffery, P., Going Against the Stream: Ethical Aspects of Ageing and Care (Collegeville, MN: Liturgical Press, 2000). Knowles, M. S., E. F. Holton and R. A. Swanson, The Adult Learner: The Definitive Classic in Adult Education and Human Resource Development, 6th ed. (Burlington, MA: Elsevier, 2005). Koenig, H. G., A Gospel for the Mature Years: Finding Fulfillment in Knowing and Using Your

184

MDiv Unit Outlines

Gifts (Brighampton, NY: Haworth Pastoral Press, 1997). Koenig, H. G. and G. W. Bowman, Dying, Grieving, Faith and Family: A Pastoral Care Approach (London: Routledge, 1997). Koenig, H. G. and B. W. Gilbert, The Pastoral Care of Depression: A Guidebook (Brighampton, NY: Haworth Pastoral Press, 1998). Koenig, H. G. and J. B. McCall, Bereavement Counseling: Pastoral Care for Complicated Grieving (Brighampton, NY: Haworth Pastoral Press, 2004). Koenig, H. G. and J. B. McCall, Grief Education for Caregivers of the Elderly (Brighampton, NY: Haworth Pastoral Press, 2000). Koenig, H. G. and J. B. McCall, A Practical Guide to Hospital Ministry: Healing Ways (Brighampton, NY: Haworth Pastoral Press, 2002). Koenig, H. G. and A. J Weaver, Pastoral Care of Older Adults (Minneapolis, MN: Fortress, 1998). Koenig, H. G. and A. J Weaver, Counselling Troubled Older Adults: A Handbook for Pastors and Religious Caregivers (Nashville, TN: Abingdon Press, 1997) MacKinlay, E. (2007) Ageing – A Public Theology and Anglican Perspective. St Mark’s Review. 203 (2) 23-26. MacKinlay, E. B. (ed.), Ageing, Disability & Spirituality: Addressing the Challenge of Disability in Later Life (London: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 2008). MacKinlay, E. B. (ed.), Aging, Spirituality and Palliative Care (New York: Haworth Press, 2006). MacKinlay E. B., Spiritual growth and care in the fourth age of life (London: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 2006). MacKinlay E. B. (ed.), On Spirituality in Later Life: Humour and Despair (New York: Haworth Press, 2004). MacKinlay E. B. (ed.), Mental Health and the Spiritual Dimension in Later Life (New York: Haworth Press, 2002). MacKinlay E. B., The Spiritual Dimension of Ageing (London: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 2001). MacKinlay E. B., J. Ellor, S. Pickard (eds), Aging, Spirituality and Pastoral Care: A Multinational Perspective (New York: Haworth Press, 2001). MacKinlay, E. and C. Trevitt, Facilitating Spiritual Reminiscence for Older People With Dementia: A Learning Package. (CAPS Publishing, Canberra, 2006). MacKinlay, E. B. and C. Trevitt (2007) Spiritual Care and Ageing in a Secular Society. The Medical Journal of Australia. 186, 10, S74-S76. Merriam, S. B., R. S. Caffarella and L. M. Baumgartner, Learning in Adulthood: A Comprehensive Guide (San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Banks, 2007). Paget, N. K and J. R. McCormack, The Work of the Chaplain (Valley Forge, PA: Judson Press, 2006). Toole, M. M., Handbook for Chaplains: Comfort My People (Mahwah, NJ: Paulist Press, 1996).

Swinton, J. and D. Willows (eds), Spiritual Dimensions of Pastoral Care: Practical Theology in a Multidisciplinary Context (London: Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 2009). Van De Creek, L., Spiritual Care for Persons with Dementia: Fundamentals for Pastoral Practice (London: Routledge, 2001). Classics: Becker, E., The Denial of Death(New York: Free Press, 1973). Becker, E., The Birth and Death of Meaning: An interdisciplinary perspective on the problem of man (New York: Free Press, 1971). Kubler-Ross, E., On Death and Dying (New York: Scribner, 1997). Lewis, C. S., A Grief Observed (New York: HarperOne, 2001). Journals: Australian Journal of Adult Learning (Mawson Lakes, South Australia). Australasian Journal on Ageing (John Wiley). Canadian Journal on Aging (Cambridge University Press). Educational Gerontology (Routledge). International Journal of Lifelong Education (Routledge). Journal of Adult Theological Education (Antigonish, Nova Scotia). Journal of Pastoral Care (Decatur, GA) Journal of Religion, Spirituality and Aging (London: Taylor and Francis). Journal of Religious Gerontology (Binghampton, NY). Ministry, Society and Theology (Mulgrave: Australian Association of Supervised Pastoral Education). Ministry Today (Richard Baxter Institute for Ministry). Religion & Education (Routledge).  PC689 Pastoral & Church Focussed Ministry Seminar Learning Outcomes (a) To provide candidates with the opportunity to study in depth a topic or theme of interest; (b) To give candidates the opportunity to develop cooperative research skills; (c) To assist candidates in the application of pastoral insights to personal and pastoral needs. Unit Outline: The choice of the topic or theme to be studied is left to approved institutions but must have staff and library support sufficient to sustain the unit. The lecturer concerned is to submit a proposed unit outline along with assessment plans for approval by the moderator for Pastoral & Church Focussed Ministry. The unit is conducted as a seminar involving class discussion as well as lectures and individual reading. The unit is not an individual research topic. It is strongly

MDiv Unit Outlines

recommended that the unit include set reading from classical as well as contemporary authors of at least 750 pages. (a) The total amount of work expected is that equivalent to an essay of approximately 7,000 words; (b) Candidates must demonstrate a thorough grasp of the theological issues involved; (c) Assessment should be designed to encourage exploration of the personal and pastoral implications of theological perspectives discerned in candidates’ learning; (d) Units approved for the Master of Arts (Theology) may be used as the basis for this unit, adjusted appropriately to reflect major level graduate study for students enrolled in the graduate degrees. 

DEVELOPMENTAL MINISTRY (DM) Aims: (a) To offer candidates an integrated series of units which will provide an educational and theological undergirding for professional or lay specialisation in Christian education, youth ministry and ministry to children and families within both church and parachurch structures as well as government and nongovernment schools; (b) To enable candidates to examine principles of education and educational insights from the social sciences in the light of biblical perspectives and contemporary theological understanding; (c) To stimulate candidates’ reflection, integration and thinking with respect to philosophical issues, including cross-cultural education, pluralism and ethnicity and the exercise of informed critical judgement on programmes of education within church or nation; (d) To facilitate in candidates an understanding of the skills involved in Christian education and ministries to children, youth and families, and give opportunity for the acquisition and development of these skills in chosen areas; These Field aims are reflected in different ways in each unit but individual units emphasise distinctive features of each of these aims. Education/Ministry in Practice: In the education and ministry units of this Field practical skill acquisition is required. The following regulations apply: 1 2 3 4 5

Religious Education in Infant classes in a school Religious Education in a Primary school Religious Education or Religious Studies in a Secondary school General teaching in a Christian school Christian Education in a parish, for children or infants of primary level

185

6

Christian Education provided for infants or children in a non-church setting 7 A Christian Education programme for adolescents 8 A programme of Christian Education for adults (Note: if preaching is included, it must be evaluated as an educational enterprise) 9 Theological Education at pre-tertiary level 10 Theological Education at tertiary level 11 Clinical Pastoral Education 12 Family and inter-generational programmes. Where specified for a unit, Education in Practice is to include a minimum of 20 hours’ work in each area(s) chosen. Of this, at least 3 hours are to be spent in observation, at least 8 hours in teaching or leading and at least 5 hours in supervised reflection upon observation and teaching. These hours exclude preparation and writing up time. Candidates may not study a particular area for more than one unit.  DM501 Foundations of Christian Education Workload Where specified for a unit, Education in Practice is to include a minimum of 20 hours’ work in each area(s) chosen. Of this, at least 3 hours are to be spent in observation, at least 8 hours in teaching or leading and at least 5 hours in supervised reflection upon observation and teaching. These hours exclude preparation and writing up time. Status Elective This unit is a pre-requisite for all further Christian education units, except for those with professional qualifications as teachers or holders of degrees which include equivalent papers in education or psychology. In these cases candidates’ approved institutions must ensure that coverage of Christian approaches to education have been considered before further units are taken. Notification of names of candidates for whom exemption is claimed by an approved institution shall be forwarded to the moderator for the Field, to whom belongs the right to question or ratify such exemptions. Learning Outcomes (a) To introduce candidates to the psychology of human development and learning: (b) To assist candidates to comprehend the place of the Scriptures in Christian education in contemporary society and schooling; (c) To enable candidates to articulate their own theology of education; (d) To enable candidates to acquire skills in effective teaching; (e) To equip candidates to pursue further studies in Christian education.

186

MDiv Unit Outlines

Content Section A: Human Development and Learning (30%) 1 An overview of the process of human development from conception to death; an introduction to Christian perspectives on human growth and development. 2 A survey of socialisation and attitude formation and their impact upon the developing person; their implications for Christian education. 3 An overview of the psychology and characteristics of learning and maturing through infancy, childhood, adolescence and adulthood; biblical principles of learning and spiritual nurture. 4 An introduction to educational psychology and issues in pedagogy and andragogy. Section B: Issues in Christian Education (30%) 5 The aims of Christian education; the use of Biblical content in Christian education; Jesus as a teacher. 6 The nature and purpose of education in our contemporary pluralistic society and a survey of the place of religious education in state and private schooling. Section C: Education in Practice (40%) 7 Work in two of the following areas. A minimum of 20 hours work to be completed in each area. (a) Religious Education in Infant classes in a school (b) Religious Education in a Primary school (c) Religious Education or Religious Studies in a Secondary school (d) General teaching in a Christian school (e) Christian Education in a parish, for children or infants of primary level (f) Christian Education provided for infants or children in a non-church setting (g) A Christian Education programme for adolescents (h) A programme of Christian Education for adults (Note: if preaching is included, it must be evaluated as an educational enterprise) (i) Theological Education at pre-tertiary level (j) Theological Education at tertiary level (k) Clinical Pastoral Education (l) Family and inter-generational programmes. Bibliography Anthony, M. J. (ed.), Christian Education Foundations for the Twenty-first Century (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2001). Anthony, M. J.and W. S. Benson, Exploring the History and Philosophy of Christian Education (Grand Rapids: Kregel, 2003). Crawford, M. and G. Rossiter, Reasons for Living: Education and Young People’s Search for Meaning, Identity and Spirituality (Camberwell, VIC: Australian Council for Educational Research, 2006). Dykstra, C., Growing in the Life of Faith: Education and Christian Practices (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2005).

Estep, J., M. Anthony and G.Allison, A Theology for Christian Education (B&H Publishing Group, 2008). Everist, N. C. (ed.), Christian Education as Evangelism. (Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 2007). Groome, T. H. and H. D. Horell, Horizons & Hopes: The Future of Religious Education (Paulist Press, 2003). Krych, M A., The Ministry of Children's Education: Foundations, Contexts, and practices (Fortress Press, 2004). Pazmino, R. W., Foundational Issues in Christian Education (3rd ed.; Grand Rapids: Baker, 2008). Peterson, C., Looking Forward Through the Life Span (4th ed.; Sydney: Pearson, 2003). Van Dyk, J., The Craft of Christian Teaching: A Classroom Journey (Dordt College Press, 2005). Yount, W. R (ed.), The Teaching Ministry of the Church (2ed.; Nashville, Tenn. : B&H Academic, 2008).  DM502 Ministry Formation for Chaplaincy Status Elective Learning Outcomes Building on previous study and graduate occupation, this unit offers new chaplaincy practitioners the opportunity to engage in a process of professional formation that will provide a foundation for their development into the profession of chaplaincy in an educational setting. (a) Students will have an understanding of themselves as persons in a professional context different from their previous field of study or graduate occupation. (b) They will have examined the context in which they will be working as professionals and explore the implications of these factors on their practice as Christian chaplains. (c) They will know who are the key stakeholders in their positions and understand the importance of an open, affirming style of engagement with them that is proactive and positive. (d) They will have an understanding of the Chaplains’ Code of Conduct as provided by the National School Chaplaincy Program and have examined it in the light of recent literature on this issue. (e) They will have a foundation for their further Professional Development and Supervision. Content 1. Introduction to key elements of Ministry Formation with particular reference to the education context that Chaplains work in. 2. Brief examination of historical models of chaplaincy and relevant Biblical models for this ministry. 3. Exploration of the roles and relationships of the key stakeholders in chaplaincy work, including an examination of the challenges of working

MDiv Unit Outlines

ecumenically in a secular and multi-faith setting and consideration of the importance of cultivating positive relationships with all stakeholders. 4. Exploration of Code of Conduct and relevant policies and procedures that determine the professional boundaries within which chaplains must operate. 5. Examination of the resources for individual learning and working styles that will assist graduate chaplains in the formation of their new pastoral identity. 6. An introduction to the purpose and function of supervision of candidate’s professional practice. Bibliography Bass, D. C., For Life Abundant: Practical Theology, Theological Education, and Christian Ministry (Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing, 2008). Bush, J. E., Gentle Shepherding: Pastoral Ethics and Leadership (Chalice Press, 2006). Department of Education, Employment, and Workplace Relations, Australian Government. National School Chaplaincy Programme Guidelines (including Code of Conduct). Hill, B.V. (ed.), “Chaplaincies in State Schools”, Journal of Christian Education 48, 1 (May 2005) [whole issue.] Hughes, P. and S. Bond, Chaplaincy in Uniting Church Schools: Report on Research 2001 (Melbourne: Christian Research Association, 2003). Lartey, E. Y., In Living Color: An Intercultural Approach to Pastoral Care and Counseling (Jessica Kingsley Publishers, 2003). Norman, J.(ed.), At the Heart of Education: School Chaplaincy and Pastoral Care (Dublin: Veritas, 2004). Orchard, H. C. (ed.), Spirituality in Health Care Contexts (London: Jessica Kingsley, 2001). Patton, J., Pastoral Care in Context: An Introduction to Pastoral Care (Westminster John Knox Press, 2005). Paver, J. E., Theological Reflection and Education for Ministry: The Search for Integration in Theology (Aldershot, Hants: Ashgate, 2006). Pohlmann, D., School Chaplaincy: An Introduction (Mansfield, Qld.: Christian Heritage College, 2004). Williams, B., The Potter's Rib: Mentoring for Pastoral Formation (Regent College Publishing, 2005).  DM510 Foundations for Youth Ministry Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) To assist candidates comprehend the Bible’s teaching on young people;

(b)

(c)

(d)

187

To assist the candidate to develop a theology of ministry with young people and to evaluate and analyse models of ministry with them; To introduce the major aspects of youth cultures in Australia and the forces which have shaped those cultures; To provide an opportunity for the candidate to undertake supervised practical work.

Content Section A: Biblical, Theological, Historical and Strategic Foundations for Youth Ministry with an Introduction to Youth in Society. (50%) 1 The Bible’s teaching on youth and young people. 2 Developing a theology of youth ministry. Biblical authority in a post modern world. Relational theology. Incarnation and reconciliation. 3 Historical overview of Christian youth ministry in Australia, especially since World War 2. 4 An examination and development of strategic models of youth ministry; motivation; goals; content; methodologies. Section B: Youth Today (50%) 5 A survey of the place and understanding of youth in western society. 6 Major aspects of youth cultures in Australia, in the light of secularisation. The changing nature of youth subcultures. 7 The beliefs and values of significant youth subcultures, including varieties of household types, ethnicity, rural or urban contexts; students, workers and the unemployed. The contexts where young people gather. Bibliography Butcher, T. (ed.), Emerging Youth Cultures Urban Australia (Melbourne: Pluto, 2003). Dean, K., C. Clark and D. Rahn, Starting Right: Thinking Theologically about Youth Ministry (Grand Rapids: Youth Specialties; Zondervan, 2001). DeVries, M., Family-based Youth Ministry (Downers Grove, Ill. : InterVarsity Press, 2004). Heflin, H., Youth Pastor: The Theology and Practice of Youth Ministry (Nashville, TN : Abingdon Press, 2009). Higgs, M., Youth Ministries from the Inside Out (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2004). Hilborn, D. and M. Bird, God & the Generations (Carlisle: Paternoster, 2002). Jones, T., Postmodern Youth Ministry (Grand Rapids: Youth Specialities; Zondervan, 2001). Muggleton, D. and R. Weinzerl, The Post-Subcultures Reader (Oxford: Berg, 2004). Nilan, P. M., R. Julian and J. Germov, Australian Youth: Social and Cultural Issues (Frenchs Forest, N.S.W. : Pearson Education Australia, 2007). Senter, B., Clark and Nel, Four Views of Youth Ministry and the Church (Grand Rapids: Youth Specialities; Zondervan).

MDiv Unit Outlines

188

Yaconelli, M., The Core Realities of Youth Ministry: Nine Biblical Principles That Mark Healthy Youth Ministries (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2003).  DM520 Introduction to Church-based Children’s Ministry Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) To introduce candidates to the essential factors involved in ministry to children in church; (b) To help candidates evaluate the appropriateness of a number of approaches to church-based children’s ministry; (c) To provide an opportunity for supervised practical work. Content Section A: Children and Faith Development (40%) 1 Biblical perspectives on children: introduction to theology of childhood; implications for ministry. 2 Human and child development; ages and stages of growth; introduction to developmental theories; implications for programs and relationships. 3 Children and God; overview of moral and faith development; survey of a variety of perspectives such as Fowler, Westerhoff, Groom, Bridger, Buckland. 4 Children and the church; history of children in the church; recent trends. 5 Children and their culture; influences on children – school, friendships, family, media; introduction to multi-cultural/multi-faith issues. Section B: Church-Based Children’s Ministry: An Introduction (40%) 6 An introduction and overview of children’s ministry; a definition; exploration of the experience of participants; aims, philosophy and strategy; introduction to leadership – motivation, self care, integrity, leading teams. 7 Developing aims, philosophy, strategies, evaluation, vision; principles for good organisation and planning; exploring a variety of models and sizes; choosing and adapting curriculum and materials. 8 Children as part of the worshipping community; children’s ministry as an integral part of the life of the church; all age worship; designing services that are all age friendly; learning together and separately; building an all age community; environment and facilities. 9 Nurturing faith and discipleship; encouraging parents, caregivers, and the church in nurture and discipleship of children, prayer for and with children; helping children read and understand the Bible; children and the Holy Spirit; training children for ministry; children and spiritual gifts.

10 Evangelism and outreach; organisation and planning; structures and programs; liaison with other churches; evangelism and the family; evangelism and schools; evangelism and the community; relational work; assisting children to faith. 11 Safety and care for staff, parents and children; developing a safety policy; premises; insurance; legal issues. Section C: Ministry in Practice (20%) 12 Supervised Field Education: At least 20 hours work to be undertaken in one of the following areas: holiday and after-school programs; family ministry; camps; school religious education; church-based religious education; other work as approved by the course coordinator. Bibliography Allen, H. C., Nurturing Children's Spirituality: Christian Perspectives and Best Practices (Eugene, Or. : Cascade Books, 2008). Beckwith, I., Formational Children's Ministry: Shepherding Children Using Story, Ritual, and Relationship Emersion (Grand Rapids, MI: Baker Books, 2010). Beckwith, I., Postmodern Children's Ministry: Ministry to Children in the 21st Century (El Cajon, CA : Youth Specialties, 2004). Bunge, M. J. (ed.), The Child in Christian Thought (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2001). Cliff, P., The Endless Playground: Celebrating Australian Childhood (Canberra: National Library of Australia, 2000). Fosarelli, P. D., ASAP : Ages, Stages, and Phases: from Infancy to Adolescence: Integrating Physical, Social, Moral, Emotional, Intellectual, and Spiritual Development (Liguori, Missouri : Liguori, 2006). Lausanne Conference on Evangelism 2004 (www.forum2004children.com). May, S., Children Matter: Celebrating Their Place in the Church, Family, and Community (Grand Rapids, Mich. : William B. Eerdmans Pub., 2005). Mercer, J., Welcoming Children: A Practical Theology of Childhood (St. Louis, Mo.: Chalice Press, 2005). Roehlkepartain, E. C. and P. E. King (eds), The Handbook of Spiritual Development in Childhood and Adolescence (Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, 2005). Shier-Jones, A. (ed.), Children of God: Towards a Theology of Childhood (Peterborough : Epworth, 2007). Yaconelli, M., Contemplative Youth Ministry: Practicing the Presence of Jesus (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2006).  DM603 Adult Christian Education Status Elective

MDiv Unit Outlines

Learning Outcomes (a) To assist candidates comprehend how adults learn; (b) To help candidates evaluate the appropriateness of provisions made in the churches for the education of adults in faith; (c) To assist candidates determine the methods of education that would most benefit various groups within their society; (d) To provide an opportunity for the candidate to undertake supervised practical work. Content Section A: Adults and Learning (30%) 1 The development characteristics of adults, from post-adolescence to old age; crisis points; common and distinctive needs of various stages; moral and faith development. 2 Learning characteristics of adults; the learning needs of particular groups: for example men, women, occupations, socio-economic, interests etc. 3 Adults in today’s society; the adult education movement; past, present and future trends. 4 An introduction to group learning, its dynamics and its place in adult education through house task and interest groups in the churches. Section B: Adult Learning in the Churches (30%) 5 Methods of teaching suitable for adult learning; particularly Bible study methods; the ‘All-age Sunday School’; adult study groups; liturgy (including preaching) as a vehicle of adult learning. 6 The socialising, didactic and faith formation functions of congregation and family in relation to ministry with adults. 7 Adult teaching and learning roles in a diversity of contexts: for example in family settings, community issues, disciple-making, leading liturgy, preaching, church business meetings. 8 Christian Education curricula for adults: goals, content and curriculum issues; a critical examination of one curriculum for use in adult Christian education. Section C: Education in Practice (40%) 9 Work in two of following areas. A minimum of 20 hours work to be completed in each area. (a) A programme of Christian Education for adults (Note: if preaching is included, it must be evaluated as an educational enterprise) (b) Theological Education at pre-tertiary level (c) Theological Education at tertiary level (d) Clinical Pastoral Education (e) Family and inter-generational programmes. Bibliography Astley, J. (ed.), Learning in the Way: Research and Reflection on Adult Christian Education (Leominster: Gracewing, 2000). Brookfield, S., The Power of Critical Theory for Adult Learning and Teaching (McGraw-Hill International, 2005).

189

Jarvis, P., Adult Education and Lifelong Learning: Theory and Practice (3rd ed.; New York: Routledge, 2004). Knowles, M. S., E. F. Holton and R. A. Swanson, The Adult Learner (6th ed.; Burlington, MA: Elsevier, Butterworth & Heinemann, 2005). McKenzie, L. and R. M. Harton, The Religious Education of Adults (Smyth & Helwys Publishing, Inc., 2002). Parent, N. A., A Concise Guide to Adult Faith Formation (Notre Dame, IN : Ave Maria Press, 2009). Regan, J. E., Toward an Adult Church: A Vision of Faith Formation (Chicago, IL: Loyola, 2002). Robero, J., Becoming a Church of Lifelong Learners: The Generations of Faith Sourcebook (New London, CT : Twenty-Third Publications, 2006). Rodgers, A., Teaching Adults (3rd ed.; Buckingham, UK: Open University, 2002). Segler, F. M. and R. Bradley, Christian Worship: Its Theology and Practice (B&H Publishing Group, 2006). Tye, K. B., Christian Education in the Small Membership Church (Nashville : Abingdon Press, 2008). Vella, J. K., On Teaching and Learning : Putting the Principles and Practices of Dialogue Education into Action (San Francisco, Calif.: Jossey-Bass 2008).  DM604 Christian Education in Practice Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) To assist candidates evaluate and analyse the role of the teacher in Christian education; (b) To assist candidates determine their own theory of Christian education; (c) to provide an opportunity for the candidate to undertake supervised practical work. Content Section A: Issues in Learning (30%) 1 The teacher as role model/discipler; personal educational development; identification of gifts, personality type, relationship qualities; ongoing learning, in-service education. 2 Environmental factors and learning: the home; peer groups; the classroom; camp situations. 3

EITHER The school situation: inter-staff relationships; legal aspects of teaching Religious Education; career potentialities; voluntary Christian groups; relationships with non-school ministers. OR The parish situation: education in relation to other church activities; the parish and local schools (government and non-government); para-church educational agencies and the local church; relations

190

MDiv Unit Outlines

between church staff; educational ministry as a career. Section B: Issues in Methodology (30%) 4 Class management: the theory and practical application in formal teaching of the following: group dynamics; discipline; accommodating the special student; competition and co-operation. 5 Lesson preparation; assessment of student learning; evaluation of educational programmes. 6 Theory and practice of teaching methods, including individual and group learning (seminars, buzz groups, discussion groups etc); drama, music and dance; team teaching; research projects; lectures; visual aids; using educational technology (recorders, OHPs, computers, video, etc.) Section C: Education in Practice (40%) 7 Work in depth in one of the following areas. (a) Religious Education in Infant classes in a school (b) Religious Education in a Primary school (c) Religious Education or Religious Studies in a Secondary school (d) General teaching in a Christian school (e) Christian Education in a parish, for children or infants of primary level (f) Christian Education provided for infants or children in a non-church setting (g) A Christian Education programme for adolescents (h) A programme of Christian Education for adults (Note: if preaching is included, it must be evaluated as an educational enterprise) (i) Theological Education at pre-tertiary level (j) Theological Education at tertiary level (k) Clinical Pastoral Education (l) Family and inter-generational programmes. Bibliography In addition to relevant works in appropriate unit Bibliography: Anthony, M. (ed.), Evangelical Dictionary of Christian Education (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2001). Ashton, E., Religious Education in the Early Years (London ; New York : Routledge, 2000). Bass, D. C., For Life Abundant: Practical Theology, Theological Education, and Christian Ministry (Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing, 2008). Bunge, M. J. (ed.), The Child in Christian Thought (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2001). Dykstra, C., Growing in the Life of Faith: Education and Christian Practices (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2005). Felderhof, M., D. Torevell and P. Thompson (eds), Inspiring Faith in Schools: Studies in Religious Education (Hampshire, UK: Ashgate, 2007). Kramer, P. A., The ABC's of Classroom Management: An A-Z Sampler for Designing Your Learning Community (Kappa Delta Pi, 2005). Lambert, D., Teaching that Makes a Difference: How to Teach for Holistic Impact (Zondervan, 2004).

Partin, R. L., The Classroom Teacher's Survival Guide: Practical Strategies, Management Techniques and Reproducibles for New and Experienced Teachers (John Wiley and Sons, 2009). Peterson, M. L, With All Your Mind : A Christian Philosophy of Education (Notre Dame, Ind. : University of Notre Dame Press, 2001). White, D., K. O’Brien and S. Todd, Into the Deep (Sydney: KD, 2003). Wilhoit, J., Christian Education and the Search for Meaning (Grand Rapids: Baker, 1991).  DM611 Youth in the Churches Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) To assist candidates to form their own theology of young people and the church; (b) To assist candidates to evaluate and analyse the various theories of the role of the youth worker as leader and mentor; (c) To provide an opportunity for supervised practical work. Content Section A: Theoretical Study (70%) 1 Young people, their place and role in the life of the churches, their rituals and liturgy, including nurture/conversion tensions, baptism/confirmation, worship participation, music, witness and pastoral care. 2 Christian education for the adolescent in various contexts: Sunday school, home groups, catechesis, church youth groups, secondary school religious education and voluntary groups, Christian camps; methods and models of Christian discipleship in youth ministry. 3 Youth leadership: biblical imperatives for nurture and discipleship; tasks and roles; the youth pastor; youth leaders; team building and dynamics; organisational structures; relationships with other church ministries; burnout. 4 The content and planning of a balanced youth programme: strategies, aims and objectives; methods and evaluation of appropriate social, educational, liturgical, counselling and empowering strategies; syllabi, themes, literature, resources. 5 The evaluation of an existing substantial youth programme in a Christian church. Section B: Ministry with Youth (30%) 6 Christian ministry among adolescents in a particular church, including a minimum of 20 hours field work. Of this, at least 5 hours are to be spent in observation, at least 8 hours in ministry by the candidate, and at least 5 hours in supervised reflection upon observation and teaching. (These hours exclude preparation and writing up time.)

MDiv Unit Outlines

7

In addition to and distinctively different from Section 6, candidates are required to participate in one of the following: (a) The planning, preparation and leadership of a camp of at least 40 hours duration, for a Christian group; (b) The planning and conduct of a one-off youth event; (c) The organising and conduct of a youth leadership training programme.

191

Learning Outcomes (a) To assist candidates understand the social factors that shape the lives of young Australians; (b) To assist candidates understand the social development of young people and the ways in which they learn, and to evaluate the appropriateness of a number of models of youth ministry; (c) To provide an opportunity for supervised practical work.

OR, as an alternative to 6 and 7: 8

Christian Ministry among adolescents including a minimum of 30 hours of fieldwork. Of this at least 7 hours are to be spent in observation, at least 12 hours in ministry by the candidate, and at least 7 hours in supervised reflection upon observation and teaching (these hours exclude preparation and writing up time).

Bibliography Arzola, F., Toward a Prophetic Youth Ministry: Theory and Praxis in Urban Context (InterVarsity Press, 2008). Brain, P., Going the Distance: To Stay Fit For a Lifetime in Ministry (Sydney: Matthias Ministry, 2004). Brierly, D., Growing Community: Making Groups Work with Young People (London: Authentic Lifestyle, 2003). Dean, K., C. Clark and D. Rahn, Starting Right: Thinking Theologically about Youth Ministry (Grand Rapids: Youth Specialities; Zondervan, 2001). Dean, K., Practicing Passion: Youth and the Quest for a Passionate Church (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2004). Kimmel, T., Why Christian Kids Rebel (Nashville: World Wide, 2004). King, M., Presence-Centered Youth Ministry: Guiding Students into Spiritual Formation (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2006). Lawrence, R., Jesus-Centred Youth Ministry (Loveland, CO: Group, 2007). Moore, M. E. and Wright, A., Children, Youth, and Spirituality in a Troubling World (Chalice Press, 2008). Moser, K., Changing the World Through Effective Youth Ministry (Sydney: Aquila, 2000). Robins, D., L. Kageler and W. Black, This Way to Youth Ministry – Companion Guide: Readings, Case Studies, Resources to Begin the Journey (Grand Rapids, Zondervan: 2004). Strommen, M. P., K. Jones and D. Rahn, Youth Ministry That Transforms (Grand Rapids: Youth Specialities; Zondervan).  DM612 Youth: Context, Development and Learning Status Elective

Content Section A: Youth in Society (35%) 1 Major trends in Australian society and how they impact young people. 2 Government policy and approaches to young people, especially education and employment. 3 An introduction to the major social questions relating to youth: identity and self image; family, economic, societal and political issues; environmental issues; values and morals; gender and sexual issues; sport; drugs; materialism and perspective son the future. 4 An examination of the religious context of youth. Section B: Youth Development and Learning (50%) 5 The developmental characteristics of adolescents: physical, emotional, psychological and intellectual changes; sexuality and the emergence of gender identity. 6 Learning characteristics of adolescents, attitudinal, moral and spiritual, relational; learning in formal and informal settings; affective and cognitive issues. 7 Methods of learning and teaching suited to adolescents, in both formal and information situations; an introduction to the various philosophies of religious education, and their implications for Christian ministry towards and by adolescents. 8 Personal ministry with adolescents: style, ethos, methodology ; mentor and peer relationships; personal skills in discipling and visiting young people. Section C: Ministry with Youth (15%) 9 Candidates are required to complete at least 20 hours supervised field education, observing and engaging with young people of different ages and contexts. This should include supervised visits to typical youth activities (e.g., sport, social or cultural events) and visits to a Secondary College and a TAFE College. Conduct survey of students and staff to identify their perspectives on youth concerns. Bibliography Barwick, H., Youth Work Today : A Review of the Issues and Challenges : A Literature Review of Youth Work in New Zealand, Australia and the United Kingdom (Wellington, New Zealand : Ministry of Youth Development, 2006).

MDiv Unit Outlines

192

Bellamy, M. and Castle, Social Influences Upon Faith Development (Sydney: NCLS Research & Bible Society, 2004). Butcher, M. and M. Thomas, Emerging Youth Cultures in Urban Australia (Melbourne: Pluto, 2003). Crawford, M. L. and G. Rossiter Reasons for Living: Education and Young People's Search for Meaning, Identity and Spirituality: A Handbook (Camberwell, Vic. : ACER Press,, 2006). de Vries, P., Family Based Youth Ministry (Downers Grove, IL: IVP, 2004). DuBois, D. L. and M. J. Karcher (eds), Handbook of Youth Mentoring (Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, 2005). Pazmino, R. W., Foundational Issues in Christian Education (3rd ed.; Grand Rapids: Baker, 2008). Rice, F. P., The Adolescent: Development, Relationships, and Culture (12th edition) (Boston : Pearson/Allyn and Bacon, 2008). Savage, S., S. Collins-Mayo, B. Mayo and G. Cray, Making Sense of Generation Y: The World View of 15-to-25-year-olds (London: Church House, 2006). Tacey, D., The Spirituality Revolution: The Emergence of Contemporary Spirituality (Sydney: HarperCollins, 2003). Wyn, J. (ed.), Generations and Social Change: Negotiating Adulthood in the 21st Century : Report on the Life-Patterns Research Program : 2005-2007 (Melbourne : Australian Youth Research Centre, Melbourne Graduate School of Education, University of Melbourne 2008). Yaconelli, M., Core Realities of Youth Ministry (Grand Rapids: Youth Specialities; Zondervan, 2003).  DM613 Ministry with Non-Church Youth Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) To assist candidates evaluate the appropriateness of strategies for ministry to young people outside the church; (b) To assist candidates evaluate a number of approaches for reaching non-church youth; (c) To provide an opportunity for supervised practical work. Content Section A: Ministry with Non-Church Youth (70%) 1 The development of specific aims, objectives, methods and strategies to meet specific needs and opportunities with non-Church youth. 2 An examination of the gospel message and how to communicate it with young people. 3 Strategies for making contact with young people. School programmes. Developing links in the community. 4 Strategies and models for evangelistic outreach with non-church youth.

5

6

The approaches of significant youth organisations to outreach ministry with youth: a survey of the philosophies and work of church and congregational youth departments, and bodies such as Theos, Fusion, Campus groups (AFES etc), YFC etc. The relationship between secular and Christian bodies working with youth.

Section B: Ministry in Practice (30%) 7 (a) An evaluation and examination of at least one para-church, and at least one church-based programme oriented to youth outside or on the fringes of the church, including observation, participation and supervised reflection. OR

8

(b) Visits to at least one agency working with disadvantaged youth; and to student welfare work in both state and church secondary schools. (a) Participation in the planning and conduct of an evangelistic mission to youth, including at least 8 hours personal ministry by the candidates, and 5 hours individual supervision. OR (b) Candidates are required to participate in the planning, preparation and leadership of a camp of at least 40 hours duration, intended for nonChristian young people.

Bibliography Butcher, M. and M. Thomas, Emerging Youth Cultures in Urban Australia (Melbourne: Pluto, 2003). Dean, K., C. C. Creasy and D. Rahn., Starting Right: Thinking Theologically about Youth Ministry (Zondervan, 2001). McKee, J. R., Do They Run When They See You Coming? : Reaching Out to Unchurched Students (El Cajon, CA : Youth Specialties ; Grand Rapids, Mich. : Zondervan, 2004). Moore, M. E. and A. M. Wright (eds), Children, Youth, and spirituality in a Troubling World (St. Louis, Mo. : Chalice Press, 2008). Moser, K., Youth Evangerlism: Reaching Young People in a Way that Honours God (Sydney: Aquila, 2004). Olsen, P., Youth at Risk (Cleaveland: Pilgrim, 2003). Peel, M., The Lowest Rung: Voices of Australian Poverty (Cambridge: CUP, 2003). Reid, A., Radically Unchurched: Who They Are and How to Reach Them (Grand Rapids: Kregel, 2002). Root, A., Revisiting Relational Youth Ministry: From a Strategy of Influence to a Theology of Incarnation (InterVarsity Press, 2007). Semmel, C. J. No Meeting Required: Strategies for Nongathered Ministry with Young People (Winona, MN : Saint Mary's Press, 2007). Sudowrth, T., G. Cray and C. Russell, Mission-Shaped Youth: Rethinking Yound People and Church (London: Church House, 2007). Winter, R., Ancient-Future Evangelism (Grand Rapids: Baker, 2003).

MDiv Unit Outlines  DM614 Chaplaincy in Educational Settings Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) To enable current and prospective practitioners to explore the practice and theology of chaplaincy in a range of educational settings: primary, secondary and tertiary, state and private systems; (b) To assist candidates evaluate a number of models for effective Christian education in a chaplaincy context; (c) To provide an opportunity for supervised practical work. Content Section A: The Role of the Chaplain and a Theology of Chaplaincy (50%) 1 The development of a theology and ecclesiology of chaplaincy. 2 An exploration of the various models of chaplaincy in primary, private secondary, state secondary and tertiary settings. 3 An examination of the role of a chaplain. The varied roles of the chaplain as pastor, youth worker, welfare counsellor, teacher and psychologist. Being a professional Christian in a secular pluralist context. The chaplain’s job description. 4 Professional ethics, confidentiality and legal issues for chaplains. Professional development, supervision and self-care issues in chaplaincy. Referral and crisis responses. 5 Approaches to classroom religious education including teaching world religions in the multifaith classroom. Approaches to religious education in the state system. 6 An examination of pastoral care and counselling models in the educational institution. Section B: Issues among Children, Adolescents and Young Adults (30%) 7 Youth in Australian society and the major issues confronting children and young people. 8 Key issues that relate to the health and spirituality of children, adolescents and young people. 9 Identify the physical, emotional, cognitive and moral issues among children, adolescents and young people. Section C: Chaplaincy in Practice (20%) 10 The exploration through observation and interview of a chaplain working in their particular educational setting.

193

Bibliography Beck, M., et al, Exploring Religion (Melbourne: OUP, 2000). Berger, K. S., The Developing Person Through the Life Span (W H Freeman & Co, 2007). Buckland, R., Perspectives on Children and the Gospel: Excellence in Ministry with Children and their Families (Gosford: Scripture Union, 2001). Crawford, M. and G. Rossiter, Reasons for Living: Education and Young People’s Search for Meaning, Identity and Spirituality (Camberwell, VIC: Australian Council for Educational Research, 2006). Felderhof, M., D. Torevell and P. Thompson (eds), Inspiring Faith in Schools: Studies in Religious Education (Hampshire, UK: Ashgate, 2007). Garlid, C. F., A. A. Zollfrank & G. Fitchett (eds) Expanding the Circle: Essays in Honor of Joan E. Hemenway (Decatur, Georgia: Journal of Pastoral Care Publications Inc., 2009) Hughes, P. and S. Bond, Chaplaincy in Uniting Church Schools: Report on Research 2001 (Melbourne: Christian Research Association, 2003). Imbroscio, A., “Post Modern Religious Education” in Religious Education Journal of Australia 16:2, 2000. McAlpin, K. and M. J. Leddy, Ministry That Transforms: A Contemplative Process of Theological Reflection (Liturgical Press, 2009). Norman, J. (ed.), At the Heart of Education: School Chaplaincy and Pastoral Care (Dublin : Veritas, 2004). Pohlmann, D., School Chaplaincy: An Introduction (Mansfield, Qld. : Christian Heritage College, 2004). Rice, F. P., The Adolescent: Development, Relationships, and Culture (12th edition) (Boston : Pearson/Allyn and Bacon, 2008). Robinson, S., Ministry Among Students: A Pastoral Theology and Handbook for Practice (London: SCM Canterbury, 2004).  DM621 Issues in Children’s Ministry Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) To assist candidates to analyse a number of contemporary issues with a bearing on churchbased children’s ministry; (b) To develop effective skills for work among church-based children; (c) To provide an opportunity for supervised practical work.

194

MDiv Unit Outlines

Content Section A: Contemporary issues in Church-based Children’s Ministry (40%) 1 Definitions of family: historical, sociological, and contemporary understandings; implications for family ministry. 2 Children and education: a survey of government, independent and Christian schools; the implications for and relationships between church and school based ministry. 3 An overview of significant pastoral issues for children: loss and grief; stress; drugs; occult; family dysfunction; abuse. 4 Working with children in a multi-cultural setting; children and other faiths. 5 An overview of children with special needs; and their integration. Section B: Children’s Ministry Skills (40%) 6 Communicating with children; pastoral care; modelling behaviour; listening and language, verbal and non-verbal; effective discipline in a small or large group context. 7 Children, doctrine and the sacraments; teaching the doctrines of revelation, humanity, salvation, church, and work of the Holy Spirit; children and baptism, communion, and confirmation; various denominational perspectives. 8 Using Scripture with children, effective use and abuse. 9 Practical skills in ministry: creative arts – music, drama, puppets, storytelling; small group work. 10 Supporting and resourcing parents in nurturing and discipleship roles. 11 Leading a team; recruiting, training, liaising with parents and other stakeholders, including those from different cultures.

Fosarelli, P. D., ASAP: Ages, Stages, and Phases: from Infancy to Adolescence: Integrating Physical, Social, Moral, Emotional, Intellectual, and Spiritual Development (Liguori, Missouri: Liguori, 2006). Keeley, R. J., Helping Our Children Grow in Faith: How the Church Can Nurture the Spiritual Development of Kids (Grand Rapids, Mich.: Baker Books, 2008). May, S., B. Posterski and C. Stonehouse, Children Matter: Celebrating Their Place in the Church, Family and Community (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2005). Mercer, J., Welcoming Children: A Practical Theology of Childhood (St. Louis, Mo.: Chalice Press, 2005). Roehlkepartain, E. C. & P. E. King (eds), The Handbook of Spiritual Development in Childhood and Adolescence (Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, 2005). Shier-Jones, A. (ed.), Children of God: Towards a Theology of Childhood (Peterborough: Epworth, 2007). Withers, M., Mission-shaped Children: Moving Towards a Child-centred Church (London: Church House, 2006). Yaconelli, M., Contemplative Youth Ministry: Practicing the Presence of Jesus (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2006).  DM630 Australian Families and the Church Status Elective

Section C: Ministry in Practice (20%) 12 Supervised Field Education: At least 20 hours work to be undertaken in one of the following areas: holiday and after-school programs; family ministry; camps; school religious education; church-based religious education; other work as approved by the course coordinator. Note: the ministry area should be different from that undertaken in previous study.

Learning Outcomes (a) To assist candidates form a theology of the family and its relationship to the local church; (b) To assist the candidate to develop an understanding of the diversity of expression of family in contemporary Australia, to analyse the factors that impact its well-being and how Christian family can be expressed in this light; (c) To seek evidence that the candidate is equipped for the tasks of the evaluation and development of the church’s ministry to families.

Bibliography Allen, H. C., Nurturing Children's Spirituality: Christian Perspectives and Best Practices (Eugene, Or.: Cascade Books, 2008). Beckwith, I., R. N. Altson and S. Burke, Postmodern Children’s Ministry: Ministry to Children in the 21st Century Church (Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 2004). Beckwith, I., Formational Children's Ministry: Shepherding Children Using Story, Ritual, and Relationship Emersion (Grand Rapids, MI : Baker Books, 2010). Cliff, P., The Endless Playground: Celebrating Australian Childhood (Canberra : National Library of Australia, 2000).

Content Section A (60%) 1 Understanding family: definitions, variety – ethnic, aboriginal; biblical, theological and sociological views; family life-cycle and rites of passage; 2 Beginnings, marriage and marriage preparation; 3 Family roles: relationships, enriching good and repairing damaged; rights and responsibilities, parent-parent including sexual relationships, parent-child including discipline and children’s rights, parent-teenage, governance; 4 Family maintenance and enrichment: Christian living in the home; spiritual nurture; marriage enrichment; holistic development;

MDiv Unit Outlines

5

Families and church: ministry to families; family worship; church as family.

Section B (20%) 6 Families in crisis: modern pressures on the family; domestic violence and abuse, pastoral care and family counselling; the family and the law, Family Court and other Courts; 7 Broken families: divorce, children and divorce; single-parenting; remarriage and blended families; the church’s ministry to broken families.

195

(b) Units PC642–644, DM642 and EM640 will be moderated by the appropriate Field moderator. (c) An introduction to the ministry issues pertaining to the context in which the Field Work will be undertaken. The precise details of the content should be outlined in advance by the individual colleges for all their students. (d) Colleges should seek approval from the relevant field moderator for their methods of reflection and evaluation for field education units. 

Section C (20%) 8 Practical work: a profile of family ministry in a local church together with a critical assessment and the development of a relevant ministry approach. Bibliography Browning, D. S., Equality and the Family: a Fundamental, Practical Theology of Children, Mothers and Fathers in Modern Societies (Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing, 2007). Everett, C. A. (ed.), Divorce and the Next Generation (New York: Hawthorn, 2001). Fosarelli, P. D., Family Ministry Desk Reference (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2004). Jones, T. P., R. Stinson, P. Renfro and B. Shields, Perspectives on Family Ministry: Three Views (B&H Publishing Group, 2009). Nilan, P., R. Julian and J. Germov, Australian Youth: Social and Cultural Issues (Pearson Education Australia, 2007). Penner, M., Youth Worker's Guide to Parent Ministry (Zondervan, 2003). Poole, M., Family: Changing Families, Changing Times (Allen & Unwin, 2005). Qu, L., Snapshots of Family Relationships (Melbourne, Vic. : Australian Institute of Family Studies, 2008). Strommen, M. P. and R. A. Hardel, Passing on the Faith: A Radical New Model for Youth and Family Ministry (Winona, MN: Saint Mary’s, 2000). van Leuwen, M. S., Father and Sons (Leicester, IVP: 2002). Zubrick, S. R., Parenting and Families in Australia (Canberra: Dept. of Families, Housing, Community Services and Indigenous Affairs, 2008).

DM642 Children’s Ministry Field Education Status Elective Learning Outcomes (a) To introduce students to the practical issues related to particular ministry settings. (b) To stimulate candidates’ reflection, integration and thinking with respect to philosophical issues, including cross-cultural education, pluralism and ethnicity and the exercise of informed critical judgement on programmes of education within church or nation; (c) To facilitate in candidates an understanding of the skills involved in practical ministry, and give opportunity for the acquisition and development of these skills in chosen areas; (d) To enable candidates to examine principles of education and educational insights from the social sciences in the light of biblical perspectives and contemporary theological understanding Content Section A: Preparation Candidates must undertake a preparation course for this field education. The unit should include communicating with children, with particular attention paid to the communication of Christian truth; health, safety and legal issues; accountability, reporting and referral. Colleges are advised to require a police check or its equivalent from students. Note: Students who are taking concurrently, or have successfully completed, DM621 Issues in Children’s Ministry are exempt from taking Section A.

 Field Education Units Student may take two only of units PC642 –PC647, DM642 and EM640 Notes (a) Units PC642–644, DM642, and EM640 will be assessed on a non-graded Pass/Fail basis, and will not be included in the calculation of grade point averages.

Section B: Field Education 1 The supervisory relationship; the supervisory session; learning covenants; evaluation; theological reflection, including the use of verbatims; Field Committees. 2 EITHER not less than 200 hours experience (with supervision) in children’s ministry; OR a period of continuous residence (with supervision) of not less than six week’s duration in a children’s ministry program.

MDiv Unit Outlines

196

Bibliography Nil  DM689 Christian Education Seminar Status Elective

Pre-requisites (i) Grad Dip Div candidates: Students may attempt the project in their final semester of studies. (ii) MDiv candidates: The project should be attempted no earlier in the course than the last year of enrolment. Candidates must have completed at least 8 credit points in the field of study. Aims:

Learning Outcomes (a) To provide candidates with the opportunity to study in depth a topic or theme of interest; (b) To give candidates the opportunity to develop cooperative research skills; (c) To assist candidates in the application of Christian education insights to Christian education needs. Content A study (under supervision) of the history, philosophy, methodology and organisation of specialised Christian Education ministries. The study must include detailed examination of at least one particular agency, or a comparison of more than one. Agencies may include a church Department of Education (whether in a local church with professional education staff, or a regional or national body) or a para-church agency with substantial education ministry (such as the Scripture Union, the Navigators, the Student Christian Movement, student bodies affiliated with the International Fellowship of Evangelical Students, or Youth with a Mission). First-hand involvement with any agency under study is highly desirable. The agency to be studied and the assessment procedures must be approved by the Field Moderator. Bibliography Nil 

RESEARCH PROJECTS ++650 (4 cps) ++690 (8 cps) Research Projects worth four credit points are offered in each Field of Study within the Grad Dip Div. Students may be permitted to attempt a 4 credit point project (++650) as part of their Graduate Diploma programme. The eight credit point project is compulsory for MDiv candidates who wish to articulate to the MTh, and is offered in each Field of Study. Candidates may not include more than one project in their course.

(a) To allow candidates to pursue in depth a topic of interest not studied elsewhere in their degree; (b) To enable candidates to develop research and reporting skills at an advanced standard; (c) To provide opportunities for candidates to explore aspects of research of relevance to their major area of ministry preparation. Regulations: Candidates must submit a proposed programme of research to the course coordinator at their institution. 1

2

The candidate’s approved institution is responsible to ensure that the appropriate pre-requisites have been met, that the candidate has the ability to complete the project satisfactorily, that effective supervision and resources are available, and that the program of study has been submitted to and approved by the appropriate Field moderator. Essays and projects form an important aspect of candidates’ learning, providing opportunity for developing research skills, logical argument and proper use of source documents. It is therefore essential that candidates do their own work. However it is also true that first year students in particular need assistance in the techniques of extended writing. Some directions are provided in the Manual. The following guidelines attempt to delineate where proper help ends and undue assistance begins: a. Lecturers may give broad direction concerning topics in relation to when corresponding topics will be dealt with in the course, or what general resources are readily available, such as relevant textbooks and likely journals. b. The choice of topic and initial outline of approach must be the candidate’s own work. No interviews should be conducted until these have been set down in writing by candidates. Talks on “how to approach this topic” should be avoided. Further help should be restricted to indicating possible lines of development which raise from the candidate’s own research. It is also permissible for lecturer to give some guidance to students in relation to basic Bibliography. c. “Essay seminars” should not be conducted. Each essay must represent the candidate’s own work. d. A candidate may be requested to correct poor spelling, expression or irregularities in

MDiv Unit Outlines

3

4

5

synopsis, footnotes and bibliography before an essay is accepted The Research Topic may take the form of academic or field-based research on a particular aspect of one subject area, or across several areas or Fields. It must have clear aims and focus, and will normally be approx. 6,000-7,000 words for Grad Dip Div candidates and 7,000-8,000 words (including footnotes but not Bibliography or abstracts) for MDiv candidates. The completed Research Project must conform to the format specified for Projects in the Master of Arts (Theology) (Ministry). One copy is to be kept by the approved institution and one submitted to the designated Field Moderator. The Project shall be assessed by an appropriately qualified person within the candidate’s approved institution and moderated by the designated Field Moderator. 

197